BA Unimog UGE 405 Niederdruckbremse 05-18 ND en GB PDF

Unimog
Operating Instructions
Mercedes-Benz
Symbols
G WARNING
Warning notes make you aware of dangers
which could pose a threat to your health or
life, or to the health and life of others.
H Environmental note
Environmental notes provide you with infor-
mation on environmentally aware actions or
disposal.
! Notes on material damage alert you to dan-

gers that could lead to damage to your vehi-
cle.
i Useful instructions or further information
that could be helpful to you.
X This symbol designates an instruc-
tion you must follow.
X Several consecutive symbols indi-
cate an instruction with several
steps.
(Y page) This symbol tells you where you can
find further information on a topic.
YY This symbol indicates a warning or an
instruction that is continued on the
next page.
Display This text indicates a message on the
display.
Thank you for purchasing a Mercedes-
Benz
Read the Operating Instructions carefully and
familiarise yourself with your vehicle before you
start driving. For your own safety and to ensure
a long operating duration for your vehicle, com-
ply with the instructions and warning notes in
these Operating Instructions. Disregarding
them may lead to damage to the vehicle or per-
sonal injury. Please note that the Mercedes-Benz Guides app
The standard equipment and product descrip- may not yet be available in your country.
tion of your vehicle may vary, depending on: The technical documentation team at Daimler
Rmodel AG wishes you safe and pleasant motoring.
Rorder
Rcountry variant
Ravailability
The illustrations in these Operating Instructions
show a left-hand-drive vehicle. In right-hand-
drive vehicles, the arrangement and location of
vehicle parts and controls differ accordingly.
Mercedes-Benz is constantly updating its vehi-
cles to the state of the art.
Mercedes-Benz reserves the right to make
changes to the following:
Rdesign
Requipment
Rtechnical features
Descriptions may therefore differ in individual
cases from your vehicle.
The following are part of the vehicle:
ROperating Instructions
RMaintenance Booklet or Service Booklet
RSupplements relating to vehicle equipment
Keep these documents in the vehicle at all
times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass the
documents on to the new owner.
i You can get to know some of the important
features of your vehicle in German and Eng-
lish in the interactive Operating Instructions
on the Internet at:
www.mercedes-benz.de/
betriebsanleitung-lkw
You can also use the Mercedes-Benz Guides
smartphone app:
4055843153 É4055843153ZËÍ
2 Contents
Features ................................................ 85
Index ....................................................... 4
Climate control .................................... 90
Introduction ......................................... 28 Useful information ................................. 90
Operating Instructions ........................... 28 General notes ........................................ 90
Correct use ............................................ 28 Heating/air conditioning and ventila-
Protection of the environment ............... 29 tion ........................................................ 91
Operating safety and vehicle approval Auxiliary heating .................................... 94
............................................................... 29
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ............... 33
Data stored in the vehicle ...................... 34 On-board computer and displays ...... 99
Useful information ................................. 99
Instrument cluster ................................. 99
At a glance ........................................... 36 On-board computer ............................. 103
Cockpit .................................................. 36 On-board computer event window ....... 115
Overhead control panel ......................... 37 Warning/indicator lamps in the status
Instrument cluster ................................. 38 area of the on-board computer ............ 130
Centre console ...................................... 40
Multifunction steering wheel ................. 42
Combination switch ............................... 43 Multimedia systems ......................... 133
Cruise control lever ............................... 44 Important safety notes ........................ 133
Multifunction lever ................................. 44 General notes ...................................... 133
Anti-theft protection ............................ 133
Operating system ................................ 134
Safety ................................................... 45 Bluetooth® settings ............................. 137
Useful information ................................. 45
Occupant safety .................................... 45
Children in the vehicle ........................... 48 Driving mode ..................................... 140
Pets in the vehicle ................................. 49 Useful information ............................... 140
Driving ................................................. 140
Brakes ................................................. 144
Opening and closing ........................... 51 Telligent® gearshift .............................. 150
Useful information ................................. 51 Telligent® automatic gearshift ............. 155
Locking system ...................................... 51 Shifting gears ...................................... 163
Getting into and out of the vehicle ......... 55 Driving mode ....................................... 165
Side windows ......................................... 55 Driving systems ................................... 171
Rear window .......................................... 56 Hydrostatic drive system ..................... 177
Driving tips .......................................... 186
Driver's workstation ........................... 57 Refuelling ............................................. 193
Useful information ................................. 57 Trailer .................................................. 196
Seats ..................................................... 57 Winter operation .................................. 198
Adjusting the multifunction steering
wheel ..................................................... 62 Hydraulic system .............................. 203
Dual-mode steering ............................... 63 Useful information ............................... 203
Exterior mirrors ...................................... 63 Important safety notes ........................ 203
Lighting system ..................................... 65 Overview .............................................. 203
Good visibility ........................................ 80 Hydraulic connections ......................... 205
Power supply ......................................... 83
Contents 3
Menus and input windows in the on-

board computer ................................... 208
Working hydraulics circuit I ................. 216
Working hydraulics circuit II ................ 225
Power hydraulics circuit III/IV ............. 229
Working mode ................................... 232

Useful information ............................... 232
Ballast/weights ................................... 232
Equipment operation ........................... 232
Tipper platform .................................... 241
Maintenance and care ...................... 253

Cleaning and care ................................ 253
Maintenance ........................................ 258
Breakdown assistance ..................... 278

Where will I find...? .............................. 278
Cab ...................................................... 280
Engine ................................................. 283
Flat tyre ............................................... 288
Electrical fuses .................................... 291
Compressed-air system ....................... 294
Jump-starting, tow-starting and tow-
ing away .............................................. 295
Wheels and tyres .............................. 301

Important safety notes ........................ 301
Tyre pressure ....................................... 303
Technical data ................................... 317

Vehicle identification plates ................ 317
Operating data ..................................... 318
Service products ................................. 322
Capacities ............................................ 329
Hydraulic system ................................. 332
Vehicle dimensions .............................. 337
Information on the compressed-air
reservoir .............................................. 341
Compressed-air reservoir identifica-
tion plates ........................................... 341
4 Index
A Air-recirculation mode
Activating/deactivating ................... 92
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Airflow
ABS Off-road program .................... 146 Setting ............................................. 92
Braking with anti-lock protection ... 146 Alarm
Important safety notes .................. 145 Operating (on-board computer) ..... 108
ABS off-road program Attachments/add-on equipment ....... 32
Activating/deactivating ................. 146 Audio equipment
Access steps
Adjusting the volume (steering
Cleaning ......................................... 255 wheel buttons) ............................... 110
Important safety notes .................. 255 Operating (on-board computer) ..... 109
Tailgate .......................................... 245 Audio system
Active charcoal filter
Bluetooth® settings ....................... 137
Cleaning ......................................... 271
General notes ................................ 133
AdBlue®
Important safety notes .................. 133
Additive ......................................... 328 Operating system (overview) ......... 134
Consumption ................................. 193 Automatic car wash .......................... 256
Disposal ......................................... 328 Automatic gearshift
Filling ............................................. 195
see Telligent automatic gearshift
Gauge ............................................ 100
Auxiliary consumers ......................... 291
General notes ................................ 327
Auxiliary headlamps
High outside temperatures ............ 328
Fixed, adjusting ................................ 70
Fixed, replacing bulbs ...................... 75
Low outside temperatures ............. 328
General notes .................................. 69
Purity ............................................. 328
Height-adjustable, adjusting ............ 70
Service product ............................. 327
Height-adjustable, replacing
Storage .......................................... 328
bulbs ................................................ 77
Tank ............................................... 195
Lighting system ............................... 69
AdBlue® empty (display message) Auxiliary heating
Yellow event window ..................... 117 Air distribution and temperature ...... 97
AdBlue® reserve (display mes- Engine preheating ............................ 97
sage) Fuels ................................................ 94
Yellow event window ..................... 117 Immediate heating mode ................. 96
AdBlue® very low (display mes- Important safety notes .................... 94
sage) Mandatory switch-off ....................... 95
Yellow event window ..................... 117 Preselected heating mode ............... 96
Additional mirror Problem (fault) ................................. 98
Vehicles with mowing door .............. 64 Timer ............................................... 95
Adjusting the headlamp range ........... 67 Auxiliary heating system
Adjusting the volume Alarm function ................................. 97
Audio equipment ........................... 110 Axle loads
Radio ............................................. 110 Vehicle identification plate ............ 317
Air conditioning Axle reduction ratio
General notes .................................. 90 Vehicle identification plate ............ 317
Air-conditioning system
Climate control ................................ 91
Switching on/off .............................. 93
Index 5
B Brake supply pressure in circuit 1

too low (display message)
Ballast weights Red event window ......................... 125
Weights .......................................... 232 Brake system
Batteries Checking for leaks ......................... 145
Care ............................................... 277 Service brake ................................. 144
Charging ........................................ 277 Brakes
Checking the fluid level ................. 276 Checking for leaks in the
Disconnecting and connecting ....... 275 compressed-air brake system ........ 145
Disconnecting/connecting the Display message in the red event
battery cover ................................. 275 window .......................................... 128
Important safety notes .................. 273 Brakes, axle 1 Maintenance due
Maintenance .................................. 273 immediately (display message)
Battery cover Yellow event window ..................... 120
Disconnecting/connecting ............ 275 Braking
Battery isolator switch ABS ................................................ 145
Interrupting the voltage supply ........ 83 Anti-lock protection ....................... 146
Re-establishing a voltage supply ...... 83 Continuous brake .......................... 149
Voltage supply ................................. 83 Engine brake .................................. 149
Before pulling away Holding brake on the front axle ..... 148
Checking the supply pressure in Parking brake ................................ 147
the compressed-air brake system .. 143 Releasing the spring-loaded park-
Important safety notes .................. 141 ing brake cylinders ........................ 299
Bleeding the fuel system Breakdown assistance
With prefilter .................................. 287 Bleeding the fuel system ................ 287
Without prefilter ............................. 287 Cab safety prop ............................. 278
BlueTec® exhaust gas aftertreat- Charging the compressed-air sys-
ment tem from an outside source ........... 294
AdBlue® service product ................ 327 Chock ............................................ 279
Notes ............................................... 31 Compressed-air pistol with
Status indicator ............................. 103 compressed-air hose ..................... 278
Bluetooth® Draining the fuel prefilter ............... 286
Activating/deactivating ................. 137 Fire extinguisher ............................ 278
Connection requirements .............. 137 First-aid kit .................................... 278
Notes ............................................. 137 Fuses ............................................. 291
Pairing a mobile phone .................. 138 Important safety notes .................. 278
Settings ......................................... 137 Jack ............................................... 278
Body Jump-starting ................................. 295
Cleaning ......................................... 254 Pump lever, storing ........................ 278
Bottle holder Releasing the spring-loaded park-
Important safety notes .................... 86 ing brake cylinders ........................ 299
Brake fluid Renewing the fuel filter .................. 284
Hydraulic clutch mechanism sys- Replacing the fuel prefilter ............. 283
tem ................................................ 322 Square spanner ............................. 278
Notes ............................................. 322 Starting and stopping the engine
Brake lamp with the cab tilted .......................... 283
Replacing bulbs ............................... 78 Tilting the cab ................................ 280
Tool bag ......................................... 278
6 Index
Towing and tow-starting ................ 298 Working-area lamp ........................... 79

Tyre inflator hose ........................... 278 Changing a wheel
Warning lamp ................................. 278 Fitting a wheel ............................... 290
Warning triangle ............................ 278 Important safety notes .................. 288
Wheel wrench ................................ 278 Positioning a jack .......................... 288
Window cleaner/scraper ............... 279 Removing a wheel .......................... 289
Buttons Retightening wheel nuts ................ 290
see On-board computer Tyre inflator connection ................. 291
Changing bulbs
C Licence plate lighting ....................... 79
Notes ............................................... 72
Cab
Perimeter lamp ................................ 79
Cable ducts ...................................... 88 Chassis
Notes on tilting .............................. 280
Cleaning ......................................... 254
Problems in tilting the cab ............. 282 Chassis protection
Tilting ............................................. 280
Cleaning and care .......................... 257
Tilting back .................................... 281 Check tyre pressure (display mes-
Tilting forwards .............................. 281 sage)
Tilting unit ...................................... 280
Red event window ......................... 129
Cab safety prop
Checking the anti-corrosion pro-
Vehicle tool kit ............................... 278
tection ................................................ 273
Cab tilting pump
Child
Pump lever ..................................... 279
Restraint system .............................. 48
Cable ducts
Children in the vehicle
Cab .................................................. 88
Important safety notes .................... 48
Cables and compressed-air lines
Cleaning
Trailer ............................................ 198
Active charcoal filter ...................... 271
Camera
Fine particle filter ........................... 271
Driving systems ............................. 175
Water membrane on the fine par-
ticle filter or active charcoal filter
Monitor setting .............................. 175
housing .......................................... 271
Capacities (technical data) ............... 329
Cleaning and care
Care
Access steps ................................. 255
see Cleaning and care
After driving off-road or on a con-
CD radio
struction site ................................. 256
Anti-theft protection ...................... 133
Automatic car wash ....................... 256
Bluetooth® settings ....................... 137 Chassis and body ........................... 254
Function overview .......................... 137 Chassis and underbody protec-
Operating system (overview) ......... 134 tion ................................................ 257
Centre console cleaning seat covers ...................... 253
Front ................................................ 40 Cleaning the exterior ..................... 253
Rear ................................................. 41 Cleaning the interior ...................... 253
Switch panel overview ..................... 40 Engine cleaning ............................. 256
Changing a bulb High-pressure cleaning .................. 255
Auxiliary headlamps, fixed ............... 75 Light-alloy wheels .......................... 256
Front foglamps ................................. 75 Notes on care ................................ 253
Overview of bulbs ............................ 73 Rain and light sensor ..................... 255
Side-mounted turn signal lamps ...... 78 Seat belts ...................................... 253
Index 7
Cleaning the air filter Heavily loaded (display message

Maintenance .................................. 271 in the yellow event window) ........... 122
Cleaning the interior Clutch actuation system
Cleaning and care .......................... 253 see Hydraulic clutch actuation system
Cleaning the radiator Clutch faulty (display message)
Air conditioning condenser ............ 269 Red event window ......................... 127
Charge-air cooler ........................... 269 Clutch pedal
Engine radiator .............................. 269 Folding out (display message,
Hydraulic oil cooling fan ................ 269 grey event window) ........................ 116
Hydrostatic drive system oil Clutch/transmission circuit
cooler ............................................ 270 Checking the supply pressure ........ 143
Important safety notes .................. 268 Cockpit
Power hydraulics oil cooler ............ 270 Overview .......................................... 36
Radiator quick cleaning system ..... 170 Switch panel overview ..................... 40
Torque converter clutch oil cooler .. 270 Cold climate package
Working hydraulics oil cooler ......... 270 Before cold-starting ....................... 201
Cleaning the release valve on the Cold-resistant service products ..... 201
air intake duct Cold-start limits ............................. 201
Maintenance .................................. 272 Coolant preheating ........................ 200
Cleaning the vehicle exterior Engine does not start ..................... 202
Cleaning and care .......................... 253 General notes ................................ 200
Important safety notes .................. 253 Starting the engine ........................ 201
Climate control Winter driving ................................ 200
Air conditioning ................................ 93 Combination switch
Auxiliary heater ................................ 94 Lighting system ............................... 67
Cooling ............................................ 93 Overview .......................................... 43
Dehumidifying .................................. 93 Compressed-air brake system
Demisting the windscreen ............... 92 Checking the reservoir pressure .... 143
Function control panel ..................... 91 Draining ......................................... 272
Mixed air operation .......................... 92 Compressed-air connection
Overview .......................................... 91 Cab .................................................. 87
Refrigerant ..................................... 325 Compressed-air drier
Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 325 Granulate cartridge ........................ 272
Residual heat ................................... 92 Compressed-air lines and cables
Setting the air distribution ............... 92 Trailer ............................................ 198
Setting the air vents ........................ 93 Compressed-air pistol with
Setting the airflow ........................... 92 compressed-air hose
Setting the temperature .................. 92 Vehicle tool kit ............................... 278
Switching air-recirculation mode Compressed-air reservoir
on/off .............................................. 92 Draining ......................................... 272
Switching windscreen heating Identification plate ......................... 341
on/off .............................................. 82 Technical data ............................... 341
Clutch Compressed-air reservoir circuit 1
Faulty, Visit workshop (display Draining ......................................... 272
message in the yellow event win- Compressed-air reservoir circuit 2
dow) ............................................... 122 Draining ......................................... 272
Heavily loaded (display message
in the grey event window) .............. 116
8 Index
Compressed-air reservoir for aux- Coolant level

iliary consumers Checking ........................................ 260
Draining ......................................... 272 Coolant level too low (display mes-
Compressed-air reservoir for tyre sage)
pressure control system Red event window ......................... 126
Draining ......................................... 272 Coolant temperature
Compressed-air reservoir regener- Checking (on-board computer) ...... 112
ation Coolant temperature too high (dis-
Draining ......................................... 272 play message)
Compressed-air system Yellow event window ..................... 121
Charging from an outside source ... 294 Crawler gears
Display message in the yellow With Telligent® automatic gear-
event window ................................. 121 shift ............................................... 164
Condensation in compressed-air With Telligent® gearshift ................ 164
reservoir (display message) Cruise control
Yellow event window ..................... 121 Activating ....................................... 173
Constant working speed Activating while driving .................. 174
Engine speed setting ..................... 233 Activation conditions ..................... 173
Constant working speed mode Adjusting the speed tolerance ....... 174
Activating/deactivating using the Deactivating ................................... 175
control lever and with the blue Driving ........................................... 174
button ............................................ 234 Driving tips .................................... 174
Activating/deactivating using the Important safety notes .................. 172
control lever without the blue but- Overtaking ..................................... 175
ton ................................................. 233 Overview ........................................ 173
Activating/deactivating with the Selecting ........................................ 173
buttons on the steering wheel ....... 233 Setting a speed .............................. 174
Consumption Setting the speed and the speed
AdBlue® ......................................... 193 tolerance ....................................... 174
Engine oil ....................................... 193 Cruise control lever
Fuel ................................................ 192 Hydrostatic drive system ............... 184
Continuous brake Overview .......................................... 44
Activating/deactivating ................. 149 Telligent automatic gearshift ......... 156
Important safety notes .................. 149 Telligent gearshift .......................... 151
Continuous consumers Cumulation
Working hydraulics circuit I ............ 224 Working hydraulics circuit II, vehi-
Control lever cles with gear pump ...................... 227
Changing the installation position .... 87 Cup holder
Conversions/equipment .................... 32 Important safety notes .................... 86
Coolant
Additive with antifreeze protec- D
tion ................................................ 324
Data plate
Additive without antifreeze pro-
tection ........................................... 324 Engine ............................................ 317
Daylight driving lamps
Important safety notes (coolant
level) .............................................. 260 Switching on/off .............................. 66
Daytime driving lights
Service product ............................. 324
Topping up ..................................... 260 Automatic headlamp mode .............. 66
Index 9
Declarations of conformity ................. 30 Diodes

Device camera Layout ............................................ 292
Connecting .................................... 176 Dipped-beam headlamps
Driving systems ............................. 175 Replacing bulbs ............................... 74
General notes ................................ 176 Setting for driving abroad (sym-
Switching on/off ........................... 177 metrical) .......................................... 65
Diagnostic data Switching on/off .............................. 66
Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 112 Direction of travel preselection
Diagnostics connection Telligent automatic gearshift with
Operating safety and vehicle cruise control lever ........................ 157
approval ........................................... 30 Telligent gearshift with cruise con-
Diesel trol lever ........................................ 151
Refuelling ....................................... 193 Telligent® automatic gearshift
Diesel fuels with operating lever ....................... 157
Fuel additives ................................ 327 Telligent® gearshift with operat-
Important safety notes .................. 326 ing lever ......................................... 152
Low outside temperatures ............. 327 Display
Diesel particle filter full (display Instrument cluster ........................... 38
message) On-board computer ....................... 103
Red event window ......................... 125 Outside temperature ...................... 100
Diesel particle filter full, engine Setting the language (on-board
performance is reduced (display computer) ...................................... 113
message) Time ............................................... 100
Yellow event window ..................... 117 Total distance recorder .................. 101
Diesel particle filter saturated (dis- Trip meter ...................................... 101
play message) Display and instrument cluster
Yellow event window ..................... 117 controls malfunction (display mes-
Diesel particle filter saturation sage)
level increased (display message) Yellow event window ..................... 123
Yellow event window ..................... 117 Display messages
Diesel particle filter, vehicles in see Red event window
accordance with the Euro 6 stand- Distance recorder
ard Total distance recorder .................. 101
Automatic regeneration ................. 191 Doors
Driving tips .................................... 190 Access steps (entering and exit-
Filter replacement ......................... 192 ing) .................................................. 55
Important safety notes .................. 190 Entering and exiting ......................... 55
Regeneration block ........................ 191 Grab handles (entering and exit-
Starting manual regeneration ........ 192 ing) .................................................. 55
Diesel reserve (display message) Mowing door, important safety
Yellow event window ..................... 120 notes ............................................... 52
Differential lock Normal door, important safety
Engaging ........................................ 170 notes ............................................... 51
Important safety notes .................. 169 Draining
Differential lock Compressed-air reservoir circuit
see Differential lock 1 .................................................... 272
Differential locks Compressed-air reservoir circuit
Disengaging ................................... 170 2 .................................................... 272
10 Index
Compressed-air reservoir for aux- Driving with a high centre of grav-

iliary consumers ............................ 272 ity .................................................. 186
Compressed-air reservoir for tyre Engine oil consumption .................. 193
pressure control system ................ 272 Important safety notes .................. 186
Compressed-air reservoir regen- Off-road driving .............................. 187
eration ........................................... 272 Running-in ..................................... 186
Fuel prefilter .................................. 286 Symmetrical dipped beam ............... 65
Drive control faulty (display mes- Use of cable winches ..................... 190
sage) Warning buzzer .............................. 193
Yellow event window ..................... 121 Dual-mode steering
Driving abroad Changing steering position .............. 63
Lighting system ............................... 65 Important safety notes .................... 63
Symmetrical dipped beam ............... 65 Overview .......................................... 63
Driving and braking characteris-
tics E
Changed (display message in the
Electromagnetic compatibility
red event window) ......................... 128
Driving mode Declaration of conformity ................ 30
Electronic immobiliser
Differential lock ............................. 169
Overview .......................................... 54
Radiator quick cleaning system ..... 170
Emergency equipment ...................... 278
Torque converter clutch ................. 165
Engine
Tyre pressure control system ........ 166
Driving off-road Changing the power output ............. 31
ABS off-road program .................... 146 Checking the operating hours (on-
Important safety notes .................. 187 board computer) ............................ 112
Rules for driving off-road ............... 188 Cleaning ......................................... 256
see Off-road driving Cold start ....................................... 200
Driving style Data plate ...................................... 317
see Fuel consumption Diagnostics indicator lamp ............ 102
Driving systems Does not start ................................ 287
Camera .......................................... 175 Oil consumption ............................ 193
Cruise control ................................ 172 Operating safety .............................. 31
Device camera ............................... 175 Rectifying faults ............................. 287
Front camera ................................. 175 Setting the oil grade (on-board
Hydrostatic drive system ............... 177 computer) ...................................... 114
Reversing camera .......................... 175 Setting the oil viscosity (on-board
Speed limiter ................................. 171 computer) ...................................... 114
Driving the vehicle Starting .......................................... 142
Attached equipment ...................... 187 Starting and stopping with the cab
Important safety notes .................. 187 tilted .............................................. 283
Driving time Stopping ........................................ 144
Checking (on-board computer) ...... 106 Technical data ............................... 318
Driving tips Engine brake ...................................... 149
Diesel particle filter, vehicles in Engine data plate .............................. 317
accordance with the Euro 6 stand- Engine faulty (display message)
ard ................................................. 190 Yellow event window ..................... 121
Driving ........................................... 187 Engine oil
Driving abroad ................................. 65 Checking the oil level ..................... 263
Index 11
Checking the oil level (on-board Equipment socket

computer) ...................................... 112 on the vehicle exterior ..................... 84
Consumption ................................. 193 Events
General notes ................................ 323 Display (on-board computer) ......... 112
Miscibility ...................................... 323 Exterior lighting control
Multi-grade engine oils .................. 323 Bulb failure indicator ........................ 69
Oil change ...................................... 323 Exterior mirrors
Quality ........................................... 323 Adjusting ......................................... 63
SAE classification .......................... 323 Adjusting the exterior mirrors
Scope of use .................................. 323 when using dual-mode steering ....... 64
Setting viscosity (on-board com- Adjusting the mirror arm .................. 64
puter) ............................................. 114 Heating ............................................ 64
Single-grade engine oil .................. 323 Important safety notes .................... 63
Topping up ..................................... 264 External mirror
Engine oil level Additional mirror, vehicles with
Checking ........................................ 263 mowing door .................................... 64
Engine oil pressure too low (dis-
play message) F
Red event window ......................... 126
Fan hydraulics
Engine power output reduced
Malfunctioning (yellow event win-
(BlueTec® exhaust gas aftertreat-
dow display message) .................... 121
ment) (display message)
Fine particle filter
Yellow event window ..................... 117
Cleaning ......................................... 271
Engine power take-off
Fire extinguisher
Constant working speed ................ 233
Vehicle tool kit ............................... 278
Power take-offs .............................. 235 First-aid kit
Engine preheating
Vehicle tool kit ............................... 278
Switching on/off .............................. 97 Fitting equipment
Engine speed mode
Automatic activation ...................... 232
Notes on connecting/disconnect-
Equipment operation ..................... 232
ing equipment ................................ 239
General notes ................................ 232
To the tipper platform .................... 243
Manually activating/deactivating .. 232 Float settings
Engine speed setting
Activating/deactivating using the
Constant working speed ................ 233
keypad ........................................... 219
General notes ................................ 233
Activating/deactivating with the
Idling speed ................................... 233
control lever .................................. 220
Entry lamp
Working hydraulics circuit I ............ 219
Replacing bulbs ............................... 79 Fluid level
Equipment driving mode
Battery ........................................... 276
Power take-offs .............................. 234
Coolant .......................................... 260
Equipment operation
Foglamps
Engine speed mode ....................... 232
Switching on/off .............................. 67
Front mounting plate ..................... 238
Fording ............................................... 189
Front PTO shaft .............................. 236
Front camera
Transport of equipment ................. 239
Driving systems ............................. 175
Working on equipment ................... 241
general instructions ....................... 176
Working with equipment ................ 239
12 Index
Front flap G
Closing ........................................... 259
Opening ......................................... 259 Gauge
Opening/closing ............................ 258 AdBlue® ......................................... 100
Removing ....................................... 260 Fuel ................................................ 100
Removing/replacing ...................... 259 Gearshift
Replacing ....................................... 260 see Telligent gearshift
Square spanner ............................. 278 Generator is not charging battery
Front foglamps (display message)
Replacing bulbs ............................... 75 Yellow event window ..................... 123
Front mounting plate Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ........... 33
Equipment operation ..................... 238 Getting into and out of the vehicle
Front PTO shaft Overview .......................................... 55
Constant working speed ................ 233 Grey event window
Correct use .................................... 237 Clutch heavily loaded ..................... 116
Cover ............................................. 237 Folding out the clutch pedal .......... 116
Displaying the operating hours ...... 112 Manual regeneration not possible .. 116
Engaging/disengaging ................... 237 Notes ............................................. 115
Important safety notes .................. 236 Refill washer fluid reservoir ........... 116
Limiting the PTO shaft speed ......... 238 Regeneration disabled ................... 116
Limiting working speed .................. 238 Gross vehicle weight
Maintenance .................................. 267 Vehicle identification plate ............ 317
Method of operation ...................... 237
Fuel H
Additives ........................................ 327 Hazard warning lamps
Bleeding the system ...................... 287 Switching on/off .............................. 68
Diesel ............................................ 326 Headlamp cleaning system
Gauge ............................................ 100 Operation ......................................... 81
Important safety notes .................. 193 Headlamp flasher ................................ 67
Refuelling ....................................... 193 Headlamp range control
Fuel consumption Adjusting ......................................... 67
Driving style ................................... 192 Headlamps
General notes ................................ 192 Replacing bulbs ............................... 74
Operating conditions ..................... 192 Headlamps (automatic) ...................... 66
Fuel filter with water separator Heating
Draining the prefilter ...................... 286 Windscreen heating ......................... 82
Replacing the prefilter ................... 286 Heating system
Fuel prefilter
Climate control ................................ 91
Replacing ....................................... 283 High-pressure cleaning ..................... 255
Fuel prefilter with water separator
Holding brake on the front axle
Activating ....................................... 148
Fuses
Braking .......................................... 148
Closing the fuse box ...................... 291
Deactivating ................................... 148
Layout ............................................ 292 Hydraulic clutch mechanism sys-
Opening the fuse box ..................... 291 tem
Brake fluid ..................................... 322
Index 13
Hydraulic clutch operation system Hydraulics menu window ............... 209

Checking the fluid level and top- Important safety notes .................. 203
ping up ........................................... 261 Load profile 1 or load profile 2
Important safety notes .................. 261 function ......................................... 212
Hydraulic connections Lowering restrictor ........................ 218
Controlling, working hydraulics Menus and input windows in the
circuit I .......................................... 217 on-board computer ........................ 208
Power hydraulics ........................... 207 Menus, brief instructions for the
Working hydraulics ........................ 205 control lever .................................. 209
Hydraulic fluid Menus, brief instructions, buttons
Checking the oil level (working on the steering wheel .................... 208
hydraulics) ..................................... 265 Menus, general notes .................... 208
Checking the oil level of the steer- Overview ........................................ 203
ing ................................................. 264 Overview of controls ...................... 203
Environmentally-compatible Power hydraulics circuit III/IV ....... 229
hydraulic fluids .............................. 326 Problems connecting hydraulic
General notes ................................ 325 lines to working hydraulics cir-
Topping up (power hydraulics) ....... 266 cuit II ............................................. 207
Topping up (working hydraulics) .... 265 Schematic diagram of power
Hydraulic fluids hydraulics ...................................... 334
Synthetic ester .............................. 325 Schematic diagram of working
Hydraulic system hydraulics ...................................... 332
"Settings", "Limits" menu win- Settings menu window .................. 213
dows .............................................. 213 Settings, automatic menu win-
Buttons overview, vehicles with dows .............................................. 215
gear pump ..................................... 204 Settings, back menu windows ....... 216
Buttons overview, vehicles with Settings, function button menu
positioning pump ........................... 204 windows ........................................ 214
Changing the installation position Settings, resetting menu win-
of the control lever and controls ...... 87 dows .............................................. 216
Continuous consumers .................. 224 Settings, save menu windows ........ 215
Control lever overview ................... 203 Side and rear working hydraulics
Controlling hydraulic connec- circuit II, activating/deactivating,
tions .............................................. 217 vehicles with positioning pump ...... 228
Deactivating/enabling ................... 205 Snow plough load relief ................. 220
Displaying the operating hours ...... 112 Types ............................................. 203
Float positions ............................... 219 Working functions menu window ... 210
Flow rate ........................................ 336 Working functions menu window,
Flow rates, vehicles with a gear control lever operation .................. 210
pump ............................................. 336 Working functions menu window,
Flow rates, vehicles with a posi- operation using the buttons on the
tioning pump .................................. 336 steering wheel ............................... 210
Front working hydraulics circuit II, Working hydraulics circuit I ............ 216
activating/deactivating, vehicles Working hydraulics circuit II, vehi-
with positioning pump ................... 227 cles with gear pump, activating/
Hydraulic connections ................... 205 deactivating ................................... 225
Hydraulic connections, types ......... 335 Hydrostatic drive system
Hydraulics input window ................ 210 Activating ....................................... 178
14 Index
Activating/deactivating standby Important safety notes .................... 99

mode, vehicles with Telligent® Odometer ...................................... 101
automatic gearshift ........................ 179 Rev counter ..................................... 99
Checking oil level ........................... 266 Time and outside temperature ....... 100
Constant working speed ................ 233 Warning and indicator lamps ........... 39
Deactivating ................................... 179 Instrument lighting
Display message, red event win- Setting (on-board computer) .......... 113
dow ................................................ 130 Interior lamp
Displaying the operating hours ...... 112 Replacing bulbs ............................... 80
Driving ........................................... 180 Interior lighting
Driving with the control lever ......... 185 Reading lamp ................................... 68
Driving with the cruise control Switching on/off .............................. 68
lever ............................................... 184
Driving, driving mode ..................... 180 J
Driving, handling characteristics .... 180 Jack
Driving, work mode ........................ 181
Declaration of conformity ................ 30
General notes ................................ 177
Pump lever ..................................... 279
Work limiter ................................... 183
Vehicle tool kit ............................... 278
Working mode cruise control ......... 181 Jump-start
Working mode cruise control with
Socket ............................................. 85
work limiter ................................... 181 Jump-starting
Working speeds ............................. 178
Hydrostatic unit faulty. Please
Jump lead ....................................... 296
apply brakes! (Display message)
Jump-starting socket ...................... 296
Red event window ......................... 130
Socket ............................................. 85
Jump-starting socket
I Jump-starting ................................. 296
Identification plate
Compressed-air reservoir .............. 341 K
Vehicle ........................................... 317 Key
Idling speed
Replacement key ............................. 51
Engine speed setting ..................... 233 Key positions
Ignition lock
Ignition lock ................................... 141
Key positions ................................. 141
Immobiliser
L
Activating ......................................... 54
Deactivating ..................................... 54 Language
Notes ............................................... 54 Setting (on-board computer) .......... 113
Implied warranty ................................. 28 Licence plate lamp
Increased brake force and pedal Replacing bulbs ............................... 79
travel (display message) Light
Red event window ......................... 128 Working area lamp ........................... 69
Insect protection on the radiator ...... 33 Light switch
Instrument cluster Important safety notes .................... 66
AdBlue® ......................................... 100 Lighting system ............................... 66
Displays ........................................... 38 Overview .......................................... 66
Fuel gauge ..................................... 100
Index 15
Light-alloy wheels Normal door, from inside with

Cleaning ......................................... 256 release lever .................................... 52
Lighting system Normal door, from outside with
Auxiliary headlamps ......................... 69 key ................................................... 51
Combination switch ......................... 67 Normal door, from outside with
Driving abroad ................................. 65 remote control ................................. 52
Exterior lighting control ................... 69 Normal door, inside ......................... 52
Hazard warning lamps ..................... 68 Normal door, outside ....................... 51
Headlamp range control .................. 67 Lowering restrictor
Interior lighting ................................ 68 Working hydraulics circuit I ............ 218
Light switch ..................................... 66 Luggage net
Notes on changing bulbs ................. 72 Stowage spaces and stowage
Overview of bulbs ............................ 73 compartments ................................. 86
Replacing bulbs ............................... 74
Strobe lights .................................... 72 M
Working-area lamps ......................... 69
Main-beam headlamps
Lights
Replacing bulbs ............................... 74
Automatic headlamp mode .............. 66
Switching on/off .............................. 67
Combination switch ......................... 67
Maintenance
Daytime driving lights ...................... 66
Batteries ........................................ 273
Dipped-beam headlamps ................. 66
Checking anti-corrosion protec-
Driving abroad ................................. 65
tion ................................................ 273
Foglamps and rear foglamps ............ 67
Checking oil level, Hydrostatic
Hazard warning lamps ..................... 68
drive system) ................................. 266
Headlamp range control .................. 67
Limit speed (display message) Checking the engine oil level ......... 263
Checking the major assemblies
Limiter on the vehicle ................................ 273
Checking the oil level of the power
Deactivating ................................... 172
Load-sensing connections, vehi- hydraulics ...................................... 266
cles with positioning pump Checking the oil level of the steer-
ing and topping up oil .................... 264
Connecting attached equipment
Checking the oil level of the work-
with load sensing connections ....... 206
ing hydraulics ................................ 265
Overview of connections ............... 206
Cleaning the active charcoal filter .. 271
Working hydraulics ........................ 206
Loads Cleaning the air filter ..................... 271
Cleaning the fine particle filter ....... 271
Ballast weights ............................... 232
Locking (doors) Cleaning the radiator ..................... 268
Cleaning the release valve on the
From inside (central locking but-
air intake duct ................................ 272
ton) .................................................. 52
Locking system Cleaning the water membrane on
the fine particle filter or active
Key .................................................. 51
Locking/unlocking the doors charcoal filter housing ................... 271
Coolant level .................................. 260
Mowing door, inside ......................... 53
Displaying maintenance due date
Mowing door, outside ...................... 53
(on-board computer) ...................... 111
Normal door, from inside with but-
Draining compressed-air reser-
tons ................................................. 52
voir circuit 1 ................................... 272
16 Index
Draining compressed-air reser- Mixed air operation

voir circuit 2 ................................... 272 Switching on/off .............................. 92
Draining compressed-air reser- Mobile phone
voir for auxiliary consumers ........... 272 External pairing .............................. 138
Draining compressed-air reser- Important safety notes .................... 88
voir for tyre pressure control sys- Operating (on-board computer) ..... 108
tem ................................................ 272 Pairing ........................................... 138
Draining compressed-air reser- Monitor
voir regeneration ........................... 272 Setting ........................................... 175
Draining the compressed-air Mowing door washer system
brake system ................................. 272 Operation ......................................... 82
Draining the tyre pressure control Mowing door windscreen wiper
system ........................................... 272 Switching on/off .............................. 82
Front PTO shaft .............................. 267 Multifunction lever
Hydraulic clutch operation sys- Overview .......................................... 44
tem ................................................ 261 Multifunction steering wheel
Important safety notes .................. 258 Adjusting ......................................... 62
Replacing the wiper blades ............ 267 Dual-mode steering ......................... 63
Torque converter clutch ................. 262 Overview .......................................... 42
Windscreen washer system ........... 263
Major assemblies O
Checking for leaks ......................... 273
Occupant safety
Manoeuvring/tow-starting and
towing away Children in the vehicle ..................... 48
Notes ............................................. 298
Manual regeneration not possible Pets in the vehicle ........................... 49
(display message) Restraint system introduction .......... 45
Seat belt .......................................... 45
Grey event window ........................ 116
Odometer
Maximum gross vehicle weight
Trip meter ...................................... 101
Vehicle identification plate ............ 317
Off-road driving
Maximum permissible axle loads
Check list after driving ................... 190
Menus Checklist before driving off-road .... 188
Driving downhill ............................. 189
On-board computer, hydraulics ..... 208
Driving on sand .............................. 190
On-board computer, overview ........ 105
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre Fording .......................................... 189
Oil
see Qualified specialist workshop
Topping up (steering system) ......... 264
Minimum tyre tread depth ............... 301
see Engine oil
Mirror arm
Oil change .......................................... 323
Adjusting ......................................... 64
Oil level
Mirror heating
Checking (power hydraulics) .......... 266
Exterior mirror ................................. 64
Mirrors Checking (steering system) ........... 264
Checking (working hydraulics) ....... 265
Additional mirror .............................. 64
On-board computer
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
Activating backup drive mode
when using dual-mode steering ....... 64
(transmission shift system) ............ 107
Adjusting the mirror arm .................. 64
Alarm ............................................. 108
Index 17
Areas in the display ....................... 104 Settings menu ............................... 113

Audio and communications menu .. 108 Showing the power hydraulics oil
Axles menu window ....................... 110 level ............................................... 112
Calling up the diagnostic data ....... 112 Time ............................................... 106
Calling up/resetting trip com- Total distance recorder .................. 106
puter .............................................. 106 Trip data menu ............................... 106
Calling up/resetting trip data ........ 106 Trip meter ...................................... 106
Checking driving time .................... 106 Tyres menu window ....................... 110
Checking the coolant tempera- Yellow warning/ indicator lamp ..... 131
ture ................................................ 112 Opening/closing
Checking the engine operating Rear window .................................... 56
hours ............................................. 112 Operating and road safety (tyres)
Checking the oil level ..................... 112 General notes ................................ 301
Checking the range ........................ 107 Tyres .............................................. 301
Checking the reservoir pressure .... 111 Operating hours
Checking the rest period ............... 106 Checking (on-board computer) ...... 112
Controls ......................................... 103 Front PTO shaft .............................. 112
Displaying events ........................... 112 Hydraulic system ........................... 112
Displaying maintenance due date .. 111 Hydrostatic drive system ............... 112
Displaying the operating hours ...... 112 Operating Instructions
Displaying trailer/semitrailer Before the first journey .................... 28
data ............................................... 110 General notes .................................. 28
Displaying vehicle speed ................ 107 Implied warranty .............................. 28
Driving mode menu ........................ 107 Vehicle equipment ........................... 28
Event window (display messages) .. 115 Operating lever
Hydraulics menu window ............... 110 Telligent® automatic gearshift ....... 157
Hydraulics, menus and input win- Telligent® gearshift ........................ 152
dows .............................................. 208 Operating safety
Layout ............................................ 103 Implied warranty .............................. 28
Menus at a glance ......................... 105 Operating safety and registration
Monitoring info .............................. 111 Attachments/add-on equipment ..... 32
Notes on messages ....................... 115 BlueTec® exhaust gas aftertreat-
Operating the audio equipment ..... 109 ment ................................................ 31
Operating the telephone ................ 108 Changes in engine performance ...... 31
Operation and maintenance Installations and conversions ........... 32
menu ............................................. 110 Notes on body/equipment
Outside temperature display .......... 106 mounting directives ......................... 32
Overview of warning and indicator Notes on fitting equipment .............. 33
lamps ............................................. 130 Operating safety and vehicle
Red warning/ indicator lamp ......... 132 approval
Setting instrument lighting ............ 113 Correct use ...................................... 28
Setting the display language .......... 113 Declaration of conformity ................ 30
Setting the engine oil grade ........... 114 Notes on operating the vehicle ........ 29
Setting the engine oil viscosity ...... 114 Qualified specialist workshops ........ 31
Setting the rear axle oil grade ........ 114 Registering your vehicle ................... 31
Setting the transmission oil grade .. 114 Operating system
Setting the unit of measurement ... 113 see On-board computer
Setting the units ............................ 113
18 Index
Outside temperature display Power steering

Instrument cluster ......................... 100 see Steering
On-board computer ....................... 106 Power supply
Overhead control panel see Voltage supply
Overview .......................................... 37 Power take-off
Overview of hydraulic system con- Pulling away in equipment driving
trols .................................................... 203 mode ............................................. 235
Shifting gears in equipment driv-
P ing mode ........................................ 236
Stopping in equipment operating
Pairing ................................................ 138 mode ............................................. 236
Parking Power take-offs
Vehicle ........................................... 144 Engine power take-off .................... 235
Parking brake General notes ................................ 234
Applying ......................................... 147 Transmission power take-off .......... 234
Applying (display message) ............ 128 Power windows
Holding brake on the front axle ..... 148 see Side windows
Releasing ....................................... 147 Power windows
Testing ........................................... 147 see Side windows
Parking up the vehicle ...................... 277 Preparing for a journey
Perimeter lamp Checking emergency equipment/
Replacing bulbs ............................... 79 first-aid kit ..................................... 140
Perimeter/side marker lamp Checking the vehicle lighting, turn
Replacing bulbs ............................... 78 signals and brake lamps ................ 140
Pets in the vehicle ............................... 49 Fuel/AdBlue® level ........................ 140
Platform dropside Visual check of the vehicle exte-
Important safety notes .................. 243 rior ................................................. 140
Platform dropsides Protection of the environment
Access steps ................................. 245 General notes .................................. 29
Letting the tailgate swing freely ..... 244 Pulling away
Opening ......................................... 244 Vehicle ........................................... 143
Opening the tailgate ...................... 244 Pump lever
Rear platform dropside .................. 244 Assembling/disassembling ........... 279
Removing ....................................... 244 Cab tilting pump ............................ 279
Removing the post ......................... 245 Jack ............................................... 279
Removing the tailgate .................... 245 Vehicle tool kit, storing .................. 278
Tipper platform .............................. 243 Wheel wrench ................................ 279
Power hydraulics
Checking the oil level ..................... 266 Q
Hydraulic connections ................... 207
Important safety notes .......... 262, 266 Qualified specialist workshop ........... 31
Schematic diagram ........................ 334 Quick change system for the tipper
Showing the oil level (on-board platform
computer) ...................................... 112 Installing ........................................ 252
Topping up the hydraulic fluid ........ 266 Removing ....................................... 251
Power hydraulics circuit III/IV
Activating/deactivating ................. 230
General notes ................................ 229
Index 19
R Regeneration disabled (display

message)
Radiator cover ..................................... 33 Grey event window ........................ 116
Radio Relays ................................................. 292
Adjusting the volume ..................... 110 Layout ............................................ 292
Changing the audio source or Remote control
title/station ................................... 109 Checking the batteries ..................... 53
Radio-based vehicle components Locking/unlocking a normal door .... 51
Declaration of conformity ................ 30 Replacing batteries .......................... 53
Radio/navigation Teaching-in ...................................... 54
Anti-theft protection ...................... 133 Replacement key ................................. 51
Range Replacing a bulb
Checking (on-board computer) ...... 107 Auxiliary headlamps, height-
Rear axle
adjustable ........................................ 77
Setting the oil grade (on-board Replacing bulbs
computer) ...................................... 114 Bi-xenon bulbs ................................. 72
Rear axle ratio
Entry lamp ....................................... 79
Vehicle identification plate ............ 317 Headlamps ....................................... 74
Rear foglamp
Interior lighting ................................ 80
Replacing bulbs ............................... 78 Tail lamp .......................................... 78
Switching on/off .............................. 67 Replacing the fuel filter .................... 284
Red event window
Replacing the window blades
Brake supply pressure in circuit 1
is too low ....................................... 125 Replacing wiper blades
Check tyre pressure ...................... 129
Mowing door .................................. 268
Clutch faulty .................................. 127
Windscreen .................................... 267
Coolant level too low ..................... 126 Reserve level
Diesel particle filter full .................. 125
AdBlue® ......................................... 100
Driving and braking characteris-
Fuel ................................................ 100
tics changed .................................. 128
Reservoir pressure
Engage parking brake .................... 128
Checking (on-board computer) ...... 111
Engine oil pressure too low ............ 126
Residual heat
Hydrostatic unit faulty. Please
Climate control ................................ 92
apply brakes! ................................. 130
Rest period
Increased brake force and pedal
Checking (on-board computer) ...... 106
travel ............................................. 128
Restraint system
Torque converter clutch ................. 127
Introduction ..................................... 45
Transmission faulty, Park vehicle
Rev counter
safely ............................................. 127
Refill washer fluid reservoir (dis- Overview .......................................... 99
Reversing camera
play message)
Driving systems ............................. 175
Grey event window ........................ 116
Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys- General notes ................................ 176
Reversing lamp
tem)
Replacing bulbs ............................... 78
Running-in
Refuelling
Driving tips .................................... 186
Fuels .............................................. 193
20 Index
S Brake fluid ..................................... 322

Coolant .......................................... 324
SAE classification (engine oils) ........ 323 Diesel ............................................ 326
Safety Diesel fuels .................................... 326
Children in the vehicle ..................... 48 Display message in the yellow
Operating safety .............................. 29 event window ................................. 120
see Occupant safety Engine oil ....................................... 323
Safety inspection For drive axles and transmissions .. 324
Supply pressure in the Fuel additives ................................ 327
compressed-air brake system ........ 143 General notes ................................ 322
Supply pressure in the transmis- Hydraulic fluids .............................. 325
sion/clutch circuit ......................... 143 Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-
Safety prop tem) ............................................... 325
Tipper platform .............................. 243 Settings (on-board computer) ........ 114
Seat Transmission oil ............................. 324
Correct driver's seat position ........... 57 Winter diesel fuel ........................... 327
Double front passenger seat ............ 61 Setting the air distribution ................. 92
Luxury suspension seat ................... 59 Setting the volume
Standard seat .................................. 58 Telephone calls .............................. 108
Suspension seat .............................. 59 Side windows
Swivel seat ....................................... 60 Important safety notes .................... 55
Seat belt Opening/closing .............................. 56
Correct usage .................................. 46 Side-mounted turn signal lamps
Lap belt ............................................ 47 Changing a bulb ............................... 78
Seat belts Snow chains
Adjusting the height ......................... 47 Checking the tyre clearance .......... 200
Cleaning ......................................... 253 Important safety notes .................. 200
Fastening ......................................... 47 Snow plough load relief
Important safety guidelines ............. 45 Automatic snow plough system ..... 223
Introduction ..................................... 45 Float setting ................................... 224
Releasing ......................................... 48 Important safety notes .................. 221
Seat operation Pressing the snow plough briefly
Co-driver's bench seat ..................... 61 onto the road ................................. 224
Luxury suspension seat ................... 59 Switching on/off ........................... 221
Seat heating .................................... 62 Switching to standby mode using
Standard seat .................................. 58 buttons .......................................... 223
Suspension seat .............................. 59 Switching to standby mode using
Swivel seat ....................................... 60 the control lever ............................ 222
Seats Working hydraulics circuit I ............ 220
Cleaning the cover ......................... 253 Socket
Important safety notes .................... 57 24 V socket centre console ............. 84
Switching seat heating on/off ......... 62 Cab rear wall .................................... 84
Securing loads Diagnostics connection ................... 84
Tipper platform .............................. 242 Equipment socket, 32-pin ................ 84
Securing the load on the vehicle exterior ..................... 84
Tipper platform .............................. 242 Switching on the 12 V socket .......... 83
Service products Spare key ............................................. 51
AdBlue® ......................................... 327
Index 21
Spare wheel Stowage spaces and stowage com-

see Changing a wheel partments
Specialist workshop ............................ 31 Luggage net ..................................... 86
Speed Strobe lights
Display (on-board computer) ......... 107 Adjusting the stand height ............... 72
Speed limitation Lighting system ............................... 72
Maximum speed ............................ 193 Switching on/off .............................. 72
Speed limiter Sun visor
Activating ....................................... 172 Practical tips .................................... 85
Activating while driving .................. 172 Supply pressure
Activation conditions ..................... 172 Checking in the compressed-air
Driving ........................................... 172 brake system ................................. 143
Important safety notes .................. 171 Checking in the transmission/
Overtaking ..................................... 172 clutch circuit .................................. 143
Overview ........................................ 171 Switching the auxiliary headlamps
Selecting ........................................ 172 on/off ................................................... 71
Setting limit speed ......................... 172 Switching the flow rate
Spring-loaded parking brake cylin- Working hydraulics circuit II, vehi-
ders cles with gear pump ...................... 226
Releasing ....................................... 299 Swivel seat
Technical Data ............................... 318 Fastening the lap belt ...................... 47
Square spanner
Vehicle tool kit ............................... 278 T
Steering
Tachograph
Check oil level ............................... 264
On-board computer ....................... 106
Steering play (table) ....................... 318
Tail lamp
Topping up oil ................................ 264
Steering fluid too low (display mes- Replacing bulbs ............................... 78
Technical data
sage)
Capacities ...................................... 329
Steering wheel buttons Compressed-air reservoir .............. 341
Compressed-air system ......... 318, 321
see On-board computer
Stickers Coolant temperature ..................... 318
Engine ............................................ 318
General safety notes ........................ 28
Stopping Engine data plate ........................... 317
Front PTO shaft .............................. 318
Vehicle ........................................... 144
Stowage compartments Reservoir pressure in the
compressed-air system .................. 318
see Stowage spaces and compartments
Stowage space and stowage com- Spring-loaded parking brake cyl-
partments inders ............................................ 318
Steering play .................................. 318
Cup and bottle holder ...................... 86
Stowage spaces and compart- Tightening torques for wheel nuts .. 318
ments Tyre pressure ................................. 318
Vehicle dimensions ........................ 337
Stowage compartment in the
Telephone
centre console ................................. 85
Adjusting the volume for calls ....... 108
Operating (on-board computer) ..... 108
22 Index
see Mobile phone Important safety notes .................. 150

Telligent automatic gearshift Multifunction lever and gear indi-
Cruise control lever ....................... 156 cator .............................................. 150
Direction of travel preselection Operating lever .............................. 152
with the cruise control lever .......... 157 Pulling away ................................... 152
Kickdown ....................................... 159 Pulling away with gear preselec-
Rapid change of direction .............. 161 tion ................................................ 153
Telligent gearshift Pulling away with the automatic
Cruise control lever ....................... 151 pulling-away gear ........................... 153
Direction of travel preselection Pulling away with the manual pull-
with the cruise control lever .......... 151 ing-away gear ................................ 153
Telligent® automatic gearshift Pulling-away gear ........................... 152
Automatic drive program, driving ... 159 Quick change of direction .............. 155
Automatic drive program, select- Shifting gears ................................. 153
ing ................................................. 158 Stopping ........................................ 154
Automatic neutral position ............ 159 Working gears ................................ 163
Changing into neutral .................... 159 Telligent®-gearshift
Clutch pedal .................................. 162 Pulling away without gear prese-
Crawler gears ................................ 164 lection ............................................ 153
Direction of travel preselection Temperature
with operating lever ....................... 157 Outside temperature display .......... 100
Drive program, selecting ................ 158 Setting (heating/air condition-
Drive programs and drive func- ing) .................................................. 92
tions .............................................. 158 Theft-deterrent system
Engaging reverse gear ................... 161 Immobiliser ...................................... 54
Important safety notes .................. 155 Tightening torques
Manual drive program, driving ....... 160 Wheel nuts ..................................... 318
Manual drive program, selecting .... 158 Tilting system
Multifunction lever and gear indi- Problems in tilting the cab ............. 282
cator .............................................. 156 Time
Operating lever .............................. 157 In the display ................................. 100
Pulling away ................................... 158 Tipper operation
Stopping ........................................ 159 Before tipping ................................ 245
Working gears ................................ 163 Important notes ............................. 245
Telligent® automatic gearshift Raising/lowering the tipper plat-
clutch pedal form ............................................... 245
Folding in ....................................... 162 Tipper platform
Folding out ..................................... 162 Correct use .................................... 241
Malfunctions .................................. 162 Enabling/disabling the tipper
Telligent® gearshift function, vehicles with working
Crawler gears ................................ 164 hydraulics ...................................... 247
Direction of travel preselection Enabling/disabling the tipper
with operating lever ....................... 152 function, vehicles without working
Driving ........................................... 153 hydraulics ...................................... 246
Engaging reverse gear ................... 155 Fitting equipment to the tipper
Engaging/disengaging the pull- platform ......................................... 243
ing-away gear ................................ 152 Loading the tipper platform ........... 242
Method of operation ...................... 241
Index 23
Platform dropside access steps ..... 245 Important safety notes .................. 298
Platform dropsides ........................ 243 Tow-starting the vehicle ................. 298
Quick change system for the plat- Towing a vehicle while the engine
form ............................................... 250 is not running ................................. 299
Raising/lowering the tipper plat- Towing a vehicle while the engine
form trailer, vehicles with working is running ....................................... 299
hydraulics ...................................... 248 Towing a vehicle with operational
Raising/lowering the tipper plat- gearshift ........................................ 299
form trailer, vehicles without Towing a vehicle with transmis-
working hydraulics ......................... 246 sion, transfer case or axle dam-
Raising/lowering the tipper plat- age ................................................. 299
form vehicle, vehicles with work- Towing the vehicle ......................... 299
ing hydraulics ................................ 247 Trailer
Raising/lowering the tipper plat- Compressed-air lines and cables ... 198
form vehicle, vehicles without Coupling up ................................... 197
working hydraulics ......................... 246 Displaying data (on-board com-
Raising/lowering, vehicles with puter) ............................................. 110
working hydraulics ......................... 247 Testing the parking brake .............. 147
Raising/lowering, vehicles with- Towing bracket for fixed trailer
out working hydraulics ................... 246 coupling ......................................... 196
Removing the tipper platform with Trailer coupling .............................. 197
a crane ........................................... 248 Transmission
Safety prop .................................... 243 Faulty, Park vehicle safely (display
Securing ........................................ 243 message in the red event win-
Securing loads ............................... 242 dow) ............................................... 127
Tipper operation ............................ 245 Faulty, Visit workshop (display
Tipper platform with a crane message in the yellow event win-
Important safety notes .................. 248 dow) ............................................... 122
Installing ........................................ 250 Setting the oil grade (on-board
Removing ....................................... 248 computer) ...................................... 114
Tool bag Transmission / clutch reservoir
Vehicle tool kit ............................... 278 pressure too low (display mes-
Topping up sage)
AdBlue® ......................................... 195 Yellow event window ..................... 121
Topping up washer fluid ................... 263 Transmission oil
Torque converter clutch Service product ............................. 324
Checking the oil level ..................... 263 Transmission power take-off
Driving mode ................................. 165 Constant working speed ................ 233
Driving mode with power take-off .. 166 Power take-offs .............................. 234
Red event window ......................... 127 Transmission shift system
Topping up the oil .......................... 263 Activating backup drive mode (on-
Total distance recorder board computer) ............................ 107
Instrument cluster ......................... 101 Transmission/clutch
Tow-starting/towing away Display message in the red event
Releasing the spring-loaded park- window .......................................... 127
ing brake cylinders ........................ 299 Display message in the yellow
Towing/tow-starting event window ................................. 122
Attaching the tow bar .................... 298
24 Index
Transmission/clutch circuit Minimum tyre tread depth ............. 301

Checking the supply pressure ........ 143 Retreaded ...................................... 303
Transporting Service life ..................................... 302
Equipment ..................................... 239 Types ............................................. 302
Trip computer Tyre speed rating ........................... 302
Calling up/resetting (on-board
computer) ...................................... 106 U
Trip data (on-board computer) ......... 106
Underbody protection
Trip meter
Cleaning and care .......................... 257
Instrument cluster ......................... 101
Unit of measurement
Turn signals
Setting (on-board computer) .......... 113
Switching on/off .............................. 68
Units
Tyre inflater hose
Setting (on-board computer) .......... 113
Vehicle tool kit ............................... 278
Universal carrier
Tyre inflator connection
Centre console ................................ 86
Flat tyre ......................................... 291
Using cable winches
Tyre pressure
Driving tips .................................... 190
Effect ............................................. 301
Tyre pressure control system V
Automatic mode, selecting the Vehicle
pressure level ................................ 166 Data acquisition ............................... 34
Automatic mode, selecting the Equipment ....................................... 28
vehicle load .................................... 168 Implied warranty .............................. 28
Draining ......................................... 272 Operating safety .............................. 29
important safety notes ................... 166 Parking .......................................... 144
Manual mode, adjusting via the Pulling away ................................... 143
on-board computer ........................ 168 Registration ..................................... 31
Manual mode, adjusting with the Socket ............................................. 83
button ............................................ 169 Stopping ........................................ 144
Manual mode, general notes ......... 168 Unlocking/locking a mowing
Preparing for a journey .................. 166 door ................................................. 52
Switching automatic mode Unlocking/locking a normal door .... 51
on/off ............................................ 166 Vehicle bodies ..................................... 32
Tyre pressure control system limi- Vehicle dimensions
ted (display message) Technical data ............................... 337
Yellow event window ..................... 123 Vehicle identification number
Tyre pressure table (VIN) ................................................... 317
Explanatory notes for the table ...... 315 Vehicle identification plate
For off-road driving ........................ 314 Axle loads ...................................... 317
On firm surfaces ............................ 304 Axle reduction ratio ....................... 317
Tyre pressures Maximum gross vehicle weight ...... 317
Determining ................................... 304 Maximum permissible axle loads ... 317
Tyres Overview ........................................ 317
Changing tyres ............................... 303 Rear axle ratio ............................... 317
Condition ....................................... 302 Vehicle tool kit
Damage ......................................... 302 Left-hand stowage compartment
Load-bearing capacity .................... 302 under the cab ................................ 278
Index 25
Stowage compartment in the rear Windscreen

of the cab ...................................... 278 Demisting ........................................ 92
Stowage space in the rear left of Windscreen heating
the cab .......................................... 278 Switching on/off .............................. 82
Vehicle tool kit and emergency Windscreen washer system
equipment Topping up fluid ............................. 263
Important safety notes .................. 278 Windscreen, operation ..................... 81
Ventilation Windscreen wiper and washer sys-
Climate control ................................ 91 tem
Setting the vents ............................. 93 Mowing door .................................... 82
VIN Windscreen wipers
Vehicle identification number ........ 317 Switching windscreen wipers on/
Voltage supply off .................................................... 80
Battery isolator switch ..................... 83 Windscreen ...................................... 80
General notes .................................. 83 Windscreen, lateral end position ...... 81
Winter diesel fuel
W Service products ............................ 327
Winter driving
Warning and indicator lamps
Cold climate package .................... 200
On-board computer ....................... 130
Parking in extremely cold condi-
Warning buzzer
tions .............................................. 199
Sounding ....................................... 193
see Winter operation
Warning lamp
Winter operation
Vehicle tool kit ............................... 278
Warning triangle AdBlue® ......................................... 327
Before the journey ......................... 199
Vehicle tool kit ............................... 278
Warning/indicator lamps Driving in extremely cold condi-
tions .............................................. 199
Engine diagnostics (BlueTec®6
vehicles) ........................................ 102
Radiator cover ................................. 33
Instrument cluster ........................... 39
Snow chains .................................. 200
Warnings
Windscreen .................................... 199
Stickers ........................................... 28
Winter diesel fuel ........................... 327
Water membrane
Winter driving ................................ 198
Cleaning on the fine particle filter Wiper blades
or active charcoal filter housing ..... 271
Replacing ....................................... 267
Wheel chock ...................................... 279 Work limiter
Wheel nuts
Hydrostatic drive system ............... 183
Retightening .................................. 290 Working area lamp
Tightening torques ......................... 318 Adjusting ......................................... 69
Wheel wrench
Overview .......................................... 69
Pump lever ..................................... 279 Switching on/off .............................. 69
Vehicle tool kit ............................... 278 Working gears
Window
General notes ................................ 163
Rear window .................................... 56
With Telligent® automatic gear-
Window cleaner/scraper
shift ............................................... 163
Vehicle tool kit ............................... 279
Windows With Telligent® gearshift ................ 163
see Side windows
26 Index
Working hydraulics Working mode cruise control

Connecting attached equipment Hydrostatic drive system ............... 181
with load-sensing connection ........ 206 Working on equipment
Hydraulic connections ................... 205 Equipment operation ..................... 241
Load-sensing connections, vehi- Working with equipment
cles with positioning pump ............ 206 For earth-moving ........................... 240
Overview of load sensing connec- For maintenance of grassland and
tions .............................................. 206 plant protection ............................. 240
Schematic ...................................... 332 Front loader operation ................... 240
Working hydraulics circuit I Important safety notes .................. 239
Activating ....................................... 216 With a wide working range ............. 240
Activating/deactivating ................. 216 Working with equipment
Checking the oil level ..................... 265 see Working with equipment
Continuous consumers .................. 224 Working-area lamps
Controlling hydraulic connec- Replacing bulbs ............................... 79
tions .............................................. 217
Deactivating ................................... 217 Y
Float settings ................................. 219
Yellow event window
Hydraulic connections ................... 205
Hydraulic system ........................... 216 AdBlue reserve® ............................ 117
Lowering restrictor ........................ 218 AdBlue® empty .............................. 117
Schematic diagram ........................ 332 AdBlue® very low ........................... 117
Snow plough load relief ................. 220 Brakes, axle 1 Maintenance due
Topping up the hydraulic fluid ........ 265 immediately ................................... 120
Working hydraulics circuit II Clutch faulty, Visit workshop ......... 122
Checking the oil level ..................... 265 Clutch heavily loaded ..................... 122
Front, activating/deactivating, Compressed-air system ................. 121
vehicles with positioning pump ...... 227 Condensation in compressed-air
Hydraulic connections ................... 205 reservoir ........................................ 121
Schematic diagram ........................ 332 Coolant temperature too high ........ 121
Side and rear, activating/deacti- Diesel particle filter fill level
vating, vehicles with positioning increased ....................................... 117
pump ............................................. 228 Diesel particle filter full .................. 117
Topping up the hydraulic fluid ........ 265 Diesel particle filter full, engine
Vehicles with gear pump, activat- performance is reduced ................. 117
ing/deactivating ............................ 225 Diesel reserve ................................ 120
Vehicles with gear pump, assign- Display and instrument cluster
ment of flow rate ........................... 226 controls malfunction ...................... 123
Vehicles with gear pump, cumula- Drive control faulty ........................ 121
tion ................................................ 227 Engine faulty .................................. 121
Vehicles with gear pump, switch- Engine power output reduced ........ 117
ing the flow rate ............................. 226 Fan hydraulics malfunctioning ....... 121
Vehicles with positioning pump, Generator is not charging battery .. 123
general notes ................................. 227 Notes ............................................. 117
Working hydraulics: oil level too Speed limitation ............................. 117
low (display message) Steering fluid too low ..................... 120
Yellow event window ..................... 124 Transmission faulty, Visit work-
shop ............................................... 122
Index 27
Transmission/clutch reservoir
pressure too low ............................ 121
Tyre pressure control system limi-
ted ................................................. 123
Working hydraulics: oil level too
low ................................................. 124
28 Introduction
Operating Instructions Correct use

Before the first journey Observe the following information when driving
The Operating Instructions, Maintenance or Ser- your vehicle:
vice Booklet and the equipment-dependent Sup- Rthe safety notes in these Operating Instruc-
plements are integral parts of the vehicle. Keep tions
these documents in the vehicle at all times. If Rthe technical data in these Operating Instruc-
you sell the vehicle, always pass all of the docu- tions
ments on to the new owner.
Rtraffic rules and regulations
Read these documents carefully and familiarise
Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to motor
yourself with the vehicle before the first journey.
vehicles
For your own safety and a longer vehicle life,
always follow the instructions and warning noti- Various warning stickers are attached to the
ces in these Operating Instructions. Disregard- vehicle. If you remove any warning stickers, you
ing them may lead to damage to the vehicle or or others could fail to recognise certain dangers.
personal injury. Leave warning stickers in position.
The Unimog is designed as an equipment car-
rier, tractor unit and chassis for a variety of dif-
ferent equipment.
Implied warranty
Correct use includes:
! Observe the notes in this Owner's Manual Rusing the Unimog as a standard vehicle as
regarding the correct operation of your vehi- delivered
cle and possible damage to the vehicle. Dam- Rusing the Unimog in conjunction with attach-
age to the vehicle which is caused by violation
ments and bodies that comply with the
of these notes is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz body/equipment mounting
Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or the new
directives
or used-vehicle warranty.
Rcompliance with Mercedes-Benz mainte-
nance or service and care specifications
Ruse of genuine Mercedes-Benz spare parts
Vehicle equipment
These Operating Instructions describe all the G WARNING
models and standard and optional equipment of Modifications to electronic components, their
your vehicle that were available at the time of software as well as wiring could affect their
going to print. Country-specific deviations are function and/or the operation of other net-
possible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not
worked components. This could in particular
be equipped with all the functions described.
This also applies to safety-relevant systems and also be the case for systems relevant to
functions. Therefore, the description may differ safety. They might not function properly any-
from your vehicle in some cases. more and/or jeopardise the operational
All systems found in your vehicle are listed in safety of the vehicle. There is an increased
your vehicle's original purchase agreement. risk of an accident and injury.
Contact a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre if you Do not attempt to modify the wiring as well as
have any questions about equipment or opera- electronic components or their software.
tion.
Always have work on electrical and electronic
components carried out at a qualified special-
ist workshop.
If you carry out modifications to electronic com-

ponents, their software or wiring, this could
result in the invalidation of your vehicle's oper-
ating permit.
Introduction 29
G WARNING Operating conditions

Gases and liquids from substances that con- Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con-
stitute a health hazard or react aggressively sumption.
can escape, even from securely closed con- Rmake sure that the tyre pressures are
tainers. If you transport these substances always correct.
inside the vehicle, this may affect your health
Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight.
and impair your concentration while you are
Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute
driving. It may also cause malfunctions or
electrical component system failures. There is to environmental protection. You should
a risk of fire and accident. therefore adhere to the service intervals.
Rall maintenance work should be carried out
Do not store or transport any substances in
the vehicle that are hazardous to health or at a qualified specialist workshop.
react aggressively. Personal driving style
Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when
Substances that constitute a health hazard or
react aggressively include, for example: starting the engine.
Rdo not warm up the engine with the vehicle
Rsolvents
Rfuel
stationary.
Roil and grease Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance
Rcleaning agents from the vehicle in front.

Racid Ravoid frequent and heavy acceleration and
braking.
Rchange gear in good time and use each gear
Protection of the environment only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed.
Rswitch off the engine when waiting in sta-
Economical and environmentally
aware driving tionary traffic.
Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consump-
H Environmental note tion.
Daimler AG has a declared policy of compre-
hensive environmental protection.
The objective is to use natural resources spar- Operating safety and vehicle approval
ingly and in a manner that takes the require-
ments of both nature and humanity into
Notes on driving
account. The vehicle may be damaged if:
You too can help to protect the environment Rthe vehicle is resting on a high kerb or on an
by operating your vehicle in an environmen- unpaved path
tally responsible manner. Ryou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a
Fuel consumption and the rate of engine, kerb, a speed bump or a pothole in the road
Ra solid object impacts with the vehicle under-
transmission, brake and tyre wear depend on
side or chassis component
the following factors:
The vehicle body, the vehicle chassis, the vehi-
Rthe operating conditions of your vehicle cle underside, suspension components, wheels
Ryour personal driving style or tyres could sustain non-visible damage in
these or similar situations. Components that
You can influence both factors. For this rea- have been damaged in this way can fail unex-
son, observe the following notes: pectedly or, in the event of an accident, may not
absorb the loads that arise as intended. If the
underfloor panelling has been damaged, flam-
Z
30 Introduction
mable materials, such as leaves, grass or twigs, Jack

for example, can collect between the vehicle
underside and underfloor panelling. These Copy and translation of the original declaration
materials may ignite if they come into contact of conformity:
with hot parts of the exhaust system for exten- EC declaration of conformity 2006/42/EG
ded periods. We, WEBER-HYDRAULIK GMBH, Heilbronner
Str. 30, 74363 Güglingen, Germany, hereby
G WARNING declare that the product "Weber-Hydraulik
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or hydraulic bottle jack", types:
twigs may ignite if they come into contact with A AD ADX AH AHX AL AT ATD ATDX ATG ATN
hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk ATGX ATPX ATQ AX
of fire. Load capacity: 2,000 to 100,000 kg
When driving on an unpaved road or off-road, Serial no.: from year of manufacture 01/2010
check the vehicle underside regularly. In par- conforms to the relevant basic health and safety
ticular, remove trapped plant parts or other requirements of the EC machinery guideline
flammable material. Contact a qualified spe- mark.
cialist workshop immediately if damage is This EC declaration of conformity becomes inva-
detected. lid:
Rin the event of modifications and repairs per-
Have the vehicle checked and repaired immedi- formed by unqualified personnel
ately at a qualified specialist workshop. If you Rif the products are used in situations which do
notice impaired driving safety after continuing not correspond to the intended use cases lis-
the journey, stop the vehicle immediately in ted in the Operating Instructions
accordance with the traffic conditions. In this Rif the checks to be performed regularly are not
case, consult a qualified specialist workshop. carried out
Relevant EC directives: EC machinery guideline
mark 2006/42/EC
Declarations of conformity Applied standards: ISO 11530
Vehicle components which receive Quality assurance: DIN EN ISO 9001:2000
and/or transmit radio waves Güglingen, 01/07/2013
Signed by
The following note refers to all components of
the vehicle which receive and/or transmit radio Manager, WEBER-HYDRAULIK GmbH
waves and the integrated information systems Representative for technical documentation,
and communications equipment in the vehicle: WEBER-HYDRAULIK GMBH
The components of the vehicle which receive Heilbronner Straße 30, 74363 Güglingen
and/or transmit radio waves are compliant with
the basic requirements and all other relevant
regulations stipulated by Directive Diagnostics connection
2014/53/EU.
You can obtain further information from any The diagnostics connection is used for connect-
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. ing diagnostic equipment at a qualified special-
ist workshop.
Electromagnetic compatibility G WARNING
The electromagnetic compatibility of the vehicle If you connect equipment to a diagnostics
components has been checked and certified connection in the vehicle, it may affect the
according to the currently valid version of operation of vehicle systems. As a result, the
UN-R 10 regulation. operating safety of the vehicle could be affec-
ted. There is a risk of an accident.
Introduction 31
Only connect equipment to a diagnostics con- Rmodifications as well as installations and con-
nection in the vehicle, which is approved for versions

Rwork on electronic components
your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Modifying the engine output ! Have the engine electronics and associated
parts, such as control units, sensors, actuat-
! Increased power could: ing components or electric cables serviced
Rchange emission levels only at a qualified specialist workshop. Vehi-
cle components may otherwise wear more
Rcause malfunctions quickly and the vehicle's operating permit
Rlead to consequential damage may be invalidated.
The operating safety of the engine cannot be
guaranteed in all situations.
Any tampering with the engine management Vehicle registration
system in order to increase the engine power
output will lead to the loss of warranty entitle- Mercedes-Benz may instruct its Service Centres
ments. to carry out technical inspections on certain
vehicles. This is the case if their quality or safety
If the vehicle's engine power output is could be improved by such measures.
increased: Mercedes-Benz can only inform you about the
Rtyres, suspension, brake and engine cooling vehicle checks if Mercedes-Benz has your reg-
systems must be adapted to the increased istration data.
engine power output Mercedes-Benz does not have your registration
Rhave the vehicle recertified data if:
Rreport changes in power output to the vehicle Ryou did not purchase your vehicle from an
insurers authorised specialist dealer
This will otherwise lead to the invalidation of the Ryour vehicle has not yet been inspected at a
vehicle's general operating permit and its insur- Mercedes-Benz Service Centre
ance cover. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you register
If you sell the vehicle, inform the buyer of any your vehicle at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
alterations to the vehicle's engine power output. Inform Mercedes-Benz as soon as possible
If you do not inform the buyer, this may consti- about changes to your address or a change in
tute a punishable offence under national legis- the ownership of the vehicle.
lation.
BlueTec® exhaust gas aftertreatment

Qualified specialist workshop
The BlueTec® exhaust gas aftertreatment sys-
A qualified specialist workshop has the neces- tem must be operated in conjunction with the
sary specialist knowledge, tools and qualifica- reducing agent AdBlue® if it is to function cor-
tions to carry out the work required on the vehi- rectly.
cle correctly.
This is particularly applicable to work relevant to Information about AdBlue® can be found in the
safety. Observe the notes in the Maintenance or "Service products" section (Y page 327).
Service Booklet. Topping up and operating the vehicle with
You should always have the following work on AdBlue® is required for compliance with emis-
your vehicle carried out at a qualified specialist sions requirements and is, therefore, a condi-
workshop: tion of the operating permit for the vehicle. The
operating permit is invalidated if the vehicle is
Rwork relevant to safety
operated without AdBlue®. The legal conse-
Rservice and maintenance work quence of this is that the vehicle may no longer
Rrepair work be operated on public roads.
Z
32 Introduction
This may be an offence or a breach of road traffic If you do not observe these event windows and
regulations in certain countries. Special con- their instructions for action, it is possible that:
cessions granted either at the time of purchase Rengine power output will be reduced
or to reduce operating costs, e.g. reduced taxes
Ra subsequent speed limit of approximately
or tolls, may also be rendered invalid retroac-
tively. This may be the case both in the country 20 km/h will be applied
of registration as well as the country of opera- Rthe diesel particle filter will have to be
tion. replaced earlier than intended (vehicles
Engine management monitors the BlueTec® which comply to the Euro 6 standard).
exhaust gas aftertreatment systems for compli- If there is a malfunction with the BlueTec®
ance with emissions laws and regulations. exhaust gas aftertreatment system, have it
Among other topics, the on-board computer checked and repaired at a qualified specialist
informs you of: workshop.
Rthe level of AdBlue® (Y page 100)
Rthe status of the BlueTec® exhaust gas after- Attachments, bodies, equipment and
treatment for vehicles in accordance with the conversions
Euro 6 standard (Y page 190)
Rthe diesel particle filter saturation level for Notes on body/equipment mounting
vehicles in accordance with the Euro 6 stand- directives
ard (Y page 190)
If you attempt to operate the vehicle without ! For safety reasons, have bodies manufac-
AdBlue®, with diluted AdBlue® or with a differ- tured and fitted in accordance with the appli-
ent reducing agent, this will be detected by the cable Mercedes-Benz body/equipment
engine management system. Other emissions- mounting directives. These body/equipment
relevant malfunctions, e.g. dosage malfunctions mounting directives ensure that the chassis
or sensor errors, are also detected and logged. and the body form one unit and that maximum
operating and road safety is achieved.
The ; indicator lamp displays emissions-rel-
evant faults after the engine is started. Addi- For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
tionally, the ; indicator lamp also signals the mends that:
status of the BlueTec® exhaust gas aftertreat- Rno other modifications should be made to
ment for a quick on-site check by authorities. the vehicle.
For vehicles in accordance with the Euro 6 Rapproval should be obtained from
standard, the Â indicator lamp warns you if Mercedes-Benz in the event of deviations
the diesel particle filter reaches a critical degree from approved body/equipment mounting
of saturation and indicates a malfunction. directives.
The on-board computer warns you in good time Approval from certified inspection agencies
about emissions-relevant malfunctions or faulty or official approvals cannot rule out risks to
operation and displays, according to priority: your safety.
Rgrey event windows (Y page 115) Technical changes to the vehicle can affect the
Ryellow event windows (Y page 117) functionality of the stability control. Observe the
Rred event windows (Y page 124) notes in the body/equipment mounting direc-
tives.
For vehicles in accordance with the Euro 6
standard, the · indicator lamp lights up in Observe the information relating to genuine
the status area of the on-board computer and Mercedes-Benz parts (Y page 33).
stays lit as long as the malfunction exists. You can access the Mercedes-Benz body/
equipment mounting directive on the Internet at
http://bb-portal.mercedes-benz.com.
There you can also find information on pin
assignment and changing a fuse.
You can obtain further information from any
Introduction 33
Notes on fitting equipment ing of engine diagnostic data is a legal require-

ment and must always be verifiable and accu-
The Unimog is an equipment carrier. It can be rate.
combined with a variety of attachments and
body equipment. Each combination of the basic
vehicle with attachments or body equipment
results in a vehicle configuration that could be Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
hazardous when used. If safety regulations, e.g.
accident prevention regulations, are not com- H Environmental note
plied with, hazards could arise when installing
equipment. Attachments and body equipment Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned
generally change the centre of gravity and the assemblies and parts which are of the same
dimensions of the vehicle, affecting the driving quality as new parts. For these, the same war-
characteristics. Particular attention is required, ranty applies as for new parts.
especially when driving off-road. The vehicle's
maximum axle load ratings must not be excee- If you use parts, tyres, wheels or safety-relevant
ded. If the axle loads are distributed unevenly, equipment which has not been approved by
ballast must be used to balance the vehicle. Mercedes-Benz, the operational safety of the
vehicle may be jeopardised. Safety-relevant sys-
G WARNING tems, e.g. the brake system, may malfunction.
When the permissible wheel loads, axle loads Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts
and/or the maximum permissible gross vehi- of an equivalent quality standard. Only use
cle weight are exceeded, driving safety is tyres, wheels and accessory parts that are
approved for your type of vehicle.
compromised. The handling as well as steer-
ing and braking characteristics may be signif- Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts and conversion
parts and accessories that have been approved
icantly impaired. Overloaded tyres may over- for your vehicle are tested by Mercedes-Benz
heat, causing them to burst. There is a risk of for:
an accident. Rreliability
When transporting a load, always observe the Rsafety
permissible wheel loads, axle loads and the Rsuitability
maximum permissible gross vehicle weight Despite ongoing market research, Mercedes-
for the vehicle (including occupants). Benz is unable to assess other parts. Mercedes-
Benz accepts no responsibility for the use of
! Read the body and equipment manufactur- such parts in Mercedes-Benz vehicles, even if
er's operating instructions. You could other- they have been independently or officially
wise fail to recognise dangers that could arise approved.
when working with your Unimog. In Germany, certain parts are only officially
Always observe the information on the cor- approved for installation or modification if they
rect use of additional equipment. comply with legal requirements. This also
applies to some other countries. All genuine
! Make sure that the vehicle dimensions com- Mercedes-Benz parts meet the approval
ply with the country's regulations for road
requirements. The use of non-approved parts
use.
may invalidate the vehicle's general operating
permit.
Notes on the engine radiator This is the case if:
Even seemingly minor changes to the vehicle, Rit results in a change to the vehicle type from
such as attaching a radiator cover for winter that for which the vehicle's general operating
driving, are not approved. Do not cover the permit was granted
engine radiator. Also, do not use thermal mats, Rthey pose a possible risk for road users
insect protection covers or similar objects.
Rthey adversely affect the emission or noise
Otherwise, the values of the diagnostics system levels
will be affected. In some countries, the record-
Z
34 Introduction
Always specify the vehicle identification number ranty cases and quality assurance measures.
(VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benz The data is read out via the connection for OBD
parts (Y page 317). (European on-board diagnostics) in the vehicle,
which is required by law. The relevant offices in
the service network or third parties collect,
Data stored in the vehicle process and use the data. This data documents
the vehicle's technical states, is used to help in
Information from electronic control finding faults and improving quality and is sent
units to the manufacturer where necessary. In addi-
tion, the manufacturer is subject to product lia-
Electronic control units are installed in the vehi- bility. The manufacturer needs technical data
cle. Some of them are essential for ensuring that from vehicles for this purpose.
your vehicle runs safely, while others assist you Fault memories in the vehicle can be reset by a
with driving (driver assistance systems). Your service outlet during repair or service work.
vehicle also offers a range of comfort and enter- You can incorporate data into the vehicle's com-
tainment functions, which are also enabled by fort and infotainment functions yourself as part
means of electronic control units. of the selected equipment.
Electronic control units contain data storage These include, for example:
systems that can temporarily or permanently
save technical information concerning the vehi- Rmultimedia data such as music, films or pho-
cle's condition, component stress and mainte- tos for playback in an integrated multimedia
nance requirements, as well as technical events system
and faults. Raddress book data for use in conjunction with
This information generally documents the con- an integrated hands-free system or an inte-
dition of a component, a module, a system or the grated navigation system
surroundings, for example: Rnavigation destinations that have been
Roperating states of system components (e.g. entered
fill levels, battery status, tyre pressure) Rdata about using Internet services
Rstatus messages concerning the vehicle or its This data can be saved locally in the vehicle or is
individual components (e.g. number of wheel located on a device that you have connected to
revolutions/speed, deceleration in move- the vehicle. If this data is saved in the vehicle,
ment, lateral acceleration, display of fastened you can delete it at any time. This data is sent to
seat belts) third parties only at your request, particularly
Rmalfunctions and defects in important system when you use online services in accordance with
components (e.g. lights, brakes) the settings that you have selected.
Rinformation on events leading to vehicle dam- You can save and change comfort settings/
age customisations in the vehicle at any time.
Rsystem responses in special driving situations Depending on the piece of equipment in ques-
(e.g. airbag deployment, intervention of station, these can include:
bility control systems) Rsettings for the seat positions and steering
Rambient conditions (e.g. temperature, rain wheel positions
sensor) Rsuspension settings and climate control set-
In addition to performing the actual control unit tings
function, this data is used by manufacturers to Rcustomisations such as interior lighting
detect and rectify faults and to optimise vehicle If your vehicle is equipped appropriately, you
functions. Most of this data is stored in volatile can connect your smartphone or another mobile
memory and processed only in the vehicle itself. terminal to the vehicle. You can control this by
Only a small part of the data is stored in event or means of the control elements integrated in the
fault memories. vehicle. The smartphone's picture and sound
When you use services, the technical data from can be output via the multimedia system. Spe-
the vehicle can be read out by service network cific items of information are also sent to your
employees or third parties. Services can include smartphone.
repair services, maintenance processes, war-
Introduction 35
Depending on the type of integration, this can Services from third parties
include:
If it is possible to use online services from other
Rgeneral vehicle status
providers, these services are the responsibility
Rposition data of the provider in question and subject to that
This allows the use of selected smartphone provider's data protection conditions and terms
apps, e.g. navigation or music player apps. of use. The manufacturer has no influence over
There is no additional interaction between the the content exchanged here.
smartphone and the vehicle, particularly active For this reason, please ask the service provider
access to vehicle data. The type of additional for information about the type, extent and pur-
data processing is determined by the provider of pose of the collection and use of personal data
the app being used. Whether you can configure when services are provided by third parties.
settings for it and, if so, which ones, depends on
the app and your smartphone's operating sys-
tem.
Service provider
Wireless network connection
If your vehicle has a wireless network connec-
tion, data can be exchanged between your vehi-
cle and other systems. The wireless network
connection is made possible by the vehicle's
own transmitter and receiver or by mobile end
devices that you have brought into the vehicle
(e.g. smartphones). This wireless network con-
nection enables online functions to be used.
These include online services and applications/
apps provided by the manufacturer or other pro-
viders.
Manufacturer's own services

In the case of the manufacturer's online serv-
ices, the manufacturer describes the functions
in a suitable place and the associated informa-
tion subject to data protection legislation. Per-
sonal data can be used in the provision of online
services. The data exchange for this takes place
via a secure connection, e.g. with the manufac-
turer's IT systems intended for the purpose. Col-
lecting, processing and using personal data
beyond the provision of services are permitted
only on the basis of a statutory permit or decla-
ration of consent.
You can usually activate and deactivate the serv-
ices and functions (some of which are subject to
charge). In many cases, this also applies to the
vehicle's entire data connection. There are
exceptions to this; in particular, legally required
functions and services such as the "E-Call" traf-
fic emergency call system.
Z
36 Cockpit
Cockpit
At a glance
Function Page Function Page

: Light switch 66 E Centre console 40
; Headlamp range control 67 F Multifunction lever 44
= Cruise control lever 44 G Ignition lock 141
? Instrument cluster 39 H To adjust the multifunction
steering wheel 62
A Multifunction steering wheel 42
I Horn
B Differential locks 169
J Combination switch 43
C Cup holder 86
D Universal carrier 86
Overhead control panel 37
Overhead control panel
At a glance
: Tachograph, see the manu- B i Switches the working-
facturer's operating instruc- area lamp on/off 69
tions
C é Switches the auxiliary
; è Switches the front headlamps on/off 69
windscreen heating
on/off 82 D À Switches the strobe
lights on/off 72
= I Switches the lateral
end position of wind- E Monitor for front, rearview
screen wipers on/off 81 and equipment cameras 175
? Q Switches on the head- F CD radio 133
lamp cleaning system 81
A J Switches the external
lighting control on/off 69
38 Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster
Displays
At a glance
Example: instrument cluster

: Speedometer A Total distance and trip dis-
tance 101
; On-board computer 103
B Clock and outside tempera-
= Rev counter 99 ture display 100
? AdBlue® level 100 C Fuel level 100
i On vehicles without display A and B scroll data menu. The menu window displays the
in the on-board computer to the Truck info total distance recorder, trip meter, time and
menu window in the ß (Y page 106) tour outside temperature.
Instrument cluster 39
At a glance
: Warning and indicator ? Warning and indicator
lamps in the speedometer lamps in the AdBlue® dis-
; Engine diagnostics 102 play, vehicles in accord-
º Cab tilt lock 280 ance with the Euro 6 stand-
ard
i Differential lock 169
É Diesel particle filter,
W Instruction to brake at
automatic regeneration 191
high engine speeds 99
Â Diesel particle filter
; Turn signal lamps 68 malfunction 190
= Warning and indicator A Warning and indicator
lamps in the rev counter lamps below the on-board
! ABS (Anti-lock Braking computer
System) 145 K Main-beam headlamps 67
J Brake pressure, safety Ã Continuous brake 149
inspection 143 ! Parking brake 147
Brake malfunction, brake U Side lamps/dipped-
system 144 beam headlamps 66
40 Centre console
Centre console Function Page

Front centre console D Î Activates/deacti-
At a glance
vates hydrostatic
drive system 177
E Operates the hydrostatic
drive system 177
Operates the hydraulic sys-
tem 203
Changes the installation
position of the control lever
and hydraulic system con-
trols 87
F L Front PTO shaft: acti-
vates/deactivates
working speed control 236
G W Engages/disengages
the front PTO shaft 236
H N Engages/disengages
working gear 163
O Engages/disengages
Function Page crawler gear 164
: K Activates/deacti- I Vehicles with a trailer-moun-
vates ABS Off-road ted tipper platform:
program 145 Ö Enabling/disabling
the tipper function 245
; U Engages/disengages
transmission power J Vehicles with tipper plat-
take-off 234 form:
P Enabling/disabling
= T Engages/disengages
the tipper function 245
engine power take-off 234
K Vehicles with tipper plat-
? £ Switches the hazard
form, without hydraulic sys-
warning lamps on/off 68 tem:
A ÷ Tyre pressure control Q Raises the tipper plat-
system: increases form 245
tyre pressure 166 R Lowers the tipper
Ö Tyre pressure control platform 245
system: reduces tyre
pressure L Heating/air-conditioning
166
system control panel 90
B Õ Activates/deacti-
vates the tyre pres-
sure control system 166
C F Manually activates/
deactivates engine
speed mode 232
Centre console 41
Rear centre console Function Page

E Stowage compartment
At a glance
F Auxiliary heating timer 94
G Ï Activates/deacti-
vates the holding
brake on the front axle 148
H £ Switches engine pre-
heating on/off 97
I J Switches the 12 V
socket on/off 83
J È Switches the radiator
quick cleaning system
on/off 170
K ¿ Opens/closes the
side windows 55
L 12 V socket 83
Function Page M T Switches on the mir-
ror heating 64
: Adjusts the exterior mirrors 63
U Switches off the mir-
; Vehicles in accordance with ror heating 64
the Euro 6 standard:
É Diesel particle filter, N 24 V socket 84
starts stationary man-
ual regeneration 190
Ê Diesel particle filter,
blocks regeneration 191
= Õ Switches the equip-
ment camera on/off 175
? & Locks the doors 52
% Unlocks the doors 52
A S Vehicles with mowing
door: wipes with
washer fluid 82
B w Switches the right-
hand seat heating on/
off 62
C w Switches the seat
heating on the left-
hand side on/off 62
D Parking brake 147
42 Multifunction steering wheel
Multifunction steering wheel

At a glance
Function Page
Function Page Operating the speed lim-
iter: 171
Operating the on-board
computer: 103 Operating cruise control: 172
u Selects the next main menu/ V Selecting cruise control 173

next entry in the input win- Switches off the working
dow, increases or resets mode limiter 183
value
p Activates and adjusts current
t Selects the previous main speed/limit speed, increa-
menu/previous entry in the ses the speed/limit speed
input window or decreases Speed limiter 171
value Cruise control 172
r Next menu window/next Working mode cruise control 181
menu bar down in the input
window q Activates and calls up stored
speed/limit speed, reduces
s Previous menu window/next set speed/limit speed
menu bar up in the input win- Speed limiter 171
dow Cruise control 172
9 Opens and closes input win- Working mode cruise control 181
dow/acknowledges event
È Selects the speed limiter 172
window
Switches on the working
Ú Stores/displays the favour- mode limiter 183
ite menu window
o Deactivates the speed limiter 172
W Increases the volume: Deactivates cruise control 175
Audio 110 Switches off the working
Telephone 108 mode cruise control and
working mode limiter 181
X Reduces the volume:
Audio 110 Ù Input window:
Telephone 108 Cruise control, adjusts the
speed tolerance 174
Equipment operation, engine
speed setting 233
Operating the telephone: 108
Combination switch 43
Function Page Combination switch

; Makes or accepts a call/
displays the Telephone
At a glance
menu window
= Ends/rejects an incoming
call
Function Page
: Main-beam headlamps on
(when dipped-beam head-
lamps are switched on) 67
; Turn signal, right 68
= Main-beam headlamps off
(when dipped-beam head-
lamps are switched on) 67
? Headlamp flasher 67
A Turn signal, left 68
B Windscreen wipers 80
C To wipe with washer fluid/
single wipe 81
44 Multifunction lever
Cruise control lever Multifunction lever

At a glance
Function Page
: Speed limiter: activating/
deactivating the speed lim-
iter 171
Cruise control: activating/
deactivating cruise control 172 Function Page
; Telligent® gearshift: gear : Continuous brake 149
preselection (shifting down) 151
; Telligent® automatic gear-
Telligent® automatic gearshift: automatic gearshift —
shift: shifting down manually 156 drive program selection 158
= Speed limiter: increasing d Automatic drive program
set limit speed 171 A
Cruise control: increasing p Manual drive program M
set speed 172 = Telligent® gearshift: gear
Telligent® gearshift: select- preselection (shifting down) 150
ing direction of travel
(forward) 151 Telligent® automatic gear-
shift: shifting down manually 156
Telligent® automatic gear-
shift: selecting direction of ? Telligent® gearshift: gear
travel (forward) 156 preselection (shifting up) 150
? Telligent® gearshift: gear Telligent® automatic gear-
preselection (shifting up) 151 shift: shifting up manually 156
Telligent® automatic gear- A Telligent® gearshift: select-
shift: shifting up manually 156 ing direction of travel 150
A Speed Limiter: reducing set h Drive/forwards
limit speed 171 i Neutral
Cruise control: decreasing k Reverse
set speed 172 Telligent® automatic gear-
Telligent® gearshift: select- shift: selecting direction of
ing direction of travel (back- travel 156
wards) 151 h Drive/forwards
Telligent® automatic gear- i Neutral
shift: selecting direction of k Reverse
travel (backwards) 156
Occupant safety 45
Useful information Seat belts
These Operating Instructions describe all the Introduction

models and standard and optional equipment of A correctly fastened seat belt is the most effec-
your vehicle that were available at the time of tive means of restraining the movement of vehi-
going to print. Country-specific differences are cle occupants in the event of a collision. It
Safety
possible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not reduces the risk of vehicle occupants coming
be equipped with all the functions described. into contact with parts of the vehicle interior or
This also applies to safety-relevant systems and being ejected from it.
functions.
If the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply at the
Read the information on qualified specialist belt sash guide, the inertia reel locks. The belt
workshops (Y page 31). strap cannot be pulled out any further.
Important safety notes

Occupant safety
G WARNING
Restraint system introduction
If the seat belt is worn incorrectly, it cannot
The restraint system can reduce the risk of vehi- perform its intended protective function. Fur-
cle occupants coming into contact with parts of thermore, an incorrectly worn seat belt can
the vehicle's interior in the event of an accident.
cause additional injuries, e.g. in the event of
The restraint system can only offer protection if
all vehicle occupants always: an accident, heavy braking or sudden
changes of direction. There is an increased
Rhave the seat belt correctly fastened
risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
(Y page 46)
Rhave the seat and head restraint adjusted Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have
properly (Y page 57) their seat belts fastened correctly and are sit-
As the driver, you must also make sure that the ting properly.
steering wheel is also adjusted properly.
Observe the information on the correct driver's The restraint system can only offer protection if
seat position (Y page 57). all vehicle occupants always:
See "Children in the vehicle" for information on Rhave the seat belt correctly fastened
children travelling with you in the vehicle as well (Y page 46)
as on child restraint systems (Y page 48). Rhave the seat and head restraint adjusted
properly (Y page 57)
Important safety notes G WARNING

The seat belt does not offer the intended level
G WARNING of protection if you have not moved the back-
If the restraint system is modified, it may no rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-
longer work as intended. The restraint system ing or in the event of an accident, you could
may then not perform its intended protective slide underneath the seat belt and sustain
function by failing in an accident or triggering abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This
unexpectedly, for example. There is an poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal
increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. injury.
Never modify parts of the restraint system. Do Adjust the seat properly before beginning
not attempt to modify the wiring as well as your journey. Always ensure that the backrest
electronic components or their software. is in an almost vertical position and that the
shoulder section of your seatbelt is routed
across the centre of your shoulder.
Z
46 Occupant safety
G WARNING the seat belts checked immediately at a quali-

Persons under 1.50 m tall cannot wear the fied specialist workshop.
seat belts correctly without an additional suit-
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use seat
able restraint system. If the seat belt is worn
belts that have been specifically approved for
incorrectly, it cannot perform its intended the relevant type of vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
Safety
protective function. Furthermore, an incor- Otherwise, your vehicle's general operating per-
rectly worn seat belt can cause additional mit could be invalidated.
injuries, e.g. in the event of an accident, heavy
braking or sudden changes of direction. There Correct seat belt use
is an increased risk of injury, possibly even
Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
fatal. (Y page 45).
Always secure persons less than 1.50 m tall in All vehicle occupants must be wearing the seat
additional suitable restraint systems. belt correctly before beginning the journey. Also
make sure that all vehicle occupants are always
If a child younger than twelve years old and wearing the seat belt correctly while the vehicle
under 1.50 m in height is travelling in the vehi- is in motion.
cle: When fastening a seat belt, always make sure
Ralways secure the child in a child restraint that:
system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehi- Rthe seat belt buckle tongue is inserted only
cle. The child restraint system must be appro- into the belt buckle belonging to that seat
priate to the age, weight and size of the child. Rthe seat belt is pulled tight across the body
Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety
Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter
notes on "Children in the vehicle"
coat.
(Y page 48) in addition to the manufactur-
er's operating and installation instructions for Rthe seat belt is not twisted
the child restraint system Only then can any forces that occur be dis-
tributed across the surface of the seat belt.
G WARNING Rthe shoulder section of the belt is routed
Seat belts cannot provide protection as inten- across the centre of the shoulder
ded if: The shoulder section of the seat belt should
Rdamaged,
not touch your neck or be routed under your
modified, extremely dirty,
arm or behind your back. If possible, adjust
bleached or pigmented the seat belt to the appropriate height.
Rthe belt buckle is damaged or extremely Rthe lap belt is taut and passes across the lap
dirty as low down as possible
Rthe belt anchorage or inertia reel has been The lap belt must always be routed across
modified your hip joints and never across your abdo-
men. This applies particularly to pregnant
Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in women. If necessary, press the lap belt down
an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. Mod- into your hip joints and pull tight with the
ifications or damage to the seat belts may shoulder section of the belt.
lead to tearing or failing, for example, in an Rthe seat belt is not routed across sharp, poin-
accident. There is an increased risk of injury, ted or fragile objects
possibly even fatal. If you have such items located on or in your
Never modify seat belts, belt anchorages or clothing, e.g. pens, keys or spectacles, store
these in a suitable place.
inertia belt reels. Make sure that the seat
Ronly one person is using a seat belt
belts are not damaged, do not show signs of
wear and are clean. After an accident, have Infants and children must never travel sitting
on the lap of a vehicle occupant. In the event
Occupant safety 47
of an accident, they could be crushed

between the vehicle occupant and seat belt.
Robjects are never secured with a seat belt if
the seat belt is also being used by one of the
vehicle's occupants
Also ensure that no objects are placed
Safety
between a person and the seat. e.g. a cush-
ion.
Seat belts are intended only to secure and
restrain vehicle occupants. Always observe the
"Before driving off" instructions and safety
notes for securing objects, luggage and loads
(Y page 141). Vehicles with a swivel seat
The shoulder section of the seat belt must
Fastening and adjusting the seat belts always be routed across the centre of the shoul-
der. Adjust the belt sash guide if necessary.
Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
X To raise: slide the belt sash guide upwards.
(Y page 45) and the information on the correct
use of the seat belt (Y page 46). The belt sash guide engages in various posi-
tions.
Vehicles with a swivel seat: also observe the
information on the lap belt for the swivel seat X To lower: press release button : and slide
(Y page 47). the belt sash guide downwards.
X Let go of release button : in the desired
position and make sure that the belt sash
guide engages.
Lap belt for the swivel seat
Basic illustration When you turn the swivel seat 90° towards the
X Adjust the seat (Y page 57). mowing door while driving, you must fasten the
The seat backrest must be in an almost lap belt.
upright position. X To fasten the seat belt: pull the seat belt
X Pull the seat belt out smoothly by belt sash smoothly from belt outlet = and engage seat
guide = and engage belt tongue ; in belt belt buckle tongue ; in belt buckle :.
buckle :. X If necessary, press the lap belt downwards
X If necessary, pull upwards on the seat belt in into the hip joints.
front of your chest so that the belt sits tightly
across your body.
Z
48 Children in the vehicle
Releasing the seat belt G WARNING

! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled up. If persons (particularly children) are exposed
Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will be to heat or cold for a prolonged period, there is
trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism. a risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Never
This could damage the door, the door trim leave persons (particularly children) unatten-
panel and the seat belt. Damaged seat belts
Safety
ded in the vehicle.

can no longer fulfil their protective function
and must be replaced. Visit a qualified spe-
cialist workshop. G WARNING
X Press release button in belt buckle, hold belt If the child restraint system is placed in direct
tongue firmly and guide the seat belt back. sunlight, the parts could become very hot.
Children could be suffer burns by touching
these parts, in particular on the metallic parts
Children in the vehicle of the child restraint system. There is a risk of
injury.
Important safety notes If you and your child leave the vehicle, always
If a child younger than twelve years old and make sure that the child restraint system is
under 1.50 m in height is travelling in the vehi- not in direct sunlight. Cover it with a blanket,
cle: for example. If the child restraint system has
Ralways secure the child in a child restraint been exposed to direct sunlight, leave it to
system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. cool down before securing the child in it.
The child restraint system must be appropri- Never leave children unattended in the vehi-
ate to the age, weight and size of the child cle.
Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety
notes in this section in addition to the child Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have
restraint system manufacturer's installation their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting
instructions. properly. Particular attention must be paid to
Vehicles with a swivel seat: the swivel seat is children.
not suitable for installing a child restraint sys- Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
tem. Children under twelve years of age and (Y page 45) and the information on the correct
under 1.50 m in height are not allowed to travel use of the seat belt (Y page 46).
on the swivel seat.
G WARNING
Child restraint system
If you leave children unattended in the vehi-
cle, they could set the vehicle in motion by, for G WARNING
example: If the child restraint system is incorrectly fit-
Rreleasing the parking brake ted on the seat position suitable for this pur-
Rshifting the transmission into neutral pose, it cannot perform its intended protec-
Rstarting the engine tive function. In the event of an accident,
sharp braking or a sudden change in direction,
They could also operate the vehicle's equip-
the child may not be held securely. There is an
ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
increased risk of serious or even fatal injuries.
an accident and injury.
Observe the manufacturer's installation
When leaving the vehicle, always take the key
instructions and the correct use for the child
with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave
restraint system. Make sure that the entire
children unattended in the vehicle.
surface of the child restraint system is resting
on the seat surface. Never place objects
under or behind the child restraint system,
Pets in the vehicle 49
e.g. cushions. Only use child restraint sys-

tems with the original cover designed for
them. Only replace damaged covers with gen-
uine covers.
G WARNING
Safety
If the child restraint system is fitted incor-
rectly or is not secured, it can come loose in
the event of an accident, heavy braking or a
sudden change in direction. The child
restraint system could be thrown about, strik- Example: approval label on the child restraint sys-
ing vehicle occupants. There is an increased tem
risk of injury, possibly even fatal. The seat belt serves as the securing system for
Always fit child restraint systems properly, child restraint systems.
even if they are not being used. Make sure If you secure a child in a child restraint system
that you observe the child restraint system on the front passenger seat, always move the
manufacturer's installation instructions. front passenger seat as far back as possible. The
entire base of the child restraint system must
Always observe the "Before driving off" instruc- always rest on the seat cushion of the front-
tions and safety notes for securing objects, lug- passenger seat. The backrest of a forward-
gage and loads (Y page 141). facing child restraint system must, as far as
possible, rest flat against the backrest of the
G WARNING front passenger seat. The child restraint system
Child restraint systems or their securing sys- must not be put under strain by the head
tems that have been damaged or subjected to restraint. If possible, adjust the head restraint
position accordingly. Always make sure that the
a load in an accident cannot perform their shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the
intended protective function. In the event of belt sash guide to the shoulder belt guide on the
an accident, sharp braking or a sudden child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap
change in direction, the child may not be held must be routed forwards and downwards from
securely. There is an increased risk of serious the belt sash guide. In addition, always observe
or even fatal injuries. the child restraint system manufacturer's instal-
lation instructions.
Immediately replace child restraint systems You can obtain child restraint systems and infor-
that have been damaged or subjected to a mation about the correct child restraint system
load in an accident. Have the child restraint from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
securing systems checked in a qualified spe-
cialist workshop before fitting a child restraint
system again. Pets in the vehicle
Observe the warning labels on the child restraint
system.
G WARNING
If children are travelling in the vehicle, always If you leave animals unsupervised or unse-
observe the safety notes on "Children in the cured in the vehicle, they may press buttons
vehicle" as well (Y page 48). or switches, for instance.
"Universal"-category child restraint systems can In this way, animals may:
be recognised by their orange approval label.
Ractivatevehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example
Rswitch systems on or off and thereby
endanger other road users
Z
50 Pets in the vehicle
Furthermore, unsecured animals may be flung

around inside the vehicle in the event of an
accident or abrupt steering or braking
manoeuvre, and thereby injure vehicle occu-
pants. There is a risk of accident and injury.
Safety
Never leave animals unattended in the vehi-

cle.
Always secure animals properly when driving,
for instance with a suitable pet carrier.
Locking system 51
Useful information Exterior door lock
These Operating Instructions describe all the Unlocking/locking using the key
models and standard and optional equipment of
your vehicle that were available at the time of
going to print. Country-specific differences are
This also applies to safety-relevant systems and
Opening and closing

functions.
Read the information on qualified specialist
workshops (Y page 31).
Locking system
Keys
Your vehicle is equipped with a special key sys-
tem. The engine can only be started using the
key coded to the vehicle.
If a vehicle key is lost, obtaining a replacement is
a time-consuming process. This can only be
done through a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Mercedes-Benz therefore recommends that you
always keep an easily accessible replacement
key with you for emergencies.
d Left-hand door
G WARNING e Right-hand door
If you attach heavy or large objects to the key, X Insert the key in position g into the respec-
the key could be unintentionally turned in the tive door lock.
ignition lock. This could cause the engine to X To lock: turn the key downwards to position
be switched off. There is a risk of an accident. 2 when the door is closed.
Do not attach any heavy or large objects to the Vehicles without central locking: the corre-
key. Remove any bulky keyrings before insert- sponding door is locked.
ing the key into the ignition lock. Vehicles with central locking: both doors are
locked.
X To unlock: turn the key up to position 1.
The corresponding door is unlocked.
Normal door lock X To open: remove the key and pull the door
Important safety notes handle in the direction of the arrow.
! Only open the doors when traffic conditions

permit. Make sure that there is sufficient
clearance when opening the doors. Other-
wise, you could damage your vehicle or other
vehicles.
Z
52 Locking system
Unlocking/locking with the remote con- Vehicles with central locking: both doors are
trol locked.
X To unlock: pull release lever : upwards in
the direction of arrow ; until it is in the
centre position.
The corresponding door is unlocked.
X To open: pull release lever : upwards in the
direction of arrow ; as far as it will go.
Opening and closing
Locking/unlocking centrally using the

buttons
X To unlock: press and hold button : for

approximately one second.
Indicator lamp = flashes. The driver's door is
unlocked.
X Press and hold button : for approximately
one second once more.
Indicator lamp = flashes. The co-driver's
door is unlocked.
i The vehicle locks again automatically if you
do not open a door within 25 seconds of X Close both doors.
unlocking the vehicle normally. X To lock centrally: press button :.
X To lock: close the doors. X To unlock centrally: press button ;.
X Press and hold button ; for approximately You can open a door from inside the vehicle
one second. even if it has been locked.
Indicator lamp = flashes. Both doors are
locked.
Mowing door lock
Interior door lock
Locking/unlocking using the door handle
G WARNING
If you are standing on the surface of the mow-
ing door frame when opening it, the door
could swing open, causing you to fall. There is
a risk of injury.
Remove your foot from the surface of the
mowing door frame before opening the door.
! Only open the mowing door when traffic

conditions allow you to do so. Ensure that
there is enough clearance when opening the
mowing door. You may otherwise damage
X Close both doors. your vehicle or other vehicles.
X To lock: push release lever : downwards in
the direction of arrow =.
Vehicles without central locking: the corre-
sponding door is locked.
Locking system 53
Exterior door lock Remote control batteries

Checking the batteries
Opening and closing

X Insert the key in position g.
X Close the door.
X To lock: turn the key to the left to position 1 X Press button : or ;.
when the door is closed. If indicator lamp = flashes, the batteries are
The mowing door is locked. functioning correctly. If the remote control is
within the receiver range of the vehicle, the
X To unlock: turn the key clockwise to position
vehicle is unlocked or locked accordingly.
2.
The mowing door is unlocked. If indicator lamp = lights up once only, the
batteries are empty. The vehicle can then no
X To open: remove the key and pull the door
longer be locked or unlocked with the remote
handle in the direction of the arrow. control.
X Replace the batteries (Y page 53).
Interior door lock Batteries may be obtained in any qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Replacing the batteries

G WARNING
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-
ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in
severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal
injury.
Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If
a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention
immediately.
Batteries and rechargeable
batteries contain pollutants.
X Use grab handles :, door frame surface A It is illegal to dispose of them
and the steps underneath the mowing door to as household rubbish. They
enter or exit. must be collected separately
X To lock: push release lever ; downwards in and recycled in an environ-
the direction of arrow ?.
X To unlock and open: push release lever ;
upwards in the direction of arrow =.
Z
54 Locking system
mentally responsible man-

ner.
Dispose of batteries and
rechargeable batteries in an
environmentally responsible
manner. Take discharged
batteries or faulty recharge-
able batteries to a qualified
Opening and closing
specialist workshop or to a
collection facility for used
batteries.
X Press and hold button : or ; for five sec-
onds.
X Briefly press button : or ; again within
three seconds..
The remote control has been taught in and is
ready for use.
Electronic immobiliser
Notes about the immobiliser
The engine can only be started using the keys
coded to the vehicle.
X Prise open remote control :, e.g. by insert-
ing a screwdriver in the direction of the arrow
in the slot. Deactivating the immobiliser
X Remove batteries ;. X Apply the parking brake.
X Use a lint-free cloth to clean new batteries ;. X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the igni-
X Push both batteries ; with the positive tion lock.
pole (+) facing downwards into battery carrier The immobiliser is deactivated after approx-
=. imately one second and the engine can be
X Press both halves of the housing together started.
until they engage.
i If you do not wait for one second, the immo-
Use two CR 1620 type batteries. biliser is not deactivated. The engine cannot
be started. At the same time, the status indi-
Teaching-in the remote control cator lights up yellow.
If central locking no longer works after replacing Activating the immobiliser

the batteries, you must teach in the remote con-
trol again. X Apply the parking brake.
X Turn the key to position g in the ignition
lock.
X Remove the key from the ignition lock.
The immobiliser is now activated.
Side windows 55
Getting into and out of the vehicle Side windows

G WARNING
If you leave children unattended in the vehi- G WARNING
cle, they could set the vehicle in motion by, for When opening a side window, parts of the
example: body can drawn into or trapped between the
Rreleasing the parking brake side window and the window frame. There is a
risk of injury.
Opening and closing

Rshifting the transmission into neutral
Rstarting the engine
Make sure that nobody is touching the side
window before you open it. If someone
They could also operate the vehicle's equip- becomes trapped, release the switch or press
ment and become trapped. There is a risk of the upper section of the switch to close the
an accident and injury. side window again.
with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave G WARNING
children unattended in the vehicle. While closing the side windows, body parts in
the closing area could become trapped. There
is a risk of injury.
When closing make sure that no parts of the
body are in the closing area. If somebody
becomes trapped, release the switch or press
the switch to open the side window again.
G WARNING
If you leave children unattended in the vehi-
cle, they could set the vehicle in motion by, for
example:
Rreleasing the parking brake
Rstarting the engine
They could also operate the vehicle's equip-
Getting into and out of the vehicle (example: left- ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
hand door) an accident and injury.
X Make sure that protective grid ; is closed When leaving the vehicle, always take the key
(Y page 269). with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave
X Keep grab handles :, steps = and your own children unattended in the vehicle.
footwear free of dirt (e.g. mud, snow and ice).
X Vehicles with a suspension seat: use the
EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (Y page 59).
X All vehicles: use grab handles : and steps
= when getting in and out of the vehicle.
Z
56 Rear window
Opening/closing the side windows

Opening and closing
: Side window (left)

; Side window (right)
X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or 2
in the ignition lock.
X To open: press and hold button ? until the
side window is in the desired position.
X To close: press and hold button = until the
side window is in the desired position.
Rear window
X To open: press locking button ; and using

handle : push the rear window into the
desired position.
X To close: push the rear window closed using
handle : until the locking button engages.
Seats 57
Useful information G WARNING

The seat belt does not offer the intended level
These Operating Instructions describe all the of protection if you have not moved the back-
models and standard and optional equipment of rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-
going to print. Country-specific differences are ing or in the event of an accident, you could
possible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not slide underneath the seat belt and sustain
be equipped with all the functions described. abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This
This also applies to safety-relevant systems and poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal
functions. injury.
Read the information on qualified specialist Adjust the seat properly before beginning
Driver's workstation
your journey. Always ensure that the backrest
is in an almost vertical position and that the
shoulder section of your seatbelt is routed
Seats
across the centre of your shoulder.
G WARNING
Your vehicle may be equipped with different
types of seats depending on the cab and the If the driver's seat is not correctly engaged, it
vehicle equipment: could unexpectedly move while driving. This
RStandard seat could cause you to lose control of the vehicle.
RSuspension seat There is a risk of an accident.
RSwivel seat Always ensure that the driver's seat is
RDouble co-driver's seat engaged before starting the vehicle.
Information on seat cleaning can be found in the
"Cleaning and care" section (Y page 253). G WARNING
G WARNING The head restraints cannot provide the inten-
ded protection unless they are fitted and
You could lose control of the vehicle while adjusted correctly. There is an increased risk
driving if you: of injury to the head and neck in the event of
Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or an accident or sudden braking, for example.
mirrors Always drive with the head restraints fitted.
Rfasten the seat belt Ensure that the centre of the head restraints
There is a risk of an accident. support the back of each vehicle occupant's
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- head at eye level before driving off.
ing wheel and mirrors and fasten your seat
belt before starting the engine. G WARNING
If there is not enough clearance, the suspen-
G WARNING sion seat could trap body parts between the
When adjusting a seat, you or another vehicle steering wheel and the suspension seat.
occupant could become trapped by the guide There is a risk of injury.
rail of the seat, for instance. There is a risk of Ensure that there is enough clearance for the
injury. movements of the suspension seat. Before
Make sure that no one has any part of their getting out, lower the suspension seat com-
body within the sweep of the seat when pletely.
adjusting it.
Z
58 Seats
G WARNING Always have work on the seats performed at a

qualified specialist workshop.
If you push the suspension seat bellows
inwards, your hand could become trapped.
There is a risk of injury. Operating the seats
Do not push the bellows inwards.
Standard seat
! To prevent damage to the seats and the seat
heating, observe the following notes: Overview
RDo not pour any fluid on the seats. If fluid is
poured on the seats, dry it as quickly as
possible.
RIf the seat covers are damp or wet, do not

switch on the seat heating. Also, do not use
the seat heating to dry the seats.
RClean the seat covers as recommended;
see the "Cleaning and care" section.
RDo not transport any heavy loads on the
seats. Do not place any pointed objects on
the seat cushions, such as e.g. knives, nails
or tools. As far as possible, only use the
seats for people.
RWhen operating the seat heating, do not
cover the seats with insulating materials,
e.g. blankets, coats, bags, protective cov-
ers, child seats or booster seats.
! Ensure that no objects in the cab are block- X Make sure that the vehicle is at a complete
ing the seats. The seats could otherwise be standstill and cannot roll away.
damaged.
Your seat must be adjusted in such a way that Seat backrest
you can wear your seat belt correctly. Observe X Relieve pressure from the seat backrest.
the following points: X Pull lever : up and hold it.
RSet the seat backrest to a position as near to X Apply pressure to or relieve pressure from the
vertical as possible and sit as upright as pos- seat backrest in order to move it to the
sible. Never drive with the seat backrest desired position.
reclined too far back. X Release lever :.
RYour arms should be slightly bent when you
are holding the steering wheel. Seat height
RAvoid seat positions which do not allow a seat X Pull lever ; up and hold it.
belt to be routed correctly. The shoulder sec- X Apply pressure to or relieve pressure from the
tion of the belt must be routed across the seat in order to move it to the desired height.
centre of your shoulder and must be pulled
X Release lever ;.
tight against your upper body. The lap belt
must always be routed across your lap as low
as possible, i.e. across your hips.
Seat angle
RMaintain a distance to the pedals that allows X Pull lever = up and hold it.
you to depress them fully. X Apply pressure to or relieve pressure from the
Also observe the safety notes in the "Children in seat cushion or backrest in order to move it to
the vehicle" section (Y page 48). the desired position.
X Release lever =.
Do not use the seat as a climbing aid.
Seats 59
Seat fore-and-aft adjustment Seat fore-and-aft adjustment

X Pull lever ? up and hold it. X Pull lever E up and hold it.
X Push the seat forwards or backwards in order X Push the seat forwards or backwards in order
to move it into the desired position. to move it into the desired position.
X Release lever ? and engage the seat audibly. X Release lever E and engage the seat audibly.
Seat cushion depth

Suspension seat/luxury suspension
X Pull lever G up and hold it.
seat
X Push the seat cushion forwards or backwards
Overview in order to move it into the desired position.
X Release lever G and engage the seat cushion
audibly.
Seat armrests
X If necessary, fold up seat armrests D.
X Use the handwheel on the underside to set
the angle of seat armrests D.
Vibration damper
X Set the vibration damper using lever : to
prevent the seat from bottoming out.
Seat angle
X Pull lever ; up and hold it.
X Apply pressure to or relieve pressure from the
seat cushion or backrest in order to move it to
the desired position.
X Release lever ;.
X Make sure that the J warning lamp in the
instrument cluster is not lit. Seat height
The vehicle's compressed air system has suf-
ficient reservoir pressure. It is possible to X Pull lever = up or push it down to the desired
carry out all possible seat adjustments. level.
X Make sure that the vehicle is at a complete
The seat rises or lowers.
standstill and cannot roll away.
EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature
Seat backrest Always use the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature when
X Relieve pressure from the seat backrest. getting out of the vehicle.
X Pull lever C up and hold it. X Push lever ? downwards.
The seat is lowered completely.
X Pull lever ? upwards.
seat backrest in order to move it to the
desired position. The seat returns to the previously set height.
X Release lever C.
Seat suspension
X Set lever F to the right.
The seat suspension can move freely.
X Set lever F to the left.
The seat suspension is locked.
Z
60 Seats
Lumbar support Seat angle

X Lower lumbar support: press the upper or X Pull lever C up and hold it.
lower section of switch A. X Apply pressure to or relieve pressure from the
The lower lumbar support is increased or seat cushion in order to move it to the desired
decreased. position.
X Upper lumbar support: press the upper or X Release lever C.
lower section of switch B.
The upper lumbar support is increased or Seat suspension
decreased. X Push lever : back.
The seat suspension is deactivated.
Swivel seat X Push lever : forwards.
The seat suspension is activated.

Overview
Seat cushion depth
X Pull lever D up and hold it.
X Push the seat cushion forwards or backwards
in order to move it into the desired position.
X Release lever D.
Seat height
X Pull lever E up or push it down.
The seat rises or lowers.
Seat fore-and-aft adjustment

X Pull lever F up and hold it.
X Push the seat forwards or backwards in order
to move it into the desired position.
X Release lever F and engage the seat audibly.
Swivelling the seat

X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the X Pull lever G up.
ignition lock. X Swivel the seat until it is in the desired posi-
It is possible to carry out all possible seat tion.
adjustments. X Release lever G.
X Make sure that the vehicle is at a complete The lever must engage audibly.
Adjusting the head restraints
X Pull lever H up and hold it.
X Pull head restraint A up or push it down to X Push the seat forwards or backwards in order
the desired height. to move it into the desired position.
X Push head restraint A back or pull it forwards
X Release lever H and engage the seat audibly.
to the desired angle.
Seat armrests
X If necessary, fold up seat armrests B.
X Use the handwheel on the underside to set
the angle of seat armrests B.
Seats 61
Lumbar support Double co-driver's seat

X Lower lumbar support: press the upper or
lower section of switch ?. Overview
The lower lumbar support is increased or
decreased.
X Upper lumbar support: press the upper or
lower section of switch =.
The upper lumbar support is increased or
decreased.
Seat backrest
X Relieve pressure from the seat backrest.
seat backrest in order to move it to the
desired position.
X Release lever ;.
Removing the head restraints
Adjusting the head restraints

X Pull head restraint : up or push it down to
the desired height.

X Push the double co-driver's seat forwards or
backwards into the desired position.
X Release lever ; and engage the double co-
driver's seat audibly.
Removing the head restraints
X Press and hold release catches ; in the

direction of the arrow.
X Pull head restraint : up and out with a single
movement.
X Press and hold release catches ; under the

upholstery.
X Pull head restraint : up and out with a single
movement.
Z
62 Adjusting the multifunction steering wheel
Seat heating X To switch on: press switch B.

Indicator lamp A lights up.
General notes X To switch off: press switch = until switch B
is in the centre position.
! Observe the following instructions; you Indicator lamp A goes out.
could otherwise damage the seat heating:
Rdo not leave any objects on the seat.
Rdo not cover the seat, e.g. with a towel or Adjusting the multifunction steering
cushion. wheel
Rif the co-driver's seat is not occupied,
switch the seat heating off on the co-driv-
er's side. G WARNING
Rif the engine is not running, switch the seat The steering wheel may move unexpectedly if
heating off on the driver's and the co-driv- you adjust it while driving. This could cause
er's side. you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a
risk of an accident.
Make sure that the steering wheel is locked
before driving off. Never unlock the steering
wheel when the vehicle is in motion.
: Seat heating (left seat)

; Seat heating (right seat)
The seat heating does not switch off automati-
cally in the event of overheating.
X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the
ignition lock. Adjustment for the multifunction steering wheel
is only available in left-hand-drive vehicles with-
Normal heating mode out dual-mode steering.
X Make sure that the J warning lamp in the
X To switch on: press switch =. instrument cluster is not lit.
Indicator lamp ? lights up. The vehicle's compressed air system has suf-
X To switch off: press switch B until switch = ficient reservoir pressure. The multifunction
is in the centre position. steering wheel can be adjusted.
Indicator lamp ? goes out. X Make sure that the vehicle is at a complete
Rapid heating mode X Press button ;.
The steering wheel unlocks.
! When the engine is switched off, do not X Adjust the steering wheel height and angle.
switch on the rapid heating function for any X Press button :.
longer than necessary. The steering wheel locks.
Otherwise, the batteries could discharge. i The steering wheel locks automatically
approximately ten seconds after it is
unlocked.
Exterior mirrors 63
Dual-mode steering X Swing release lever = up as far as it will go.

Vehicles with Telligent® automatic gearshift:
Important safety notes the clutch pedal folds in upwards. Automatic
drive program A is selected.
G WARNING X Release button ?.
If the dual-mode steering is unlocked while The dual-mode steering is unlocked.
the vehicle is in motion, it could move unex- X Make sure that the steering wheel does not
pectedly. This could cause you to lose control turn.
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. i If the dual-mode steering is unlocked, the
Before the journey, make sure that the dual- steering wheel is lightly secured to prevent it
from turning. However, if the steering wheel
mode steering is locked. Never unlock the does turn, it needs to be turned back by the
dual-mode steering when the vehicle is in corresponding number of locking points. If
motion. the steering wheel turns by more than 1 rota-
tion, the electrical functions in the steering
wheel may fail.
Changing the steering position X Position the dual-mode steering to the right-
hand or left-hand steering position.
X Gently press release lever = downwards,
whilst moving the steering wheel to and fro
with short steering movements.
The teeth must engage.
X Push release lever = until it engages.
X Align the bottom of trim ; with the guides,
then push the upper section inwards until
trim ; engages.
i If release lever = has engaged and trim ;
is fitted, you can start the engine.
Exterior mirrors
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
G WARNING
The exterior mirrors reduce the size of the
image. Objects visible in the mirrors are
closer than they appear. You could misjudge
the distance from road users driving behind
Example: dual-mode steering, vehicles with Telli- you when changing lanes, for instance. There
gent® automatic gearshift is a risk of an accident.
X Set the wheels to the straight-ahead position. You should therefore always look over your
X Make sure that the vehicle is at a complete shoulder to determine the actual distance
standstill and cannot roll away. from road users driving behind you.
X Make sure that the key is in position g in the
ignition lock or removed. An incorrectly adjusted exterior mirror may
X Pull out and remove trim ; using handles :. impair visibility. For this reason, always check
X Press and hold button ?. the position of the exterior mirrors on the vehi-
cle before starting a journey.
Z
64 Exterior mirrors
Adjusting X "Driver right" seat position k: position

the right-hand mirror arm in front detent 1.
X Kerb and wide-angle mirror: adjust the kerb X Position the left-hand mirror arm in rear
and wide-angle mirrors by hand. detent 3.
Exterior mirror heating

X Left and right exterior mirrors: make sure

that the key is in position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
X Turn switch : to position 1 for the left-hand
exterior mirror or to position 2 for the right- X To switch on: make sure that the engine is
hand exterior mirror. running.
X Press switch : forwards or backwards, right X Press button :.
or left, until the exterior mirror is correctly set. Indicator lamp ; lights up.
X To switch off: press button =.
Indicator lamp ; goes out.
Adjusting the mirror arm on vehicles In damp or cold weather, use the mirror heating
with dual-mode steering to keep the exterior mirrors demisted and free of
ice. The kerb mirror is not heated.
Depending on the vehicle version, your vehicle Vehicles with mowing door: when mirror
either has no detent, or has a dual detent on the heating is active, the panorama window in the
mirror arms. If the mirror arms do not have a mowing door is also heated. The additional mir-
dual detent, you can adjust the exterior mirrors ror is not heated.
electrically (Y page 63).
Additional mirror, vehicles with mow-

ing door
General notes
There is an additional mirror for vehicles with a
mowing door and swivel seat. The additional
mirror can be attached to the right side of the
front bumper for working at the side of the vehi-
cle.
When working at the side of the vehicle, the
Mirror arms with dual detents additional mirror considerably improves the
driver's rear view.
X "Driver left" seat position l: position the
left-hand mirror arm in front detent 4.
X Position the right-hand mirror arm in rear
detent 2.
Lighting system 65
Folding down the additional mirror Switching headlamp settings
Additional mirror (example: vehicles without auxil-
iary headlamps)
If you need to open/close or fit/detach the front
flap, you must fold down additional mirror =.
X Pull out hand rail ; by ball coupling :.
X Swing mirror holder A downwards ?.
X Carefully release handrail ;.
Lighting system
Driving abroad d Asymmetrical dipped-beam headlamps
e Symmetrical dipped-beam headlamps
Halogen headlamps X Unscrew cover ;.
X Remove covering cap = from dipped-beam/
General notes
main-beam headlamp :.
When driving in countries in which traffic drives X Turn setting screw ? a Õ revolution clock-
on the opposite side of the road to the country wise.
where the vehicle is registered, you must switch
the halogen headlamps to symmetrical dipped X Insert covering cap =.
beam. This prevents oncoming traffic from X Screw on cover ;.
being dazzled. Symmetrical dipped-beam head- Convert the headlamps back to the asymmetri-
lamps do not illuminate as large an area of the cal dipped-beam setting as soon as possible
edge of the carriageway. You should make the after returning across the border.
adjustment as close as possible to the border
before crossing it.
Bi-xenon headlamps
If your vehicle is equipped with bi-xenon head-
lamps, the inscription "bi-xenon" is featured on
the headlamp glass.
You must switch the bi-xenon headlamps to
symmetrical dipped-beam when driving in coun-
tries where vehicles drive on the opposite side
of the road to the country in which the vehicle is
registered. This prevents oncoming traffic from
being dazzled. Symmetrical dipped-beam head-
lamps do not illuminate as large an area of the
edge of the carriageway. You must have the
conversion performed at a qualified specialist
Z
66 Lighting system
workshop and as close as possible to the border When parking lamps or dipped-beam headlamps
before crossing it. are switched on, the warning buzzer sounds if
you open the driver's door and:
Rthe key is in position g in the ignition lock
Light switch Rthe key is removed from the ignition lock
Dipped-beam headlamps
G WARNING X Turn the light switch to the L position.
The rear exterior lighting is concealed when The dipped-beam headlamps and side lamps
the tailgate is opened. This could cause other are switched on. The T indicator lamp in
road users to fail to recognise the vehicle in the instrument cluster lights up.
time. There is a risk of an accident. The dipped-beam headlamps are asymmetrical.

Make sure that the vehicle is safeguarded at For this reason, in countries where vehicles
drive on the other side of the road to the country
the rear in accordance with national legal where the vehicle is registered, there is a danger
requirements, e.g. with a warning triangle. of oncoming traffic being dazzled. Switch head-
lamps when driving in these countries
Overview (Y page 65).
Daytime driving lights

ignition lock.
X Turn the light switch to position $.
The daytime driving lights are switched on.
or
X Vehicles with rain and light sensor: turn
the light switch to position c.
When the dipped-beam headlamps and side
lamps are switched off automatically, the day-
time driving lights are switched on.
Light switch
When you turn the light switch to the L posi-
1 c Automatic headlamp mode and day-
tion, the daytime driving lights are switched off.
time driving lights, vehicles with rain
and light sensor
2$ Lights off/daytime driving lights Automatic headlamp mode and daytime
3T Side/tail lamps, licence plate lighting driving lights, vehicles with rain and
and perimeter/side marker lamps light sensor
4L Dipped-beam headlamps or main-
beam headlamps G WARNING
5N Foglamps When the light switch is set to c, the
6Q Rear foglamp dipped-beam headlamps do not switch on
The light switch can be used to switch the vehi- automatically if there is fog, snow or other
cle lighting on or off. The main-beam headlamps causes of poor visibility such as spray. There
and the headlamp flasher are operated using the is a risk of an accident.
combination switch (Y page 67). In such situations, turn the light switch to
L.
The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid.

The driver is responsible for the vehicle lighting
at all times.
Lighting system 67
When it is dark or foggy, turn the light switch accordance with the load on your vehicle. The
from c to L in good time. The headlamps angle of the headlamp beams changes if the
may otherwise be switched off temporarily. seats are occupied or if the vehicle is loaded or
X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the unloaded. This can impair visibility and dazzle
ignition lock. oncoming traffic.
X Turn the light switch to position c. X Switch on the dipped-beam headlamps
The dipped-beam headlamps and side lamps (Y page 66).
are switched on or off automatically depend- X Turn headlamp range control : to the
ing on light conditions. When the dipped- desired position. The road should be illumi-
beam headlamps are switched on, the L nated from 40 to 100 m and the dipped-beam
indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights headlamps must not dazzle oncoming vehi-
up. cles.
When the dipped-beam headlamps and side For an unladen vehicle, use position g or 1
lamps are switched off automatically, the day- depending on the vehicle body.
time driving lights switch on.
i If the rain/light sensor is malfunctioning,
the side lamps and dipped-beam headlamps Combination switch
are automatically switched on and remain on.
Main-beam headlamps/headlamp
Foglamps and rear foglamps flasher
X Turn the light switch to the T or L
position.
X To switch on the foglamps: pull the light
switch out to position 4.
The foglamps and the N foglamp indicator
lamp next to the light switch light up.
X To switch on the front and rear foglamps:
pull the light switch out to position 5.
The front foglamps, rear foglamps and the
N foglamp and the Q rear foglamp indi-
cator lamps next to the light switch light up.
i If the vehicle only has a rear foglamp, turn
the light switch to the L position and pull X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the
the light switch out one level. ignition lock.
X To switch on the main-beam headlamps:
switch on the L dipped-beam headlamps
Headlamp range control (Y page 66).
X Push the combination switch in the direction
of arrow ; and engage.
The K indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up.
X To use the headlamp flasher: briefly pull the
combination switch in the direction of
arrow :.
The K indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster and the main-beam headlamps light
up briefly.
The headlamp range control is used to adapt the

downward angle of the headlamp beams in
Z
68 Lighting system
Turn signal lamps Hazard warning lamps

X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the X To switch on: press button :.
ignition lock. All turn signals flash.
X To indicate right: push the combination If you switch on turn signal lamps using the
switch upwards : and engage. combination switch (Y page 68), the turn sig-
The right-hand turn signal lamps and the . nals only flash on the corresponding side of
indicator lamp in the instrument cluster flash. the vehicle.
The combination switch returns to its original X To switch off: press button : again.
position automatically after large steering
movements.
or
Interior lighting
X To indicate left: push the combination
switch downwards ; and engage.
The left-hand turn signal lamps and the ,
indicator lamp in the instrument cluster flash.
The combination switch returns to its original
position automatically after large steering
movements.
X To indicate briefly: when overtaking or
changing lane, press the combination switch
briefly in the desired direction, indicate
right : or indicate left ;.
The appropriate turn signal lamps and
the , or . indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster flash 5 times. : Switch
X To cancel brief indicating: press the com- 1 To switch on the reading lamp
bination switch briefly in the opposite direc- 2 To switch the interior lighting off/reading
tion, indicate right : or indicate left ;. lamp off
The appropriate turn signal lamps and 3 To switch the automatic control on/reading
the , or . indicator lamp in the instru- lamp off
ment cluster flash. 4 To switch the interior lighting on/switch the
automatic control off/switch reading lamp
off
X To switch on automatic control of the
interior lighting: put switch : into position
3.
When you open one of the front doors, the
interior lighting switches on or off automati-
cally.
Lighting system 69
Exterior lighting control
X To switch on: press button :.
Indicator lamp ; in the button lights up.
X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and X To switch off: press button : again.
that the parking brake is applied. Indicator lamp ; in the button goes out.
X Make sure that the transmission is in neutral.
The working-area lamps switch off once the
X To switch on: press button :.
vehicle reaches a certain speed.
Indicator lamp ; in the button lights up. The
lights of the entire exterior lighting system are
switched on and off consecutively. The func- Adjusting the working area lamps
tion switches off automatically after 30
cycles.
X Check the operation of the exterior lighting
and replace bulbs where necessary
(Y page 72).
X To switch off: press button : again.
Indicator lamp ; in the button goes out.
Working-area lamps
Switching the working-area lamp
on/off X Unscrew nut ;.
X Turn working-area lamps : to the desired
G WARNING position.
If you use the working-area lamp on public X Tighten nut ;.
roads, other road users may be dazzled. There
is a risk of an accident.
Only use the working-area lamps when on Auxiliary headlamps
public roads while working. Make sure that no
General notes
other road users are dazzled.
The auxiliary headlamps may be used if the main
headlamps are blocked by attached equipment.
Observe the relevant legal requirements for
each country.
Z
70 Lighting system
Adjusting the fixed auxiliary headlamps Adjusting height-adjustable auxiliary

headlamps
A Distance = 15 m
B Light/dark boundary When the main headlamps are covered by
H Height of the auxiliary headlamp centre attached equipment, you can adjust the height
N% Angle of the light/dark boundary of auxiliary headlamp : on rail ;.
X Slightly loosen nut ; on auxiliary head- Area (D): auxiliary headlamp : is attached to
lamp :. bracket = at hole A.
X Switch on auxiliary headlamp : Area (C): auxiliary headlamp : is attached to
(Y page 71). bracket = at hole ?.
X Adjust auxiliary headlamp :.
The light/dark boundary (B) at a distance (A)
of 15 m in front of the auxiliary headlamps
may only be half as high as the installation
height (H) of the auxiliary headlamps. The
installation height (H) is measured from the
ground to the centre of the auxiliary head-
lamps (H).
Example of adjustment height:
Light/dark boundary (B) at 15 m = 1.00 m
Light/dark boundary (B) at
5 m = approx. 1.67 m
1/3 of the installation height, measured at
5 m, yields the light/dark boundary (B) with
dipped-beam headlamps.
X Tighten nut ; on auxiliary headlamp :.
Lighting system 71
X Hold auxiliary headlamp :. Example: setting the auxiliary headlamps
X Unscrew screw B. X Slightly loosen nut D on auxiliary head-
X Remove bracket C. lamp :.
X Position auxiliary headlamp : on bar ; in X Switch on auxiliary headlamp :
the desired position in area (D) or (C). (Y page 71).
X Hook bracket C into mounting =. X Adjust auxiliary headlamp :.
X Turn auxiliary headlamp : until the pin on The light/dark boundary (B) at a distance (A)
bracket C is fixed in the desired hole on of 15 m in front of the auxiliary headlamps
bar ;. may only be half as high as the installation
X Attach screw B and tighten. height (H) of the auxiliary headlamps. The
installation height (H) is measured from the
X Adjustment range in area (C): hold auxiliary
ground to the centre of the auxiliary head-
headlamp :. lamps (H).
X Unscrew nut D and remove the washers.
Example of adjustment height:
X Remove the auxiliary headlamp from bracket
Light/dark boundary (B) at 15 m = 1.00 m
=.
Light/dark boundary (B) at
X Insert the thread of auxiliary headlamp :
5 m = approx. 1.67 m
into hole ?.
1/3 of the installation height, measured at
X Slide on the washers, attach nut D and
5 m, yields the light/dark boundary (B) with
tighten. dipped-beam headlamps.
X Tighten nut D on auxiliary headlamp :.
Switching the auxiliary headlamps

on/off
Example: auxiliary headlamp
X Check the setting of the auxiliary headlamps

before the start of a journey, adjust the fixed
auxiliary headlamps (Y page 70), adjust the
Z
72 Lighting system
height-adjustable auxiliary headlamps Adjusting the stand height

(Y page 70).
X To switch on: make sure that the key is in ! If you extend the stand, always observe the
position 2 in the ignition lock. change in vehicle height, e.g. if you drive
through an underpass or in a multi-storey car
X Switch on the dipped-beam headlamps
park. The vehicle or building may be dam-
(Y page 66). aged. Lower the stand in good time.
X Press switch :.
The é indicator lamp in the status area of
the on-board computer lights up. The side
lamps, dipped-beam headlamps and main-
beam headlamps are only available on the
auxiliary headlamps. The daytime driving
lights are switched off, but the dipped-beam

headlamps in the auxiliary headlamps are
switched on automatically instead.
X To switch off: press switch ;.
The é indicator lamp in the status area of
the on-board computer goes out.
Example: stand
X Hold stand :.
Strobe lights
X Loosen wing nut ;.
Switching the strobe lights on/off X Move stand : to the desired height.
X Tighten wing nut ;.
Notes on replacing light bulbs

G WARNING
Bulbs, lamps and plug connectors can
become very hot during use. When replacing a
bulb, you could burn yourself on these com-
ponents. There is a risk of injury.
Allow these components to cool down before
X To switch on: press switch :. replacing the bulb.
Indicator lamp ; in the switch lights up. The
À indicator lamp in the status area of the G DANGER
on-board computer lights up.
Xenon bulbs are under high voltage. You can
X To switch off: press switch =.
get an electric shock if you remove the cover
Indicator lamp ; in the switch goes out. The
À indicator lamp in the status area of the of the xenon bulb and touch the electrical
on-board computer goes out. contacts. There is a risk of fatal injury.
When operating the vehicle with the strobe Never touch the parts or the electrical con-
lights, observe the applicable national regula- tacts of the xenon bulb. Always have work on
tions for the relevant country. If the required the xenon bulbs carried out at a qualified spe-
field of vision is obscured by trailers, special cialist workshop.
bodies or other attachments, make the vehicle
safe by using additional lights. ! Make sure bulbs are positioned securely.
Lighting system 73
If your vehicle is equipped with bi-xenon head- RDo not use a bulb if it has been dropped or if
lamps, the inscription "bi-xenon" is featured on its glass has been scratched. The bulb could
the headlamp glass. explode. You could be injured by shards of
Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of glass from a broken bulb.
vehicle safety. You must therefore ensure that RKeep bulbs out of the reach of children.
all bulbs are functioning at all times. The exterior RTest the contacts for corrosion and clean
lighting control assists you while checking the them if necessary.
bulbs (Y page 69). RCheck that all seals are positioned correctly,
RIn order to avoid a short circuit: and replace damaged seals.
- switch off the lights before changing a bulb RIf the new bulb does not light up, consult a
and qualified specialist workshop.
- turn the key to position g in the ignition
ROnly use bulbs in closed lamps designed for
lock the purpose.
RWear eye protection and gloves when remov- RProtect bulbs from moisture when in use and
ing defective bulbs. do not allow them to come into contact with
RDirt on the glass bulb reduces the operating liquids.
life of the bulb. Do not hold the glass bulb with RHave the headlamp setting checked regularly.
your bare hands. If necessary, clean the glass RHave the following bulbs replaced at a quali-
bulb with alcohol or spirit while it is cold and fied specialist workshop:
wipe with a lint-free cloth.
- bi-xenon bulbs
ROnly hold bulbs with a clean, lint-free cloth or
- LED daytime running lamp
a similar item. Do not perform this work with
wet or greasy fingers. - navigation lights in the LED daytime run-
RAlways replace defective bulbs with the speci- ning lamp
fied new bulbs, i.e. those with the correct - LED strobe lights
wattage and voltage.
Overview of bulbs
Always carry bulbs in your vehicle for each type of lamp in case of an emergency.
Headlamps Main-beam/dipped-beam H7 24 V 70 W
headlamps
Daytime driving lamps Daytime driving lights 24 V 21 W
Side lamps LED
Turn signal lamps, brake lamps, reversing 24 V 21 W
lamp, rear foglamp
Fixed auxiliary headlamps Main-beam/dipped-beam H4 24 V
headlamps 70/75 W
Side lamps 24 V 4 W
Turn signals, clear 24 V 21 W
Height-adjustable auxiliary headlamps Main-beam headlamps H3 24 V 70 W
Dipped-beam headlamps H7 24 V 70 W
Side lamps 24 V 4 W
Turn signals, yellow 24 V 21 W
Z
74 Lighting system
Auxiliary headlamps on the roof Main-beam headlamps LED

Perimeter/side marker lamps Perimeter lamps, on the upper 24 V 5 W
sides of the cab
Perimeter/side marker lamps, 24 V 10 W
rear, in the tail lamp
Additional turn signal lamps Side 24 V 21 W
Tail lamps, licence plate lamps 24 V 10 W
Working area lamps/front foglamps H3 24 V 70 W
Strobe lights LED

Interior lamps Interior light 24 V 10 W
Reading lamp LED
Courtesy lights 24 V 5 W
Replacing light bulbs Dipped-beam/main-beam headlamps
Headlamps, front turn signal lamps

Overview
X Turn socket ; anti-clockwise in the direction

of arrow : as far as it will go.
X Pull out socket ;.
X Pull out bulb ? from socket ;. If necessary,
: Daytime driving lights
prise bulb ? out of socket ; at the base
; Cover using a suitable object (arrow A).
= Turn signal lamps X Insert new bulb ? in such a way that the
? Dipped-beam/main-beam headlamps recess in the base fits into lug = of
A Foglamps socket ;.
Daytime driving lights, turn signal lamps, X Push new bulb ? into socket ; as far as it
dipped-beam/main-beam headlamps: will go.
X Before replacing bulbs: unscrew cover ;. X Insert socket ; into the housing and turn it
clockwise, in the opposite direction to that
X After replacing bulbs: screw on cover ;.
indicated by arrow :, as far as it will go.
Lighting system 75
Daytime driving lights Front foglamps
X Turn socket : anti-clockwise in the direction X Remove rubber grommet =.
of the arrow as far as it will go. X Press locking spring ? down, forwards and
X Pull out socket :. to the right.
X Applying light pressure, turn bulb ; anti- The locking spring is released.
clockwise and remove it. X Fold locking spring ? upwards.
X Insert new bulb ; and turn it clockwise, X Remove bulb A.
applying light pressure. X Disconnect cable connector :.
X Insert socket : into the housing and turn it
X Disconnect electrical connection ; of bulb
clockwise, in the opposite direction to that A.
indicated by the arrow, as far as it will go.
X Connect electrical connection ; of new bulb
Turn signal lamps A.
X Attach it to cable connector :.
X Insert new bulb A. When doing this, the
round recess of the socket (arrow) must be
facing upwards.
X Fold locking spring ? downwards and hook it
in place.
X Slide rubber grommet = upwards.
Fixed auxiliary headlamps
X Turn socket : anti-clockwise in the direction

of the arrow as far as it will go.
X Pull out socket :.
X Applying light pressure, turn bulb ; anti-
clockwise and remove it.
X Insert new bulb ; and turn clockwise, apply-
ing light pressure.
X Insert socket : into the housing and turn it
clockwise, in the opposite direction to that
indicated by the arrow, as far as it will go. X To remove: remove screws ;.
X Remove front headlamp unit :.
Z
76
Driver's workstation Lighting system
X Turn signal lamp: gently turn bulb = anti- X Side lamps: remove base C with both cable
clockwise and remove it. connectors and, if necessary, turn the base
X Insert new bulb = and turn it clockwise, slightly to do so.
applying light pressure. X Turn the bulb anti-clockwise, applying light
pressure, and remove it.
X Insert the new bulb and turn it clockwise,
applying light pressure.
X To fit: check that seal D is positioned cor-

rectly.
X Main-beam/dipped-beam headlamps:
remove cable connector B from bulb ?.
X Lift left and right locking springs A and fold
them outwards.
X Remove bulb ?.
X Insert new bulb ? in such a way that its base
fits into the recess of the socket.
X Lift left and right locking springs A and fold
them inwards onto the base of the bulb.
X Attach cable connector B to bulb ?.
X Attach front headlamp unit : and fasten

screws ;.
X Adjust the auxiliary headlamp (Y page 70).
Lighting system 77
Height-adjustable auxiliary headlamps X Side lamps: pull out socket ?.

X Applying light pressure, turn bulb A anti-
X Insert new bulb A and turn it clockwise,
X Push socket ? into the headlamp unit.
X To remove: unscrew the four screws to
remove frame ;.
X Remove front headlamp unit :.
X Main beam: disconnect plug B.

X Press left-hand and right-hand safety springs
C together and swing upwards.
X Remove bulb D.
X Insert new bulb D into the socket in such a
way that its base fits into the recesses
(arrows).
C together and hook in.
X Connect plug B.
X Dipped beam: pull off both cable connec-
tors : on bulb ;.
= together and swing upwards.
X Remove bulb ;.
X Insert new bulb ; into the socket in such a
way that its base fits into the recess (arrow).
= together and hook in.
X Attach both cable connectors : to bulb ;.
X Turn signal lights: remove both cable con-

nectors F by socket E.
X Turn socket E anti-clockwise, in the direc-
tion of the arrow, as far as it will go.
X Remove socket E.
X Applying light pressure, turn bulb G anti-
X Insert new bulb G and turn it clockwise,
Z
78 Lighting system
X Insert socket E into the headlamp unit so Tail lamp

that the lugs (arrows) fit in the headlamp unit.
X Turn socket E clockwise, in the opposite
direction to that indicated by the arrow, as far
as it will go.
Tail lamp, right
X To fit: insert front headlamp unit :.

X Position frame ;, align screws and tighten.
X Adjust the auxiliary headlamp (Y page 70).
Side-mounted turn signal lamps
Tail lamp, left

: Screws
; Perimeter/side marker lamps
= Turn signal lamps
? Brake lamp
A Reversing lamp
B Rear lamps
C Rear foglamp
X Remove screws :. You cannot change bulbs for turn signal lamps,
X Remove turn signal lamp ;. tail lights, brake lights or perimeter lamps in
vehicles with LED modules. If necessary, have
X Remove seal = from the glass of the turn
these bulbs replaced at a qualified specialist
signal lamp. workshop.
X Applying light pressure, turn bulb ? anti-
X Remove screws :.
X Remove the lamp lens.
X Insert new bulb ? and turn clockwise, apply-
ing light pressure. X Turn the bulb anti-clockwise, applying light
X Place seal = onto the glass of the turn signal
pressure, and remove it.
lamp. X Insert the new bulb and turn it clockwise,
X Attach the turn signal lamp and tighten

screws :. Make sure that seal = is posi- X Attach the lamp lens.
tioned correctly. X Tighten screws :.
Lighting system 79
Licence plate lamp Exit lamp
The licence plate lamp is behind the reflector X Open the door.
unit. X Press out lens ; from recess (arrow :) with
X Remove screws :. a suitable screwdriver.
X Remove the lamp lens. X Press spring = on the cable connector down-
X Remove reflector units ; and ?. wards and remove the cable connector.
X Applying light pressure, turn bulb = anti- X Turn socket ? in the direction of arrow A as
clockwise and remove it. far as it will go and remove it.
X Insert new bulb = and turn it clockwise, X Pull out the bulb from socket ?.
applying light pressure. X Press a new bulb into socket ?.
X Insert reflector units ; and ?. X Insert socket ?.
X Attach the lamp lens. X Insert socket ? into the housing and turn it
X Tighten screws :. clockwise, in the opposite direction to that
indicated by arrow A, as far as it will go.
X Press spring = on the cable connector down-
Perimeter lamp wards and attach the cable connector.
X Align the bottom of lens ; and press inwards
until it engages.
Working-area lamps
X Remove screw ;.
X Swing housing : of the perimeter lamp out-
wards slightly and remove it.
X Applying light pressure, turn bulb = anti-
X Remove screws :.
X Insert new bulb = and turn it clockwise,
applying light pressure. X Remove headlamp unit ; of the working-
area lamp.
X Position housing : at the bottom using the
lug and swing it upwards. X Remove cable connectors = and ?.
X Tighten screws ;.
Z
80 Good visibility
X To release locking spring A, push it to the left wiper sweeps. This could then damage the
and swing it upwards. windscreen wiper blades or scratch the wind-
X Remove bulb B. screen.
X Insert new bulb B in such a way that the ! Do not operate the windscreen wipers when
recesses on the base fit into the socket. the windscreen is dry, as this could damage
X Fold locking spring A downwards and the wiper blades. Moreover, dust that has col-
engage it. lected on the windscreen can scratch the
X Attach both cable connectors = and ?. glass if wiping takes place when the wind-
X Insert headlamp unit ;.
screen is dry.
X Tighten bolts :.
If it is necessary to switch on the windscreen
wipers in dry weather conditions, always
operate them using washer fluid.
Interior lamp
! If the windscreen wipers leave smears on
the windscreen after the vehicle has been
washed in an automatic car wash, this may be
due to wax or other residue. Clean the wind-
screen with washer fluid after an automatic
car wash.
! Switch off the windscreen wipers before you
stop the engine. Otherwise, undesired wiper
sweeps could occur when starting the next
journey. This may damage the wiper blades or
windscreen, especially if the windscreen is
dirty or iced up.
The windscreen will no longer be wiped properly
X Press retaining spring A inwards from the if the wiper blades are worn or icy. This may
side with a suitable screwdriver (arrow :). prevent you from observing the traffic condi-
X Prise lens ; downwards and out of the tions. This can cause faults in vehicles with rain/
bracket. light sensors.
X Interior light: remove bulb = from the bulb
holder.
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder =.
X Reading lamp: remove LED ? from the bulb
holder.
X Insert the new LED into bulb holder ?.
X All: align lamp lens ; sideways on the lugs
and push it upwards until retaining spring A
engages.
Good visibility $ Windscreen wipers off

Ä Slow intermittent wipe or wiping with rain
Windscreen wipers sensor, in vehicles with rain/light sensor
Switching the windscreen wipers Å Fast intermittent wipe or wiping with rain
on/off sensor, in vehicles with rain/light sensor
° Slow wipe
! Vehicles with rain/light sensor: ¯ Rapid wipe
In dry weather conditions, switch the wind-
screen wipers off. Otherwise, dirt or optical
effects may cause undesired windscreen
Good visibility 81
X To switch on: make sure that the key is in X Make sure that the key is in position 1 in the
position 1 in the ignition lock. ignition lock.
X Temperatures below freezing: switch to the X Press switch :.
lateral end position of the windscreen wipers Indicator lamp ; in the switch lights up.
(Y page 81). The windscreen wipers move to the lateral
In this position, the risk of the wiper blades end position.
freezing to the windscreen is reduced. X Press switch =.
X Remove snow and ice from under the exterior Indicator lamp ; in the switch goes out.
visor using the window cleaner/scraper with The windscreen wipers move to the upper end
a telescopic pole (Y page 279). position.
X De-ice the wiper blades.
X Minor icing on the windscreen wipers:
briefly turn wiper switch : to the ¯ posi- Windscreen washer system
tion.
The wiper blades are de-iced.
X All temperatures: turn wiper switch : to
the appropriate setting depending on the
intensity of the rain.
Vehicles with rain and light sensor: if the
Ä or Å setting is used, an appropriate
wipe frequency is set according to rainfall. In the
Å position, the rain and light sensor is more
sensitive than in the Ä position, causing the
windscreen wipers to wipe more frequently. If
the rain and light sensor fails, the wiper auto-
matically switches to the wiping interval corre-
sponding to the position of the switch. X Make sure that the key is in position 1 in the
ignition lock.
Lateral end position of the windscreen X Single wipe: press switch : briefly.
wipers X To wipe the windscreen using washer
fluid: press and hold down switch :.
Depending on your requirements, you have the
option of putting the windscreen wipers in a lat-
eral position. This further improves your field of
vision. Headlamp cleaning system
You should also use this setting in cold weather
conditions. This reduces the risk of the wiper
blades freezing to the windscreen. This also
makes it easier to move the wiper blades if they
do freeze.
X To switch on: press and hold button :.

The headlamp cleaning system cleans the rel-
evant light projecting areas of the headlamp.
Z
82 Good visibility
i If you wash the windscreen with washer fluid

for the first time with the dipped-beam head-
lamps switched on (Y page 81), the head-
lamps are also cleaned. If you wash the wind-
screen with washer fluid ten times with the
dipped-beam headlamps switched on, the
headlamps are also cleaned once.
Mowing door windscreen wiper and

washer system
Windscreen wipers Centre console

X To wipe the windscreen using washer
fluid: press and hold down the : button.
Windscreen heating
X To switch on intermittent wipe: make sure

that the key is in position 2 in the ignition
lock.
X Press switch :.
X To switch off intermittent wipe: press
switch ;. If you only activate windscreen heating on one
side of the windscreen, that side will thaw out
Windscreen washer system quicker than the other.
X Make sure the engine is running.
X To switch on left-sided windscreen heat-
ing: press button :.
Indicator lamp ; in the button lights up.
After approx. 15 minutes the right side is acti-
vated automatically. Indicator lamp = in the
button lights up.
X To switch on right-sided windscreen heat-
ing: press button ?.
Indicator lamp = in the button lights up.
After approx. 15 minutes the left side is acti-
vated automatically. Indicator lamp ; in the
Mowing door button lights up.
X To switch off: press corresponding but-
ton : or ? again.
Corresponding indicator lamp ; or = in the
button goes out.
Power supply 83
Power supply
Battery isolator switch
General notes
! Vehicles with BlueTec® exhaust gas after-
treatment: do not disconnect the battery until
the engine has been switched off for at least
five minutes. This ensures that the exhaust
gas aftertreatment functions after restarting.
! Vehicles with auxiliary heating: during heat
output and the cooling-off period, the power Battery isolator switch, vehicles in accordance with
supply should only be disconnected, in the the Euromot 4 or Euro 5 standard
event of danger, using the battery isolator X Remove the key from the ignition lock and
switch. If the power supply is disconnected wait approximately five minutes.
during heat output, the cooling off period can-
X Vehicles with auxiliary heating: ensure
not be activated and this can damage the
auxiliary heating. You will find further infor- that the auxiliary heating is switched off and
mation in the "Auxiliary heating" section. the cooling off period is complete
(Y page 96).
X All vehicles: turn lever : of the battery iso-
Interrupting the voltage supply
lator switch to position g.
You can interrupt the voltage supply to all impor- All consumers are disconnected from the bat-
tant electrical consumers with the battery iso- teries, apart from the digital tachograph.
lator switch on the battery compartment. These X Pull out lever : of the battery isolator switch
are, for example, the vehicle lighting, anti-lock and attach the protective cap.
system, electric gearshift and CD radio.
Reconnecting the voltage supply
X Push in lever : of the battery isolator switch.
X Turn lever : of the battery isolator switch to
position 1.
All consumers may be switched on again.
X Deactivate the anti-theft protection of the CD
radio (Y page 133).
Sockets
Battery isolator switch, vehicles in accordance with 12 V socket in the centre console
the Euro 6 standard
Z
84 Power supply
You can use 12 V socket = for accessories, e.g. Service personnel can connect the correspond-
torches or cigarette lighters. The 12 V socket ing diagnostic testers to diagnostics connec-
can carry a maximum load of 180 W. tion : (Y page 30).
X To switch on the 12 V socket: press X Switch the 12 V socket on/off (Y page 83).
switch :.
Indicator lamp ; in the switch lights up. The Socket on the vehicle exterior
12 V socket on the centre console and on the
rear wall of the cab are switched on
(Y page 84).
X To switch off the 12 V socket: press
switch : again.
Indicator lamp ; in the switch goes out.
24 V socket in the centre console
: 24 V power socket for equipment, 7-pin

The equipment socket complies with
DIN EN 15431.
PIN Function
1 Earth connection
2 Tail lamp, left
You can use 24 V socket : for accessories, e.g.
torches or cigarette lighters. The 24 V socket 3 Turn signal, left
can carry a maximum load of 360 W. 4 Unassigned
ignition lock. 5 Turn signal, right
6 Tail lamp, right
Sockets on the cab rear wall 7 Unassigned
Equipment socket, 32-pin
: Diagnostics connection
; 12 V socket, 15 A, 3-pin with speed signal
= 24 V socket, 25 A, 3-pin with speed signal
The 3-pin sockets on the cab rear wall comply
with DIN EN 15431.
Features 85
X Fold swivel bar ; to the left. Stowage spaces and compartments

X Fold socket cap : of the 32-pin equipment
socket to the right. Important safety notes
Information on pin assignment and changing a
fuse can be found in the body/equipment
G WARNING
mounting directives in the Mercedes-Benz body If you transport objects in the vehicle interior
manufacturer portal: http://bb- and these are not adequately secured, they
portal.mercedes-benz.com could slip or be flung around and thereby
strike vehicle occupants. In addition, cup
Jump-start socket holders, open stowage spaces and mobile
phone brackets may not always be able to
hold the objects placed in them in the event of
an accident. There is a risk of injury, particu-
larly in the event of sharp braking or sudden
changes of direction.
RAlways stow objects in such a way that they
cannot be tossed about in these or similar
situations.
RAlways make sure that objects do not proj-
ect from stowage spaces, luggage nets or
stowage nets.
Jump-start socket : is under battery cover ;. REnsure that closable stowage spaces are
Even if the power supply is interrupted using the shut before beginning your journey.
battery isolator switch, jump-start socket : is
RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, poin-
not disconnected from the batteries. You will
find further information on jump-start socket : ted, sharp-edged, fragile or outsize objects
in the section on jump-starting (Y page 295). in the load compartment.
Stowage space
Features
Sun visors
: Stowage space in the centre console
X Fold sun visor : down in front.

X Move sun visor : into the desired position.
Z
86 Features
Luggage net
: Cup holder
: Luggage net behind the left-hand seat
Cup and bottle holder

G WARNING
Cup and bottle holders cannot hold liquid con-
tainers securely in place while you drive. If you
use cup or bottle holders while driving, con-
tainers could be flung around and liquids
could be spilled. Vehicle occupants may come
into contact with the liquid and, particularly, if Door (example: left side of the vehicle)
it is hot, they could be scalded. You could be ; Bottle holder
distracted from traffic conditions and you may
lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident and injury. Universal carrier in the centre con-
sole
Only use cup and bottle holders if the vehicle
is stationary. Only place suitable liquid con-
tainers in cup or bottle holders. Always close
containers, particularly if they contain hot liq-
uid.
! Only place suitable and sealable containers

in the cup and bottle holders. Otherwise the
drinks could spill.
Features 87
X Place the monitor/control unit in universal

carrier :.
X Pull lever ; in the direction of arrow B and
then turn upwards in the direction of
arrow ?.
X If the monitor/control unit is still not
fixed: push lever ; in the direction of arrow
A and then turn downwards in the direction
of arrow =.
X Pull lever ; in the direction of arrow B and
then turn upwards in the direction of
arrow ?.
X Open the left-hand door.
X To couple up: remove protective cap :.
Compressed air connection on the X Push the compressed-air hose into
cab compressed-air connection = and engage.
X To disconnect: push the compressed-air
G WARNING hose into compressed-air connection = and
If you clean the cab with compressed air, par- hold.
ticles are dispersed. These can enter or irri- X Slide back circlip ; and hold.
tate the eyes, nose, mouth and ears. There is X Remove the compressed-air hose from
a risk of injury. compressed-air connection = and release
circlip ;.
While cleaning the cab with compressed air, X Press on protective cap : until it engages.
always wear a dust protection mask, protec-
tive eyewear and ear protectors.
Changes the installation position of
G WARNING
the control lever and hydraulic sys-
The compressed-air connection on the cab is tem controls
under high pressure. If you aim the
compressed-air pistol towards body parts or
other people, eyes, ears or skin could be dam-
aged. There is a risk of injury.
Always hold the compressed-air pistol away
from your body. Never aim the compressed-
air pistol towards other people.
! Do not clean the air filter with the

compressed-air pistol. Replace soiled air fil-
ters.
Z
88 Features
Cable guides
Cable ducts on the cab rear wall
X Press release catch ; firmly and pull control

lever ? up and out in the direction of the
arrow.
X Press release catch : firmly and pull hydrau-
lic system controls = up and out in the direc-
tion of the arrow.
X Unscrew electrical plug-type coupling D of Cable guide in the engine compartment
control lever ? and separate. X Remove rubber cap = and guide the cable
X Mark cable connector A at the correspond- through.
ing sockets of hydraulic system controls = X If necessary, cut open the rubber grommet of
and remove. cable guide : or ; and guide the cable
X Place control lever ? and hydraulic system through.
controls = in front of the alternative opening.
X Connect plug-type coupling D of control
lever ? and tighten. Communications
X Attach cable connector A to the marked
sockets of hydraulic system controls =. Important safety notes
X Position lugs B to the rear and press hydrau-
lic system controls = forwards and down- G WARNING
wards until it engages. If you operate mobile communication equip-
X Position lugs C to the rear and press control ment while driving, you can be distracted from
lever ? forwards and downwards until it the traffic situation. This could also cause you
engages. to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of
an accident.
Only operate this equipment when the vehicle
is stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements in the

country in which you are driving when operating
Features 89
mobile communications equipment in the vehi-

cle.
The Mercedes-Benz installation specifications
must be observed if you subsequently install
one of the following communication devices:
Rmobile phone
R2-way radio
Rfax machine
Observe the legal requirements in all countries
concerned.
Z
90 General notes
Useful information outside air or recirculated air. A blocked filter

reduces the amount of air supplied to the cab.
The interval for replacing the filter depends on
These Operating Instructions describe all the
environmental influences. It may be shorter
models and standard and optional equipment of than that indicated in the Service Booklet.
going to print. Country-specific differences are Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period during
possible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not warm weather. In order to cool the vehicle more
be equipped with all the functions described. rapidly, briefly switch climate control to air-
This also applies to safety-relevant systems and recirculation mode. This will speed up the cool-
functions. ing process and the desired interior tempera-
ture will be reached more quickly.
workshops (Y page 31). Condensation may appear on the underside of
the vehicle in cooling mode.
! Turn on the air-conditioning system at least
General notes
Climate control
once a month for approximately ten minutes.

The refrigerant compressor may otherwise be
The heating or the air-conditioning system can damaged.
only be operated with the engine running. To H Environmental note
ensure optimal function, close the windows.
The air-conditioning system regulates the tem- Only switch on the air-conditioning system
perature and humidity of the cab and removes when necessary. Fuel consumption increases
undesirable substances from the air. when the air-conditioning system is switched
In air-recirculation mode, the fitted filter on.
removes most dust particles and pollen from
Heating/air conditioning and ventilation 91
Heating/air conditioning and ventilation

Overview and control panel
Climate control
Functions
C To set the airflow:
1 to 3 Heating/ventilating/cooling
: Side air vents: ventilation/heating
vents for the vehicle interior 4 Demisting/ventilating/cooling
g Air supply switched off
; Front windscreen vents: ventilation/
demister vent D To set the air distribution:
b Airflow to the footwell
= Side window vents: ventilation/demis-
c Airflow to the windscreen, side
ter vent
and centre air vents and to the footwell
? Footwell vents: ventilation/heating d z Airflow to the windscreen,
vents side and centre air vents
A Centre air vents: ventilation/heating E To switch air recirculation mode on/off
vents for the vehicle interior
F To switch the cooling with air dehumid-
B Control panel ification function on/off
Z
92 Heating/air conditioning and ventilation
X To switch on: close the windows.

G Temperature bar display X Press button E.
The indicator lamp next to button E lights up.
H To set the temperature:
X To switch off: press button E.
Temperature button f raises the tem-
The indicator lamp next to button E goes out.
perature
Temperature button g lowers the tem- The air-circulation mode switches off automati-
perature cally after approximately 15 minutes.
I To switch mixed air operation on/off

Switching mixed air operation on/off
ignition lock. If you switch on mixed air operation when per-
forming dirt-intensive work, i.e. mowing:
Rthe operating life of the air filter is extended.
Climate control
Rthe cab, on vehicles with air conditioning, is

Setting the airflow
cooled more quickly and less energy is
X Turn airflow control C to the desired posi- required in cooling mode.
tion. A supply of fresh air is established in mixed air
operation.
X To switch on: press button I.
Setting the temperature The indicator lamp next to button I lights up.
X To switch off: press button I again.
X Turn airflow control C to at least airflow level
1. The indicator lamp next to button I goes out.
X Press the f or g temperature button H
repeatedly until the desired temperature is
set. Demisting (maximum heating output)
or X Turn air-distribution control D to position
X Press and hold the f or g temperature but- z.
ton H until the desired temperature is set. X Turn airflow control C to position 4z.
X Press and hold the f temperature button H
until the maximum temperature is set.
Setting the air distribution All bars light up in display G.
X If required, switch on the windscreen heating
X Turn air-distribution control D to the desired
position. (Y page 82).
X Close the centre air vents (Y page 93).
X Direct the side air and side window vents to
the side windows (Y page 93).
Switching air recirculation mode
on/off
When you switch on air-recirculation mode, the Residual heat
windows may mist up faster, particularly at low
outside temperatures. Only switch air-recircu- The vehicle interior can still be heated for a cer-
lation mode on for a short time. tain time after the engine is switched off. The
Switch on air-recirculation mode if unpleasant heating time depends on the set temperature.
odours or dust enter the vehicle. X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the
ignition lock.
X Press the f or g temperature button H
repeatedly until the desired temperature is
set.
Heating/air conditioning and ventilation 93
X Turn airflow control C to the desired posi- Adjusting the air vents
tion.
X Set the air vents as required. General notes
Either the entire cab can be ventilated via fixed
air vents or just the windscreen or footwell can
Air-conditioning system be targeted. The adjustable centre/side air
vents can be used for independent, targeted
Switching the air-conditioning system ventilation of the driver's workstation and the
on/off co-driver seat. Keep all the air vents and the
ventilation grille in the cab free from obstruction
X To switch on: make sure that the engine is to ensure that the air can flow freely into the cab.
running.
X Press button F.
Centre air vents
The indicator lamp next to button F lights up.
X To set the temperature: press the f or g
Climate control
temperature button H repeatedly until the
desired temperature is set.
X To switch off: press button F again.
The indicator lamp next to button F goes out.
Example settings
Cooling
X Make sure that the air-conditioning system is
switched on.
X Set the airflow, air distribution and tempera- X To open the centre air vent: turn thumb-
ture as desired. wheel ; to position 1.
i Mercedes-Benz recommends cooling the X To adjust the airflow direction: use
temperature in the vehicle interior down to a slider : to set the fins to the desired posi-
maximum of 6 to 8 † below the outside tem- tion.
perature. X To close the centre air vent: turn thumb-
X Close the windows. wheel ; to position g.
X At high outdoor temperatures: direct the
air distribution towards the windscreen. Side air vents
X Switch on mixed-air operation (Y page 92).
Dehumidifying
X Make sure that the air-conditioning system is
switched on.
X Make sure that air-recirculation mode is
switched off (Y page 92).
X Set the airflow, air distribution and tempera-
ture as desired.
X Close the windows.
Z
94 Auxiliary heating
X To open the side air vent: turn thumb- G WARNING

wheel ; to the pressure point towards z.
Parts of the vehicle, e.g. the auxiliary hea-
X Side air vent function for the side window:
turn thumbwheel ; beyond the pressure ting's exhaust system, may become very hot
point towards z. when the auxiliary heating system is switched
X To adjust the airflow direction: use on.
slider : to set the fins to the desired posi- Flammable materials, such as leaves, grass or
tion. twigs, may ignite in the following situations.
X To close the side air vent: turn thumb- If they come into contact with:
wheel ; to position g.
Rhot parts of the auxiliary heating's exhaust
system
Side window vents
Rthe exhaust itself
There is a risk of fire.
Climate control
Make sure that when the auxiliary heating

system is switched on:
Rhot parts of the vehicle do not come into
contact with flammable materials
Rthe emissions from the auxiliary heating's
exhaust pipe can be released without
obstruction
Rthe exhaust emissions do not come into
contact with flammable materials
X To open the side window vent: fold out the
side window vent using tab :.
G DANGER
X To close the side window vent: fold in the
side window vent using tab :. If you have preselected a switch-on time, the
auxiliary heating system switches on auto-
matically.
Auxiliary heating RToxic exhaust fumes may accumulate if
there is insufficient ventilation, carbon
Important safety notes monoxide in particular. This is the case in
The auxiliary heating system operates inde- enclosed spaces, for example. There is a
pendently of the engine and complements the risk of fatal injuries.
vehicle heating. RThere is a risk of fire and explosion if there
The auxiliary heating heats the coolant and the are highly flammable materials or flamma-
vehicle interior, thereby reducing the load on the ble materials nearby!
engine and saving fuel.
The auxiliary heating can be switched on and off If you park the vehicle in these or similar con-
using the timer. ditions, always deactivate the preselected
You can use the auxiliary heating to: switch-on times.
Rpre-heat the vehicle interior and demist the
windows.
G DANGER
Rbetter start the engine in cold conditions. If the exhaust pipe is blocked or sufficient
Rheat up the coolant. This reduces engine wear ventilation is not possible, toxic exhaust
and saves fuel. fumes may enter the vehicle, especially car-
Rsupport the vehicle's heating system while bon monoxide. This is the case, for example, if
the engine is running and outside tempera-
tures are low.
Auxiliary heating 95
the vehicle gets stuck in snow. There is a risk Operation using the timer
of fatal injuries.
Overview
If you have to leave the engine or the auxiliary
heating running, keep the exhaust pipe and Using the timer, you can:
the area around the vehicle free of snow. To Ractivate/deactivate immediate heating mode
guarantee a sufficient supply of fresh air, open Rin immediate heating mode, set the remaining
the roof hatch or a door on the side of the heating time between one and 120 minutes
vehicle away from the wind. Rin preselected heating mode, set up to three
programmed times
G WARNING Rin preselected heating mode, set the heating
You could burn yourself on the exhaust pipe if time between one and 120 minutes
the auxiliary heating system has been run-
ning. There is a risk of injury.
Climate control
Let the exhaust pipe cool down before carry-
ing out work on the auxiliary heating system.
! If you do not use the auxiliary heating for a

prolonged period, residue could build up in
the auxiliary heating fuel system as a result of
exposure to heat and condensation. This res-
idue causes malfunctions in the auxiliary
heating. Have the auxiliary heating checked
and repaired at a qualified specialist work- : Memory slot o, p or Y
shop before operating again.
; Day of the week, switch-on day
! Turn on the auxiliary heating at least once a = Time, switch-on time, heating time or
month for approximately ten minutes. Other- remaining heating time
wise, the auxiliary heating could be damaged. ? y Heater operation and malfunction
! The auxiliary heating may only be operated (flashing)
with conventional diesel fuel. Operating with A . Forwards
100% fatty acid methyl ester (FAME) fuel or B , Backwards
diesel fuel with an admixture of more than C y Activates/deactivates immediate
10% fatty acid methyl ester (FAME) fuel can heating mode
lead to malfunctions and is therefore not per- D E Selects the memory position or acti-
mitted. vates/deactivates the switch-on time
E Ï Sets the time and day
When the key is in position 2 in the ignition
Mandatory switch-off lock or a switch-on time is preselected, the time
! When the auxiliary heating system is in heat- and day of the week are constantly displayed.
ing mode and during its cooling off period, the When the key is turned to position g in the
power supply shall be disconnected using the ignition lock, the display turns off after
battery isolator switch only in the event of 15 seconds.
danger. If the power supply is interrupted in
heating mode, the cooling off period can not Setting the time and day
be initiated and the auxiliary heating system
may sustain damage. X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the
ignition lock.
X Press and hold the Ï button until the time
flashes in the display.
X Press the , or . button to set the time.
Z
X Press the Ï button. A preselected switch-on time is deactivated

The time is stored and the day of the week after the heating process and needs to be reac-
flashes in the display. tivated for subsequent heating processes.
X Press the , or . button to select the If the power supply is interrupted using the bat-
day. tery isolator switch (Y page 83), the auxiliary
X Press the Ï button. heating will not switch on at the set switch-on
The day of the week is stored. time.
G DANGER
Setting the heating duration If you have preselected a switch-on time, the
X Press and hold the , button until the cur- auxiliary heating system switches on auto-
rent setting flashes. matically.
X Press the , or . button to set the RToxic exhaust fumes may accumulate if
heating duration to between one and there is insufficient ventilation, carbon
120 minutes.
Climate control
monoxide in particular. This is the case in

The setting is stored when the display disap-
pears. enclosed spaces, for example. There is a
risk of fatal injuries.
The auxiliary heating automatically switches
off after the heating time has elapsed. RThere is a risk of fire and explosion if there
are highly flammable materials or flamma-
Immediate heating mode ble materials nearby!
If you park the vehicle in these or similar con-
X To switch on: press the y button.
ditions, always deactivate the preselected
The display shows the time and day of the
week, as well as the y symbol. switch-on times.
X Press the , or . button to set the
X To set the switch-on time: press the E
remaining heating time to between one and button repeatedly until desired memory posi-
120 minutes. tion o, p or Y flashes in the dis-
X To switch off: press the y button again. play.
Cooling off period: the auxiliary heating sys- X Press the , or . button.
tem continues to run for approximately three The switch-on time flashes in the display.
minutes. Then the combustion air blower and
the heating/ventilation blower turn off.
When the switch-on time no longer flashes,
When the y symbol goes out in the dis- the switch-on time has been stored.
play, the auxiliary heating has switched off.
X To preselect the switch-on time: press the
i If the key is turned to position g in the E button repeatedly until the desired
ignition lock while the auxiliary heating is memory position and the set time flash in the
switched on, the auxiliary heating remains on display.
for a further 15 minutes. The display shows After approximately five seconds, day of the
remaining heating time =. week ; also begins to flash.
X If the desired switch-on time is within the next
Preselected heating mode 24 hours, wait until the display stops flashing.
The switch-on time is then activated for the
Three preselection times can be selected using next 24 hours.
the timer. or
You can preselect the switch-on times either for X While day of the week display ; is flashing,
the next 24 hours or for one week (maximum of set the switch-on day using the , or .
seven days). button.
i If identical preselection times (time and day When the switch-on time no longer flashes,
of the week) are set in the preselection mem- the switch-on time has been activated. The
ory, only the last preselection time set is current time and the activated memory posi-
saved.
Auxiliary heating 97
tion are displayed constantly and the y The engine can only be preheated if it is not run-
symbol flashes in the display. ning.
X To check the switch-on time: press the X To switch on: switch on the auxiliary heating
E button. system (Y page 94).
The set switch-on time (time and day of the X Press switch :.
week) is shown for approximately five sec- Indicator lamp ; in the switch lights up. The
onds in the display. engine is preheated.
X To deactivate the switch-on time: press the X To switch from engine preheating to vehi-
E button repeatedly until no more mem- cle interior preheating: press switch =.
ory positions are shown in the display. Indicator lamp ; in the switch goes out.
X To switch off: switch off auxiliary heating
Airflow, air distribution and tempera- (Y page 96).
ture Indicator lamp ; in the switch goes out.
or
If immediate or preselected heating mode is
Climate control
X Start the engine.
active, the blower selects airflow level 2 at
least. Additionally, the minimum temperature Indicator lamp ; in the switch goes out. The
default setting is selected. The heating system vehicle interior is preheated.
or the air conditioning control unit is activated
automatically.
X Press and hold the f temperature button Alarm clock function
until the maximum temperature is set X Press the E button repeatedly until the
(Y page 91).
æ alarm symbol flashes in the display.
X Adjust the air-distribution control and the air
X Press the , or . button.
vents as required (Y page 91).
The switch-on time flashes in the display.
X Adjust the airflow control as required while
driving (Y page 91).
When the switch-on time no longer flashes,
the switch-on time of the alarm has been
stored.
Switching engine preheating on/off
Z
Problems with the auxiliary heating

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
F:01 to F:09 and F:11 X Have the auxiliary heating checked at a qualified specialist work-
to F:17 shop.
F:10 While the auxiliary heating was switched on, the voltage supply
was interrupted:
X Switch on the voltage supply with the battery isolator switch
(Y page 83).
or
X Connect the battery (Y page 273).
or
Climate control
X Have the auxiliary heating checked at a qualified specialist work-

shop.
The protection against overheating on the auxiliary heating was
triggered:
X Have the auxiliary heating checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
All displays flash. All displays flash after an interruption in the voltage supply:
X Reset the time, day, switch-on times and heating time (Y page 95).
Mechanical malfunction: heavy smoke, fuel odour, or unusual

noises during auxiliary heating operation.
X Switch off the auxiliary heating (Y page 94).
X Remove the auxiliary heating fuse (Y page 291).
X Have the auxiliary heating checked as quickly as possible at a quali-
fied specialist workshop.
Useful information Rev counter

! If you exceed the maximum permissible
engine speed, the warning buzzer sounds.
your vehicle that were available at the time of You should not drive and change gear by the
going to print. Country-specific differences are sound of the engine, but according to the
possible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not engine speed shown in the rev counter.
be equipped with all the functions described. Avoid driving in the red overrevving range.
This also applies to safety-relevant systems and This could lead to engine damage.
functions.
Instrument cluster
On-board computer and displays

G WARNING
If you operate information and communica-
tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when
driving, you could be distracted from the traf- Example: instrument cluster
fic situation. This could also cause you to lose : Economical operating range (green)
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an ; Engine brake operating range (yellow)
accident. = Overrevving range, danger of engine dam-
age (red)
Only operate this equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you cannot be sure of this, If the W indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up, the engine speed is too high,
stop the vehicle paying attention to road and e.g. if you select a low gear when shifting down:
traffic conditions and operate the equipment
X Decelerate using the service brake.
with the vehicle stationary.
or
G WARNING X Shift up a gear.
The W indicator lamp in the instrument
If the instrument cluster has failed or mal- cluster goes out.
functioned, you may not recognise function
Observe further information in the event window
restrictions relevant to safety. The operating of the on-board computer.
safety of your vehicle may be impaired. There General notes on the rev counter:
RObserve the rev counter while driving and stay
Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked within economical speed range :.
at a qualified specialist workshop immedi- In some situations, it may make sense to
ately. operate the engine outside economical
engine speed range :, e.g. on uphill gradi-
You should therefore make sure your vehicle is ents or when overtaking.
operating safely at all times. Otherwise, a vehi- RIf you drive the vehicle within economical
cle that is not operating safely may cause an engine speed range :, you achieve low fuel
accident. If your vehicle is not operating safely, consumption and reduced wear.
stop and park safely as soon as possible.
RIn engine braking mode, use yellow engine
speed range ;. The highest engine braking
effect will be achieved just before red over-
revving range =.
Z
RWhen driving downhill, make sure that the Fuel gauge

engine speed does not rise into red overrev-
ving range =.
RIdling speed is set automatically depending
on the coolant temperature.
AdBlue® gauge

If the 9 fuel level has dropped to approx-
imately 14% of the tank capacity, the needle
enters the red reserve area. The on-board com-
puter displays a corresponding event window

with the 6 symbol.
In the Range menu window of the ß trip data
Example: instrument cluster menu, you can display your vehicle's range
The AdBlue® reducing agent is required for based on the current fuel tank content
reduction of engine emissions. (Y page 107).
The operating permit is invalidated if the vehicle
is operated without AdBlue®. The legal conse-
quence of this is that the vehicle may no longer Time and outside temperature
be operated on public roads.
In the Range menu window of the ß trip data
menu, you can display your vehicle's range
together with the current fuel tank content
(Y page 107).
If the AdBlue® level has dropped to approx-
imately 10% of the tank capacity, a correspond-
ing event window appears with the Ø sym-
bol. Top up the AdBlue® tank in good time
(Y page 195).
If the yellow event window is ignored and the
AdBlue® level drops further to approximately
2.5 %, engine output may be reduced. Instrument cluster (example: display in speedom-
When the AdBlue® tank has run dry, the event is eter)
stored and is signalled by the ; indicator You should pay particularly close attention to
lamp when starting the engine as an emission- road conditions as soon as temperatures
relevant fault (Y page 102). Vehicle speed may approach freezing.
also be limited to approximately 20 km/h. There is a delay in displaying a change in outside
temperature.
ignition lock.
Time : and outside temperature ; appear
in the display.
Displays vary according to country specifica- X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the
tions: ignition lock.
Rtime : in 12 h or 24 h mode The display in the rev counter shows total dis-
tance : and trip distance ;.
Routside temperature ; in Celsius (†) or
Fahrenheit (‡) Depending on the country, total distance :
and trip distance ; are shown in kilometres
The time and outside temperature are also dis- (km) or miles (mi).
played by the Truck info menu window of the
ß trip data menu (Y page 106). You can The total distance recorder and the trip odom-
change the clock mode and the temperature eter are also displayed by the Truck info menu
unit in the Menu menu window in the ä settings in the ß trip data menu (Y page 106). You can
menu (Y page 113). change the units of measurement in the Menu
menu window in the ä settings menu
Vehicles without a digital tachograph: you (Y page 113). You can reset trip odometer ; in
can make slight adjustments to the time in the the Truck info menu window in the ß trip
Menu menu window in the ä settings menu data menu (Y page 106).
(Y page 113).

Odometer
Instrument cluster (example: display in rev coun-

ter)
Z
Engine diagnostics indicator lamp

Indicator lamp
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The ; indicator lamp After you have turned the key to position 2 in the ignition lock, the
flashes. indicator lamp indicates the system's status by means of a sequence
of flashes. If there are no malfunctions, the indicator lamp goes out
after the engine is started.
The ; indicator lamp An emissions-related malfunction has been detected.

lights up. X Follow the instructions in the event window.
The on-board computer X Have the BlueTec® exhaust gas aftertreatment checked as soon as
shows an event window possible at a qualified specialist workshop.
and the · indicator
lamp in the display. If you do not follow the instructions in the event window, a reduction
in the engine power output may be imposed, as per the message dis-
played:
Rafter ten hours, e.g. if a low-grade diluted reducing agent is being
used or the dosage is incorrect
Rafter 36 hours, e.g. if the exhaust gas recirculation or the monitoring
system is faulty
The ; indicator lamp You have not had a detected emissions-related malfunction rectified.
lights up. X Follow the instructions in the event window.
The engine power output X Drive carefully to the nearest qualified specialist workshop and
is reduced. The on-board have the malfunction rectified as soon as possible.
computer also shows an
event window in the dis- If you do not follow the instructions in the event window, a speed
play. limitation may be imposed, as per the message displayed:
R20 hours after the first occurrence of a malfunction, e.g. if a low-
grade diluted reducing agent is being used or if the dosage is incor-
rect
R100 hours after the first occurrence of a malfunction, e.g. if the
exhaust gas recirculation or if the monitoring system is faulty
The ; indicator lamp AdBlue® has been used up or a detected emissions-related malfunc-
lights up. tion has not been rectified.
Vehicle speed is limited X Follow the instructions in the event message.
to approx. 20 km/h. X Drive carefully to the nearest filling station and refill AdBlue®
Simultaneously, the on-
(Y page 195).
board computer shows
the · indicator lamp or
in the status area. X Drive carefully to the nearest qualified specialist workshop and
have the malfunction rectified as soon as possible.
The operating permit is invalidated if you continue to use the vehicle.
Once the AdBlue® tank has been refilled or the fault rectified, full engine output is restored. If the
system check does not detect any other faults, the ; indicator lamp goes out after the system's
status indicator. It may take several journeys to complete the system check.
On-board computer 103
BlueTec® exhaust gas aftertreatment your vehicle is not operating safely, stop and
status indicator park safely as soon as possible.
The status of the BlueTec® exhaust gas after- G WARNING

treatment is signalled for a quick on-site check If you operate information and communica-
by authorities. tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when
There are three successive signalling phases driving, you could be distracted from the traf-
shown by the ; indicator lamp. These com- fic situation. This could also cause you to lose
mence when you have turned the key to position control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
2 in the ignition lock and end when the engine
accident.
is started.
The first phase is the instrument cluster display Only operate this equipment when the traffic
check. The indicator lamp lights up for approx- situation permits. If you cannot be sure of this,
imately five seconds and then goes out for stop the vehicle paying attention to road and
approximately ten seconds. traffic conditions and operate the equipment
The second phase indicates the system check with the vehicle stationary.
status. The indicator lamp either lights up again
for five seconds or flashes for approximately five Observe the legal requirements for the country

seconds. Subsequently, it goes out for five sec- you are currently in while operating the on-board
onds. computer.
In the third phase, the indicator lamp indicates
whether any emissions-related malfunctions
have been detected.
If no emissions-related malfunctions are detec-
ted, the indicator lamp lights up briefly and then
goes out for approximately five seconds. This
flashing sequence is repeated until the engine is
started.
If an emissions-related malfunction is detected,
the indicator lamp flashes three times and then
goes out for approximately five seconds. This
flashing sequence is repeated until the engine is
started. The indicator lamp remains lit for : Display in the on-board computer
approximately 15 seconds after the engine is ; Buttons
started.
u Selects the next main menu/next entry in
The indicator lamp lights up and remains lit after the input window, increases or resets
the engine is started if: value
Ra serious emissions-related malfunction is t Selects the previous main menu/previ-
detected. ous entry in the input window or decrea-
Ran emissions-related malfunction is still pres- ses value
ent and more than 200 hours have elapsed r Next menu window/next menu bar down
since detection. in the input window
s Previous menu window/next menu bar up
in the input window
On-board computer 9 Opens and closes input window/
acknowledges event window
Operating the on-board computer Ú Stores/displays the favourite menu win-
The on-board computer only shows messages or dow
warnings from certain systems. You should Navigate through the on-board computer menus
therefore make sure your vehicle is operating using the group of buttons on the left of the
safely at all times. Otherwise, a vehicle that is multifunction steering wheel.
not operating safely may cause an accident. If
Z
104 On-board computer
Whilst you are driving, the on-board computer button for approximately two seconds until a
provides information about: tone sounds.
Rfuel consumption X To display the favourite menu window:
Rtrip time briefly press the Ú button.
Roperating conditions
Rmalfunctions
Rcauses of malfunctions
Sections in the display in the on-board
Rmeasures to be taken
computer
X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition
lock.
The on-board computer shows the welcome
display (Mercedes star). After a short time the
display also shows the date and time.
lock.
The on-board computer shows the last active
menu window, e.g. the Truck info menu
window in the ß trip data menu.

If a malfunction is detected, the on-board
computer will display the events in an event
window first. In addition to the event window,
an indicator lamp may light up in the instru-
ment cluster or in the status area of the on-
board computer. If there are several mes-
sages, the on-board computer shows them
one by one according to priority level. If fur-
ther information on the malfunction is availa- Example: menu window, Truck info
ble in the event window, the event window Register and title bar: register : shows the
shows the Û symbol. You can display the main menu. The active main menu is represen-
information using the u button. ted in white. Register ? shows you the number
X Clear the event window by pressing the 9 of menu windows (submenus) and which win-
button. dow is currently selected. Title bar A shows the
X To scroll through the main menus: press name of the active menu window.
the u or t button. Display area: the on-board computer displays
X To display further menu windows in the the menu window or event window in display
main menu: press the r or s button. area ;. An event window is displayed automat-
X To open and close the input window: when ically and contains a message, e.g. Reset
a menu window displays the 9 symbol, press trip meter? or information about malfunc-
9. tions, e.g. AdBlue very low. In addition to the
event window, an indicator lamp may light up in
X To select menu bars in the input window:
status area = of the on-board computer or in
press the r or s button. the instrument cluster. If you can confirm the
X To change the value or select an entry in event window using the 9 button, the event
the input window: press the u or t window is hidden. An indicator lamp that lights
button. up in status area = of the on-board computer or
i If you call up a particular menu window reg- in the instrument cluster does not go out after
ularly, e.g. the engine oil level check, save it the event window is confirmed.
on the Ú button.
X To save a favourite menu window: call up
the desired menu window and press the Ú
Status area: status area = shows: Driving mode (Y page 107)

Rthe gear indicator of the Telligent® gearshift/ à
Telligent® automatic gearshift, e.g. N
Speed To display the vehicle
Rwhen cruise control is selected, the é speed
symbol and the set speed, e.g. 85 km/h
(Y page 172) Backup drive To select the shift position
The status of the driving system, e.g. on or off, is mode when experiencing prob-
represented in colour. lems with the transmis-
sion shift system
In addition, status area = contains an indicator
lamp panel. In the event of a malfunction, warn-
ing or operating information, an indicator lamp Audio and com- (Y page 108)
automatically lights up in status area = of the munications á
on-board computer. Depending on the priority
of the malfunction, warning or operating infor- Alarm clock RTo display the alarm
mation, the indicator lamp lights up in different time
colours. The indicator lamp may also light up in RTo set the alarm clock
addition to the event window.
RTo switch off the alarm

Telephone To display the telephone
Menus at a glance book and call lists/dial
numbers
The number and order of the menus depends on
your vehicle's equipment and the type of vehicle Audio RTo control the volume
itself. RTo display the audio
(Y page 106) source
Trip data ß
RTo change the audio
Truck info To display/reset the time, source, track or fre-
outside temperature, the quency
trip meter and total dis- RTo operate the MP3
tance recorder browser
Tachograph To display the driving time
and rest periods Operation and (Y page 110)
Since start To display/reset the maintenance
- all "From start" trip data â
Range To display the range of fuel Axles To display the power take-
and AdBlue® levels offs, front PTO shaft, work-
ing gears, crawler gears
Since reset To display/reset the and differential lock
- all "From reset 1" trip data
Tyres To adjust the tyre pressure
Since reset To display/reset the
- drive "From reset 2" trip data Hydraulics To display the operating
conditions and change
settings
Z
Operation and (Y page 110) Trip data menu

maintenance
â Truck info menu window
Trailer Displaying trailer data
RInformation on braking
RAxle loads
RTyre pressure
RSupply pressure
Maintenance To display/reset the main-

tenance point and due
date
Monitoring info (Y page 111) : Total distance recorder

ã
; Trip meter
Reserve pres‐ To display the reservoir = Time

sure pressure in brake circuits ? Outside temperature
\ and ^
X To display total distance, trip meter, clock
Coolant To display the coolant or outside temperature: using the u or
temperature t button, scroll to the ß trip data menu.
Engine To display the engine oil X To reset the trip meter: press 9.
level and operating hours The input window shows Reset trip
of the engine meter? No/Yes.
X Using the r button, select the Yes menu
Events To display events bar and press u or 9 to confirm.
Diagnosis Displaying diagnostics
data Tachograph menu window
The Tachograph menu window is available on
Settings ä (Y page 113) vehicles with a digital tachograph.
X Using the u or t button, scroll to ß
Menu To set the units of meas-
urement (e.g. display of † trip data.
or ‡) X To display the driving and rest times: use
the r or s button to scroll to the
Lighting RTo make the instrument Tachograph menu window.
cluster lighting and The menu window shows:
audio display lighting Rthe driver's name
darker/brighter
Rthe driving time
RTo adjust/deactivate
Rthe rest time
delayed switch-off for
the exterior lighting
Language To set the display lan-
From start all/From reset all/From
guage reset drive menu window
Service prod‐ To display/set service The Since start - all trip data contains per-
ucts product values formance data from the start of the journey. If
you leave the vehicle parked for more than four
hours, the values are reset automatically.
The Since reset - all or Since reset - Backup drive mode menu window
drive trip data contains performance data from
the last time the menu window was reset. General notes
X Using the u or t button, scroll to ß If the automated transmission shift system is
trip data. malfunctioning, you may, under certain circum-
X To display the trip data: use the r or stances, be able to continue your journey in
s button to scroll to the Since start - backup drive mode. It is not possible to change
all, Since reset - all or Since reset - gear in backup drive mode when the vehicle is in
drive menu window. motion.
The menu window shows: The vehicle may respond abnormally in backup
Rthe distance covered drive mode and therefore requires a high level of
Rthe journey time concentration on the part of the driver.
Rthe average vehicle speed Backup drive mode remains switched on for as
long as the ignition lock is in the drive position.
Rthe average fuel consumption
When you take the key out of the ignition lock,
X To reset the trip data: press 9. backup drive mode is switched off. If backup
The input window shows, for example, Reset drive mode is used when the transmission is
values for: Since start - all No/Yes. cold, the on-board computer may not show the

X Using the r button, select the Yes menu selected gear. Repeat the gear selection. If the
bar and press u or 9 to confirm. on-board computer does not display the selec-
ted gear after you have tried to select a gear
several times, switch off the engine. Start the
Range menu window engine again and select the gear.
The on-board computer calculates the approxi- Selecting shift position
mate ranges of the vehicle based on current fuel
levels and AdBlue®. The ranges depend largely X Apply the parking brake.
on your driving style. X Start the engine.
X Using the u or t button, scroll to the X Using the u or t button, scroll to à
ß trip data. driving mode.
X To display the range: use the r or s X Press the r or s button to scroll to the
button to scroll to the Range menu window. Backup drive mode menu window.
The menu window displays the approximate The menu window shows Activate with
ranges of the 6 fuel level and the Ø "OK"..
AdBlue® level. In addition, the menu window X Press the 9 button.
also shows the current fuel consumption level The menu window shows Is the parking
as a bar display underneath the ranges. When brake applied?.
the vehicle is stationary, the bar display X Press the u button
changes and shows the stationary fuel con- The input window shows:
sumption level (l/h). The mark above the bar RR for reverse gear
display corresponds to the average consump- RN for neutral
tion Since start - all.
RD1 for the slow gear, 2nd gear
The menu window displays the range up to
50 km. For lower values, the on-board com- RD2 for the fast gear, 6th gear
puter displays <50 km. Rï for towing mode
X Select gear, neutral position or towing mode
with the r or s button and confirm
Driving mode menu your selection with the u button.
The on-board computer displays the selected
Speed menu window direction of travel in the status area.
X If the Ready to start for 10 seconds
X To display vehicle speed: using the u or menu window appears, depress the acceler-
t buttons, scroll through to à driving ator pedal.
mode.
Z
When driving the vehicle in backup drive mode, Telephone menu window
the event window shows the Shift to neu‐
tral? message. While the vehicle is in motion, Important safety notes
you can only shift to transmission neutral posi- In the telephone menu window you can:
tion.
Rdisplay the telephone book, select and call an
You can find information on towing in the sec-
tion "Manoeuvring, tow-starting and towing entry
away" (Y page 298). Rdisplay the call list, select and call an entry
Rupdate the phone book
G WARNING
Audio and communications menu
If you operate information and communica-
Alarm clock menu window tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when
driving, you could be distracted from the traf-
If your vehicle is equipped with the Mercedes-
Benz CD radio, you can set the CD radio as an fic situation. This could also cause you to lose
alarm clock in alarm clock mode. If the alarm control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
mode is set to Radio and the CD radio is accident.
switched on at the set alarm time, no further Only operate this equipment when the traffic
signalling takes place.
situation permits. If you cannot be sure of this,
X To display the alarm time: using the u or stop the vehicle paying attention to road and
t button, scroll through to á audio and traffic conditions and operate the equipment
communications.
The menu window shows: with the vehicle stationary.
Rthe day of the week and the date
When making a call, observe the legal require-
Rthe alarm time for the æ alarm clock ments for the country you are currently in.
Rthe alarm time for the ç alarm clock
X To set the alarm clock: press the 9 button.
Functions
The input window shows: The telephone menu window is available on
Rthe alarm clock Alarm clock 1/Alarm vehicles with Bluetooth® CD radio.
clock 2 i Further information on suitable mobile
Rthe alarm clock mode Audio/Buzzer/Off phones and connecting Bluetooth®-capable
Rthe hour of the alarm time, e.g. 09 h mobile phones can be found in the "Multime-
Rthe minute of the alarm time, e.g. 23 min
dia systems" section (Y page 133).
X Select the desired menu bar with the r or i Information on operating the CD radio can
s button. be found in the "Multimedia systems" section
X Change the value with the u or t but- (Y page 133).
ton. X Bluetooth® mobile phone: pair the mobile
i If you press and hold the u or t but- phone to the CD radio.
ton, the hours/minutes scroll quickly. X Press the u or t button to scroll to á
X To stop the alarm: press the 9 button. audio and communications.
X Press the r or s button to scroll to the
i The alarm switches off automatically after
two minutes. Telephone menu window.
The menu window shows the provider name
and the name of the connected Bluetooth®
mobile phone.
i Briefly pressing the ; button calls up the
Telephone menu directly.
X To display the phone book/call list: press
the 9 button.
The input window shows:
RPhone book Audio menu window

RMissed calls
RReceived calls Audio source, track/station/frequency,
RNumbers dialled MP3 browser
RLoad phone book The Audio menu window is available on vehicles
X Select the desired menu bar with the r or
with the Mercedes-Benz CD radio.
s button. X Switch on the CD radio (Y page 133).
X Display the phone book entries with the u X Press the u or t button to scroll to á
button. audio and communications.
X Select a name or number with the r or X To display the audio source and the title/
s button. station: press the r or s button to
X To scroll quickly through the phone book scroll to the Audio menu window.
or call list: press and hold the r or s X To change the audio source or track/
button. station/frequency: press the 9 button.
X To select a number from the phone book Depending on the active audio source, the
or call list: press the ; button. input window displays:
Rthe name of the audio source

The menu window shows the details of the
call. Rthe station or frequency when in radio
X Press the ; button. mode
The phone number is dialled. Rthe track when in CD, USB or Bluetooth®
mode
Rthe AUX source in video mode
Rthe waveband in radio mode
Rthe MP3 browser in CD or USB mode
X Select the desired menu bar with the r or
s button.
X Change the audio source, track or station with
the u or t button.
When using MP3 files stored on audio CDs or a
USB device, you can navigate through folders
and select your MP3 files for playback.
; Makes or accepts a call/displays the To operate the MP3 browser
Telephone menu window X Open the Audio menu window.
= Ends/rejects an incoming call X Press the 9 button.
W Increases volume
X Select the MP3 browser menu bar with the
X Decreases volume r or s button.
X To accept a call: press the ; button. X To open the MP3 browser: press the u
The on-board computer shows the caller's or t button.
number or Unknown number. X To change the MP3 file/folder: press the
X To adjust the call volume: increase or r or s button.
decrease the volume during the call with the X To open an MP3 file or folder: press the
W or X button. u button.
X To reject or end a call: press the = but-
X To close the current folder: press the t
ton. button briefly.
X To close the MP3 browser: press and hold
the t button.
Z
Adjusting the volume Tyres menu window

X Press the u or t button to scroll to â
operation and maintenance.
Tyres menu window.
You will find further information in the "Tyre
pressure control system" section (Y page 166).
Hydraulics menu window

It is always possible to adjust the playback vol- Hydraulics menu window.
ume in audio mode.
X To increase or decrease the volume: press
Further information can be found in the "Menus
and input windows in the on-board computer"
W or X.
section (Y page 208).
Trailer menu window

Operation and maintenance menu
The Trailer menu window is available when a
Axles menu window trailer is coupled up. The possible displays
depend on your trailer's equipment. Observe the
notes on equipment and their operation in the
manufacturer's Operating Instructions for the
trailer.
If the axle load is displayed in the Trailer menu
window, park the vehicle on a level surface and
apply the parking brake.
Trailer menu window.
X Press the 9 button.
: Ø Working gears/Ó crawler gears The display shows the first input window, e.g.
; Working speed, front PTO shaft Brake info.
= Front PTO shaft X Press the u or t button to display the
? Engine power take-off next input window.
A Transmission power take-off The following information/input windows
may be displayed, depending on the equip-
B Differential locks ment installed:
X Press the u or t button to scroll to â RBrake info displays the temperature and
operation and maintenance. wear on the trailer brake.
X Press the r or s button to scroll to the RAxle loads displays the overall axle load
Axles menu window. of the trailer.
RTyres displays the tyre pressure of the
trailer tyres.
RReserve pressure displays the reservoir
pressure in the trailer compressed-air res-
ervoirs.
Maintenance menu window Rthe maintenance point, e.g. Air filter

Rthe maintenance due date, e.g.
The maintenance system calculates mainte- 23.09.2017
nance due dates for the vehicle and its assem-
Rthe remaining distance, e.g. 2000 km
blies based on the vehicle's operating condi-
tions. The event window automatically displays If no prediction for the maintenance due date
maintenance due dates 14 days in advance. is possible, the input window shows:
When the maintenance due date has been Rthe maintenance point, e.g. Air filter
reached or exceeded, the on-board computer Rthe maintenance due date, e.g.
shows additional event windows (Y page 120).
--.--.----
If the maintenance work is carried out at a Rthe remaining distance, e.g. ---- km
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, the fact that the
work has been carried out professionally will be X To display the next maintenance point
confirmed in the on-board computer and the and due date: press the r or s button
Maintenance Booklet. to display the maintenance due date or the
next maintenance point.
G WARNING Depending on the vehicle's equipment, you
If you do not have the prescribed service/ can call up the maintenance due date or var-
ious maintenance points:

maintenance work or necessary repairs car-
RTime-based maint.
ried out, this could result in malfunctions or
RDiesel particle filter, vehicles in
system failures. There is a risk of an accident.
accordance with the Euro 6 standard
Always have the prescribed service/mainte- RAir filter
nance work as well as necessary repairs car-
X To reset the maintenance due date: press
ried out at a qualified specialist workshop. the r or s button to display the
desired maintenance point.
! Have the engine electronics and associated X Press the u button.
parts, such as control units, sensors, actuat-
ing components or electric cables serviced If a reset is possible, the input window shows,
only at a qualified specialist workshop. Vehi- for example Reset? No/Yes.
cle components may otherwise wear more X Press the r button to select the Yes menu
quickly and the vehicle's operating permit bar and press the u or 9 button to con-
may be invalidated. firm.
! If you confirm maintenance work, without
having it performed according to schedule,
you can damage the vehicle and the assem- Monitoring info menu
blies. Wear can increase.
Reservoir pressure menu window
If you inadvertently confirm maintenance
work or confirm it too early, the maintenance X To display the reservoir pressure: press
system calculates the new maintenance due the u or t button to scroll to the ã
date. To prevent damage to the vehicle or monitoring info.
assemblies, have the corresponding mainte- X Press the r or s button to scroll to the
nance work performed immediately. Reserve pressure menu window.
Only confirm the maintenance work when the The menu window shows the reservoir pres-
maintenance work has been performed. sure of the \ brake circuit and ^ brake
X Press the u or t button to scroll to â circuit as a bar display.
Maintenance menu window.
X To display the maintenance point and due
date: press the 9 button.
The input window shows:
Z
Coolant menu window X If the oil level display is not available, repeat
the oil level check.
X Press the u or t button to scroll to the X If it is not possible to display the oil level after
ã monitoring info. repeated attempts, have the oil level display
X To display the coolant temperature: press checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
the r or s button to scroll to the
Coolant menu window.
Events menu window
i When the coolant level is too low, the cool-
ant temperature cannot be displayed. You can display stored malfunctions and mes-
sages in the Events menu. If you have rectified
Engine menu window the cause of the malfunction/message, the on-
board computer no longer displays the event.
In the Engine menu window, you can check the X Press the u or t button to scroll to the
engine oil level and display the engine's operat- ã monitoring info.
ing hours. Check the engine oil level before the
start of every journey. The engine oil level is not
displayed while driving. Events menu window.
The menu window shows, for example, the
X Park the vehicle on a level surface. number of events or No events.
X Apply the parking brake. X To display events: press 9.

X Switch off the engine. X To display further events: press the r or
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition s button to show the next event window.
lock.
X If the engine is at normal operating tem-
perature: wait approximately five to seven
Diagnostics menu window
minutes after switching off the engine. Diagnostics data contains information with
or which you can assist the maintenance person-
X If the engine is cold: wait approximately five nel during fault diagnosis, e.g. by remote diag-
to ten minutes after switching off the engine. nosis. The Diagnosis menu window contains,
for example, a list of all control units (systems)
i If you call up the engine oil level too early or installed in the vehicle. Further information can
while the engine is running, Not availa‐ be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz Service
bleappears in the new menu window. Centre.
X Press the u or t button to scroll to the
X Press the u or t button to scroll to the
ã monitoring info. ã monitoring info.
X To display the engine oil level and operat-
ing hours: press the r or s button to Diagnosis menu window.
scroll to the Engine menu window.
The menu window shows: Displaying the operating hours
Rthe 4 engine oil level, e.g. Low Top up X Press the 9 button.
oil:%s X Press the r or s button to select ICM.
Rthe ý operating hours of the engine, X Press the u button.
e.g. 10000 h 27 min. X Press the r or s Values button to
The service counter is not suitable for select.
measuring the driving hours of the driver. X Press the u button.
Use suitable devices for this purpose.
X Press the r or s button to select the
X If Low or Too low is displayed in the menu
desired system:
window, refill the missing amount of engine oil
shown (Y page 264) as soon as possible and RM3: X h Operating time: hydraulics
call up the engine oil again. circuit 1
X Be sure not to start the engine when the Too RM4: X h Operating time: hydraulics
low menu window appears. circuit 2
RM7: X h Operating time: hydraulics Rclock mode in 24 h or 12 h

circuit 3 Rvehicles without a digital tachograph: make
RM8: X h Operating time: hydraulics slight adjustments to the current time, e.g.
circuit 4 10:25
RM12: X h Operating time: hydro‐ If you need to change the time by several
static drive minutes, this must be done in small incre-
RM20: X h PTO shaft operating time ments over several days.
Rspeed in km/h or mph
Showing the power hydraulics oil level
Rdistance in km or mi
X Start the engine. Rliquid units in litres, UK gal or US gal
X Park the vehicle on a level surface. Rtemperature units in °C or °F
X Apply the parking brake.
Raverage fuel consumption in l/100 km, km/
X Make sure that engine power take-off is l or mpg
switched off (Y page 235). Rpressure units in bar, kpa or psi
Rweight units in t, tn or l.tn
X Press the r or s button to select ICM.
X Press the u button.

desired menu bar.
X Press the r or s Values button to X Press the u or t button to change the
select. setting.
X Press the u button.
X Press the r or s button to select M6:
Lighting menu window
X l Oil level: power hydraulics.
The oil level display of the power hydraulics You can set the brightness of the instrument
must show approximately 52 l. cluster, the switch and the audio display in the
X Top up the difference in quantity of the oil Lighting menu window.
(Y page 266). You can only adjust the brightness of the instru-
Displaying diagnostics data ment cluster and the switch if the light sensor of
the instrument cluster has detected night mode
X Press the 9 button. and the lights have been switched on. If the set-
The input window shows a list of all control ting cannot be changed, the input window dis-
unit system abbreviations. plays Day mode.
X Press the r or s button to select the X Press the u or t button to scroll to ä
desired control unit. settings.
X Press the u button to display further X Press the r or s button to scroll to the
details on the control unit. Lighting menu window.
The input window shows the instrument clus-
Settings menu ter lighting as a bar display.
X Press the r or s button to select
Menu window menu Instrument panel.
If you change the settings in the Menu menu X Press the u or t button to change the
window, the changes affect the display of the setting.
menu window.
X Press the u or t button to scroll to ä Language menu window
settings.
The languages available depend on the country
X To set the units of measurement: press 9.
specifications of the vehicle. All text displays are
The input window displays a list of possible shown in the set language. You can install more
settings: languages. Further information can be obtained
from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Z
X Press the u or t button to scroll to ä i You can obtain information about service
settings. products which have been tested by
X Press the r or s button to scroll to the Mercedes-Benz and approved for your vehicle
Language menu window. on the Internet at: http://bevo.mercedes-
X To set the language: press 9. benz.com/
The input window displays a selection of lan- Engine oil viscosity
guages.
Under Engine Oil viscosity, set the viscosity
desired language. classification (SAE class) of the engine oil used.
X Press the u button to change the setting. Transmission oil grade
Under Transmission Oil grade, set the oil
Service products menu window grade of the transmission oil used according to
the Sheet Numbers of the Mercedes-Benz Spec-
General notes ifications for Service Products.
! When you change the service product data Rear axle oil grade
via the on-board computer, the maintenance
system adjusts the maintenance due dates Under Rear axle Oil grade, set the oil grade
accordingly. of the transmission oil used according to the

Sheet Numbers of the Mercedes-Benz Specifi-
Set the data for the service products added. cations for Service Products.
Otherwise, the assemblies could be dam-
aged. Setting the service products
Observe the "Service products" section X Press the u or t button to scroll to ä
(Y page 322). settings.
Engine fuel grade Service products menu window.
! A high fuel sulphur content accelerates the X Press the 9 button.
ageing process of the engine oil and can dam- The input window displays the assembly and
age the engine and exhaust system. the service product characteristic, for exam-
The sulphur content in the fuel is set before the ple Engine Oil grade, as well as the cur-
vehicle is delivered. rently set value, e.g. 228.51.
Observe the notes on diesel fuel and fuel quality X To select an assembly: press the u or
in the "Diesel fuel" section (Y page 326). t button to select an assembly with a cor-
responding service product characteristic, for
Engine oil grade example:
! If you mix engine oils with differing oil REngine Fuel grade
grades, the change interval for the engine oil REngine Oil grade
is reduced in comparison to mixtures of REngine Oil viscosity
engine oil of identical grade.
RTransmission Oil grade
Therefore, only mix engine oils of differing
RRear axle Oil grade
grade in exceptional circumstances. To pre-
vent damage to the engine, set the Sheet X To set the service product value: press the
Number of the engine oil with the lower grade r or s button to select a service prod-
under Engine Oil grade. uct value.
X Press the u or t button to set the ser-
Observe the notes on engine oil in the "Engine
oils" section (Y page 323). vice product value of the service product
added.
Under Engine Oil grade, set the oil grade of
the engine oil used according to the Sheet Num-
bers of the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for
Service Products.
On-board computer event window 115
On-board computer event window Observe the instructions in the event window.
Stop the vehicle as soon as possible while
Notes on events paying attention to the traffic conditions and
contact a qualified specialist workshop. If the
Messages include operating information, error qualified specialist workshop determines it is
messages or warnings that the on-board com- possible to continue driving, adapt your driv-
puter automatically displays in an event win- ing style accordingly. Drive with even greater
dow. In addition to the event window, an indi- care. Keep in mind that continuing the journey
cator lamp may light up in the instrument cluster could damage the vehicle and contravene
or in the status area of the on-board computer. legal regulations. Immediately drive to a quali-
Depending on the priority of the message, the fied specialist workshop and have the affec-
on-board computer displays the event window ted system checked and repaired.
in different colours: If you can confirm the event window using the
Rgrey event window for a malfunction/ 9 button, the event window is hidden. You can
notification of low priority call up the event window again at a later point
Observe the instructions in the event window. (Y page 112). If, in addition to the event window,
You can drive on. an (Y page 130) indicator lamp has lit up in the
instrument cluster or in the status area of the
Ryellow event window for a malfunction/

on-board computer, the indicator lamp remains
notification of medium priority on.
Observe the instructions in the event window.
If it is possible to continue the journey despite
the malfunction, drive on carefully. Have the
affected system checked at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop as soon as possible.
Rred event window for a malfunction of
high priority
Grey event window

Note
If you ignore warning and indicator lamps and the event window, you will not be able to recognise
failures and malfunctions in components or systems. Driving/braking characteristics may be affec-
ted and the operating and road safety of your vehicle may be limited. Have the affected system
checked and repaired at a qualified specialist workshop. Always observe the warning lamps and
event window and follow the corresponding measures.
Grey event window
With a malfunction/notification of low priority, the on-board computer displays a grey event win-
dow. If further information about the malfunction/notification is available, the event window dis-
plays the Û symbol. You can display the information using the u button on the multifunction
steering wheel. Observe the information and instructions in the event window. You can drive on.
Z
116 On-board computer event window

Display message for vehicles in accordance with the Euro 6 standard.
Â Regeneration of the diesel particle filter is disabled and the fill level of
Regeneration disa‐ the diesel particle filter is raised.
bled
X In order to enable automatic regeneration of the diesel particle fil-
ter, deactivate the regeneration block as soon as possible
(Y page 191).

Â Supplementary text Û: Requirements for manual regenera‐
Manual regeneration tion have not been fulfilled. Please observe the Oper‐
not possible ating Instructions.
Regeneration of the diesel particle filter is not possible. One or more
requirements have not been fulfilled.
X Observe the activation conditions and requirements for manual

regeneration of the diesel particle filter (Y page 192).
Transmission and clutch

The clutch is under a heavy load but not overloaded. You should only
Ô pull away in first gear.
Clutch under heavy X Keep the pulling away or manoeuvring procedure as brief as pos-
strain sible.
Fold down clutch Vehicles with Telligent® automatic gearshift: the automatic clutch
pedal operating mechanism is malfunctioning. The warning buzzer also
sounds.
X Fold out the clutch pedal (Y page 162).
X Depress the clutch pedal briefly.
X To drive, depress the clutch pedal and change gear manually.
Observe the additional information in the "Telligent® gearshift" sec-
tion (Y page 150).
X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Service products
The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir of the windscreen
¨ washer system has dropped to approximately 1 l.
X Top up washer the fluid reservoir (Y page 263).
Yellow event window

Note
Yellow event window
With a malfunction/notification of medium priority, the on-board computer displays a yellow event
window. The on-board computer displays a yellow event window, e.g. if you have not performed the
service work due. The on-board computer also displays a yellow event window for special operating
conditions, e.g. if the coolant temperature is too high or if the clutch is under heavy load. If further
information about the malfunction/notification is available, the event window displays the Û
symbol. You can display the information using the u button on the multifunction steering wheel.

Observe the information and instructions in the event window.

Supplementary text Û: Please top up AdBlue.
Ø The AdBlue® level has dropped to approximately 10%.
AdBlue reserve
X Refill the AdBlue® tank as soon as possible (Y page 195).
Otherwise, engine output may be reduced.
Supplementary text Û: Please top up with AdBlue. Risk of

Ø reduction in engine power
AdBlue reserve Additionally, the on-board computer displays the · indicator lamp
in the status area. The AdBlue® level has dropped to approximately
7.5%.
Otherwise, engine output may be reduced and, also, speed may be
limited to approximately 20 km/h.
Supplementary text Û: Please top up with AdBlue. Reduc‐

Ø tion in engine power after stopping
AdBlue very low Additionally, the on-board computer displays the · indicator lamp
5%.
Otherwise, engine output will be reduced the next time the engine
is started.
Z

Supplementary text Û: Please top up with AdBlue Risk of
Ø limit speed
AdBlue empty In addition, the on-board computer displays the · indicator lamp in
the status area. The AdBlue® level has dropped to approximately
2.5%. The engine power output is reduced.
X Adapt your driving style accordingly.
Otherwise, speed may be limited to approximately 20 km/h.

Ø Additionally, the on-board computer displays the · indicator lamp
AdBlue empty in the status area. The AdBlue® level has dropped to approximately
0%. The engine power output is reduced.
Supplementary text Û: Please top up with AdBlue Risk of

· limit speed
Engine power reduced Additionally, the on-board computer displays the · indicator lamp
2.5%. The engine power output is reduced.
Otherwise, speed may be limited to approximately 20 km/h.

· Additionally, the on-board computer displays the · indicator lamp
Limit speed in the status area and the ; indicator lamp lights up in the instru-
ment cluster. The AdBlue® level has dropped to approximately 0%.
Vehicle speed is limited to approximately 20 km/h.

Â Supplementary text Û: Please start regeneration Please
Diesel particulate observe the Operating Instructions
filter: raised fill
The Â indicator lamp also lights up yellow in the instrument cluster.
level
The diesel particle filter is in need of regeneration.
Depending on your operation of the vehicle, within the next four hours:
X Deactivate the regeneration block (Y page 191) and drive on a
motorway or for a long distance until the Â indicator lamp goes
out.
or
X Start manual regeneration (Y page 192).

Â Supplementary text Û: Please start regeneration at once
Diesel particulate Press and hold regeneration switch for 3 s while vehi‐
filter full cle is stationary Please observe the Operating Instruc‐
tions
The Â indicator lamp also lights up yellow in the instrument cluster.
The diesel particle filter is in need of regeneration.
Depending on your operation of the vehicle, within the next
30 minutes:
X Deactivate the regeneration block (Y page 191) and drive on a
motorway or for a long distance until the Â indicator lamp goes
out.
or
X Start manual regeneration as soon as possible (Y page 192).
Otherwise, engine output may be reduced.

Â Supplementary text Û: Please start regeneration at once
Diesel particulate Press and hold regeneration switch for 3 s while vehi‐
filter full Engine cle is stationary Please observe the Operating Instruc‐
power reduced tions
The Â indicator lamp also flashes yellow in the instrument cluster.
The diesel particle filter is in immediate need of regeneration and this
is the last possibility for it to be started manually.
X Start manual regeneration as soon as possible (Y page 192).
Otherwise, the diesel particle filter can only be cleaned or
exchanged at a qualified specialist workshop.
Z
Service products and maintenance

The fuel has dropped to the reserve level.
9 X Refill the fuel tank (Y page 193).
The ¦ indicator lamp lights up yellow in the status area of the on-
¦ board computer as well as in the event window. The oil level in the
Steering fluid too reservoir has dropped to the minimum level (Y page 264).
low X Have the steering checked immediately at a qualified specialist
workshop.
The © indicator lamp lights up yellow in the status area of the on-
¯ board computer as well as in the event window.
Example: Brakes Axle The service work due has not been performed.
1 Maintenance due The wear limit of the brake pads/linings and/or brake discs has been
immediately exceeded.
G WARNING
The vehicle's driving and braking characteristics may change.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Have the brake pads/linings replaced as soon as possible at a
Compressed-air system, engine and cooling system

There is too much condensation in the compressed-air braking system
+ and/or the compressed-air dryer is malfunctioning.
Condensation in
compressed-air res‐ G WARNING
ervoir If the condensation level in the compressed-air reservoir is too high or
the condensed water freezes, the braking effect may be reduced. The
compressed-air brake system can also fail completely. There is a risk
of an accident.
X Drain the compressed-air brake system (Y page 272).
X If more than 4 cl of condensed water escapes or if the malfunction
occurs regularly: have the compressed-air braking system and
compressed-air dryer checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
The reservoir pressure in the transmission/clutch is too low.

:

Transmission/ G WARNING
clutch reserve pres‐ The gears can no longer be changed properly.
sure too low There is a risk of an accident.
X Stop the vehicle as quickly as possible, paying attention to traffic
conditions.
X Let the engine run until the event window goes out and the reservoir
pressure has reached an adequate level.
X If the malfunction occurs regularly, have the compressed-air system
checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Supplementary text Û: Visit workshop.

I The electronic drive control is malfunctioning.
Drive control faulty
X Observe the instructions in the event window.
One of the following systems is malfunctioning:

ÿ Rengine
Engine faulty
Rengine cooling
Rengine management
Rdiesel injection system
X Have the systems checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Z

The coolant temperature is too high. Engine power output is auto-
? matically reduced.
Coolant temperature X Reduce the speed.
too high
X Shift to a lower gear.
X Remove objects that could block the air supply to the engine radi-
ator, e.g. paper which has flown onto the grille.
â Supplementary text Û: Visit workshop.

The control cable for the fan hydraulics valve is faulty. The fan is oper-
Fan hydraulics mal‐ ated at maximum speed so that the engine does not overheat.
functioning
X Have the fan hydraulics checked at a qualified specialist workshop.


Ú
Transmission faulty G WARNING
The transmission gearshift system is malfunctioning. The journey can
be continued, but with restrictions.
X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Ø
Clutch faulty G WARNING
The clutch is malfunctioning. The journey can be continued, but with
restrictions.
X Have the clutch checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
The permissible operating temperature of the clutch has been

Ô reached. There is a risk of clutch damage if placed under further load.
Clutch under heavy X Engage a lower gear when manoeuvring or pulling away.
strain
X Complete the pulling away or manoeuvring process as quickly as
possible.
Otherwise, the clutch will be overloaded.
Lighting system and electrical system

ª
Generator is not G Risk of accident
charging battery. The ª indicator lamp lights up yellow in the status area of the on-
board computer as well as in the event window. The alternator is faulty
or the poly-V-belt has torn. The vehicle's driving and braking charac-
teristics may change.
conditions.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
I G Risk of accident
Instrument cluster The CAN connection to the instrument cluster is interrupted.

display and con‐ The display in the on-board computer can no longer show important
trols faulty information about the operating and road safety of the vehicle.
conditions.
A short circuit in the lighting system has been detected.

4s X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Tyres
h The tyre pressure control system is malfunctioning. It is possible that
Tyre pressure con‐ the tyre pressure has decreased in one or more of the tyres.
trol system restric‐
ted G WARNING
The driving and braking characteristics are affected.
X Stop the vehicle without steering or braking suddenly. Pay attention
to the traffic conditions.
X Check the tyres for damage.
X Check the compressed-air line for leaks.
X If necessary, change the wheel (Y page 288).
X Have faults in the tyre pressure control system rectified at a quali-
fied specialist workshop immediately.
Z
Hydraulic system
Supplementary text Û: Arbeitshydraulik: Öl nachfüllen
oder Motor abstellen
Working hydraulics:
oil level too low The working hydraulics oil level has fallen below the normal level. The
operating safety of the working hydraulics is jeopardised.
conditions.
X Switch off the engine.
X Check the working hydraulics oil level and top up the oil
(Y page 265).
Supplementary text Û: Leistungshydraulik: Öl nachfüllen

Power hydraulics: The power hydraulics oil level has fallen below the normal level. The
oil level too low operating safety of the power hydraulics is jeopardised.
conditions.
X Check the power hydraulics oil level and top up the oil
(Y page 266).
Red event window

Note
Red event window
For a malfunction of high priority, the on-board computer shows a red event window. The on-board
computer shows a red event window, e.g. for low brake reservoir pressure. Stop the vehicle as soon
as possible, while paying attention to the traffic conditions and contact a qualified specialist work-
shop. If further information about the malfunction is available, the event window displays the Û
symbol. You can display the information using the u button on the multifunction steering wheel.
Observe the information and instructions in the event window.

Â Supplementary text Û: Stop vehicle. Consult service
Diesel particulate centre. Regeneration is no longer possible.
filter full
The Â indicator lamp also lights up red in the instrument cluster.
The diesel particle filter has reached its soot saturation limit. Engine
performance is reduced and manual regeneration is no longer possi-
ble.
X Clean the diesel particle filter as soon as possible or have it replaced
at a qualified specialist workshop.
Compressed-air system

In addition, the J warning lamp lights up red in the instrument
\ cluster.
Example: Brake sup‐ The reservoir pressure in brake circuit 1 \ or 2 ^ is too low.
ply pressure in cir‐ If the reservoir pressure in the spring actuator and the trailer's brake
cuit 1 too low circuit is too low, the event window shows the J symbol.
Possible causes:
Rtoo much compressed air has been consumed.
Rthere is a leak in the compressed-air system.
G WARNING
The operating and road safety of the vehicle are jeopardised.
conditions.
X Start the engine.
The compressed-air system is charged.
If the J warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out:
X Continue the journey.
If the J warning lamp in the instrument cluster does not go out:
X Check the compressed-air brake system for leaks (Y page 145).
X If the compressed-air brake system is not leaking, but the J
warning lamp does not go out: have the compressed-air brake sys-
tem checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Z
Engine and cooling

Supplementary text Û: Stop vehicle. Switch off engine.
5 The 5 indicator lamp lights up red in the status area of the on-
Engine oil pressure board computer as well as in the event window. The engine oil pres-
too low sure is too low.
The operating safety of the engine is jeopardised.
conditions.
X Check the engine oil level (Y page 112) and top up with engine oil
(Y page 264).
Supplementary text Û: Top up coolant.

, The * indicator lamp lights up in the status area of the on-board
Coolant level too computer as well as in the event window. As long as the * indicator
low lamp is lit, the coolant temperature cannot be displayed.
The coolant level has dropped to approximately 1 l below the normal
filling level. The operating safety of the engine is jeopardised.
conditions.
X Top up the coolant (Y page 260).
X Have the engine cooling system checked for leaks at a qualified
specialist workshop.

Supplementary text Û: Stop vehicle. Contact service
Ø centre.
Clutch faulty
G WARNING
The transmission no longer changes gear. The reservoir pressure in
the transmission/clutch may be too low.
conditions.
X If the Transmission/clutch reserve pressure too low
event window is displayed: start the engine and let it run until
there is adequate reservoir pressure in the transmission circuit/
clutch circuit.
The Transmission/clutch reserve pressure too low event

window goes out.
X Start the engine again after approximately ten seconds.
X If theClutch faulty Stop vehicle. Contact service
centre. event window is displayed again: activate backup drive
mode (Y page 107).
X If backup drive mode cannot be activated: consult a qualified
Supplementary text Û: Park vehicle safely. Gears can

Ú only be changed in backup drive mode.
Transmission faulty
G WARNING
The transmission gearshift system is malfunctioning.
X Activate backup drive mode (Y page 107).
X Move the vehicle to a safe position.
conditions.
The oil temperature of the torque converter clutch is too high.

0 X Shift to a lower gear.
The oil temperature decreases, as soon as the torque converter
clutch engages. The X indicator lamp in the status area of the
on-board computer goes out.
The oil temperature does not decrease:
X Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Check the oil level and top up the engine oil if necessary
(Y page 262).
Z

X Shift to neutral.
X Let the engine run for around one minute at approximately
1,200 rpm.
The oil temperature still does not decrease:
Braking and driving systems

The parking brake is not applied.
M The vehicle was parked with a gear applied and the parking brake
Engage parking released. A warning tone also sounds.
brake.
G WARNING
The parked vehicle could roll away. You could endanger yourself and
others.
Vehicles with a programmable special module: the parking brake is

M not applied.
Engage parking The parking brake has not been applied before engaging the power
brake. take-off.
G WARNING
The parked vehicle could roll away. You could endanger yourself and
others.
X Apply the parking brake before engaging the power take-off.

J centre.
Increased brake In addition, the J warning lamp lights up red in the instrument
force and pedal cluster.
travel
Full braking power may not be available.
G WARNING
Driving and braking characteristics are affected. The operating and
road safety of the vehicle are jeopardised.
X Carefully bring the vehicle to a standstill and park it safely.

J

centre.
Driving and braking In addition, the J warning lamp lights up red in the instrument
characteristics cluster.
changed
The vehicle's brake system is malfunctioning.
G WARNING
Driving/braking characteristics may change.
X Carefully bring the vehicle to a standstill and park it safely.
Tyres
The tyre pressure has dropped in one or more tyres.
h
Check tyre pressure G WARNING
The driving and braking characteristics are affected.
X Stop the vehicle without steering or braking suddenly. Pay attention
to the traffic conditions.
X Check the tyres for damage.
X Check the compressed-air line for leaks.
X Check the tyre pressure and correct it if necessary.
X If necessary, change the tyre (Y page 288).
Z
130 Warning/indicator lamps in the status area of the on-board computer
Hydrostatic drive system

Supplementary text: Visit workshop.
X The hydrostatic drive system has been deactivated due to a malfunc-
Hydrostatic drive tion (overheating, damage, short circuit) and no longer exerts any
malfunctioning force.
Operate the brakes
conditions.
X Check the components of the hydrostatic drive system for external
damage.
Warning/indicator lamps in the sta- warning lamp/indicator lamp may also light up
tus area of the on-board computer in addition to an event window.
· An emissions-relevant malfunction
If you ignore warning and indicator lamps, you
in the BlueTec® exhaust gas after-
will not be able to recognise failures and mal-
functions in components or systems. Driving/ treatment system or low AdBlue®
braking characteristics may be affected and the supply (Y page 102)
operating and road safety of your vehicle may be 5 Engine oil pressure too low
limited. Have the affected system checked and (Y page 126)
repaired at a qualified specialist workshop.
Always observe the warning and indicator lamps 4 Engine oil level too low, top up
and follow the corresponding measures. engine oil (Y page 264)
# The battery charge status is too low
Overview ª Power supply malfunction
(Y page 123)
¯ Maintenance due date
(Y page 120)
¦ Oil level in the steering is too low
(Y page 120)
I Transmission power take-off
engaged (Y page 234)
Engine power take-off engaged
(Y page 235)
y Continuous brake malfunction
If there is a fault, warning or operating informa- (Y page 149)
tion, a warning lamp or indicator lamp lights up ! ABS status message: ! shown
in status area : of the on-board computer. The with s, r or u for tractor
warning lamp/indicator lamp lights up in a dif- vehicle and/or trailer
ferent colour, depending on the priority of the (Y page 145)
fault, warning or the operating information. The
Warning/indicator lamps in the status area of the on-board computer 131
Warning and indicator lamps Warning and indicator lamps

ß ABS malfunction, trailer (see manu- X Snow plough load relief activated
facturer's operating instructions) (Y page 220)
Û Brake system malfunction, trailer Y Vehicle tipper platform raised
(Y page 131) (Y page 245)
© Brake wear (tractor vehicle) X The torque converter lock-up clutch
(Y page 120) is open (Y page 165)
Ï Holding brake on the front axle acti- Ô The oil level in the torque converter
vated (Y page 148) clutch is too low (Y page 262)
u Direction of travel selection, back- 3 On-board voltage too low
wards, Telligent® gearshift (Y page 201)
(Y page 151), Telligent® automatic
F Engine speed mode has been acti-
gearshift (Y page 156)
vated manually (Y page 232)
* Coolant level too low

À Strobe lights activated (Y page 72)
é Auxiliary headlamp activated æ Driving with the control lever in the
(Y page 71)
hydrostatic drive system
V ABS off-road program activated (Y page 185)
(Y page 146) å Raising/lowering the tipper plat-
W Front PTO shaft activated form with the control lever
Yellow warning lamp/indicator lamp

The Û indicator lamp G Risk of accident
in the status area of the
on-board computer The trailer's brake system is malfunctioning. Driving/braking charac-
lights up yellow. teristics may change. Observe the notes on trailers (see the manu-
facturer's operating instructions).
X Drive on carefully.
X Have the brake system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Z
132 Warning/indicator lamps in the status area of the on-board computer
Red warning lamp/indicator lamp

The Û indicator lamp G Risk of accident
in the status area of the
on-board computer The trailer's brake system is malfunctioning or the trailer is automat-
lights up red. ically braked. Driving/braking characteristics may change. Observe
the notes on trailers (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
X Brake carefully and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and
traffic conditions.
Anti-theft protection 133

If you handle or operate mobile audio/video
G WARNING sources while driving, your attention may be
The CD/DVD drive is a class 1 laser product. diverted from the traffic conditions. You could
then lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk
Multimedia systems
If you open the housing of the CD/DVD drive,
invisible laser beams may be released. These of an accident.
laser beams may damage your retina. There is Only handle or operate these mobile audio/
a risk of injury. video sources when the vehicle is stationary.
Do not open the housing. Always have main- Only operate mobile audio/video sources via
tenance work and repairs carried out at a the communications devices integrated into
qualified specialist workshop. the vehicle when traffic conditions permit. If
this is not the case, pull over to a safe location
G WARNING and make entries only while the vehicle is sta-
If you handle a disc while driving, you may be tionary.
distracted from the traffic situation. This
could also cause you to lose control of the G WARNING
vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. If you operate two-way radios incorrectly in
Only handle a disc when the vehicle is sta- the vehicle, their electromagnetic radiation
tionary. can interfere with the vehicle electronics, for
example if:
G WARNING Rthe two-way radio is not connected to an
If you operate information and communica- exterior aerial
tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when Rthe exterior aerial is not correctly mounted
driving, you could be distracted from the traf- or is not low-reflection
fic situation. This could also cause you to lose This could jeopardise the operating safety of
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
accident.
Have the low-reflection exterior aerial fitted at
Only operate this equipment when the traffic a qualified specialist workshop. When oper-
situation permits. If you cannot be sure of this, ating two-way radios in the vehicle, always
stop the vehicle paying attention to road and connect them to the low-reflection exterior
traffic conditions and operate the equipment aerial.
with the vehicle stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the

country in which you are currently driving when General notes
operating the system.
These brief instructions only describe the basic
G WARNING operation of your audio system.
If you use mobile information systems and All further information on the individual func-
communications devices while driving, you tions can be found on the Internet at
will be distracted from traffic conditions. You www.mercedes-benz.de/betriebsanleitung-
could then lose control of the vehicle. There is lkw.
a risk of an accident.
Only operate these devices when the vehicle
is stationary.
Anti-theft protection
If the CD radio has been/is disconnected from

the battery, the anti-theft protection is active.
Z
134 Operating system
The display of the switched on CD radio shows X Switch on the ignition.

BLOCKED. You can now use the CD radio.
Operating system
Multimedia systems
CD/radio overview
Function
: Control knob
RPress:
To switch on/off
RTurn:
Adjusting the volume
Changes settings in menus
; ´
To switch folders in MP3 and USB mode
= w
RPress briefly:
Accepting an incoming call
RPress and hold:
To activate Bluetooth®
To start Bluetooth® search
To start Bluetooth® pairing (pairing/external)
? Microphone for making calls via Bluetooth®
Operating system 135
Function
A t
RPress briefly:
To select a menu:
Multimedia systems
To activate/deactivate the TP function
To change the track time display
To activate/deactivate XMUT
To switch RDS on/off
To set the type of Bluetooth® pairing
RPress and hold:
To display the connected mobile phone
B CD drive
C Display
D 88
RPress briefly:
To mute the audio source
RPress and hold:
To eject a CD
E F
RRadio:
-Press briefly:
Station search forwards
- Press and hold:
Manual station search
RCD and USB mode:
- Press briefly:
Skips forward1
- Press and hold:
Fast forward
RAUX mode:
To switch over to a rear AUX jack
1 Also possible in Bluetooth® audio mode

Z
136 Operating system
Function
F SRC
RPress briefly:
To select an audio source:
Multimedia systems
Radio
CD playback
USB
AUX function
BT audio (MP3 playback)
Exiting the menu
RPress and hold:
To end the current traffic report
G BND
RPress briefly:
Switching wavebands
RPress and hold:
Storing stations automatically
H E
RRadio:
-Press briefly:
Station search backwards
- Press and hold:
Manual station search
RCD and USB mode:
- Press briefly:
To skip back1
- Press and hold:
Fast rewind
RAUX mode:
To switch over to a front AUX jack
I AUX jack
J Mini USB port
K ¸ to Â
RRadio:
-Press briefly:
Selects stations from the station presets
- Press and hold:
Storing stations manually
RCD and USB mode:
¿ To activate/deactivate random track
À To activate/deactivate track repeat
1 Also possible in Bluetooth® audio mode
Bluetooth® settings 137
Function
L =
RPress briefly:
To end/reject an incoming call
Multimedia systems
RPress and hold:
To deactivate Bluetooth®
M ´
To switch folders in MP3 and USB mode
N u
RPress briefly:
To call up the sound menu
RPress and hold:
To reset the sound settings
Function overview Requirements for a Bluetooth® connec-

tion
You can use the CD/radio to operate the fol-
lowing functions: The following requirements must be met for the
Rradio, to receive FM and AM (SW, MW, LW) CD/radio to detect the mobile phone:
wavebands Rthe mobile phone must be in the vehicle in the
RCD, to play WMA and MP3 formats vicinity of the CD/radio.
Rplay MP3 files, which are saved on USB devi- Rthe Bluetooth® function of the CD/radio must
ces be activated (Y page 137).
Rmake a call Rthe mobile phone must be ready for pairing.
Rplay MP3 players which are connected via
Bluetooth® (if supported by your device)
Rplay external devices, which are connected Activating/deactivating the Blue-
via the AUX jack tooth® function
Activating the Bluetooth® function
Bluetooth® settings
X Press and hold the ; button.
Notes on Bluetooth® function BT ON appears briefly in the display. The ª
Bluetooth® symbol flashes in the display, the
Information on suitable mobile phones CD/radio searches automatically for mobile
phones that have already been coupled with
Bluetooth® mode via the CD/radio is available the CD/radio.
in conjunction with a Bluetooth®-capable
mobile phone.
Further information on suitable mobile phones
and connecting Bluetooth®-capable mobile
phones to the audio system can be obtained at
your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
i The Bluetooth® function will remain active
until you deactivate it again. When you switch
off the CD/radio, the Bluetooth® connection
Z
138 Bluetooth® settings
is interrupted. When the CD/radio is X Press the E or F button to select the

switched on it re-establishes the connection desired mobile phone.
automatically. X Press and hold the ; button.
Deactivating the Bluetooth® function

Multimedia systems
X Press and hold the = button.

BT OFF appears briefly in the display. The
connection to the mobile phone has been
interrupted.
X Use the number keys to enter a number with
one to six digits that can be easily memorised,
e.g. 1111.
X Press and hold the ; button.
The CD/radio is ready for pairing with a
mobile phone.
X On the mobile phone, select the Bluetooth®
device name MB-Bluetooth.
Pairing a mobile phone X Enter the previously dialled number on the
mobile phone.
Pairing the mobile phone via Bluetooth® The CD/radio establishes a connection to the
mobile phone. When the connection has been
X Press the t button repeatedly until BT established, PAIR OK appears briefly in the
PAIR or BT EXT appears in the display. display.
X Turn the control knob anti-clockwise. X Confirm any prompts via the mobile phone.
BT PAIR appears briefly in the display. Telephone data is transferred from the mobile
phone to the CD/radio. When the transfer has
been completed, the current audio source
and the ª Bluetooth® symbol are shown per-
manently in the display.
Pairing a mobile phone externally via

X To exit the menu: press the SRC button or Bluetooth®
wait 10 seconds.
X To start a search for mobile phones: X Press the t button repeatedly until BT
PAIR or BT EXT appears in the display.
press and hold the ; button.
X Turn the control knob clockwise.
The ª Bluetooth® symbol flashes in the dis-
play. The CD/radio searches for a certain BT EXT appears in the display.
period for mobile phones in range. After the
search, a tone sounds.
If at least one mobile phone is detected, BT
LIST appears briefly in the display and then
the device name of the mobile phone.
X To exit the menu: press the SRC button or

wait 10 seconds.
X To prepare the CD/radio for a search:
Press and hold the ; button.
The ª Bluetooth® symbol flashes in the dis-
i If the CD/radio cannot find a mobile phone, play.
BT LIST EMPTY appears briefly in the display.
Bluetooth® settings 139
Multimedia systems
X Use the number keys to enter a number with
one to six digits that can be easily memorised,
e.g. 1111.
X Press and hold the ; button until a tone
sounds.
The CD/radio is ready for pairing with a
mobile phone.
X On the mobile phone, start the search for
Bluetooth® devices. See the manufacturer's
operating instructions.
X On the mobile phone, select the Bluetooth®
device name MB-Bluetooth.
X Enter the previously dialled number on the
mobile phone.
The CD/radio establishes a connection to the
mobile phone. When the connection has been
established, PAIR OK appears briefly in the
display.
X Confirm any prompts via the mobile phone.
Telephone data is transferred from the mobile
phone to the CD/radio. When the transfer has
been completed, the current audio source
and the ª Bluetooth® symbol are shown per-
manently in the display.
Z
140 Driving
Useful information Have all faults and damage rectified. If neces-

sary, have the causes determined and rectified
at a qualified specialist workshop.
your vehicle that were available at the time of Visual and function check in the vehicle
possible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not General notes
be equipped with all the functions described. Please note that all electronic systems in the
This also applies to safety-relevant systems and vehicle only serve to assist you. They do not
functions. relieve you of the obligation to carry out a visual
Read the information on qualified specialist inspection of the vehicle and the trailer before
workshops (Y page 31). starting a journey.
Driving mode
Emergency equipment/first-aid kit

Driving You will find an overview of emergency equip-
ment and first-aid kits in the "Breakdown assis-
Preparing for a journey tance" section (Y page 278).
X Check the emergency equipment to make
Visual and function check outside the sure that it is accessible, complete and ready
vehicle for use.
Before you pull away, carry out the following These are, for example:
checks on the towing vehicle and the trailer: Rfirst-aid kit
X Check the exterior lighting (Y page 69). Rwarning triangle
X Replace faulty bulbs (Y page 72). Rwarning beacon
X Check the vehicle lighting for cleanliness and Rfire extinguisher
damage. X At regular intervals, check that the first-aid kit
X Check that the licence plate is clean. is usable. Note the use-by dates of the con-
X Check the tyre pressures, tyres and wheels
tents.
for firm seating and general condition. X Have the fire extinguisher checked every one
X Check the tyres for sufficient tread depth.
to two years.
When doing so, observe the country-specific X The fire extinguisher must be refilled after
regulations regarding minimum tyre tread each use.
depth. In some countries, it is a legal requirement to
X Check tyres and wheels for visible damage carry additional emergency equipment on
and tears. board, e.g. a breathalyser. Observe the legal
X Make sure that the vehicle is loaded correctly. requirements regarding emergency equipment
X Check that the dropsides and exterior flaps
in all countries concerned. Supplement your
are locked securely and check for damage. emergency equipment accordingly.
X Check the condition of the contour markings Checking the fuel level/AdBlue® supply
at all attachments and bodies.
X Check the fuel level/AdBlue® supply shown
X In wintry conditions, remove snow and accu-
on the fuel gauge (Y page 100) and on the
mulations of ice from the tractor vehicle and
trailer/semitrailer. AdBlue® gauge (Y page 100).
X If necessary, refuel (Y page 193) and top up
X Check that trailer cables and compressed-air
lines are connected correctly (Y page 198). the AdBlue® (Y page 195).
X Check that the trailer coupling is locked and
Checking the engine oil level
secured correctly.
X Check the engine oil level before every jour-
Observe the operating instructions issued by
the manufacturer for the operation, care and ney and top up the engine oil if necessary
maintenance of the trailer coupling. (Y page 263).
Driving 141
The engine oil level is not displayed while the over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle
engine is running. occupants. There is a risk of injury, especially
when braking or abruptly changing directions.
Ignition lock Always store objects so that they cannot be
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or
G WARNING loads against slipping or tipping before the
If you attach heavy or large objects to the key, journey.
the key could be unintentionally turned in the
ignition lock. This could cause the engine to G WARNING
be switched off. There is a risk of an accident. Objects in the driver's footwell can impede
pedal travel or block a pedal which is
Driving mode
Do not attach any heavy or large objects to the
key. Remove any bulky keyrings before insert- depressed. This jeopardises safe operation of
ing the key into the ignition lock. the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Stow all objects in the vehicle safely, so that
G WARNING they cannot reach the driver's footwell. Make
If you switch off the ignition while driving, sure the floormats and carpets are properly
safety-relevant functions are only available secured so that they cannot slip and obstruct
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, the pedals. Do not lay several floormats or
for example, the power steering and the brake carpets on top of one another.
boosting effect. You will require considerably
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk G WARNING
of an accident. Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage
Do not switch off the ignition while driving. of the pedals, e.g.:
Rshoes with thick soles
Rshoes with high heels
Rslippers
Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct
usage of the pedals.
G WARNING
If you load the vehicle unevenly, driving char-
acteristics such as steering and braking
g To insert/remove the vehicle key behaviour may be severely impaired. There is
1 Steering wheel unlocked/radio position a risk of an accident.
2 Drive position; ignition is switched on Load the vehicle evenly. Secure the load so
3 Start position that it cannot slip.
Driving, braking and steering characteristics

change depending on:
Before driving off
Rtype of load
Important safety notes Rweight
Rthe centre of gravity of the load
G WARNING
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or
not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip
Z
142 Driving
X Close all doors. the engine compartment or in the exhaust

X Store or secure all loose items. system.
X Make sure that the floormats and carpets are
properly secured so that they cannot slip and ! If the engine oil pressure is too low, the on-
obstruct the pedals. board computer will display the 5 symbol
in a red event window. Additionally, the warn-
Starting the engine ing buzzer will sound.
The operating safety of the engine is jeopar-
G WARNING dised. Switch off the engine immediately.
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, Observe the information and instructions on this
they could: event window in the "On-board computer and
displays" section (Y page 126).
Driving mode
Ropen doors, thereby endangering other per-

X Depress the brake pedal or apply the parking
sons or road users brake.
Rget out and be struck by oncoming traffic X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
Roperate vehicle equipment and become lock.
trapped, for example The instrument cluster display check starts.
The display check in the instrument cluster
In addition, the children could also set the allows you to see what equipment is connec-
vehicle in motion, for example, if they: ted and if it has developed any faults.
Rrelease the parking brake The immobiliser is deactivated and the engine
can be started. If you use an invalid key, the
Rshift the transmission to neutral on-board computer will show an event win-
Rstart the engine dow. Use a valid spare key.
There is a risk of an accident and injury. X Check the engine oil level (Y page 112).
When leaving the vehicle, always take the key X Shift to neutral.
with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave X Make sure that engine power take-off is dis-
children and animals unattended in the vehi- engaged (Y page 235).
X Make sure that the front PTO shaft is disen-
cle. Keep the keys out of the reach of children.
gaged (Y page 237).
X Turn the key to starting position 3 in the
G DANGER
ignition lock. Do not depress the accelerator
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust pedal whilst doing so.
gases such as carbon monoxide. Breathing in X Release the key when the engine starts.
these exhaust gases is hazardous to health The idling speed is controlled automatically.
and results in poisoning. There is a risk of fatal i The idling speed increases in the following
injury. Therefore, never leave the engine run- cases:
ning in an enclosed space without sufficient Rwhen the outside temperature is very low
ventilation. Rduring regeneration of the diesel particle
filter, for vehicles in accordance with the
G WARNING Euro 6 standard
Flammable materials introduced through The starting procedure is automatically can-
environmental influence or by animals can celled after approximately 60 seconds.
ignite if in contact with the exhaust system or X If the engine fails to start: rectify the cause
parts of the engine that heat up. There is a risk of the poor starting characteristics.
of fire.
Carry out regular checks to make sure that
there are no flammable foreign materials in
Driving 143
Possible causes of poor starting characteristics Do not pull away, or stop the vehicle as soon
are, for example: as possible, paying attention to road and traf-
Ra blocked fuel filter fic conditions. Secure the vehicle against roll-
Ran empty fuel tank (Y page 193) ing away, e.g. with the parking brake. Have
Rfuel system not bled (Y page 287) the compressed-air system repaired at a
X Repeat the starting procedure. qualified specialist workshop.
X If the engine still fails to start, contact a quali-
fied specialist workshop. The reservoir pressure in the transmission/
clutch circuit is supplied once brake circuits 1
and 2 have been charged.
Safety inspection
If the reservoir pressure in the transmission/
clutch circuit is too low, the on-board computer
Driving mode
Checking the reservoir pressure in the displays the yellow : Transmission/
compressed-air brake system clutch reserve pressure too low event
G WARNING window.
X Start the engine.
It is not possible to brake the vehicle if the
compressed-air brake system has a leak or if X Leave the engine running until the yel-
there insufficient reservoir pressure. There is low : Transmission/clutch reserve

pressure too low event window in the on-
a risk of an accident. board computer goes out.
Do not pull away until the required reservoir
pressures have been reached.
In the event of loss of pressure while driving, Pulling away
immediately bring the vehicle to a halt in
accordance with the traffic conditions.
! Do not pull away as soon as the engine
starts. Let the engine run in neutral for a short
Secure the vehicle using the parking brake. time after starting, until there is sufficient
Have the compressed-air system repaired at a engine oil pressure. Do not drive at high
qualified specialist workshop. engine speeds when the engine is cold.
This will prevent excessive wear and possible
X Start the engine. engine failure.
X Leave the engine running until the J warn- You should pay particularly close attention to
ing lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. road conditions as soon as temperatures
X Call up the Reserve pressure menu window approach freezing.
(Y page 111) and check the current reservoir There is a delay in displaying a change in outside
pressure. temperature.
Observe the event window in the on-board com- If the brake system is faulty, the braking char-
puter and the indicator lamps in the status area acteristics can change or the brake system can
of the on-board computer/instrument cluster fail. If you notice a reduction in braking power
on the reservoir pressure and the compressed- when testing the brakes, stop the vehicle as
air brake system. soon as possible in accordance with traffic con-
ditions. Have the brake system checked and
Checking the reservoir pressure in the repaired in a qualified specialist workshop.
transmission/clutch circuit If you ignore warning lamps and messages on
G WARNING the instrument cluster, you will not be able to
recognise failures and malfunctions affecting
If there is a loss of pressure or insufficient
the brake system components and systems.
reservoir pressure in the transmission/clutch Braking characteristics may change. The pedal
circuit, you can no longer shift gears. There is travel and pedal force required to brake the
a risk of an accident. vehicle may increase. Have the brake system
checked and repaired at a qualified specialist
Z
144 Brakes
workshop. Always pay attention to the warning considerably more force to steer and brake.
lamps and messages in the instrument cluster. There is a risk of an accident.
X Engage a gear, Telligent® gearshift
Do not switch off the ignition while the vehicle
(Y page 150)/Telligent automatic gearshift
(Y page 155). is in motion.
X Release the brake pedal or parking brake and
slowly depress the accelerator pedal. G WARNING
X When starting a journey, carry out a brake If you leave children unattended in the vehi-
test. Observe the road and traffic conditions cle, they could set the vehicle in motion by, for
when doing so. example:
Warm up the engine quickly by driving at mod- Rreleasing the parking brake
erate engine speeds. After approximately10 to
Driving mode

20 minutes, the engine will reach its operating
temperature between approximately 85 and Rstarting the engine
100 †. They could also operate the vehicle's equip-
You can utilise the full engine power output once ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
the engine has reached its normal operating
temperature.
with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave
Stopping and switching off the engine children unattended in the vehicle.
G WARNING Ensure that you observe the safety notes in the

Flammable material such as leaves, grass or section "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 48).
twigs may ignite if they come into contact with X Stop the vehicle.
hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust X Apply the parking brake.
gas flow. There is a risk of fire. X Shift to neutral.
X Let the engine idle for approximately two
Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate-
minutes before switching it off if:
rial can come into contact with hot vehicle
Rthe coolant temperature is above approx-
components. In particular, do not park on dry
imately 100 †
grassland or harvested grain fields.
Rfull engine power has been used, e.g. while
driving in mountainous terrain or during
G WARNING combined operation. This is particularly
The parking brake may not be sufficient to important when the vehicle is stopped at
ensure that the loaded vehicles does not roll elevations more than 1,000 m above sea
away on uphill and downhill gradients. There level.
X Vehicle with trailer: check the parking brake
(Y page 147).
In the test position, check whether the park-
X To switch off the engine: turn the key to
ing brake will hold the loaded vehicle. If the position g in the ignition lock and remove it.
vehicle is not held, secure it using other meth- X Safeguard the vehicle and trailer against roll-
ods, e.g. wheel chocks. ing away; use chocks if necessary.
G WARNING
If you switch off the ignition while the vehicle Brakes
is in motion, safety-relevant functions are
restricted or not available. This can affect the Brake system
power steering function and the brake boost- If the brake system is faulty, the braking char-
ing effect, for example. You will then require acteristics can change or the brake system can
Brakes 145
fail. If you notice a reduction in braking power X Stop the vehicle on a level surface.
when testing the brakes, stop the vehicle as X Apply the parking brake.
soon as possible in accordance with traffic con- X Use chocks to safeguard the vehicle against
ditions. Have the brake system checked and rolling away.
repaired in a qualified specialist workshop.
X Release the parking brake.
If you ignore warning lamps and messages on
the instrument cluster, you will not be able to
recognise failures and malfunctions affecting lock.
the brake system components and systems. X Call up the Reserve pressure menu window
Braking characteristics may change. The pedal in the ã monitoring information menu in the
travel and pedal force required to brake the on-board computer (Y page 111).
vehicle may increase. Have the brake system X Run the engine until the display shows a res-
checked and repaired at a qualified specialist ervoir pressure of at least 11 bar.
Driving mode
workshop. Always pay attention to the warning X Switch off the engine.
lamps and messages in the instrument cluster. X Turn the key to the drive position in the igni-
If the brake system is malfunctioning, pay attention lock.
tion to the instructions in the yellow X Call up the Reserve pressure menu window
(Y page 121) or red (Y page 128) event window.
in the ã monitoring information menu in the
In addition to the event window, an indicator
on-board computer once again (Y page 111).
lamp may light up in the instrument cluster or
the status area of the on-board computer and X Depress the brake pedal and keep it in this
the warning buzzer may sound. position.
The brake system is equipped at the factory with X Read off the reservoir pressure after approx-
the following systems: imately one minute.
X Read off the reservoir pressure again after
RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
another minute.
RALB (automatic load-dependent brake) If no significant loss of pressure can be detec-
ted in the Reserve pressure menu window
in the on-board computer after this minute,
Checking the compressed-air system the compressed-air brake system is free from
for leaks leaks.
If a significant loss of pressure is detected,
G WARNING the compressed-air brake system is leaking.
It is not possible to brake the vehicle if the X If the compressed-air brake system is leaking,
compressed-air brake system has a leak or if have it checked and repaired at a qualified
there insufficient reservoir pressure. There is specialist workshop.
Do not pull away until the required reservoir
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
pressures have been reached.
In the event of loss of pressure while driving, Important safety notes
immediately bring the vehicle to a halt in
If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you are
accordance with the traffic conditions. inattentive, the driving safety systems can nei-
Secure the vehicle using the parking brake. ther reduce the risk of an accident nor override
Have the compressed-air system repaired at a the laws of physics.
qualified specialist workshop. Driving safety systems are merely aids designed
to assist driving. You are responsible for the dis-
Do not let anyone enter or exit the vehicle during tance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed
the test. This will help to prevent you from mis- and for braking in good time. Always adapt your
taking pressure loss due to air-sprung seats for driving style to the prevailing road and weather
leakage. conditions and maintain a sufficient, safe dis-
tance from other road users. Drive carefully.
Z
146 Brakes
ABS regulates the brake pressure to prevent the Always adapt your driving style to the prevail-
wheels from locking when braking. This means ing road and weather conditions and maintain
that the vehicle can still be steered while brak-
ing. a sufficient, safe distance from other road
ABS is operational from walking pace, regard- users. Avoid full brake applications; except in
less of road surface conditions. If the road is emergency situations.
slippery, ABS intervenes even if you only brake
gently. If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel the
steering wheel vibrate slightly.
G WARNING X If ABS intervenes: keep the brake pedal
If ABS is malfunctioning, the wheels could firmly depressed until the braking situation
lock when braking. The steerability and brak- has passed.
X During full brake application: depress the
Driving mode
ing characteristics are thus severely impaired.

There is an increased risk of skidding and an brake pedal with full force.
accident. During ABS braking intervention, the continuous
Drive on carefully. Have the ABS checked at a brake and the differential locks are disengaged
qualified specialist workshop as soon as pos- automatically.
sible. The following symbols can appear in the status
area of the on-board computer:
i The tyre pressure table can be found in the R! s: anti-lock protection for the trac-
"Technical data" section (Y page 304). tor vehicle is deactivated.
R! u: anti-lock protection for the trac-
ABS only functions properly if you use wheels
with the specified tyre size. tor vehicle and trailer are deactivated.
R! r: there is a possibility of the trailer
The full effect of the ABS system is only achieved
when the tyre pressure is set correctly and being overbraked. Observe the trailer in the
adjusted to the load. In wintry driving condi- exterior rear view mirror and avoid heavy
tions, always use winter tyres (M+S tyres), if braking. Thereby, the tractor/trailer combi-
necessary with snow chains. nation remains stable.
When the front-axle differential lock is engaged,
ABS is deactivated. ABS off-road program
X Vehicles with Telligent® gearshift: on slip- The ABS off-road program can be activated for
pery road surfaces, also depress the clutch off-road driving. When braking at speeds of
pedal. between approximately 40 and 15 km/h, the
The engine braking effect cannot affect the ABS off-road program allows the wheels to lock
ABS control system. briefly. This reduces the braking distance on
corresponding surfaces.
Braking with anti-lock protection At speeds below approximately 15 km/h, ABS is
deactivated and the wheels may lock. The steer-
G WARNING ability of the vehicle is impaired when the
wheels are locked.
The wheels of the trailer/semitrailer may lock
when braking and the vehicle combination G WARNING
may become unstable if: If the ABS Off-road program is activated, the
Rthe trailer/semitrailer does not have ABS wheels may lock when braked. As a result, the
Rthe ABS of the trailer/semitrailer has failed
vehicle can no longer be steered. There is an
increased risk of skidding and an accident.
RABS has failed completely
Deactivate the ABS Off-road program on pub-
As a result, you could lose control of the vehi- lic roads and firm surfaces.
cle and cause an accident.
Brakes 147
Driving mode
ABS on the trailer cannot be controlled using Safeguard the parked vehicle against rolling
button :. away by applying the parking brake. The parking
X To activate the ABS off-road program: brake actuates the spring-loaded parking brake
press button :. cylinder.
ABS is in the off-road program. You can find further information about the park-
ing brake on the trailer in the manufacturer's
The indicator lamp in the status area of operating instructions.
the on-board computer lights up.
Applying the parking brake
X To deactivate the ABS off-road program:
press button : once more. X Move parking brake lever : from released
The ABS off-road program is switched off and position 1 to fully applied position 2 and
ABS is activated. engage it.
The ! indicator lamp in the instrument
The indicator lamp in the status area of cluster lights up.
Trailer with EC brake system: when a trailer is
attached, the parking brake actuates the trail-
er's service brake.
Parking brake X Vehicles with a trailer: apply the trailer's
parking brake; see the manufacturer's oper-
G WARNING ating instructions.
If the parking brake lever is not in the fully
Vehicle with trailer: check the parking
applied position, it automatically returns to brake when parking the vehicle
the released position. The vehicle could roll
away as a result. There is a risk of an accident.
X Press the top of parking brake lever :. While
Move the lever into the fully applied position doing so, move parking brake lever : beyond
when parking the vehicle. fully applied position 2 into control position
3 and hold it.
G WARNING During the test, the vehicle combination is
only held by the force exerted by the spring-
The parking brake may not be sufficient to
loaded brake of the tractor vehicle. The trailer
ensure that the loaded vehicles does not roll brake is released.
away on uphill and downhill gradients. There The vehicle must not move.
is a risk of an accident. X If the force exerted by the spring-loaded
In the test position, check whether the park- brake cannot hold the vehicle combination,
ing brake will hold the loaded vehicle. If the secure the tractor vehicle and trailer using
vehicle is not held, secure it using other meth- chocks.
ods, e.g. wheel chocks. X Move parking brake lever : from control
position 3 back to fully applied position 2
and engage it.
Z
148 Brakes
Releasing the parking brake skids, brake additionally with the service
X Pull parking brake lever : upwards from fully brake.
applied position 2 and swing it up into
released position 1 as far as it will go.
The ! indicator lamp in the instrument Activating the holding brake on the
cluster goes out. front axle
If the reservoir pressure in both brake circuits
is above 8 bar, the parking brake releases
fully.
If the ! indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster does not go out, the reservoir pressure
in the spring-loaded brake circuit has dropped
Driving mode
below 5.5 bar and is too low.

To tow the vehicle, you can also release the
spring-loaded parking brake cylinder on the
parking brake manually (Y page 299).
Holding brake on the front axle, in X Secure the vehicle with wheel chocks.
addition to the parking brake on the X Start the engine.
rear axle X Shift to neutral.
X Apply the parking brake (Y page 147).
Important safety notes X Press button :.
The holding brake on the front axle connects the The Ï indicator lamp in the status area of
rear axle parking brake with the front axle ser- the on-board computer lights up.
vice brake. It provides safe support for the The holding brake on the front axle is activa-
Unimog, e.g. when carrying out recovery oper- ted and a set brake pressure is applied to the
ations using the winch. brakes on the front axle.
The holding brake on the front axle may only be
activated when the engine is running. The per- i If, after the engine has stalled, for example,
manent holding brake function is also only avail- you start the engine by turning the key in the
able when the engine is running. If the engine ignition lock:
switches off, the 4-wheel parking brake Rfrom position 2 to position 3, the hold-
not assured message appears in the on-board ing brake on the front axle remains activa-
computer display. You must restart the engine ted.
immediately to ensure the holding brake func- Rfrom position g to position 3, the hold-
tion is still available. ing brake on the front axle is deactivated.
G WARNING To activate the holding brake on the front
axle, you must press button : again.
If the engine switches off or if there is a loss of
pressure or interruption of the on-board elec- Deactivating the holding brake on the
trical system voltage in the compressed-air front axle
brake system, the holding brake on the front
axle is released. This reduces the holding With parking brake:
force of the vehicle and it may roll away or X Release the parking brake (Y page 147).
skid. There is a risk of an accident. The parking brake on the rear axle is released.
The holding brake on the front axle remains in
Do not exit the driver's seat when the holding
brake position.
brake on the front axle is released and always
be ready to brake. If the vehicle rolls away or
Brakes 149
In the on-board computer, the 4-wheel G WARNING

parking brake not assured message is
displayed. If you activate the continuous brake or shift to
X Engage a gear and pull away. a lower gear on a slippery road surface in
The holding brake on the front axle is order to increase the engine's braking effect,
released. the drive wheels may lose traction. There is an
The Ï indicator lamp in the status area of increased risk of skidding and an accident.
the on-board computer goes out. Do not activate the continuous brake and do
With button: not shift to a lower gear in order to increase
X Press button : again. the engine's braking effect on a slippery road
The holding brake on the front axle is surface.
released. The parking brake remains in brake
Driving mode
position. Activating and deactivating the contin-
The Ï indicator lamp in the status area of uous brake
With key: ! If the continuous brake is deactivated and
the Ã indicator lamp in the instrument
X Turn the key to position 1 or position g in cluster does not go out, have the continuous
the ignition lock. brake checked at a qualified specialist work-
The holding brake on the front axle is shop.
released. The parking brake remains in brake
position.
The Ï indicator lamp in the status area of
Continuous brake
The engine brake is used as the continuous
brake.
The effectiveness of the engine brake depends
X To activate: pull the multifunction lever to set
on the engine speed. A high engine speed
results in more effective engine braking. to the desired brake level.
The Ã indicator lamp in the instrument
Observe the effective engine braking range cluster lights up.
marked on the rev counter (Y page 99).
The braking effect of the continuous brake is
At very low outside temperatures, the engine lowest in position 1 and highest in position
brake has limited or no effect after the engine 2.
has been started.
X To deactivate: push the multifunction lever
You can utilise the engine's braking effect, par-
into position g.
ticularly on long downhill gradients, if you:
The Ã indicator lamp in the instrument
Ractivate the continuous brake cluster goes out.
Rshift to a lower gear in good time If you turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
The continuous brake is activated automatically lock and the Ã indicator lamp flashes in the
if: instrument cluster, the multifunction lever is not
Rthe vehicle electronics detect that the vehicle in position g.
is loaded after several brake applications and When ABS intervenes, the continuous brake is
you depress the brake pedal switched off. The Ã indicator lamp in the
Rcruise control or speed limiter intervenes in instrument cluster remains on.
overrun mode
Z
150 Telligent® gearshift
Telligent® gearshift When driving, the transmission control controls

clutch and gear operation, e.g. when:
Important safety notes Rpulling away
Rmanoeuvring
Telligent® gearshift is an electronic/pneumatic
gearshift. Rchanging gear
The driver initiates the gear change process by Rstopping
depressing the clutch pedal; Telligent® gearshift If the Telligent® gearshift malfunctions, it is pos-
shifts the transmission automatically. sible to continue driving in backup drive mode
(Y page 107).
G WARNING
Do not let the engine speed drop below the min-
If there is a loss of pressure or insufficient imum engine speed of 720 rpm.
Driving mode
reservoir pressure in the transmission/clutch

circuit, you can no longer shift gears. There is Multifunction lever
Do not pull away, or stop the vehicle as soon
as possible, paying attention to road and traf-
fic conditions. Secure the vehicle against roll-
ing away, e.g. with the parking brake. Have
the compressed-air system repaired at a
Keep an eye on the rev counter while driving and

stay within the economical operating range.
Drive in the highest possible gear. Shift down in
good time before an uphill or downhill gradient.
If possible, change several gears at once and : To select the direction of travel:
avoid changing gear unless necessary. h Drive for driving forward (Y page 152)
Always depress the clutch pedal until the gear i Neutral (Y page 154)
change process is complete. The on-board com- k Reverse (Y page 155)
puter display shows the engaged gear. ; q Gear preselection upshift (Y page 152)
If the clutch pedal is released before the gear = Pulling-away gear
change process is complete: d Automatic pulling-away gear
RTelligent® gearshift automatically shifts to the p Manual pulling-away gear
neutral position ? ± Gear preselection downshift
RN flashes in the display (Y page 152)
Ra clacking noise will sound repeatedly in the
instrument cluster
When the clutch is then depressed, an appro-
priate gear will be selected again.
Multifunction lever and gear indicator

General notes
The Telligent® gearshift has eight forward gears
and six reverse gears.
Telligent® gearshift 151
Gear indicator Gear preselection

X Pull away with gear preselection
(Y page 153).
X To downshift: briefly push the cruise control
lever away : from the steering wheel.
The transmission control shifts down one
gear.
The preselected gear flashes in the on-board
computer display. The gear preselection is
stored for approximately 120 seconds.
or
Driving mode
X To upshift: briefly pull the cruise control lever
: Direction of travel and/or selected gear towards = the steering wheel.

The transmission control shifts up one gear.
; Pulling-away gear
d Automatic pulling-away gear
p Manual pulling-away gear stored for approximately 120 seconds.
Possible displays:
1–8 1st to 8th gear Direction of travel preselection
N Neutral position X Make sure that the vehicle speed is below
R1 – R6 1st to 6th reverse gear 30 km/h.
X Make sure that the speed limiter
(Y page 171) and cruise control
Cruise control lever (Y page 172) are deactivated.
X Turn the direction of travel selection switch to
Overview the h (drive/driving forwards) position.
The cruise control lever has equal status with X Direction of travel preselection, reverse:
the multifunction lever and can be used alter- briefly push the cruise control lever to the
nately. This enables simplified equipment oper- left ?.
ation using the control lever, for example, since A warning tone sounds.
the right hand is not needed for drive functions. or
X Direction of travel preselection, forward:
briefly push the cruise control lever to the
right ;.
A warning tone sounds.
X Release the accelerator pedal and reduce
speed until the vehicle is almost stationary.
X Depress the clutch pedal.
A clacking noise sounds in the instrument
cluster; the preselected gear is selected. The
u indicator lamp in the status area of the
on-board computer lights up. The on-board
computer display shows the engaged gear.
: Gear preselection downshift X Slowly release the clutch pedal and depress
; Direction of travel preselection forward the accelerator pedal.
= Gear preselection upshift
? Direction of travel preselection reverse
Z
Operating lever Pulling-away gear

Overview
The control lever has equal status with the mul-
tifunction lever and the cruise control lever. The
control lever can be used alternately.
Driving mode
The pulling-away gear can be selected at any

time.
X To engage the manual pulling-away gear:
press the o button : briefly.
The on-board computer display shows the
manual pulling-away gear M.
Direction of travel preselection The pulling-away gear stored in the control
X Make sure that the vehicle speed is below unit is selected.
30 km/h. X To engage the automatic pulling-away
X Ensure that: gear: press the o button : briefly.
Rthe hydraulic system is enabled
automatic pulling-away gear A.
(Y page 205) or
Rthe hydrostatic drive system is activated
The pulling-away gear is selected automati-
cally depending on the load and gradient.
(Y page 178) or
Rthe engine speed mode is activated
(Y page 232).
X Turn the direction of travel selection switch to Pulling away
the h (drive/driving forwards) position.
Overview
X Press the u button : forwards or back-
wards.
A warning tone sounds. The direction of travel
is preselected.
X Release the accelerator pedal and reduce
speed until the vehicle is almost stationary.
i If the accelerator pedal is not released
within approximately 15 seconds, the prese-
lected direction of travel is deleted.
A clacking noise sounds in the instrument
cluster; the preselected gear is selected. The
on-board computer lights up. The on-board Gears 1 to 3 can be selected to pull away.
The direction of travel is changed.
X Slowly release the clutch pedal and depress
the accelerator pedal.
Telligent® gearshift 153
Pulling away with the automatic pulling- Pulling away without gear preselection
away gear X Start the engine.
X X Make sure that the manual pulling-away gear
Start the engine.
is engaged (Y page 152).
X Make sure that the automatic pulling-away
gear is engaged (Y page 152).
X Depress the clutch pedal. X Turn the direction of travel selection switch to
the h (Drive/driving forwards) position :.
In all drive programs the transmission control
the h (Drive/driving forwards) position :. shifts into second gear, which can be changed
In all drive programs the transmission control manually.
shifts into 2nd gear.
X Release the brake pedal or parking brake,
slowly release the clutch and depress the
Driving mode
slowly release the clutch and depress the accelerator pedal.
accelerator pedal.
Pulling away with the manual pulling- Driving and changing gears
away gear
General notes
Pulling away with gear preselection
You can preselect a gear before depressing the Changing gear while driving is only possible at
suitable engine speeds or at suitable vehicle
clutch pedal. Telligent® gearshift will not shift to speeds. A warning tone will sound if the engine
the preselected gear until you have depressed speed has not been achieved or if the vehicle
the clutch pedal. speed is too high. The gear is not selected. The
X Start the engine. transmission control only selects permissible
X Make sure that the manual pulling-away gear gears.
is engaged (Y page 152).
X Turn the direction of travel selection switch to Overview
the h (Drive/driving forwards) position :.
In all drive programs the transmission control
shifts into second gear, which can be changed
manually.
X To adapt gear preselection: pull the multi-
function lever up briefly (shift up) ; or push it
down briefly (shift down) =.
Telligent® gearshift shifts to the preselected
gear.
A clacking noise in the instrument cluster Changing gears with gear preselection
confirms the gear change.
The on-board computer display shows the You can preselect a gear before depressing the
engaged gear. clutch pedal. Telligent® gearshift will not shift to
X Release the brake pedal or parking brake, the preselected gear until you have depressed
slowly release the clutch and depress the the clutch pedal.
accelerator pedal. You can shift several gears at once.
The preselected gear can be erased by turning
the direction switch to the i position.
Z
X Pull the multifunction lever up briefly (to shift Changing gears without gear preselec-
up) : or push it down briefly (to shift tion
down) ;.
The transmission control shifts up or down It is only possible to change up or down one gear
one gear. The gear change is complete when at a time.
the on-board computer display shows the X Depress the clutch pedal.
selected gear. X Pull the multifunction lever up briefly (to shift
or up) : or push it down briefly (to shift
X Depending on the number of gears to be shif- down) ;.
ted, briefly pull up the multifunction lever (to The Telligent® gearshift shifts gear.
shift up) : or briefly push it down (to shift A clacking noise in the instrument cluster
down) ; a corresponding number of times. confirms the gear change.
The transmission control shifts several gears
Driving mode
up or down. The gear change is complete The on-board computer display shows the
when the on-board computer display shows engaged gear.
the selected gear. X Slowly release the clutch pedal and depress
The preselected gear flashes in the on-board the accelerator pedal.

or Stopping
X When the working or crawler gear is not
engaged: pull and hold the multifunction
lever up (to shift up) : or push and hold it
down (to shift down) ;.
The transmission control determines the
most suitable gear (target gear) for the
desired gearshift direction, depending on the
vehicle load. The transmission control shifts
up or down at least one gear to a suitable
gear. The gear change is complete when the
on-board computer display shows the selec-
ted gear.
computer display. The gear preselection is Shift the transmission to neutral when stopping
stored for approximately 15 seconds. for a longer time, e.g. at traffic lights or before
stopping the engine.
X All vehicles: depress the clutch pedal fully.
X Brake the vehicle and, if necessary, shift
Telligent® gearshift shifts to the preselected
gear. down.
A clacking noise in the instrument cluster
confirms the gear change. X Turn the direction switch to the i (neutral)
The on-board computer display shows the position :.
engaged gear. The gear change is complete when N is shown
on the on-board computer display.
X Slowly release the clutch pedal and depress
X Continue to depress the brake pedal or apply
the accelerator pedal.
the parking brake.
The preselected gear can be changed during the X Release the clutch pedal.
preselection period by pressing or pulling the
multifunction lever again. The newly preselec-
ted gear flashes in the on-board computer dis-
play.
The preselected gear can be erased by turning
the direction switch to the i position.
Telligent® automatic gearshift 155
Reverse gear and changing direction Shifting to the reverse gears while the vehicle is
quickly in motion is only possible at suitable engine
speeds or driving speeds. If the vehicle speed is
Engaging reverse gear too high, a warning tone will sound. The selected
reverse gear is not engaged. The transmission
control only selects permissible reverse gears.
Rapid changes of direction
Driving mode
To pull away, you can only shift from neutral to
the 1st to 4th reverse gear.
With the vehicle stationary and the transmission
in neutral:
At speeds of up to approximately 30 km/h, you
X Depress the brake pedal or apply the parking can preselect a reverse or forward gear while
brake. driving.
X Depress the clutch pedal. Changing the direction of travel
X Turn direction switch to position h (Drive/
the k (Reverse) position :.
The gear change is complete when the on- forward gear) or k (Reverse gear):. Do not
board computer display shows the selected pause in position i.
reverse gear. From the 1st forward gear, the 1st reverse
gear is preselected, and vice versa.
X To shift up in reverse gear if necessary:
pull the multifunction lever up briefly ;. From the 2nd forward gear, the 2nd reverse
The gear change is complete when the on- gear is preselected, and vice versa.
board computer display shows the selected From the 3rd or higher forward gear, the 3rd
reverse gear. reverse gear is selected.
or From the 3rd or higher reverse gear, the 3rd
X To shift down in reverse gear if necessary:
forward gear is selected.
push the multifunction lever down briefly =. A lower gear will be selected, depending on
The gear change is complete when the on- the load. The gear is engaged as soon as the
board computer display shows the selected vehicle nears standstill and the clutch pedal is
reverse gear. entirely depressed. The gear change is com-
plete when the on-board computer display
slowly release the clutch and depress the shows the gear.
accelerator pedal.
You can shift up or down by single reverse gears
in succession while reversing: Telligent® automatic gearshift
X Pull the multifunction lever up briefly (to shift Important safety notes
up) ; or push it down briefly (to shift down)
=. G WARNING
The gear change is complete when the next
If there is a loss of pressure or insufficient
higher or next lower reverse gear appears in
the on-board computer display. reservoir pressure in the transmission/clutch
Z
156 Telligent® automatic gearshift
circuit, you can no longer shift gears. There is d Automatic drive program
a risk of an accident. p Manual drive program
Do not pull away, or stop the vehicle as soon ? ± To downshift manually, automatic in
drive program (Y page 159)/manual
as possible, paying attention to road and traf-
(Y page 160)
fic conditions. Secure the vehicle against roll-
ing away, e.g. with the parking brake. Have
Gear indicator
the compressed-air system repaired at a
Multifunction lever and gear indicator

Driving mode
General notes
The Telligent® automatic gearshift transmission
has eight forward gears and six reverse gears.
When driving, the transmission control controls
clutch and gear operation, e.g. when:
Rpulling away : Direction of travel and/or selected gear
Rmanoeuvring ; Drive program
Rchanging gear
Possible displays:
Rstopping the vehicle
1–8 1st to 8th gear
If the Telligent® automatic gearshift malfunc-
tions, it is possible to continue driving in backup N Neutral position
drive mode (Y page 107). R1 – R6 1st to 6th reverse gear
Do not let the engine speed drop below the min- A Automatic drive program
imum engine speed of 720 rpm. M Manual drive program
Multifunction lever
Cruise control lever
Overview
The cruise control lever has equal status with
the multifunction lever and can be used alter-
nately. This enables simplified equipment oper-
ation using the control lever, for example, since
the right hand is not needed for drive functions.
: To select the direction of travel:

h Drive for driving forward (Y page 158)
i Neutral (Y page 159)
k Reverse (Y page 161)
; q To upshift manually, automatic in drive
program (Y page 159)/manual
(Y page 160)
= To select a drive program: (Y page 158)
on-board computer lights up. The on-board

X Depress the accelerator pedal.
Operating lever
Overview
The control lever has equal status with the mul-
tifunction lever and the cruise control lever. The
control lever can be used alternately.
To shift down manually
Driving mode
:
; Direction of travel preselection forward
= To shift up manually
? Direction of travel preselection reverse
Selecting a gear manually

X To downshift: briefly push the cruise control
lever away : from the steering wheel.
The transmission control shifts down one
gear.
or
X To upshift: briefly pull the cruise control lever
towards = the steering wheel. Direction of travel preselection
The transmission control shifts up one gear.
X Make sure that the vehicle speed is below
30 km/h.
Direction of travel preselection X Ensure that:
X Make sure that the vehicle speed is below Rthe hydraulic system is enabled
30 km/h. (Y page 205) or
X Make sure that the speed limiter Rthe hydrostatic drive system is activated
(Y page 171) and cruise control (Y page 178) or
(Y page 172) are deactivated. Rthe engine speed mode is activated
X Turn the direction of travel selection switch to (Y page 232).
the h (drive/driving forwards) position. X Turn the direction of travel selection switch to
X Direction of travel preselection, reverse: the h (drive/driving forwards) position.
briefly push the cruise control lever to the X Press the u button : forwards or back-
left ?. wards.
A warning tone sounds. A warning tone sounds. The direction of travel
or is preselected.
X Direction of travel preselection, forward: X Release the accelerator pedal and reduce
briefly push the cruise control lever to the speed until the vehicle is almost stationary.
right ;. A clacking noise sounds in the instrument
A warning tone sounds. cluster; the preselected gear is selected. The
X Release the accelerator pedal and reduce u indicator lamp in the status area of the
speed until the vehicle is almost stationary. on-board computer lights up. The on-board
A clacking noise sounds in the instrument computer display shows the engaged gear.
cluster; the preselected gear is selected. The The direction of travel is changed.
Z
i If the accelerator pedal is not released You can switch between the drive programs at
within approximately 15 seconds, the prese- any time.
lected direction of travel is deleted. X To activate the manual drive program:
X Depress the accelerator pedal. press the o button and hold :.
manual drive program M and the selected
gear.
Drive programs and drive functions X To activate automatic mode: press the
Automatic drive program o button briefly :.
The on-board computer display shows auto-
The transmission control shifts gears depending matic drive program A and the selected and
on a number of factors including: preselected gear.
Driving mode
Rengine speed
Raccelerator pedal position
Rapplication of the continuous brake Stopping the vehicle and pulling away
Rload status of the vehicle
Pulling away
Rcondition of the road surface
Manual drive program

In the manual drive program, you initiate gear
changes yourself.
In particularly difficult driving conditions, switch
to the manual driving program. This will enable
you to avoid any undesired interruptions to the
tractive power that may occur with automatic
gearshifting.
In difficult terrain you must manually engage
and release the clutch pedal. In order to do this,
the clutch pedal must be folded out X Start the engine.
(Y page 162). X Turn the direction switch to the h (drive/
driving forwards) position :.
Drive program selection In all drive programs, the transmission control
selects a suitable pulling-away gear, which
can be changed manually, depending on the
vehicle load.
X Release the brake pedal or parking brake and
depress the accelerator pedal.
Changing the starting gear
X Pull the multifunction lever up briefly (to shift
up) ; or push it down briefly (to shift down)
=.
The transmission control shifts up or down
one gear.
Gears 1 to 3 can be selected to pull away.
The gear change is complete when the on-
board computer display shows the selected
gear.
Stopping When the continuous brake is activated and you

shift up on downhill gradients, the gear change
X Depress the brake pedal. is limited to one gear by the transmission con-
The transmission control shifts back, depend- trol.
ing on driving conditions, and into a suitable
pulling-away gear shortly before the vehicle
comes to a standstill. Kickdown gear shifting
Use kickdown for maximum acceleration of the
Automatic neutral position vehicle.
You can increase performance when pulling
If the vehicle is stationary for approximately nine away using the kickdown function if required,
minutes with the engine running and a gear e.g. on steep uphill gradients. The engine speed
engaged, a warning tone will sound. N flashes in is increased when pulling away in 1st or 2nd
Driving mode
the display. After a further minute, the trans- gear. Higher engine torque is thus available. If
mission control automatically shifts to the neu- you pull away using kickdown, this will result in
tral position. increased clutch load and higher wear.
X Depress the accelerator pedal past the pres-
Shifting to neutral sure point to the stop.
The transmission control shifts to a lower gear
as required.
X Ease off the accelerator pedal slightly once
the desired speed is reached.
The transmission control shifts up again.
Decelerating
X Release the accelerator pedal.
X Depress the brake pedal.
or
X Activate the continuous brake (Y page 149).
Shift the transmission to neutral when stopping The transmission control shifts down auto-
for a longer time, e.g. at traffic lights or before matically according to the driving situation.
stopping the engine.
X Depress the brake pedal or apply the parking Selecting a gear manually
brake.
the i (neutral) position :.
The gear change is complete when N is shown
on the on-board computer display.
Driving using the automatic drive pro-

gram
Accelerating
You can use the accelerator pedal position to
actively influence the shift point: You can also select a different gear manually.
Rlight throttle application: early upshift
The automatic control functions are not
changed by doing this.
Rheavy throttle application: late upshift
Changing gear while driving is only possible at
Rkickdown: maximum upshift delay and
extremely early downshift speeds. A warning tone will sound if the engine
Z
speed has not been achieved or if the vehicle Shifting gears

speed is too high. The gear is not selected. The
transmission control only selects permissible
gears.
up) : or push it down briefly (to shift
down) ;.
The transmission control shifts up or down
one gear. The gear change is complete when
the on-board computer display shows the
selected gear.
or
Driving mode
X Depending on the number of gears to be shif-

ted, briefly pull up the multifunction lever (to
shift up) : or briefly push it down (to shift
down) ; a corresponding number of times. up) : or push it down briefly (to shift
The transmission control shifts several gears down) ;.
up or down. The gear change is complete The transmission control shifts up or down
when the on-board computer display shows one gear. The gear change is complete when
the selected gear. the on-board computer display shows the
selected gear.
or
or
X Pull and hold the multifunction lever up (to
shift up) : or push and hold it down (to shift
down) ;. ted, briefly pull up the multifunction lever (to
The transmission control determines the shift up) : or briefly push it down (to shift
most suitable gear (target gear) for the down) ; a corresponding number of times.
desired gearshift direction, depending on the The transmission control shifts several gears
vehicle load. The transmission control shifts up or down. The gear change is complete
up or down at least one gear to a suitable when the on-board computer display shows
gear. The gear change is complete when the the selected gear.
on-board computer display shows the selec- or
ted gear. X Pull and hold the multifunction lever up (to
shift up) : or push and hold it down (to shift
down) ;.
The transmission control determines the
Driving using the manual drive pro- most suitable gear (target gear) for the
gram desired gearshift direction, depending on the
vehicle load. The transmission control shifts
General notes up or down at least one gear to a suitable
In the manual drive program, the driver is gear. The gear change is complete when the
responsible for selecting gears. on-board computer display shows the selec-
ted gear.
In particularly difficult driving conditions, switch
to the manual driving program. This will enable
you to avoid any undesired interruptions to the
tractive power that may occur with automatic
gearshifting.
Changing gear while driving is only possible at
speeds. A warning tone will sound if the engine
speed has not been achieved or if the vehicle
speed is too high. The gear is not selected. The
transmission control only selects permissible
gears.
Reverse gear and changing direction shift up) ; or briefly push it down (to shift
quickly down) = a corresponding number of times.
The transmission control shifts several gears
Engaging reverse gear up or down. The gear change is complete
when the on-board computer display shows
the selected gear.
Shifting to the reverse gears while the vehicle is
in motion is only possible at suitable engine
speeds or driving speeds. A warning tone will
sound if the engine speed has not been achieved
or if the vehicle speed is too high. The selected
reverse gear is not engaged. The transmission
control only selects permissible reverse gears.
Driving mode
Rapid changes of direction
When you shift to a reverse gear, the manual

drive program is activated.
To pull away, you can only shift from neutral to
the 1st to 4th reverse gear.
With the vehicle stationary and the transmission
in neutral:
X Depress the brake pedal or apply the parking
brake.
the k (Reverse) position :.
The gear change is complete when the on- At speeds of up to approximately 30 km/h, you
board computer display shows the selected can preselect a reverse or forward gear while
reverse gear. driving.
To engage reverse gear: Changing the direction of travel
X Pull the multifunction lever up briefly (to shift X Turn direction switch to position h (Drive/
up) ; or push it down briefly (to shift down) forward gear) or k (Reverse gear) :.
=. From the 1st forward gear, the 1st reverse
The gear change is complete when the on- gear is preselected, and vice versa.
board computer display shows the selected From the 2nd forward gear, the 2nd reverse
reverse gear. gear is preselected, and vice versa.
X Release the brake pedal or parking brake and From the 3rd or higher forward gear, the 3rd
slowly depress the accelerator. reverse gear is selected.
You can shift up or down by single reverse gears From the 3rd or higher reverse gear, the 3rd
in succession while reversing: forward gear is selected.
X Pull the multifunction lever up briefly (to shift A lower gear will be selected, depending on
up) ; or push it down briefly (to shift down) the load. The gear is engaged as soon as the
=. vehicle comes to a near standstill. The gear
The gear change is complete when the next change is complete when the on-board com-
higher or next lower reverse gear appears in puter display shows the gear.
the on-board computer display.
or
ted, briefly pull up the multifunction lever (to
Z
Clutch pedal Vehicle with dual-mode steering
General notes
! When the clutch pedal is depressed the first
time after folding it out, pressure builds up in
the clutch system. If a gear is selected, the
vehicle pulls away as the clutch pedal is
released. After folding out the clutch pedal,
release it cautiously.
If the clutch pedal is folded out, you have to
depress the clutch and change gears manually
to drive. Further information can be found in the
Driving mode
"Telligent® gearshift" section (Y page 150).

X Slide release catch : to the left.
Lever ; folds upwards and the clutch pedal
Folding out the clutch pedal folds out.
Vehicles without dual-mode steering
In the on-board computer, the Clutch
pedal folded down message is displayed.
Telligent® automatic gearshift switches to
manual drive program M.
X Slowly release the clutch pedal.
Folding in the clutch pedal

General notes
! Under no circumstances may the clutch
pedal be folded in while the vehicle is in
motion.
X Pull release catch :.
Clutch pedal ; folds out. Vehicles without dual-mode steering
X Depress clutch pedal ; fully.
Pressure builds up in the clutch actuation sys-
tem.
In the on-board computer, the Clutch
pedal folded down message is displayed.
Telligent® automatic gearshift switches to
manual drive program M.
X Slowly release clutch pedal ;.
X Stop the vehicle.

X Shift to neutral.
X Pull release catch : and depress clutch
pedal ; fully.
X Release catch :.
Shifting gears 163
X Release clutch pedal ;. Engaging the working gears

Clutch pedal ; remains folded in.
X If necessary, select automatic drive program
A (Y page 158).
Vehicle with dual-mode steering
Driving mode
X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and
that the parking brake is applied.
X Vehicles with Telligent® gearshift: depress
X Stop the vehicle. the clutch pedal.

X Vehicles with Telligent® automatic gear-
shift: shift into the desired pulling-away gear.
X Shift to neutral.
X All vehicles: push button :.
X Make sure that clutch pedal ; is not
depressed. Indicator lamp ; in the button lights up. The
working gears are engaged. When engaged,
X Press lever : downwards until it engages.
the N symbol lights up briefly in the on-
Clutch pedal ; folds in upwards. board computer display.
X If necessary, select automatic drive program
Vehicles with Telligent® automatic gearshift:
A (Y page 158). the on-board computer display shows manual
drive program M.
X If the N symbol does not briefly appear
Shifting gears in the on-board computer display: briefly
pull away and stop again.
Working gears The gear change will be repeated automati-
cally. When the working gears are engaged,
General notes the N symbol briefly appears on the on-
If you engage the working gears, you can drive at board computer display.
a slower speed with the same engine revs. You X Vehicles with Telligent® gearshift: slowly
can then use certain equipment, for example, or release the clutch pedal.
increase the tractive power. X All vehicles: release the parking brake.
You can still shift to all transmission gears man- X Slowly depress the accelerator pedal.
ually when the working gears are engaged. The vehicle starts moving.
! Avoid changing gear on slopes. If you Shifting the working gears
change gear on a downhill slope, you must
X Vehicles with hydrostatic drive system:
depress the service brake to prevent the vehi-
cle from speeding up. Otherwise, the gear- stop the vehicle and apply the parking brake.
shift may be noisy and the gearbox could be X Vehicles with Telligent® gearshift: switch
damaged. to the desired gear with the multifunction
lever. To do this, pull the multifunction lever
up briefly (to shift up) or push it down briefly
(to shift down) (Y page 153).
Z
164 Shifting gears
X Telligent® automatic gearshift: switch to ! Only engage/disengage the gears when the
the desired gear with the multifunction lever vehicle is stationary. Otherwise, the gearshift
(Y page 160). may be noisy and the gearbox could be dam-
X Vehicles with hydrostatic drive system: aged.
release the parking brake.
X All vehicles: slowly depress the accelerator Engaging crawler gears
pedal.
The vehicle starts moving.
When stationary, secure the vehicle against
rolling away
Driving mode
Disengaging the working gears

X Make sure the vehicle is stationary.
the clutch pedal. X Make sure the engine is running.
X All vehicles: push button : again.
X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and
Indicator lamp ; in the button goes out. that the parking brake is applied.
The working gears are disengaged. The on- X Vehicles with Telligent® gearshift: depress
board computer display briefly shows a status
the clutch pedal.
message without the N symbol.
X If the status message without the N
symbol does not appear in the on-board shift: shift into the desired pulling-away gear.
computer display: briefly pull away and stop X All vehicles: push button ;.
again. Indicator lamp : in button lights up. The
The gear change will be repeated automati- working gears are engaged first. When
cally. When the working gears are disen- engaged, the N symbol lights up briefly in
gaged, the status message without the N the on-board computer display. Then, the
symbol is briefly displayed on the on-board crawler gears are engaged automatically.
computer display. When engaged, the O symbol briefly
X Vehicles with Telligent® gearshift: slowly appears in the on-board computer display.
release the clutch pedal. Vehicles with Telligent® automatic gearshift:
the on-board computer display shows manual
drive program M.
X If the O symbol does not briefly appear
Crawler gears in the on-board computer display: briefly
General notes pull away and stop again.
The gear change will be repeated automati-
If you engage the working gears, you can drive at cally. When the crawler gears are engaged,
a slower speed with the same engine revs. You the O symbol briefly appears on the on-
can engage the crawler gears in order to drive at board computer display.
an even slower speed with the same engine X Vehicles with Telligent® gearshift: slowly
revs. release the clutch pedal.
! Never use the crawler gears to increase the X All vehicles: release the parking brake.
tractive power of the vehicle. The crawler X Slowly depress the accelerator pedal.
gears are intended to permit the slowest The vehicle starts moving.
speeds when using corresponding add-on
equipment.
Driving mode 165
Shifting the crawler gears If the torque converter lock-up clutch is open,
X Stop the vehicle and apply the parking brake. the X indicator lamp in the status area of the
on-board computer lights up. When it is closed,
X All vehicles: shift to the desired gear with the
the X indicator lamp goes out.
multifunction lever; vehicles with Telligent®
gearshift (Y page 153), vehicles with Telli-
Driving mode
gent® automatic gearshift (Y page 160).
X Release the parking brake. The oil temperature rises during torque con-
X Slowly depress the accelerator pedal. verter operation.
The vehicle starts moving. Depending on the load and gradient, you can
pull away in 1st - 5th gear. Select the pulling-
When stationary, secure the vehicle against away gear according to the load. For loads
rolling away exceeding 400 t, you must pull away in 1st gear.
Driving mode
X Apply the parking brake. This will prevent the oil in the torque converter
clutch heating up too much.
Deactivating crawler gears i If the vehicle is stationary and a gear
between 6th and 8th is selected, the throttle
X Vehicles with Telligent® gearshift: depress does not respond.
the clutch pedal.
X
Depress the brake pedal during gear selection. If
All vehicles: place transmission in neutral
you do not depress the brake pedal, a warning
position. tone sounds. In the on-board computer, the
X Press button ; again. Depress brake. message is displayed.
Indicator lamp : in the button goes out. The torque converter clutch is opened when
The crawler gears and working gears are dis- changing gears. If you release the accelerator
engaged. The on-board computer display pedal slightly, you can determine when the tor-
briefly shows a status message without the que converter lock-up clutch closes. Closing the
O symbol. torque converter lock-up clutch as soon as pos-
X If the status message without the O sible has a positive effect on the oil temperature
symbol does not appear in the on-board of the torque converter clutch and fuel con-
computer display: briefly pull away and stop sumption. Waiting for a longer period before
again. closing the torque converter lock-up clutch
The gear change will be repeated automati- increases fuel consumption and the oil temper-
cally. When the crawler gears are disengaged, ature of the torque converter clutch. Consider
the status message without the O symbol your driving style carefully.
briefly appears on the on-board computer dis- You can temporarily increase the towing power
play. at engine speeds below 1,700 rpm by using the
X Vehicles with Telligent® gearshift: slowly kickdown function.
release the clutch pedal. G WARNING
secure the vehicle on uphill and downhill gra-
Driving mode
dients. A loaded vehicle or a vehicle with
Torque converter clutch trailer/semitrailer may roll away. There is a
risk of an accident.
General notes In the control position, check whether the
The torque converter clutch allows you to pull parking brake alone can hold the entire vehi-
away smoothly and without causing wear, with- cle. The tractor unit and trailer/semitrailer
out using the clutch pedal, in particular with should normally be secured using the parking
large trailer loads. The torque converter clutch is brake and wheel chocks.
controlled by the transmission control module.
Load your vehicle up to the permissible gross
weight in order to maximise tractive power.
i The vehicle can be stopped with any gear
engaged.
Z
166 Driving mode
Driving mode with power take-off Rbefore embarking on a longer journey

The function of the transmission shift system is Rfor changed operating conditions, e.g. off-
severely restricted with the speed governor road driving
switched on, even in power take-off mode. For If necessary, correct the tyre pressure.
this reason, switch off the speed governor
before changing gears and driving in normal
mode. Preparing for a journey
X Stop the vehicle.
Every day, before starting a journey, check the
X Leave the engine running at idling speed. tyres for external damage and check the tyre
X Select a gear to pull away. pressure in the on-board computer. The tyre
X Engage power take-off. pressures are displayed in the on-board com-
Driving mode
puter display as soon as the key is turned to

position 2 in the ignition lock.
Tyre pressure control system
Tyre pressure control system, auto-
Important safety notes matic mode
The tyre pressure control system serves to Activating/deactivating automatic mode
enhance off-road capability and traction on soft
surfaces.
RThe tyre pressures of the front and rear axles
are shown in the on-board computer display.
RYou can adjust the tyre pressure to suit the
terrain while driving.
RA safety device limits the upper and lower tyre
pressures that can be set.
RPay attention to the tyre pressure table
(Y page 304), (Y page 304).
G WARNING
Underinflated or overinflated tyres pose the X To activate: make sure that the key is in
following risks: position 2 in the ignition lock.
Rthe tyres may burst, especially as the load X Press button :.
and vehicle speed increase. Indicator lamp ; in the button lights up.
Automatic tyre pressure control mode is
Rthe tyres may wear excessively and/or
active.
unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre X To deactivate: press button :.
traction. Indicator lamp ; in the button goes out.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steer-
If you have deactivated the tyre pressure control
ing and braking, may be greatly impaired. system, it is automatically reactivated if:
There is a risk of an accident. Ryou turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
Observe the recommended tyre pressure and lock and
check the tyre pressure of all the tyres includ- Rthe engine has cooled down to the outside
ing the spare wheel: temperature
Rat least every two weeks Selecting the pressure level
Rwhen the load changes In automatic mode, you can select the pressure
levels and vehicle loads. Each pressure level has
a pre-stored target tyre pressure with the cor-
Driving mode 167
responding vehicle load. You can select a pres-

sure level based on road surface characteristics.
G Warning
If you exceed the speeds specified in the
table, the tyres can be damaged or even burst.
This jeopardises the operating and road
safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an acci-
dent. Do not exceed the maximum permissi-
ble speeds specified in the table.
Pressure Road sur- Speed
Driving mode
level face condi-
tions
If you exceed the specified speeds, a warning
Highway Road with Up to maxi- tone sounds. In the event window of the on-
normal driv- mum permis- board computer, the Speed too high for
ing condi- sible speed the current tyre pressure settings mes-
tions sage is displayed. The tyre pressure control sys-
Cross Coun‐ Unpaved Maximum tem then shifts automatically to a pressure level
try road with permissible with a higher tyre pressure.
loose surface speed X Make sure that the automatic tyre pressure
50 km/h control mode is activated (Y page 166).
X To select the Highway, Cross Country or
Sand Mud Sand, mud Maximum
Sand Mud Snow pressure level: press
Snow and snow permissible
speed "increase pressure level" button : or
20 km/h "reduce pressure level" button ? repeatedly
until the desired pressure level is selected.
Emergency To free a Maximum A warning tone sounds at each pressure level
stuck vehicle permissible change. The selected pressure level is dis-
speed played in the on-board computer display for
10 km/h approximately five seconds. Indicator
lamp ; or = remains lit as long as the tyre
pressure is being set. If the tyre pressure con-
! Only select Emergency pressure level in an trol system display is called up in the on-board
emergency if the vehicle is stuck. An computer, the corresponding preset target
extremely low pressure level is set so that you and actual tyre pressures are displayed.
can free the vehicle in an off-road situation.
X To select the Emergency pressure level:
Avoid introducing lateral force, e.g. no steer-
ing input or angle. The tyres could otherwise press "reduce pressure level" button ?
be damaged. repeatedly until the Sand Mud Snow pressure
level is selected.
A warning tone sounds. The target tyre pres-
sure is displayed. The Sand Mud Snow pres-
sure level flashes until the preset target tyre
pressure has been reached.
X Press "reduce pressure level" button ?.
A tone sounds and Emergency pressure level
is selected. The corresponding target tyre
pressure is displayed. The Emergency pres-
Z
168 Driving mode
sure level flashes until the preset target tyre Tyre pressure control manual mode
pressure has been reached.
X To cancel pressure level selection: press General notes
"increase pressure level" button : or In manual mode, you can freely set the tyre
"reduce pressure level" button ? again. pressure. When setting, always observe tyre
size, axle load and speed. If you exceed the per-
Selecting the vehicle load missible speeds in manual mode, no warning
tone sounds. Also, the tyre pressure control sys-
tem does not automatically increase the tyre
pressure.
Adjusting via the on-board computer
Driving mode
X Make sure that the automatic tyre pressure

control mode is activated (Y page 166).
X Using the u or t button on the multi-
function steering wheel, scroll to â opera-
tion and maintenance.
X Using the r or s button on the multi-
function steering wheel, scroll to the Tyres
menu window. : Current tyre pressure, left front wheel
X Press the 9 button on the multifunction ; Current tyre pressure, right front wheel
steering wheel. = Target tyre pressure, front axle tyres
Load appears in the menu window. ? Target tyre pressure, rear axle tyres
X Select the current vehicle load using the r A Current tyre pressure, right rear wheel
or s button on the multifunction steering B Current tyre pressure, left rear wheel
wheel:
X Make sure that the automatic tyre pressure
R: Empty
control mode is deactivated (Y page 166).
R; Partially laden (half load)
X Using the u or t button on the multi-
R= Fully laden
function steering wheel, scroll to â opera-
If the engine has cooled to the outside tem- tion and maintenance.
perature and you start the engine, vehicle X Using the r or s button on the multi-
load fully laden = is automatically selected. function steering wheel, scroll to the Tyres
X Press the 9 button on the multifunction menu window.
steering wheel. X Press the 9 button on the multifunction
The selected vehicle load is saved. The tyre steering wheel.
pressures are only adjusted if different values Pressure selection appears in the menu
for the axle load are specified in the tyre pres- window.
sure table (Y page 304).
X To adjust the tyre pressure: using the r
or s button on the multifunction steering
wheel, select front = or rear axle tyres ?.
X Determine the tyre pressure to be set
(Y page 304).
X Using the buttons on the multifunction steer-
ing wheel, press the u button to increase
Driving mode 169
or the t button to decrease the target tyre X To adjust the tyre pressure: use the r or
pressure. s button on the multifunction steering
X Press the 9 button on the multifunction wheel to select front C or rear axle tyres D.
steering wheel. X Determine the tyre pressure to be set
After about ten seconds, the tyre pressures (Y page 304).
are adjusted. X Press "increase tyre pressure" : or "reduce
X To cancel the procedure: switch on the tyre pressure" button ? repeatedly until the
automatic tyre pressure control mode current tyre pressure is displayed.
(Y page 166). X Press the 9 button on the multifunction
steering wheel.
Adjusting with the button While the tyre pressure is being set, indicator
lamp ; or = remains on.
Driving mode
X To cancel the procedure: switch on the
automatic tyre pressure control mode
(Y page 166).
Differential lock
Engage the differential lock when required, e.g.
when driving off-road or on slippery road surfa-
ces.
The differential locks can also be engaged/
disengaged while driving, without disengaging
the clutch, but only if the wheels are not spin-
ning.
G WARNING
If you activate the automatic operating mode
while driving off-road or with the differential
lock engaged, the electronic management
system may perform unwanted gear changes.
Due to the interruption in the tractive power,
the vehicle can roll backwards on uphill
slopes, for instance. There is a risk of an acci-
A Current tyre pressure, left front wheel dent.
B Current tyre pressure, right front wheel Always activate the manual operating mode
C Target tyre pressure, front axle tyres when driving off-road or with the differential
D Target tyre pressure, rear axle tyres lock engaged.
E Current tyre pressure, right rear wheel
F Current tyre pressure, left rear wheel G WARNING
X Make sure that the automatic tyre pressure If you engage the differential locks when driv-
control mode is deactivated (Y page 166). ing on a firm, high-traction surface, the steer-
X Press "increase tyre pressure" button : or ability of the vehicle is severely impaired. You
"reduce tyre pressure" button ?. could lose control of the vehicle, especially
Pressure selection appears in the menu when activating on a bend. There is a risk of an
window.
accident.
Z
170 Driving mode
Disengage the differential locks immediately Disengaging the differential lock

on a firm, high-traction surface. X Turn the differential lock switch to position
g.
Vehicles with Telligent® automatic gear- The differential locks are disengaged. The dif-
shift: in particularly difficult driving conditions, ferential lock indicator in the on-board com-
switch to manual driving program M. This will puter display and the i indicator lamp go
enable you to avoid any undesired interruptions out. ABS is reactivated.
to the tractive power that may occur with auto-
matic gearshifting. In difficult terrain you must If the indicator in the on-board computer display
manually engage and release the clutch pedal. does not go out when the differential lock is dis-
In order to do this, the clutch pedal must be fol- engaged:
ded out (Y page 162). X Carry out the load change while driving.
Driving mode
Depress and release the brake pedal several

Engaging the differential lock times.
or
X Stop the vehicle and drive a short distance in
the opposite direction.
Radiator quick cleaning system

Briefly switch on the radiator quick-cleaning sys-
tem if the radiator core fins of the engine radi-
ator/condenser are contaminated. During dirt-
intensive work, e.g. mowing or mulching, the
radiator quick-cleaning system can remain
switched on. Intermittent cleaning will occur
The individual differential locks can only be automatically.
engaged in sequence.
X Turn the differential lock switch to position
1.
The transfer case inter-axle lock is engaged. A
symbol appears in the on-board computer to
indicate locking and the i indicator lamp
lights up in the instrument cluster.
2.
The rear-axle differential lock is also engaged.
A symbol appears in the on-board computer
to indicate locking and the i indicator
lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.
X To switch on: make sure the engine is run-
ning.
3.
X Make sure there are no persons, animals or
The front-axle differential lock is also
engaged. ABS is deactivated. A symbol sensitive objects on the left side of the vehicle
appears in the on-board computer to indicate in front of the engine radiator/condenser of
locking and the i indicator lamp lights up the air-conditioning system.
in the instrument cluster. X Press button :.
Indicator lamp ; in the button lights up con-
tinuously for approximately ten seconds. The
fan blades are twisted. The radiator core fins
of the engine radiator/condenser of the air-
conditioning system are cleaned. Debris is
Driving systems 171
exhausted next to the engine radiator/ Overview

condenser of the air-conditioning system.
Indicator lamp ; will blink after the quick
cleaning. The radiator quick-cleaning system
is switched on automatically every ten
minutes.
X To switch off: press button : again.
Indicator lamp ; in switch goes out.
Driving systems
Driving mode
Speed limiter
È Selects the speed limiter
Important safety notes p Switches on and set the current limit
The speed limiter restricts the vehicle speed to speed/increase the set limit speed
the set limit speed. It is possible to accelerate q Switches on and call up the stored limit
the vehicle up to the set limit speed using the speed/decrease the set limit speed
accelerator pedal. In order to keep to the set V Selects cruise control (Y page 173)
limit speed on downhill gradients, the speed o Deactivates the speed limiter
limiter automatically brakes the vehicle with the
continuous brake. If the set speed is exceeded,
the È symbol in the on-board computer
flashes.
If you fail to adapt your driving style or fail to pay
attention to your surroundings, the speed limiter
can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor
override the laws of physics. The speed limiter
cannot take the road and weather conditions
into account, nor the prevailing traffic situation.
The speed limiter is only an aid. You are respon-
sible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for
vehicle speed, braking in good time and remain-
ing in lane. When changing drivers, make the Cruise control lever
next driver aware of the speed stored. You : To activate/deactivate cruise control or
should always adapt your driving style to suit speed limiter
prevailing road and weather conditions. ; To increase set limit speed
Do not use the speed limiter: = To reduce set limit speed
Ron slippery roads. Braking could cause the The È symbol in the on-board computer
drive wheels to lose their grip and the vehicle shows the status of the speed limiter in colour:
could skid.
RGrey symbol: the speed limiter is selected, but
Rwhen there is low visibility, e.g. due to fog,
not activated.
heavy rain or snow.
RWhite symbol: the speed limiter is active and
is restricting the vehicle speed to the set limit
speed.
Z
172 Driving systems
Activating Cruise control lever:

X Activate the speed limiter (Y page 172).
Activation conditions X Push the cruise control lever upwards ; for a
If you are driving slower than 15 km/h, the higher speed or down = for a lower speed.
speed limiter cannot be activated. X Push and hold the cruise control lever until
If the speed limiter cannot be activated, the on- the desired speed is shown in the on-board
board computer will display - - - km/h in grey. computer.
Selecting the speed limiter
X Press the È button. Driving
The on-board computer shows the È sym- It is possible to exceed the set limit speed, e.g.
bol in grey. when overtaking:
Driving mode
Activating when driving X Briefly depress the accelerator pedal beyond

the point of resistance (kickdown).
Multifunction steering wheel: The set limit speed is still shown and the È
X Select the speed limiter (Y page 172). symbol flashes in the on-board computer.
X Drive at the desired speed and briefly press X When overtaking is completed, briefly release
the p button. the accelerator pedal and depress it again.
The speed limiter is activated and the current The speed limiter again restricts the vehicle
vehicle speed is stored as the limit speed. speed to the set limit speed.
or
X Briefly press the q button. Deactivating
The speed limiter is activated and assumes
the stored limit speed. The limit speed remains stored if you deactivate
The on-board computer shows the È sym- the speed limiter.
bol and the set limit speed in white. X Press the o button.
The on-board computer shows the È sym-
Cruise control lever: bol in grey.
X Select the speed limiter (Y page 172). or
X Drive at the desired speed and push the cruise X Using the V button, select cruise control.
control lever in the direction of arrow :. The on-board computer shows the é sym-
The speed limiter is activated and the stored bol and the set speed in grey.
vehicle speed is set as the limit speed.
Increasing/decreasing the limit speed Cruise control

You can change the settings of the limit speed Important safety notes
while driving.
Multifunction steering wheel: Cruise control maintains the set speed of the
vehicle for you. In order to keep the speed within
X Activate the speed limiter (Y page 172). the specified tolerance range of between
X To adjust in 1 km/h increments: press the 2 and 15 km/h on downhill gradients, cruise
q or p button repeatedly until the control brakes the vehicle using the continuous
desired speed is shown in the on-board com- brake. When the continuous brake slows the
puter. vehicle, the Ã indicator lamp lights up in the
or instrument cluster.
X To adjust in 5 km/h increments: press the G WARNING
q or p button repeatedly until the
desired speed is shown in the on-board com- If you call up a stored speed and this is dif-
puter. ferent from the current speed, the vehicle
accelerates or brakes. If you do not know
what the stored speed is, the vehicle may
Driving systems 173
accelerate or brake unexpectedly. There is a È Selects the speed limiter (Y page 172)
risk of an accident. o Deactivates cruise control
Take the traffic conditions into account
before calling up the stored speed. If you do
not know what the stored speed is, store the
desired speed again.
! Do not exceed the maximum design speed

of the individual gears. Observe the rev coun-
ter.
If you fail to adapt your driving style or fail to pay
Driving mode
attention to your surroundings, cruise control
can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor
override the laws of physics. Cruise control can- Cruise control lever
not take the road and weather conditions into
: To activate/deactivate cruise control or
account, nor the prevailing traffic situation.
speed limiter
Cruise control is only an aid. You are responsible
for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehi- ; To increase set speed
cle speed, braking in good time and remaining in = To decrease set speed
lane. You should always adapt your driving style The é symbol in the on-board computer
to suit prevailing road and weather conditions. shows the status of cruise control in colour:
Do not use cruise control: RGrey symbol: cruise control is selected, but
Rin traffic conditions that do not allow you to not activated.
drive at a constant speed (e.g. heavy traffic or RWhite symbol: cruise control is activated and
winding roads). You could otherwise cause an maintains the set speed.
accident.
Ron slippery roads. Braking or accelerating can
Activating
cause the drive wheels to lose traction and
the vehicle could then skid. Activation conditions
Rwhen there is low visibility, e.g. due to fog,
heavy rain or snow. If you are driving slower than 15 km/h, cruise
control cannot be activated.
If cruise control cannot be activated, the on-
Overview board computer will display - - - km/h in grey.
Cruise control is deactivated automatically if
you:
Rare driving slower than 10 km/h
Rdepress the clutch pedal for longer than five
seconds
Rdepress the brake pedal when the continuous
brake is deactivated
Rshift the transmission into neutral for more
than five seconds
If cruise control automatically deactivates, a
warning tone sounds.
V Selects cruise control
Selecting cruise control
p Activates and adjusts current speed/
increases set speed X Press the V button repeatedly until the on-
q Activates and calls up stored speed/ board computer shows the é symbol in
reduces set speed grey.
Z
174 Driving systems
Activating when driving Setting the road speed tolerance

Multifunction steering wheel:
X Select cruise control (Y page 173).
X Drive at the desired speed and briefly press
the p button.
Cruise control is activated and the current
speed is stored.
or
X Briefly press the q button.
Cruise control is activated and assumes the
stored speed.
Driving mode
The on-board computer shows the é sym-

bol and the set speed in white.
Set the Ä upper speed tolerance to between
2 and 15 km/h. On mountainous roads, this
In order to maintain the set speed, cruise allows you to make better use of the momentum
control automatically brakes or accelerates gained on a downhill gradient and thus increase
the vehicle. fuel economy. The on-board computer shows
Cruise control lever: the upper speed tolerance next to the speed.
Once the maximum vehicle speed has been
X Select cruise control (Y page 173). reached, the upper speed tolerance is
X Drive at the desired speed and push the cruise decreased to 2 km/h.
control lever in the direction of arrow :. X Press the Ù button repeatedly until the Eco-
Cruise control is activated and the current
Drive input window appears in the on-board
speed is stored.
computer and the Ä menu bar is selected.
X Release the accelerator pedal. In the Ä menu bar, set the value by which
In order to maintain the set speed, cruise the stored speed may be exceeded.
control automatically brakes or accelerates
X Press the t or u button to increase/
the vehicle.
reduce speed tolerance in 1 km/h incre-
ments.
Setting the speed and speed tolerance X Press the 9 button to exit the input window.
or
Increasing/reducing the speed
X Wait for approximately three seconds.
You can change the speed setting while driving. The setting is stored automatically.
Multifunction steering wheel:
X Activate cruise control (Y page 174). Driving
X To adjust in 0.5 km/h increments: press
the q or p button repeatedly until the Driving tips
desired speed is shown in the on-board com- You can decelerate using the continuous brake.
puter. Cruise control remains activated.
or If you reset the continuous brake lever, but do
X To adjust in 5 km/h increments: press and not deactivate it, the vehicle will accelerate on
hold the q or p button until the desired inclines up to the set speed.
speed is shown in the on-board computer. If the continuous brake is deactivated, the vehi-
Cruise control lever: cle will accelerate to the last stored speed.
If cruise control is decelerating the vehicle using
X Activate cruise control (Y page 174). the continuous brake and you simultaneously
X Push the cruise control lever upwards ; for a depress the brake pedal, cruise control remains
higher speed or down = for a lower speed. activated.
X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until the
desired speed is reached.
Driving systems 175
If the braking power from the continuous brake them incorrectly or not at all. The cameras can-
is insufficient: not replace your own awareness of the immedi-
X Shift down a gear and reduce your speed.
ate surroundings.
If you shift down on a downhill gradient with- You are responsible for safe manoeuvring and
out adjusting the speed, cruise control sets an parking. When manoeuvring and parking, make
engine speed lower than the engine over- sure that there are no persons, animals or
speed. The set speed remains set and is auto- objects in the manoeuvring area.
matically re-established as soon as this is You are always responsible for safety and must
possible in a higher gear. always pay attention to your immediate sur-
The vehicle is braked by the continuous brake roundings when parking and manoeuvring. This
automatically if: applies to the areas behind, in front of and
beside the vehicle. Otherwise, you endanger
Rcruise control is activated and yourself and others.
Driving mode
Rthe vehicle speed exceeds the set speed by The front camera, reversing camera and device
more than the speed tolerance camera do not function or only function to a
When the continuous brake is activated and you limited degree:
activate cruise control, the continuous brake Rif it is raining hard, snowing or foggy
regulates the set speed on downhill slopes. Rat night or when the vehicle is in very dark
Overtaking places
Rif the camera is exposed to very bright light
It is possible to exceed the set speed, e.g. when
Rif the area is lit by fluorescent light or LED
overtaking:
lighting (the display may flicker)
Rif the camera lens mists up, e.g. if you drive
X When the overtaking manoeuvre is finished, into a heated garage in the winter and the
release the accelerator pedal again. temperature changes very quickly
Cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speed to Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed
the set speed.
Rif the parts of the vehicle are damaged in
which the camera is fitted. In this case, have
Deactivating the camera position and setting checked at a
The speed remains stored if you deactivate
cruise control. Do not use the front camera, reversing camera
or device camera under these circumstances.
X Press the o button.
You may injure others or cause damage to
or objects and the vehicle while parking.
X Select the speed limiter with the È button.
The on-board computer shows the È sym- Setting the monitor
bol in grey.
or
X Only when the continuous brake is deac-
tivated: when cruise control causes the vehi-
cle to accelerate, depress the brake pedal.
The on-board computer shows the é sym-
bol and the set speed in grey.
Camera
The front camera, reversing camera and device
camera are merely aids to assist driving. They
may show a distorted view of obstacles, show
Z
176 Driving systems
X To adjust the horizontal setting of the

monitor: hold monitor : on the left and right
and swing to desired position =.
X To adjust the vertical setting of the moni-
tor: loosen screws ; a little.
X Hold the underside of monitor : and swing it
to desired position ?.
X Tighten screws ;.
Front camera
The front camera is an optical parking and
Driving mode
manoeuvring aid. It shows you the area in front You see reversing camera : image on the mon-
of the vehicle on the monitor. It enables a sim- itor display if:
plified view of the pocket of the front mounting Rthe key is in position 2 in the ignition lock
plate and provides an extended field of vision in and
front of the vehicle. Ryou turn the direction of travel selection
switch to the k (reverse) position
You see the previous display on the monitor dis-
play when the function is switched on, as soon
as you:
Rturn the direction of travel selection switch to
the i (neutral) position
Rdrive forwards briefly
Additional information on the monitor is inclu-
ded in the manufacturer's operating instruc-
tions.
: Front camera Device camera

The monitor switches off automatically at a
speed of approximately 15 km/h. At a speed of
General notes
approximately 10 km/h, it switches back on. The device camera is an optical aid for the pur-
Change the speed; additional information on the poses of device monitoring.
monitor can be found in the manufacturer's In order to be able to see the device camera
operating instructions. image on the monitor display, you must switch
on the device camera (Y page 177). Additional
Reversing camera information on the monitor is included in the
manufacturer's operating instructions.
The reversing camera is an optical parking and
manoeuvring aid and shows the area behind the Connecting the device camera
vehicle on its monitor. The foot of the camera is magnetic. Therefore,
the device camera can be attached to all met-
allic parts freely.
Hydrostatic drive system 177
cable is laid without tension, kinking or fric-

tion.
X Insert the cable of the equipment camera to
the open end of wire ; and tighten the elec-
trical screw connections.
X Secure the cable of the device camera with a
cable connector.
Switching the equipment camera on/off
Driving mode
X Connection to the front end: open the front
flap (Y page 258).
X Position the device camera in a suitable posi-
tion on the attached equipment.
X Guide the cable of the device camera under
the front flap. Make sure that the cable is laid
without tension, kinking or friction.
X Unscrew electrical screw connector :, ;
and disconnect.
X Insert the cable of the device camera and X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the
twist the electrical screw connection tight. ignition lock.
X Unscrew protective cap ? at the open end of X To switch on: press button :.
wire =. X To switch off: press button : again.
X Reconnect electrical screw connection ;,
= and close.
X Connect protective cap ? to the open end of
wire : and screw closed.
Hydrostatic drive system
X Secure the cable of the device camera with a General notes
cable connector.
X Close the front flap (Y page 258). The hydrostatic drive system supports you dur-
ing working operation where vehicle speeds are
low, e. g.:
Rroad works
Rsnow clearing
Rtrench digging
The hydrostatic drive system can decouple the
speed of the diesel engine from the vehicle
speed. As such, the drive speed at the PTO shaft,
the working hydraulics and power hydraulics are
independent of the vehicle speed. You can
accelerate your vehicle, starting from a stand-
still, up to the type-tested maximum speed in
the gear. This wide gear ratio spread means you
X Rear area connection: position the device need to change gear less often. If it is necessary
camera in a suitable position on the attached to change gear, it is not necessary to disengage
equipment. the clutch as power is transmitted through the
X Unscrew protective cap : at the open end of hydrostatic transmission. For this reason, on
wire ; and remove. vehicles with Telligent® gearshift, there is also
X Guide the cable of the device camera into the no need to depress the clutch pedal when
rear area and connect it. Make sure that the engaging a gear.
Z
178 Hydrostatic drive system
Using the hydrostatic drive system, you can Operation Working speed
drive on uphill or downhill slopes with a gradient of 0.1 km/h
of less than 25%.
Mower up to 10 km/h
G WARNING
If a malfunction occurs when in hydrostatic Ditch-cleaning machine up to 5 km/h
drive mode, the power transmission to the Verge cutter up to 5 km/h
driven wheels is interrupted and the vehicle
coasts to a stop. On an uphill or downhill gra-
dient, the vehicle could roll away. People in Activating/deactivating the hydro-
the vehicle's area of danger could be run over static drive system
or could collide with equipment mounted on
Driving mode
the vehicle. There is a risk of serious or even Activating

fatal injuries.
Before starting work, make sure that no per-
sons are in the area of danger.
Depress the brake pedal immediately in the
event of a malfunction and secure the vehicle
with the parking brake. On an uphill or down-
hill gradient, a wheel chock may additionally
be required. If fuel leaks out, set the vehicle in
motion. Consult a qualified specialist work-
shop immediately.
The hydrostatic drive system is particularly
suitable for slow work trips. Avoid using the
hydrostatic drive system at high speeds. This
reduces fuel consumption and therefore
actively contributes to protection of the envi-
ronment.
Working speeds
During operation, the maximum permissible Hydrostatic drive system status indicator
speed is 50 km/h. Working mode cruise control = Working mode cruise control display
can be used up to a speed of 25 km/h. ? Drive condition display
Operation Working speed A Work mode display M work or driving mode
of 0.1 km/h display A drive
X Ensure that:
Snow clearing machine for up to 15 km/h
roads Rthe engine is running
Rthe constant working speed mode is deac-
Rotating brushes, e.g. for up to 15 km/h tivated (Y page 233)
washing roadside posts Rthe vehicle is stationary
Street-sweeping machine up to 15 km/h X Press button :.
Indicator lamp ; in the button flashes.
Side-delivery snow up to 10 km/h
blower, snow cutter
Vehicles with Telligent® automatic gear- the on-board computer goes out. The hydro-
shift: in the status area of the on-board com- static drive system is deactivated.
puter, after a brief period, drive condition dis- X Vehicles with Telligent® gearshift: press
play ? lights up green and indicator lamp ; button :.
lights up and stays lit in the switch. The hydro- Indicator lamp ; in the button flashes.
static drive system is activated. X Completely depress the clutch pedal until a
The previously selected work mode M work clacking noise sounds in the instrument clus-
A or driving mode A drive A also appears ter. If indicator lamp ; in the button is off,
in the status area of the on-board computer. the hydrostatic drive system is deactivated.
X Vehicles with Telligent® gearshift: depress The hydrostatic drive system status indicator
the clutch pedal. in the on-board computer goes out.
In the status area of the on-board computer, If the hydrostatic drive system is deactivated
Driving mode
after a brief period, the drive condition display while driving, a driving gear is automatically
lights up green and indicator lamp ; in the selected again if the clutch is open. If you want
button lights up and stays lit. The hydrostatic to engage the hydrostatic drive system again,
drive system is activated. the vehicle must be stationary.
The previously selected work mode M work
A or driving mode A drive A also appears
in the status area of the on-board computer. Activating/deactivating standby
X Release the clutch pedal.
mode, vehicles with Telligent® auto-
X All vehicles: if necessary, select the alter-
matic gearshift
nate mode; work mode M work A or driving
mode A drive A (Y page 180). You can switch the hydrostatic drive system to
X If necessary, turn the direction switch to the standby mode while in motion. In standby mode,
h (drive/driving forwards) or k (reversing) eighth gear is not available. In order to drive at
position. full speed, you must disengage the hydrostatic
The last gear used in the hydrostatic drive drive system (Y page 179).
system is selected.
X If the parking brake has been applied, release
the parking brake.
X Control the vehicle speed using the acceler-
ator pedal.
or
X Activate working mode cruise control
(Y page 181).
X Shift gear; see "Driving with the hydrostatic
drive system" (Y page 180) and "Driving with
the cruise control lever" (Y page 184).
Deactivating
You can disengage the hydrostatic drive system
at any time.
shift: press button :.
Indicator lamp ; in the button goes out. The
hydrostatic drive system status indicator in
Z
Driving with the hydrostatic drive sys-

tem
General notes
When the hydrostatic drive system is activated,
then either the "drive" or "work" mode is selec-
ted.
Handling characteristics
When driving with the hydrostatic drive mode,
the driving and coasting characteristics of the
Driving mode
Hydrostatic drive system status indicator

vehicle are the same as in normal drive mode.
= Working mode cruise control display
The brake response of the accelerator pedal can
? Drive condition display be adapted to suit the work to be performed by
A Work mode display work or driving mode applying the continuous brake (Y page 149).
drive Even at higher speeds, a safe full brake applica-
X To activate standby mode: ensure that: tion is possible in conjunction with ABS. It is
possible to shift the transmission gears while
Rthe clutch pedal is folded in (Y page 162)
driving, without having to open the clutch.
Rthe hydrostatic drive system is activated Power output is limited to approximately 65 kW.
(Y page 178)
X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the "Drive" mode
point of resistance (kickdown) for approx-
imately one second. In "drive" mode, you can drive with the "auto-
In the status area of the on-board computer, motive hydrostatic transmission", i.e. vehicle
work mode or driving mode display A, drive speed is proportionate to the speed of the diesel
condition display ? and working mode cruise engine. Only the first six gears are available and
control display = go out. the speed is therefore limited to approximately
Indicator lamp ; in the button flashes. The 50 km/h.
hydrostatic drive system is in standby mode. If you call up "drive" mode while the vehicle is
X To deactivate standby mode and activate stationary, the previously selected pulling-away
the hydrostatic drive system: gear is chosen.
Reduce the vehicle speed to below: You can choose from two operating modes in
driving mode "drive":
R40 km/h in driving mode drive
RM drive: you must change gear manually.
R25 km/h in working mode work
This operating mode is suitable for front
X Briefly press the o button on the multi-
loader use, for example, when you need to
function lever. drive forwards and backwards repeatedly.
In the status area of the on-board computer,
RA drive: gears are changed automatically.
the previously selected working mode or driv-
ing mode A, drive condition display ? and This operating mode is suitable for interval
working mode cruise control display = use, for example, including roadside post
appear. cleaning.
Indicator lamp ; in the button lights up. The H Environmental note
hydrostatic drive system is activated. The hydrostatic drive system is particularly
suitable for slow work trips. Avoid using the
hydrostatic drive system at high speeds. This
reduces fuel consumption and therefore
actively contributes to protection of the envi-
ronment.
Driving mode
Hydrostatic drive system status indicator Hydrostatic drive system status indicator
: Working mode cruise control display (not : Working mode cruise control display
available in driving mode) ; Drive condition display
; Drive condition display = Work mode display
= Driving mode display When work mode = is activated:
To select an operating mode: Rthe previously selected gear is selected
X Press and hold the o button on the multi- Rthe previously selected working speed is set
function lever, until desired operating mode
To switch between "work" mode = and
A drive or M drive = is displayed.
"drive" mode:
A drive: gear changes occur automatically.
M drive: the gears must be shifted manually. X With the multifunction lever: briefly press
the o switch on the multifunction lever.
To switch between "drive" = and "work" X With the control lever: make sure that the
modes:
Work Drive function is selected in the on-
X With the multifunction lever: briefly press board computer (Y page 214).
the o button on the multifunction lever. X Press the blue button on the control lever.
X With the control lever: make sure that the
Work Drive function is selected in the on-
board computer (Y page 214).
Working mode cruise control with
X Press the blue button on the control lever.
work limiter
"Work" mode Working mode cruise control
In "work" mode you can select the vehicle speed Working mode cruise control is a special cruise
and the working speed independent of the control that can be used in "work" mode. Work-
speed of the diesel engine. The work mode is ing mode cruise control can be activated within
suitable for work with a snow blower, for exam- a speed range from 0.1 km/h up to 25 km/h.
ple, when you wish to set the vehicle speed and You can set the speed yourself in 0.1 km/h
the working speed separately. increments.
You must change gears manually. Only the first Working mode cruise control is suitable, for
six gears are available and the speed is there- example, for mowing on a slope. It is possible to
fore limited to approximately 50 km/h. If nec- adjust the vehicle speed with the working mode
essary, you can also activate working mode cruise control and to set the working speed sep-
cruise control and the work limiter arately.
(Y page 181).
Z
Ñ Activates and adjusts current speed/

Driving mode
Working mode cruise control status indicator

: Working mode cruise control deactivated increases set speed
; Working mode cruise control activated q Activates and calls up stored speed/
= Stored speed cannot be reached (red arrow) reduces set speed
? Speed reduced by the driver (blue arrow) o Deactivates working mode cruise control
X Activation requirements: activate the
Even if working mode cruise control is activated,
you can reduce your speed by braking gently. hydrostatic drive system (Y page 178).
When doing so, the stored speed will not be X Make sure that "work" mode is selected
altered. A blue arrow appears in status indica- (Y page 181).
tor ?. If you then depress the accelerator X To activate working mode cruise control
pedal, you will return to the stored speed. If you and store a speed: drive at the desired speed
wish to drive faster than the stored speed, you and briefly press the Ñ button.
must briefly release the accelerator pedal and Status indicator ; appears in the on-board
then depress it once more. computer. Working mode cruise control is
If a red arrow appears in status indicator =, the activated. The speed you are driving at is
vehicle speed is lower than the stored speed. saved.
The speed of the diesel engine remains the X Release the accelerator pedal.
same, however. In order to maintain the stored speed, work-
The reason for the lower speed could be: ing mode cruise control automatically brakes
or accelerates the vehicle.
Ruphill/downhill inclines
Rthe engine speed is too low
X To activate working mode cruise control
Ran unsuitable gear is selected
at or above the stored speed: press the
Rthe operating temperature is too high q switch briefly.
Status indicator ; appears in the on-board
computer. The vehicle is decelerated to the
stored speed. In order to maintain the stored
speed, working mode cruise control automat-
ically brakes or accelerates the vehicle.
at speeds slower than the stored speed:
press the q switch briefly.
Status indicator ? appears with a blue arrow
in the on-board computer.
This maintains all speeds ranging from
0 km/h up to the stored speed. The stored
speed will not be exceeded.
In order to maintain the currently stored

with the cruise control lever and to set
speeds: drive with the cruise control lever
(Y page 184).
X To deactivate working mode cruise con-
trol: press the o button briefly.
Status indicator ;, = or ? goes out in the
on-board computer.
Working mode cruise control is deactivated
Driving mode
Status indicator for working mode cruise control
automatically if: with work limiter
Ryou brake sharply : Work limiter deactivated
Ra door is opened ; Work limiter activated
= Stored speed cannot be reached (red arrow)
Work limiter ? Speed reduced by the driver (blue arrow)
The work limiter can be used in conjunction with X To activate: activate working mode cruise
working mode cruise control. When you have control (Y page 181).
activated the work limiter, you have the possi- X Press the È button on the steering wheel.
bility of entering a load value for the diesel The input window for the load value opens in
engine. If, during working operation, this load the on-board computer.
value is reached while using attached equip- X If necessary, increase the load value by press-
ment, a red arrow appears in the status indica- ing the u button on the steering wheel.
tor. The vehicle speed is then reduced below the
stored speed of the working mode cruise con- or
trol. The speed of the diesel engine remains the X If necessary, decrease the load value by
same, however. This serves to prevent the pressing the t button on the steering
mechanical device protection on your attached wheel.
equipment from being triggered. The stored X Press the 9 button on the steering wheel.
speed of the working mode cruise control and The input window for the load value closes.
the load value must be adapted to the corre- X To change the load value for the attached
sponding working operation. equipment: press the È button on the
steering wheel.
The input window for the load value opens in
the on-board computer.
X Increase the load value by pressing the u
button on the steering wheel.
or
X Decrease the load value by pressing the t
button on the steering wheel.
X Press the 9 button on the steering wheel.
The input window for the load value closes.
X To deactivate: press the é button on the
é Switches off the working mode limiter steering wheel.

È Switches on the working mode limiter
o Deactivates cruise control
Z
Driving with the cruise control lever X Reduce speed until the vehicle is almost sta-
tionary.
Overview A signal tone sounds; the preselected gear is
selected. The u indicator lamp in the sta-
tus area of the on-board computer lights up.
engaged gear.
Activating/deactivating working mode

cruise control
Driving mode

at speeds faster or the same as the stored
speed: push the cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow :.
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, your X Release the accelerator pedal.
vehicle may have a cruise control lever. The working mode cruise control status indi-
X Engage the hydrostatic drive system cator appears in the on-board computer
(Y page 178). (Y page 181). The vehicle is decelerated to
the stored speed. In order to maintain the
Selecting a gear stored speed, working mode cruise control
automatically brakes or accelerates the vehi-
X To downshift: briefly push the cruise control cle.
lever away ; from the steering wheel. X To activate working mode cruise control
The transmission control shifts down one at speeds slower than the stored speed:
gear. push the cruise control lever in the direction
or of arrow :.
X To upshift: briefly pull the cruise control lever The working mode cruise control status indi-
towards ? the steering wheel. cator appears in the on-board computer
The transmission control shifts up one gear. (Y page 181).
This maintains all speeds ranging from
Changing direction 0 km/h up to the stored speed. The stored
X
speed will not be exceeded.
Make sure that the vehicle speed is below
30 km/h. In order to maintain the currently stored
X Make sure that working mode cruise control
is switched off.
X To deactivate working mode cruise con-
trol: push the cruise control lever in the direc-
the h (drive/driving forwards) position.
tion of arrow :.
X To preselect reverse driving direction:
The working mode cruise control status indi-
press the cruise control lever to the left A for cator in the on-board computer goes out
approximately one second. (Y page 181).
or
X To preselect forward driving direction:
press the cruise control lever to the right =
for approximately one second.
Setting the speed of working mode Depending on the selected vehicle equipment,
cruise control your vehicle may be equipped with a control
lever. If the hydrostatic drive system is activa-
X Activate working mode cruise control. ted, the following functions can be operated
X To increase the speed: push the cruise con- with the control lever:
trol lever in direction of travel =/A. To activate the control lever for driving
or mode:
X To decrease the speed: push the cruise con- X Select the Joystick function in the on-board
trol lever in the opposite direction to direction computer (Y page 214).
of travel =/A. The following functions can now be carried
Refer to the "Working mode cruise control" sec- out using the control lever.
tion for further information (Y page 181). X Engage the hydrostatic drive system
Driving mode
(Y page 178).
The æ indicator lamp in the status area of
Driving with the control lever the on-board computer lights up.
To accelerate forwards:
X Press red button A.
X Move the control lever in direction B.
To decelerate in forward mode:
X Move the control lever in direction C.
The braking effect is limited, and, if neces-
sary, the service brake must also be used.
To accelerate in reverse:
To decelerate in reversing mode:
The braking effect is limited, and, if neces-
: u button, changes direction sary, the service brake must also be used.
; F button, sets engine speed
To change direction:
= Yellow button, adjusts settings
? Black button, calls up menus X Press red button A.
A Red button, calls up acceleration or decel- X Move the operating lever in direction B or
eration functions C.
B To drive forwards or reduce speed when or
reversing X Press the u button : forwards or back-
C To reverse or reduce speed when driving wards.
forwards Stationary vehicle: the direction of travel is
D Blue button, in hydrostatic drive mode, acti- changed immediately.
vates operation of red hydraulic connec- While driving: the vehicle decelerates. When
tions 1, 2 or green hydraulic connections 3, the vehicle is stationary, the control lever
4; see working hydraulics (Y page 216) must be moved again.
E White button, activates the operation of yel-
low hydraulic connections 5, 6 or blue
hydraulic connections 7, 8; see working
hydraulics (Y page 216)
Z
186 Driving tips
To activate working mode cruise control: G WARNING

X Press red button A and yellow button = If you load the vehicle unevenly, driving char-
simultaneously. acteristics such as steering and braking
Working mode cruise control is activated and
the current speed is stored. behaviour may be severely impaired. There is
To activate working mode cruise control
and call up the stored speed: Load the vehicle evenly. Secure the load so
that it cannot slip.
X Move the control lever to the maximum extent
in the desired direction of travel and briefly The vehicle's driving, braking and steering char-
press red button A. acteristics vary with the type, weight and centre
The vehicle is accelerated/decelerated to the of gravity of the load.
stored speed.
Driving mode
To deactivate working mode cruise control:

X Move the control lever to the maximum extent Running-in
in the direction of travel and briefly press red The running-in period of the engine has a signif-
button A. icant effect on the vehicle, especially with
Further information on "Working mode cruise regard to:
control" (Y page 181). Rservice life
Roperating safety
Reconomy
Driving tips
Please note the following instructions during the
Important safety notes running-in period of 2,000 km:
Ravoid subjecting the engine to full load.
G WARNING Rrun in the engine with care, using differing
If you switch off the ignition while the vehicle speeds and engine revs.
is in motion, safety-relevant functions are Ravoid high engine speeds. Do not drive at
restricted or not available. This can affect, e.g. more than 2/3 of the type-tested maximum
the power steering. To steer, you will require speed for each gear.
considerably more force. There is a risk of an Rchange gear in good time.
accident. Rdo not shift down to brake the vehicle.
Do not switch off the ignition while the vehicle After 2,000 km, you may gradually accelerate
is in motion. the vehicle to its full velocity and increase the
engine speed.
G WARNING
Driving with a high body centre of
secure the vehicle on uphill and downhill gra-
gravity
dients. A loaded vehicle or a vehicle with
trailer/semitrailer may roll away. There is a To prevent an accident, observe the following
risk of an accident. points:
In the control position, check whether the Rthe vehicle load has a negative effect on all of
parking brake alone can hold the entire vehi- the vehicle's handling characteristics. Critical
conditions are reached sooner.
cle. The tractor unit and trailer/semitrailer
Rbox-type bodies and high loads increase the
should normally be secured using the parking vehicle's susceptibility to crosswinds.
brake and wheel chocks. Rgood traction conditions, e.g. dry roads, could
result in the vehicle tipping when it reaches
the cornering speed limit before the rear axle
slips away.
Driving tips 187
Rthe vehicle's braking distance increases. During the journey, check the warning and indi-
Rfluid tanks, e.g. fire extinguishers or fertiliser cator lamps on the instrument cluster.
tanks, that are not empty or not completely
full could have a negative effect on the vehi- Additional equipment
cle's handling characteristics.
Rthe risk of tipping is increased if the vehicle is Sufficient steerability of the vehicle must be
towed with the front axle raised. guaranteed. The front axle load, with corre-
sponding attached equipment and bodies for all
Ravoid periodic vehicle movements at high
vehicle loads, must be at least 33% of the actual
speeds, e.g. a sequence of several steering gross vehicle weight.
manoeuvres to the right and left.
The rear axle load must always be at least 33% of
Rbear in mind that there is an increased danger
the actual gross vehicle weight.
of tipping when driving off-road.
Driving mode
Pay attention to the minimum rear axle load:
Radapt the vehicle speed to the topographic
conditions. Driving off-road in less demanding RU 216 / U 218: 1,950 kg
terrain increases your vehicle's likelihood of RU 318: 2,200 kg
rolling. RU 323 / U 423 / U 427 / U 429 / U 430 /
Rreduce speed in difficult off-road terrain, U 527 / U 529 / U 530: 2,350 kg
especially if your vehicle is turned in alternat- This ensures sufficient braking performance and
ing directions. that directional stability is guaranteed during a
Mercedes-Benz does not take responsibility for full brake application.
accidents resulting from driving that is not For reasons of safety, only equipment and bod-
appropriate for the conditions. ies that meet the currently valid body/equip-
ment mounting directive may be used. It can be
found on the Internet in the Mercedes-Benz
Driving mode body manufacturer portal: http://bb-
portal.mercedes-benz.com.
Important safety notes Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of
approved equipment and bodies with Daimler
G WARNING mounting certification. Equipment and body
If you load the vehicle unevenly, driving char- manufacturers may provide the Daimler certifi-
acteristics such as steering and braking cate for devices with mounting certification.
behaviour may be severely impaired. There is
Driving off-road
Load the vehicle evenly. Secure the load so
that it cannot slip. Important safety notes
! Do not exceed the permissible axle loads, G WARNING
wheel loads (half of the axle load) and the When driving off-road, your body is subject to
maximum permissible gross weight.
forces from all directions due to the uneven
The following parts of the vehicle may other-
surface. You could be thrown from your seat,
wise be damaged:
for instance. There is a danger of injury.
Rwheels and tyres
Always wear a seat belt, even when driving off-
Rchassis
road.
Rsuspension
Raxles
G WARNING
Rsteering
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or
The vehicle's driving, braking and steering char- twigs may ignite if they come into contact with
acteristics vary with the type, weight and centre
hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk
of gravity of the load.
of fire.
Z
188 Driving tips
When driving on an unpaved road or off-road, X Steering: check the steering oil level and top
check the vehicle underside regularly. In par- up if necessary (Y page 264).
X Vehicle tools: if necessary, take along an
ticular, remove trapped plant parts or other
flammable material. Contact a qualified spe- additional durable tow cable and folding
spade.
cialist workshop immediately if damage is
X Tyres: check the tread depth (Y page 301)
detected.
and tyre pressure (Y page 303).
Driving off-road increases the possibility of vehi- X Driving on highly flammable surfaces,
cle damage which may cause assemblies or sys- vehicles in accordance with the Euro 6
tems to fail. Adapt your driving style to off-road standard: activate the regeneration block if
conditions. Drive carefully. Have vehicle dam- necessary (Y page 191).
age rectified immediately at a qualified special- Vehicles in accordance with the Euro 6 stand-
Driving mode
ist workshop. ard: pay particular attention that, if necessary,

When driving off-road, dirt, sand, mud and water the regeneration block is activated on vehicles
mixed with oil, for example, can soil the brakes. with low mounted exhaust pipes.
This can lead to reduced braking performance or
to total failure of the brakes, also from increased Rules for off-road driving
wear. The braking characteristics change
depending on the material that has penetrated. G WARNING
Clean the brakes after driving off-road. If you
then notice grinding noises or a reduction in If you drive over obstacles or in ruts, the steer-
braking performance, have the brake system ing wheel may jerk out of your grip, causing
checked at a qualified specialist workshop as injury to your hands.
quickly as possible. Adapt your driving style to Always hold the steering wheel firmly with
the altered braking characteristics. both hands. When driving over obstacles, you
Driving off-road demands special driving skills must expect steering forces to increase
and concentration. Furthermore, the driver
must take special care when driving off-road and briefly and suddenly.
before driving on-road again.
X Safely stow or secure any items of luggage or
Please make sure you read this section thor- loads.
oughly before attempting to drive the vehicle
X Secure bulk material (e.g. sand or gravel) with
off-road. You will then understand the particular
advantages your vehicle offers to enable you to baffle plates or covers to prevent it slipping.
always reach your destination safely. X Close the side and rear windows (Y page 55),
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you practice (Y page 56).
driving off-road in less demanding terrain. When X Before driving off-road, stop the vehicle and
driving on difficult terrain for the first time, ask engage a low gear.
an experienced off-road driver to accompany X If necessary, activate the differential locks
and advise you. (Y page 169).
X Activate the ABS off-road program
Check list before driving off-road (Y page 145).
XEngine: check the engine oil level and top up Vehicles with Telligent® automatic gear-
the engine oil if necessary (Y page 263). shift, when automatic drive program is
Before driving up or down extreme gradients, selected:
check that the engine oil is topped up to the G WARNING
maximum level.
If the engine revs drop below the minimum
i If you drive up or down extremely steep gra-
dients, the 4 symbol may appear in the engine speed, the electronics automatically
status area of the on-board computer. If the disengage the clutch. This interrupts the
engine oil has been topped up to the maxi- transmission of power. The vehicle may, for
mum level beforehand, this will not affect the
operating safety of the engine.
Driving tips 189
example, roll backwards on gradients. There When driving on an incline, drive into the line
is a risk of an accident. of fall (upwards or downwards in a straight
Never let the engine revs drop below the min- line) and do not turn.
imum engine speed.
X Engage a low gear. Select 1st or 2nd gear
Do not let the engine speed drop below the idle depending on the uphill or downhill gradient.
speed, idle speed (Y page 318). X Only drive over embankments and on slopes
All vehicles: along the line of fall.
X Do not brake until the vehicle is in the line of
! Only engage the differential locks if there is fall.
equal traction on all wheels. You could other- X If the engine braking effect is not sufficient
wise damage the differential locks. when driving downhill: depress the brake
Driving mode
X Challenging driving conditions, vehicles pedal carefully.
with Telligent® automatic gearshift: acti-
vate manual drive program M (Y page 158). Fording
Undesired interruptions to the tractive power
that may occur with automatic gear shifting ! Do not switch off the engine while fording.
are avoided. Otherwise, the exhaust system may be dam-
X Difficult terrain, vehicles with Telligent® aged by water.
automatic gearshift: manually shift
between gears. Fold out the clutch pedal
! If you drive into water at speed, the bow
wave may damage parts of the vehicle.
(Y page 162).
X All vehicles: only drive off-road with the ! Bear in mind that vehicles travelling in front
engine running and a gear engaged. or in the opposite direction create waves. This
X Drive slowly and smoothly. Walking pace is may cause the maximum permissible water
necessary in many situations. depth to be exceeded.
X Do not declutch or change gear on hills. These notes must be observed under all cir-
cumstances. You could otherwise damage
X Always ensure that the wheels remain in con-
the engine, the electronics or the transmis-
tact with the ground. sion.
X Exercise the utmost caution when driving
across unfamiliar, unpredictable terrain. For Fording is possible when the water level does
reasons of safety, first get out of the vehicle not rise above the wheel hub centres.
and inspect the terrain. X Before fording: activate the regeneration
X Watch out for obstacles such as rocks, holes, block, vehicles in accordance with the Euro 6
tree stumps and ruts. standard (Y page 191).
X Do not deviate from marked tracks or paths. X Turn the differential lock switch to position
1 (Y page 169).
Do not shift to neutral while driving on moun- The transfer case inter-axle lock is engaged. A
tainous terrain or declutch. You could lose con- symbol appears in the on-board computer to
trol of the vehicle while trying to brake with the indicate locking and the i indicator lamp
service brake only. If your vehicle is not able to lights up in the instrument cluster.
cope with the gradient, drive backwards in
X While fording: exercise extreme caution to
reverse gear.
ensure that a bow wave does not form.
X Drive through the water slowly at a constant
Driving on inclines
speed.
G WARNING X Adapt your driving style to the unaccustomed
environment.
If you drive on a steep incline at an angle or
X Avoid declutching, changing gear or stopping
turn on a steep incline, the vehicle could slip during the journey.
sideways, tip and overturn. There is a risk of
Pulling away in water can be difficult due to
an accident. the unknown surface conditions.
Z
190 Driving tips
X After fording: clean any mud from the tyre X After prolonged driving in mud, sand and
treads. water, clean and check the brake discs, brake
X Dry out the brakes by repeated brief opera- pads/linings, wheels and axle joints.
tion of the brakes. X Activate the regeneration block, vehicles in
X Activate the regeneration block, vehicles in accordance with the Euro 6 standard
accordance with the Euro 6 standard (Y page 191).
(Y page 191). X Observe the additional notes on cleaning
X Turn the differential lock switch to position after driving off-road (Y page 256).
g (Y page 169).
The transfer case inter-axle lock is deactiva-
ted. The differential lock indicator in the on- Using cable winches
board computer display and the i indica-
Driving mode
tor lamp go out. G WARNING

The cable may break under excessively heavy
Driving on sand loads. There is a risk of serious or even fatal
Loose sand is a particularly treacherous surface injury.
for off-road driving. If you do not act correctly in RAlways observe the maximum cable ten-
such situations, you could quickly get stuck in sion prescribed by the winch manufacturer.
the sand after just a few metres. In sandy areas,
REnsure that no-one is in the area of danger
drive quickly but in a measured manner in order
to overcome the roll resistance and thereby pre- when using the winch.
vent the vehicle from digging in. Wheel tracks RObserve work safety and accident preven-
that other vehicles have made are also helpful. tion regulations as well as the winch man-
Make sure that the tyre ruts are not too deep ufacturer's operating instructions.
and that the vehicle has sufficient ground clear-
ance. RMake sure that there are no persons between
the cable winch and the object to which the
Check list after driving off-road cable is attached.
ROnly use the cable winch from the operating
Driving off-road puts a greater strain on the
vehicle than normal road operation. position prescribed by the manufacturer.
RObserve the manufacturer's specifications
X Disengage the differential locks (Y page 169).
for the maximum permissible load for the
X Deactivate the ABS off-road program cable winch and its accessories. The value for
(Y page 145). the weakest component is applicable.
X Test the brakes. RFor self-recovery of the vehicle, only secure
X Clean the vehicle lighting and check for dam- the cable to secure and stable objects.
age. Activate the holding brake on the front axle
X Clean the licence plate. when recovering other objects (Y page 148).
X Clean the wheels, tyres and wheel arches and
remove any foreign objects. Check for dam-
age to the tyres. Diesel particle filter, vehicles in
X Check the tyre pressure (Y page 303). accordance with the Euro 6 standard
X Replace missing valve caps.
X Replace dented or damaged rims. Important safety notes
X Remove trapped plant matter and twigs.
G WARNING
X Remove flammable materials from the
exhaust system, e.g. leaves, plant matter and Flammable material such as leaves, grass or
twigs. twigs may ignite if they come into contact with
X Check the entire vehicle underside, tyres, hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust
steering, chassis and exhaust system for gas flow. There is a risk of fire.
signs of damage.
Driving tips 191
Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate- During the first few regenerations in particu-
rial can come into contact with hot vehicle lar, smoke and noise generation can occur in
the area of the exhaust system.
components. In particular, do not park on dry
grassland or harvested grain fields.
Regeneration block
! During automatic and manual regeneration, If you need to prevent the raised exhaust tem-
extremely hot exhaust gases escape from the peratures which occur during regeneration, you
exhaust pipe. Maintain a distance of at least can block regeneration, e.g.:
one metre to other objects, e.g. parked vehi-
Rwhen driving into a hazard area
cles, in order to avoid damage to property.
Rwhen performing work which causes intense
If you drive the vehicle predominantly over short build-up of dirt on the vehicle, involving dry or
distances or with low loads, automatic regener-
Driving mode
flammable materials
ation may not be sufficient.
Automatic and manual regeneration can then no
If too many particles collect in the diesel particle longer be started and any current regeneration
filter, the Â indicator lamp in the instrument will be interrupted.
cluster lights up. The on-board computer then
instructs you with a yellow event window
(Y page 117) to start manual regeneration. Man-
ual regeneration lasts approximately
30 minutes up to a maximum of 60 minutes
(Y page 192).
If you do not observe the yellow event windows
and their instructions, you risk:
Ra reduction in engine performance
Rhaving to replace the diesel particle filter
(Y page 125)
Automatic regeneration X To switch on/off: press button ;.

When the É indicator lamp lights up in the If indicator lamp : in the button lights up,
instrument cluster, automatic regeneration of regeneration is blocked.
the diesel particle filter is in progress. Only switch on the regeneration block for the
Automatic regeneration can begin either while duration of the hazardous condition. If you have
the vehicle is in motion or stationary. switched on the regeneration block, regenera-
Automatic regeneration only begins when all tion remains disabled even after starting the
operating conditions have been fulfilled, such as engine again. This can result in a large number of
sufficiently high engine oil and exhaust temper- particles quickly collecting in the diesel particle
atures, for example. If an operating condition is filter. In this case, the on-board computer
no longer fulfilled while regeneration is in proc- informs you that the regeneration block is still
ess, the É indicator lamp goes out and the active by means of a Â Regeneration dis‐
regeneration is interrupted. When all operating abled grey event window.
conditions are fulfilled again, the regeneration
starts again automatically. Avoid interrupting
the journey as long as the É indicator lamp is
lit. Breaks in your journey increase the required
regeneration time, which leads to increased fuel
consumption.
i The engine noise and the engine idling
speed may change while regeneration is in
process.
Z
192 Driving tips
Starting stationary manual regenera- Regeneration is automatically interrupted if you:

tion Rmove the multifunction lever into position h
or k
Rrelease the parking brake
Rswitch on the regeneration block
The interruption reduces the engine speed to
idling speed.
i During regeneration, the engine noise may
change.
i If the on-board computer prompts you to
carry out manual regeneration when the out-
Driving mode
side temperature is low, start regeneration

before parking the vehicle.
Start manual regeneration when the on-board If you park the vehicle without regenerating,
computer has prompted you to do so with cor- you can only begin manual regeneration after
responding event windows (Y page 117). In spe- the engine warming-up phase.
cial cases and for official vehicles, manual Start the manual regeneration after a thawing
regeneration can be initiated earlier for preven- time of up to 60 minutes if:
tative particle filter regeneration. Manual regen-
RAdBlue® was frozen
eration lasts approximately 30 minutes up to a
maximum of 60 minutes. Ryou have parked up the vehicle without per-
X Make sure the regeneration block is switched forming regeneration
off (Y page 191).
X Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and Replacing the filter
traffic conditions, and keep the engine run-
ning. G WARNING
While doing so, maintain a distance of at least Direct contact or inhalation of soot particles is
one metre to other vehicles, other objects and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury.
all flammable materials. Have the diesel particle filter replaced at a
X Shift to neutral i.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator.
X Press button : for approximately three sec-
Fuel consumption
onds.
Manual regeneration only begins if: Fuel consumption depends on:
Rthe engine oil and exhaust temperatures Rvehicle version
are sufficiently high Roperating conditions
RAdBlue® is not frozen
Rthe fuel type in use
Rthe system is functioning without problems Rmaintenance
The É indicator lamp lights up in the Rdriving resistance
instrument cluster and the engine speed is
Ryour driving style
increased.
When regeneration is finished: For these reasons, exact figures about any indi-
vidual vehicle's fuel consumption cannot be pro-
Rthe É indicator lamp in the instrument vided.
cluster goes out
Rthe engine speed is reduced to idling speed
i The on-board computer shows information
on average fuel consumption in the trip data
menu ß (Y page 106).
Refuelling 193
AdBlue® consumption Do not pull away or, if the vehicle is already in

motion, stop the vehicle as soon as possible,
AdBlue® consumption is between approx- paying attention to road and traffic condi-
imately 2 to 4% of fuel consumption. tions. You could otherwise damage the
engine.
The warning buzzer sounds if:
Engine oil consumption Rthe driver's door is opened with the side lights
After running-in the engine, oil consumption or dipped-beam headlamps switched on and
may reach 0.2 % of the vehicle's fuel consump- with the key in the ignition lock in position g
tion. Rthe driver's door is opened with the parking
Increased distance covered and more arduous light or dipped-beam headlamps switched on
operating conditions could result in vehicles and with the key removed from the ignition
Driving mode
exceeding this value. lock
Rthe immobiliser is activated
Rthe driver's door is opened while the parking
Limiting the speed brake is not applied
Rthe vehicle is stationary for approximately
If you exceed the maximum permissible speed, nine minutes with the engine running and a
the tractor/trailer combination can begin to gear selected
lurch. This may also overload the brakes and
Ryou select the reverse gear
tyres.
Ryou exceed the maximum permissible engine
G WARNING speed
If the vehicle combination swerves, you could Rthe engine speed or vehicle speed is too high
lose control of the vehicle combination. The when changing gears
vehicle combination may even overturn. In addition to the event window in the display of
There is a risk of an accident. the on-board computer, the warning buzzer
sounds if:
On no account should you attempt to
Rthe coolant level is too low or the maximum
straighten up the vehicle combination by
permissible coolant temperature (approx-
increasing the speed. Reduce your speed and imately 108 †) is exceeded. The operating
do not countersteer. Brake if necessary. safety of the engine is jeopardised by this.
Rthere is the risk of overloading the clutch.
For vehicles with a limit speed, the maximum
Rthe instrument cluster and/or the on-board
design speed of the vehicle is set to 90 km/h.
computer is malfunctioning. Important oper-
The limit speed depends on: ating information, maintenance information
Rthe vehicle equipment or indicator and warning lamps can no longer
Rthe legal requirements for the country be displayed.
The limit speed is automatically limited when
the restricted top speed is reached. Take this
into account when overtaking. Refuelling
You are responsible for ensuring that the maxi-
mum permitted speed is not exceeded. Fuel
Warning buzzer G WARNING
! If the warning buzzer sounds and the red Fuel is highly flammable. When fuel is handled
event window with the 5 symbol appears improperly, there is a risk of fire and explo-
in the on-board computer, the operating sion.
safety of the engine is jeopardised.
Z
194 Refuelling
Avoid fire, naked flames, smoking and the components in the exhaust system may over-
creation of sparks. Make sure that fuels do heat unnoticed. There is a risk of fire.
not come into contact with a hot exhaust sys- Never refuel with petrol. Never add petrol to
tem. Before carrying out work on the fuel sys- diesel fuel.
tem, switch off the ignition and the auxiliary
heater. Always wear protective gloves. ! Only refuel using commercially available,
sulphur-free diesel fuel that conforms to the
G WARNING European standard EN 590 as of 2010, et seq.
(max. 0.001% sulphur by weight).
Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to health.
The following fuel types are not permitted:
There is a risk of injury.
Rsulphurous fuel with a sulphur content
Be sure to avoid swallowing fuel or letting it
Driving mode
greater than 0.001% sulphur by weight

come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Rpetrol
Do not breathe the fuel vapours in. Keep fuels Rmarine diesel
out of the reach of children. Raviation fuels
Keep the doors and windows closed while Rheating oils
refuelling. Rvegetable oils
If you or others come into contact with fuel, Rparaffin
observe the following points: RFAME fatty acid methyl ester (bio-diesel
RImmediately rinse fuel off your skin with fuel)
soap and water. These fuel types cause irreversible damage to
the engine and BlueTec® exhaust gas after-
RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,
treatment, as well as significantly reducing
rinse your eyes with clean water immedi- the expected service life.
ately. Consult a doctor without delay.
! Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a
RConsult a doctor without delay if you swal-
diesel engine. Do not switch on the ignition if
low fuel. Do not induce vomiting. you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.
RImmediately change out of clothing that Otherwise, fuel can enter the fuel system.
has come into contact with fuel. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could
result in damage to the fuel system and the
engine. The repair costs are high. Notify a
G WARNING qualified specialist workshop and have the
Electrostatic charge can cause sparks and fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.
thereby ignite fuel vapours. There is a risk of ! Do not mix fuel additives to diesel fuel.
fire and explosion.
Fuel additives can result in:
Before you open the fuel filler cap or take hold
Rmalfunctions
of the pump nozzle, touch the metallic vehicle
Rdamage to the exhaust system/exhaust
body. This discharges any electrostatic gas aftertreatment
charge that may have built up. Rdamage to the engine
Do not get into the vehicle again during the
refuelling process. Otherwise, electrostatic ! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the
fuel system.
charge could build up again.
! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted
G WARNING surfaces. You could otherwise damage the
paintwork.
If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the flash
point of this fuel mixture is lower than that of ! If you are using drums or canisters to refuel
pure diesel fuel. When the engine is running, the vehicle, you should filter the fuel before
adding it.
Refuelling 195
This will prevent malfunctions in the fuel sys- X Observe the fuel grade (Y page 326).
tem due to contaminated fuel. X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel
! Use truck fuel pump nozzles to refuel. If you pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place and
use a passenger vehicle fuel pump nozzle, the refuel.
filler neck could be damaged. If you must use X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle
a passenger vehicle fuel pump nozzle, be switches off.
careful of the latch when removing the nozzle. i Do not add any more fuel after the pump
Do not pull the passenger vehicle fuel pump stops filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel
nozzle, but turn or tilt it downwards. You can may leak out.
then remove the nozzle.
X Replace fuel filler cap = and screw it on.
H Environmental note X Lock fuel filler cap = with the key.
Driving mode
If fuels are handled improperly, they pose a X Vehicles with fuel prefilter with water
danger to persons and the environment. Do separator: drain the fuel prefilter regularly
not allow fuels to run into the sewage system, (Y page 286).
the surface waters, the ground water or into
the ground.
AdBlue®
Do not get into the vehicle again during the refu-
elling process. Otherwise, electrostatic charge Important safety notes
could build up again.
! Do not allow diesel fuel to run into the
If you overfill the fuel tank, some fuel may spray
out when you remove the fuel pump nozzle. AdBlue® tank. You could otherwise damage
the exhaust gas aftertreatment system.
You will find further information on fuel in the
"Service products" section (Y page 326). ! Only use AdBlue®/DEF in accordance with
DIN 70070/ISO 22241. Do not use any addi-
Refuelling tives.
If AdBlue®/DEF comes into contact with pain-
ted or aluminium surfaces when filling the
tank, rinse the affected area immediately with
plenty of water.
! Do not mix additives to AdBlue®. Do not thin
AdBlue® with tap water. This could destroy
! Always close the AdBlue® tank properly.
Otherwise impurities may get into the exhaust
gas aftertreatment system and damage it.
! Make sure that you do not overfill the
Example: U 318 fuel tank AdBlue®/DEF tank. Otherwise, the AdBlue®/
DEF tank could be damaged at very low tem-
peratures.
X Remove the key from the ignition lock.
When opening the AdBlue® tank, small amounts
of ammonia vapours could escape.
X Switch off the auxiliary heating system
(Y page 94). Ammonia vapours have a pungent smell and are
particularly irritating to:
X Raise lock cover ; slightly and move it to the
side. Rskin
X Unlock fuel filler cap = with the key. Rmucous membranes
X Turn fuel filler cap = to the left and remove Reyes
from fuel tank :.
Z
196 Trailer
The vapours may cause a burning sensation in

the eyes, nose and throat as well as irritation of
the throat and watering eyes.
Avoid inhaling ammonia vapours. Only fill the
AdBlue® tank in well-ventilated areas.
AdBlue® should not come into contact with skin,
eyes or clothing, and should not be swallowed.
Keep AdBlue® out of the reach of children.
If you come into contact with AdBlue®, observe
the following:
Rimmediately wash AdBlue® from your skin
Driving mode
with water and soap. AdBlue® tank, U 200

Rif AdBlue® comes into contact with your eyes,
If AdBlue® tank = still contains sufficient
rinse your eyes thoroughly with clean water AdBlue®, pressure compensation may result
immediately. Consult a doctor without delay. when unscrewing cap :. AdBlue® may spill out.
Rif you have swallowed AdBlue®, immediately For this reason, take care when unscrewing
rinse your mouth with water and drink plenty cap : from AdBlue® tank =. If AdBlue® spills
of water. Consult a doctor without delay. out, immediately wash the affected area with
Rchange clothing that is soiled with AdBlue® plenty of water.
immediately. A special filler neck prevents AdBlue® tank =
AdBlue® is not refilled as part of the mainte- from mistakenly being filled with diesel fuel.
nance work. Top up the tank regularly during X Switch off the engine.
vehicle operation or at the latest when the first X Remove the key from the ignition lock.
event message is displayed on the on-board
computer.
X Switch off the auxiliary heating (Y page 94).
Additional information on AdBlue® is included in
the "Service products" section (Y page 327). X Lockable cap: lift up lock cover ; on blue
cap :.
Before filling the tank X Unlock blue cap : with the separate key.
X All vehicles: slowly turn blue cap : anti-
clockwise and remove.
Trailer
Towing bracket for fixed trailer cou-
pling
Make sure to observe all legal stipulations when
driving with heavy trailer drawbar loads, partic-
Example: AdBlue® tank, U 318 ularly the maximum permissible speed. The
trailer drawbar load and gross trailer weight
influence the driving characteristics. Always
observe the permissible maximum values,
which also apply for private roads.
Tridem centre-axle trailers have a positive effect
on the driving characteristics by using positive
steered trailer axles. If your vehicle is permitted
for use at tongue weights of up to 3 t, a minimum
front axle load of 33% of the gross vehicle weight
Trailer 197
of the towing vehicle is mandatory. When the Couple up the trailer by reversing the tractor
tractor/trailer combination is fully loaded, the vehicle. Never let the trailer run on.
minimum front axle load must not fall below 4 t.
G WARNING
If you uncouple a trailer with an engaged over-
Trailer tow hitch run brake, you could trap your hand between
the vehicle and the trailer drawbar. This poses
The trailer coupling is one of the vehicle com-
ponents with particular significance for road a risk of injury.
safety. Please comply precisely with the manu- Do not uncouple a trailer with an engaged
facturer’s operating, care and maintenance overrun brake.
instructions.
Only tow vehicles that do not have technical
Driving mode
problems. The permitted weight and load values
that must not be exceeded are to be found in the
vehicle's registration papers. These values can
also be found on the type plate of the trailer
coupling, the trailer and the vehicle identifica-
tion plate. Where the values differ, the lowest is
valid.
Coupling up
G WARNING Example: trailer coupling
If the trailer coupling has too much longitudi- : Control lever
nal play, the trailer can tear away. You could ; Coupling pin
lose the semitrailer as a result. There is a risk
of an accident.
Check the trailer coupling daily for longitudi-
nal play by moving the towbar body of the
trailer coupling forwards and back firmly.
Have any longitudinal play eliminated at a
qualified specialist workshop as soon as pos-
sible.
Longitudinal play cannot be checked on the cou-

pling jaw.
G WARNING Example: open trailer coupling
: Locking pin
There is a risk of the drawbar swinging out ; Control lever
when coupling up the trailer. In this case, the
X Couple/decouple the trailer (see the manu-
trailer drawbar swings uncontrollably from
facturer's operating instructions of the trailer
side to side. If a person is in the area of dan- coupling).
ger, there is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no persons are in the area of
danger. Set the trailer drawbar to the correct
height before coupling up, e.g. by using the
height adjustment device.
Z
198 Winter operation
Connecting cables and compressed- appears in the on-board computer display. The
air lines message only appears when the power supply is
connected to 12 V socket = or 24 V socket A.
Overview Observe the important safety notes
(Y page 196).
! Arrange the cables and compressed-air
lines in such a way that they easily yield to all Disconnecting cables and compressed-
movements without tension, kinking or fric- air lines
tion when cornering, etc. Before connecting
the cable, make sure the voltage rating of the G WARNING
consumer equipment on the trailer is correct.
If you disconnect the hose couplings in the
wrong order, the trailer brake is released and
Driving mode
the trailer could roll away. There is a risk of

accident.
Make sure that you observe the correct order
when disconnecting the hose couplings.
! After disconnecting the compressed-air

lines, ensure that the covers of the coupling
heads on the vehicle are closed. If the covers
are not closed, the coupling heads may
become contaminated, causing a malfunc-
Example: connections for trailer tion.
: Reservoir line hose coupling (red) X Apply the parking brake of the towing vehicle
; Brake line hose coupling (yellow) (Y page 147).
= 12 V socket X Chock the trailer wheels.
? ABS socket, 7-pin X Apply the trailer's parking brake, see the man-
A 24 V socket ufacturer's operating instructions.
X Detach reservoir line hose coupling : (red).
Connecting cables and compressed-air The trailer is automatically braked.
lines X Detach brake line hose coupling ; (yellow).
X Disconnect the power supply from 12 V
X Connect brake line hose coupling ; (yellow). socket = or 24 V socket A.
X Connect reservoir line hose coupling : (red). X Disconnect the control cable from ABS
X Connect the power supply to 12 V socket = socket ?.
or 24 V socket A.
X Connect the control cable to ABS socket ?.
X After connecting the compressed-air lines to
Winter operation
the vehicle, adjust the brake pressure regu-
lator (if installed) on the trailer (see manufac- Driving in winter
turer's operating instructions).
X Check that the lighting system on the tractor Important safety notes
vehicle and trailer is clean and working cor-
rectly. G WARNING
X Check that the trailer brake system is working If you activate the continuous brake or shift to
correctly. a lower gear on a slippery road surface in
Vehicles with a towing bracket for fixed order to increase the engine's braking effect,
trailer coupling: if you turn the key to position the drive wheels may lose traction. There is an
2 in the ignition lock, the Trailer increased risk of skidding and an accident.
speed Adapt your driving style. message
Winter operation 199
Do not activate the continuous brake and do at a speed to suit the prevailing weather condi-
not shift to a lower gear in order to increase tions.
the engine's braking effect on a slippery road You should pay particularly close attention to
road conditions as soon as temperatures
surface. approach freezing.
Before the journey Windscreen

Before the onset of winter, make sure that: At temperatures between approximately 5 † to
Rthe coolant contains sufficient antifreeze pro- Ò5 † and snowfall, direct the air to the wind-
tection (Y page 324) screen using the air-distribution control z
Rthe fuel used is suitable for winter use
(Y page 92). Additionally, the windscreen heat-
ing can be switched on (Y page 82).
Driving mode
(Y page 326)
Rwhen using single-grade engine oils, replace-
ment is completed in good time Driving in extremely cold conditions
(Y page 323) At outside temperatures below Ò20 †:
Rthe windscreen washer system contains suf-
X Make sure that there is adequate brake sys-
ficient antifreeze (Y page 263)
tem reservoir pressure (Y page 143) and that
Rtyres with a high-grip tread pattern are fitted;
the operating temperature of the coolant
if possible, these should be M+S tyres (winter (Y page 112) has been reached.
tyres)
X Avoid placing heavy loads on the engine when
Rsnow chains are carried in the vehicle
pulling away.
Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified X Shift gear early and avoid high engine speeds.
specialist workshop at the onset of winter.
X Warm the vehicle up for approximately
X When driving on snow, slush and on icy roads 20 minutes before increasing the load.
fit snow chains in good time (Y page 200).
Parking in extremely cold conditions
While the vehicle is in motion
If the vehicle is parked at outside temperatures
You should drive particularly carefully on slip- below Ò30 †, it cannot be guaranteed that the
pery road surfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, engine will start, even with the cold-climate
steering and braking manoeuvres. package. Mercedes-Benz advises against park-
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road con- ing the vehicle outdoors at outside tempera-
ditions. tures below Ò30 †.
If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be Observe the following if the vehicle has to be
stopped when moving at low speed: parked outdoors at extremely low tempera-
tures:
X Shift the transmission into neutral.
X Interrupt the voltage supply with the battery
X Try to bring the vehicle under control by using
isolator switch (Y page 83).
corrective steering.
X If necessary, ensure adequate vehicle lighting
The outside temperature indicator is not by using an external lighting system (e.g.
designed to serve as an ice-warning device and warning lamps).
is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. There is X Make sure that the fuel tank and the AdBlue®
a delay in displaying a change in outside tem-
perature. reservoir are filled above the reserve level.
Indicated temperatures just above the freezing i It may be necessary to ventilate the fuel
point do not guarantee that the road surface is system after long periods out of use if the fuel
free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially in level is too low (Y page 287).
wooded areas or on bridges. The vehicle could
start skidding if you fail to adapt your driving
style. Always adapt your driving style and drive
Z
X For longer periods out of use: charge the bat- ments in individual countries. Observe the legal
teries every two days. requirements in all countries concerned.
or When fitting snow chains, observe the fitting
X Remove the batteries and store at a temper- instructions of the chain manufacturer.
ature above 0 †.
Checking the tyre clearance
! If the clearance between the snow chain and
Snow chains steering linkage is less than 25 mm, the snow
chain could damage the steering linkage. In
Important safety notes this case, remove the snow chains again.
Snow chains increase traction in wintry condi- Have the steering geometry checked at a
Driving mode
tions.
German law requires that snow chains be Observe the following when fitting snow chains
removed as soon as possible once the road is to the front axle:
clear of snow. The vehicle's driving and braking X Apply the parking brake.
characteristics will be adversely affected if you
X Fit the snow chains (see fitting instructions of
drive on roads that are clear of snow with snow
chains fitted to the vehicle. the snow chain manufacturer).
X Start the engine.
G WARNING
If you drive too fast with snow chains fitted,
they may snap. As a result, you could injure
others and damage the vehicle. There is a risk
of an accident.
Observe the maximum permissible speed for
operation with snow chains.
! Only use snow chains that have been

approved and recommended for Mercedes-
Benz. This will prevent you from causing dam-
age to the vehicle. If you have questions, con-
sult a qualified specialist workshop. Clearance between snow chain and drag link
X Turn the steering wheel to the right as far as it
! Mercedes-Benz recommends fitting snow will to go.
chains on all wheels on the front and rear With the steering on full lock, there must be a
axles. clearance of at least 25 mm between the
If, contrary to Mercedes-Benz recommenda- snow chains and the drag link.
tions, snow chains are not fitted on all axles,
at least the interaxle lock must be engaged on
vehicles with permanent all-wheel drive.
There is otherwise a high risk of damaging the Cold climate package
interaxle differential.
If, contrary to Mercedes-Benz recommenda-
General notes
tions, snow chains are fitted diagonally, there To ensure that the vehicle can be started in low
is a high risk of damaging the differential. outside temperatures, the following optional
Repeated and sustained spinning of the equipment is available:
wheels may cause damage to the differen-
Rsocket for jump-starting
tials.
Rauxiliary heating
There may be slight deviations from the descrip-
Rfuel preheating system with water separator
tions in these Operating Instructions regarding
the use of snow chains, due to legal require- You can also have coolant preheating retrofitted
at a qualified specialist workshop. This is oper-
Winter operation 201
ated independently of the on-board voltage at Before attempting a cold start

230 V.
Special measures must be taken before a cold
i If the vehicle is to be used in extreme cold on start if the vehicle has been exposed to
a frequent basis, Mercedes-Benz recom- extremely low temperatures.
mends fitting the vehicle with the following
X Charge batteries in a low state of charge
equipment:
before starting.
Rhigh-output alternator X Thaw frozen batteries before charging them.
Rheated windscreen
i The acid in discharged batteries may freeze
Rseat heating at extremely cold temperatures.
X Do not rapid-charge cold batteries.
Cold-start limits X If the batteries are permanently subjected to
Driving mode
Without optional equipment, your vehicle is temperatures below Ò25 †: charge the bat-
capable of starting at temperatures as low as teries every two days.
Ò15 †. When fitted with the optional equipment or
and filled with cold-resistant service products, XRemove batteries and store at a temperature
your vehicle can be started at temperatures as above 0 †.
low as Ò26 †.
i The capacity of the batteries is adversely
i Engine starting may be impaired despite affected by increasingly cold temperatures.
taking appropriate measures if the vehicle is XVehicles with Telligent® automatic gear-
exposed to temperatures lower than the cold-
shift: fold out the clutch pedal (Y page 162).
start limits.
i The folded-out clutch pedal makes starting
Cold-resistant service products the engine easier. When the engine has
reached the operating temperature, you can
fold the clutch pedal back in.
Service products Notes
Diesel fuel Winter diesel Starting the engine
Engine oil Cold-resistant oil ! Do not start the engine if the on-board volt-
SAE 5W-30 age is low. This is the case if, for example, the
lights are weak or the 3 indicator lamp in
Coolant Mixing ratio of the status area of the on-board computer
50% by volume lights up. Starting attempts could damage the
Coolant/50% by volume batteries if they are cold or not fully charged.
water X Establish the voltage supply with the battery
Axles 001 989 53 03 12 isolator switch (Y page 83).
X Switch off all unnecessary electrical consum-
steering 001 989 24 03 12 ers (e.g. CD radio, blower etc.).
Hydraulic system Cold-resistant oil X At temperatures below Ò25 † and on vehi-
SAE 5W-40 cles with coolant preheating: pre-heat the
coolant with coolant preheating for at least
90 minutes.
Have the vehicle converted to cold-resistant X If required, switch on the auxiliary heating
service products at a qualified workshop. (Y page 94) or engine preheating (Y page 97).
X All vehicles: turn the key to position 2 in the
ignition lock.
X Make sure that the on-board voltage is suffi-
cient for starting the engine. When doing this,
observe the temperature display in the instru-
Z
ment cluster and watch out for signs of low

on-board voltage.
the clutch pedal.
X All vehicles: start the engine.
X Warm up the engine at low engine speed with
the vehicle stationary. Do this at outside tem-
peratures below Ò20 † for approximately
20 minutes.
! The lubricity of the engine oil and transmis-
sion oil may be reduced at low temperatures.
Driving mode
Driving a cold vehicle may result in damage to

the drivetrain and assemblies.
Engine does not start

! Do not continuously operate the starter.
Continuous operation can damage the starter
and the electrical system. Starting attempts
should last no more than 60 seconds and you
must wait at least 60 seconds between
attempts.
A break of at least five minutes is necessary if
the engine has still not started after three
starting attempts.
X Before restarting: turn the key to position
g in the ignition lock.
X Let the starter motor cool down and then
restart the engine.
or
X Jump-start the vehicle by means of an exter-
nal 24 V jump-start (Y page 295).
Overview 203
Useful information led separately, vehicles with positioning

pump
Rpower hydraulics circuit III/IV
going to print. Country-specific differences are Hydraulic system controls
be equipped with all the functions described. Operating lever
functions.
Hydraulic system
G WARNING
The hydraulic system is under high pressure
and the hydraulic fluid may be hot. If work on
the hydraulic system is carried out incor-
rectly, high-pressure hydraulic fluid may spray
out. There is a risk of injury.
Only have work on the hydraulic system car-
ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
: u button, to change direction
! Only switch on the hydraulic system when it ; F button, to set engine speed
is connected to an item of attached equip-
= Yellow button, to adjust settings
ment. There is otherwise a risk of damage to
the hydraulic system. ? Black button, to call up menus
A Red button, to call up the float setting func-
H Environmental note tion (Y page 219) or snow plough load relief
Environmentally compatible hydraulic fluids (Y page 220)
must be separately stored, collected and dis- B To lower the control system:
posed of in accordance with waste manage- Red hydraulic connection 2 or, if simultane-
ment laws. ously pressing white button G, yellow
hydraulic connection 6
C To move the control system to the right:
Green hydraulic connection 4 or, if simulta-
Overview neously pressing white button G, blue
hydraulic connection 8
Types of hydraulic system To raise the control system:
D
The hydraulic system can consist of several Red hydraulic connection 1 or, if simultane-
independent circuits: ously pressing white button G, yellow
Rworking hydraulics circuit I, with or without hydraulic connection 5
snow plough load relief, vehicles with gear E To move the control system to the left:
pump Green hydraulic connection 3 or, if simulta-
Rworking hydraulics circuit II for continuous neously pressing white button G, blue
consumers, vehicles with gear pump hydraulic connection 7
Rfront, side and rear working hydraulics circuit
II for continuous consumers, can be control-
Z
204 Overview
F Blue button, can be assigned specific func- T Activates/deactivates float setting, green
tions (Y page 214) hydraulic connections 3 and 4
G White button, to activate operation of yellow U Activates/deactivates float setting, red
hydraulic connections 5, 6 or blue hydraulic hydraulic connections 1 and 2
connections 7, 8
Buttons, vehicles with positioning
Buttons, vehicles with gear pump pump
Hydraulic system
H Deactivates/enables complete hydraulic H Deactivates/enables complete hydraulic

system system
I Activates/deactivates working hydraulics I Activates/deactivates working hydraulics
circuit I circuit I
J Activates/deactivates working hydraulics M Activates/deactivates power hydraulics cir-
system circuit II cuit III/IV
K Cumulation of flow rates to circuit I or circuit N Activates/deactivates power hydraulics cir-
II cuit IV
L Switches the flow rate between circuit I and O Activates/deactivates snow plough load
circuit II relief, red hydraulic connections 1 and 2
M Activates/deactivates power hydraulics cir- P Activates/deactivates continuous consum-
cuit III/IV ers, green hydraulic connection 3
N Activates/deactivates power hydraulics cir- Q Activates/deactivates continuous consum-
cuit IV ers, red hydraulic connection 1
O Activates/deactivates snow plough load R Activates/deactivates float setting, blue
relief, red hydraulic connections 1 and 2 hydraulic connections 7 and 8
P Activates/deactivates continuous consum- S Activates/deactivates float setting, yellow
ers, green hydraulic connection 3 hydraulic connections 5 and 6
Q Activates/deactivates continuous consum- T Activates/deactivates float setting, green
ers, red hydraulic connection 1 hydraulic connections 3 and 4
R Activates/deactivates float setting, blue U Activates/deactivates float setting, red
hydraulic connections 7 and 8 hydraulic connections 1 and 2
S Activates/deactivates float setting, yellow V Activates/deactivates front working
hydraulic connections 5 and 6 hydraulics circuit II
W Activates/deactivates side and rear work-
ing hydraulics system circuit II
Hydraulic connections 205
Deactivating/enabling the hydraulic motion. Persons in the area of danger can be

system seriously or even fatally injured.
X To deactivate: press button H. Make sure that only one piece of equipment at
The indicator lamp in button H lights up. a time is ever connected to hydraulic connec-
The entire hydraulic system is deactivated. tions of the same colour.
Operation of the hydraulic system using the
buttons or the control lever is disabled. The working hydraulics may be fitted with up to
X To enable: press button H. eight hydraulic connections at the front and up
The indicator lamp in button H goes out. to four connections at the rear. The hydraulic
connections are integrated into the front and
Operation of the hydraulic system using the rear bumpers. The hydraulic connections are
buttons or the control lever is enabled. colour-coded.
Hydraulic system
Hydraulic connections 1 to 8 can be proportion-
ally controlled with the control lever. You can
Hydraulic connections connect attached equipment with a constant
flow rate either to hydraulic connection 1 or
Important safety notes hydraulic connection 3; switching continuous
consumers on/off (Y page 224).
G WARNING
When you switch off the hydraulic system, a
residual pressure remains in the hydraulic
system. This may cause attached equipment
to move or continue to run. There is a risk of
RAfter switching off the hydraulic system,
always secure the attached equipment by
closing the cutoff valve on the equipment.
RInsert the transport lock.
RMake sure that nobody is in the danger
Vehicle front, left-hand side
zone of the attached equipment.
: Red hydraulic connection 1, circuit I
! Only switch on the hydraulic system when it ; Red hydraulic connection 2, circuit I
is connected to an item of attached equip- = Green hydraulic connection 3, circuit I
ment. There is otherwise a risk of damage to ? Green hydraulic connection 4, circuit I
the hydraulic system.
Working hydraulics circuit I and cir-

cuit II
Hydraulic connections
G DANGER
If hydraulic connections of the same colour
are connected at the front and rear simulta-
neously, all hydraulic connections will be
pressurised to the same pressure. The equip- Vehicle front, right-hand side
ment fitted can then be set, uncontrolled, in A Yellow hydraulic connection 5, circuit I
B Yellow hydraulic connection 6, circuit I
C Blue hydraulic connection 7, circuit I
Z
206 Hydraulic connections
D Blue hydraulic connection 8, circuit I Load-sensing connections, vehicles

E Hydraulic connection, separate return flow with positioning pump
line for circuit I or circuit II
F Hydraulic connection, circuit II Overview of connections
Hydraulic system
Rear area, right-hand side Vehicle front, right-hand side

: Red hydraulic connection 1, circuit I : Load-sensing connection
; Red hydraulic connection 2, circuit I
= Green hydraulic connection 3, circuit I
? Green hydraulic connection 4, circuit I
A Hydraulic connection, separate return flow
line, circuit I or circuit II
B Hydraulic connection, circuit II
Rear area, right-hand side

: Load-sensing connection
Chassis, right-hand side

: Hydraulic connection, circuit II
; Hydraulic connection, separate return flow
line, circuit II
Chassis, right-hand side

: Load-sensing connection
Connecting attached equipment with

load-sensing connection
If you connect attached equipment to the load-
sensing connection, the required flow rate for
this equipment is controlled automatically by
Hydraulic connections 207
the device. The attached equipment is then X Make sure that the engine is switched off.
directly connected to the positioning pump, as X Connect attached equipment that has a load-
soon as you have selected LS in the "Hydraulics" sensing connection with individual pressure
input window (Y page 210). compensation (see the manufacturer's oper-
ating instructions).
X Perform a safety and function check on the
attached equipment (see the manufacturer's
operating instructions).
Problems connecting hydraulic lines to working hydraulics circuit II

Hydraulic system
The hydraulic lines of the The pressure in the hydraulic lines of working hydraulics circuit II is too
equipment fitted cannot high.
be connected to the X Switch off the engine.
hydraulic connections of
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.
working hydraulics cir-
cuit II. X Vehicles with gear pump: briefly switch working hydraulics cir-
cuit II to standby mode (Y page 225).
The pressure is decreased in the hydraulic line of working hydraulics
circuit II.
or
X Vehicles with positioning pump: briefly switch front working
hydraulics circuit II (Y page 227) or side and rear working hydraul-
ics circuit II (Y page 228) into standby mode.
The pressure is decreased in the hydraulic line of working hydraulics
circuit II.
Power hydraulics
! Only switch on the power hydraulics when
connected to an item of attached equipment.
There is otherwise a risk of damage to the
power hydraulics.
You must switch off the power hydraulics
when you have finished using the equipment
and when you are transporting it.
! If a cell is activated, the corresponding
hydraulic connections at the front and rear of
the vehicle will be pressurised. Therefore, do
not simultaneously use equipment connected Vehicle front with circuit III
at the front and rear hydraulic connections for : Red hydraulic connection, pressure line, cir-
the same hydraulic circuit. cuit III
; Red hydraulic connection, return line, cir-
cuit III
= Black hydraulic connection, leak oil connec-
tion
Z
208 Menus and input windows in the on-board computer
Vehicle front with circuit III and circuit IV Rear area with circuit III and circuit IV
Hydraulic system
: Red hydraulic connection, pressure line, cir- : Red hydraulic connection, pressure line, cir-
cuit III cuit III
; Green hydraulic connection, pressure line, ; Green hydraulic connection, pressure line,
circuit IV circuit IV
= Red hydraulic connection, return for cir- = Red hydraulic connection, return for cir-
cuit III cuit III
? Green hydraulic connection, return for cir- ? Green hydraulic connection, return for cir-
cuit IV cuit IV
A Black hydraulic connection, free return A Black hydraulic connection, free return
Menus and input windows in the on-

board computer
Brief instructions
General notes
You can call up the menus, submenus and input
windows of the hydraulics with the buttons on
the steering wheel and the control lever. Brief
instructions follow. In all further descriptions,
Rear area with circuit III only the buttons on the steering wheel will be
: Red hydraulic connection, pressure line, cir- described.
cuit III
; Red hydraulic connection, return line, cir- Brief instructions for operation using
cuit III the buttons on the steering wheel
= Black hydraulic connection, free return
X To select an entry: press the r or s
button.
X To change the value: press the u or t
button.
X To call up a menu or function, to end an
entry: press the 9 button.
Menus and input windows in the on-board computer 209
Brief instructions for operation using Trailer

the control lever
Maintenance
Hydraulic system
Example: hydraulics menu window, vehicles with
gear pump
: Symbols for the working hydraulics circuit
and power hydraulics circuit
: u button, to change direction ; Flow rates
; F button, to set engine speed = Hydraulic connections
= Yellow button, adjusts settings ? Symbols for operating mode display: con-
? Black button, calls up menus tinuous consumers, proportional control or
F Blue button, can be assigned specific func- snow plough load relief
tions (Y page 214) A Hydraulic connections
X To select an entry: press and hold yellow B Power hydraulics circuit IV deactivated
button = and press the u button : up or C Power hydraulics circuit III activated
down until the desired entry has been selec- D Working hydraulics circuit II in standby
ted. mode
X To change the value: press and hold yellow E Working hydraulics circuit I activated
button = and press the F button ; up or
down until the desired value is shown.
X To call up a menu or function, to end entry:
press black button ?.
"Hydraulics" menu window

Below, the menus, submenus and input win-
dows of the hydraulics are described.
Structural Selection
sequence in the on-
board computer Example: hydraulics menu window, vehicles with
positioning pump
Operation and main- Axles : Symbols for the working hydraulics circuit
tenance â and power hydraulics circuit
; Attached equipment with constant flow
Tyres
rate: flow rate
Hydraulics Equipment with load sensing: LS display
= Hydraulic connections
Z
? Symbols for operating mode display: con- X Press the r or s button to select the
tinuous consumers, proportional control or Hydraulics entry.
snow plough load relief The Hydraulics menu window appears.
A Hydraulic connections X Press the 9 button.
B Power hydraulics circuit IV deactivated The Work functions menu appears.
C Power hydraulics circuit III deactivated X Press the r or s button to select the
D Side and rear working hydraulics system cir- desired entry.
cuit II activated X Press the 9 button.
E Front working hydraulics circuit II in standby The desired input window appears.
mode
F Working hydraulics circuit I activated
Hydraulic system
operation and maintenance (Y page 105).

Hydraulics menu window.
The Hydraulics menu window appears. All
operating conditions of the working and
power hydraulics are displayed.
"Working functions" menu window

As a rule, it is simplest to operate the on-board
computer using the buttons on the steering
wheel. You can, however, also call up the Work
functions menu window using the control
lever and, if necessary, change settings as well.
Operation using the control lever
sequence in the on- X Make sure the vehicle is stationary.
board computer X Press black button ?.
The Work functions menu appears. The
Operation and main- Hydraulics input window is selected.
tenance â X Press black button ?.
Hydraulics The Hydraulics input window appears.
X Select the entry, change the value and con-
Work functions Hydraulics firm the function (Y page 209).
Load profile 1
Load profile 2
"Hydraulics" input window
Settings
G DANGER
back A vehicle with positioning pump has equip-
ment with a constant flow rate connected. If
Operation using the buttons on the steering you then select LS in the "Hydraulics" input
wheel window, the attached equipment goes into
X Make sure the vehicle is stationary. float setting as soon as you activate the cor-
X Press the u or t button to scroll to â responding working circuit. The equipment
operation and maintenance. fitted then lowers in an uncontrolled manner.
Persons in the area of danger can be seriously
or even fatally injured.
Keep the following in mind before activating

the working hydraulics: in the case of
attached equipment with a constant flow rate,
a flow rate must always be shown in the
"Hydraulics" input window, and not LS.
Structural Display
sequence in the on-
board computer
Operation and main-
tenance â Example: symbols for hydraulics input window,
Hydraulic system
Hydraulics vehicles with gear pump
: Working and power hydraulics circuit deac-
Work functions tivated
; Working and power hydraulics circuit in
Hydraulics The hydraulics input
window appears. standby mode
= Working and power hydraulics circuit acti-
vated
? Power hydraulics circuit IV
A Power hydraulics circuit III
B Working hydraulics circuit II
C snow plough load relief
D Continuous consumer on green hydraulic
connection 3
E Continuous consumer on red hydraulic con-
nection 1
Example: hydraulics input window, vehicles with

gear pump
: Symbol for working hydraulics circuit I: con-
tinuous consumer on red hydraulic connec-
tion 1, continuous consumer on green
hydraulic connection 3 or snow plough load
relief
; Flow rate for continuous consumers or load
relief function value for snow plough load
relief Example: hydraulics input window, vehicles with
= Flow rates positioning pump
? Symbols for the working hydraulics circuit : Symbol for working hydraulics circuit I: con-
and power hydraulics circuit tinuous consumer on red hydraulic connec-
tion 1, continuous consumer on green
hydraulic connection 3 or snow plough load
relief
; Load relief function value for snow plough
load relief or
Attached equipment with constant flow
rate: flow rate
Equipment with load sensing: LS display
Z
= Attached equipment with constant flow Rworking hydraulics circuit (Y page 216)
rate: flow rate Rpower hydraulics circuit (Y page 230)
Equipment with load sensing: LS display The corresponding symbol is marked with a
? Symbols for the working hydraulics circuit coloured border. The indicator lamp in the
and power hydraulics circuit corresponding button flashes.
desired hydraulic circuit.
X Attached equipment with constant flow
rate: change the value. To do so, press the
u or t button.
or
X Equipment with load sensing: press and
Hydraulic system
hold the t button until LS is shown in the

input window.
Activating a hydraulics circuit
X Press the 9 button on the steering wheel or
Example: symbols for hydraulics input window, the black button on the control lever until the
vehicles with gear pump indicator lamp in the corresponding button
: Working and power hydraulics circuit deac- lights up.
tivated The corresponding symbol is coloured.
; Working and power hydraulics circuit in Switching the hydraulics circuit back to
standby mode standby mode
= Working and power hydraulics circuit acti- X Press the r or s button to select an
vated activated hydraulics circuit.
? Power hydraulics circuit IV X Press the 9 button on the steering wheel or
A Power hydraulics circuit III the black button on the control lever until the
B Side and rear working hydraulics system cir- indicator lamp in the corresponding button
cuit II flashes.
C Front working hydraulics circuit II The symbol has a coloured border.
D snow plough load relief Deactivating a hydraulics circuit
E Continuous consumer on green hydraulic
X Deactivate the desired hydraulics circuit
connection 3
using the corresponding button:
F Continuous consumer on red hydraulic con-
Rsnow plough load relief (Y page 220)
nection 1
Rcontinuous consumers (Y page 224)
Calling up the "Hydraulics" input window
Rworking hydraulics circuit (Y page 216)
X Call up the Work functions menu window Rpower hydraulics circuit (Y page 230)
(Y page 210). The indicator lamp in the corresponding but-
X Press the r or s button to select the ton goes out. The symbol is grey.
Hydraulics entry.
The Hydraulics input window appears. "Load profile 1" or "Load profile 2"
Changing the value function
X If necessary, switch the desired hydraulics If you have saved a profile for the fitted equip-
circuit to standby mode: ment (Y page 215), you can call up the saved
Rsnow plough load relief (Y page 220) settings again from this profile. The attached
Rcontinuous consumers (Y page 224) equipment is then immediately ready for use.

sequence in the on- The Settings menu window appears.
board computer X Press the r or s button to select the
desired entry.
Operation and main-
tenance â
"Settings", "Limits" menu windows
Hydraulics
In the Limits input window you can set limits
Work functions for proportional positioning movements on
hydraulic connections 1 to 8. With the limit, you
Load profile 1 or determine if and how fast a positioning move-
Load profile 2 ment on the hydraulic connections should be
made by the control lever. The smaller the value
Hydraulic system
X Call up the Work functions menu window for the limit, the more finely you can carry out
(Y page 210). positioning movements. You can also set the
limit while you are carrying out positioning
movements with the control lever. In this way,
Load profile 1 or Load profile 2 entry. you can check your setting directly.
The limit does not apply to continuous consum-
The saved profile is loaded and the setting ers.
values applied. The on-board computer briefly
shows the Profile 1 loaded or Profile 2 Structural Selection
loaded message in the display. sequence in the on-
board computer
Operation and main-
"Settings" menu window tenance â
Settings Hydraulics
Work functions
sequence in the on- Settings
board computer
Limits The "Limits" input
Operation and main- window appears.
tenance â
Hydraulics
Work functions
Settings Limits
Function button
Automatic
Save
Reset
back
Example: "Limits" input window for proportional
valves
X Call up the Work functions menu window : Control direction of the proportional valves
(Y page 210). ; Hydraulic connections
X Press the r or s button to select the = Symbols for proportional valves
Settings entry.
Z
? Yellow mark Function button Working speed

A Red mark
Unit function
If hydraulic connections of the same colour
have: Joystick
Rone red mark, then only the hydraulic con-
Work Drive
nection with a yellow mark can be controlled.
Rtwo red marks, then both hydraulic connec- Unit function 2
tions are disabled. The symbols of the hydrau-
lic connections are then grey. X Call up the Settings menu window
X Call up the Settings menu window (Y page 213).
(Y page 213). X Press the r or s button to select the
X Press the r or s button to select the Function button entry.
Hydraulic system
Limits entry. X Press the 9 button.

X Press the 9 button. The Function button selection window
The Limits input window appears. appears.
X Press the r or s button to select the X Select the desired function with the r or
desired hydraulic connection. s button.
X To set a limit: press the u or t button RWorking speed: constant working speed
until yellow mark ? is at the desired position. mode is activated/deactivated
or (Y page 234).
X To disable a hydraulic connection: press Activated hydraulic system: if you move the
and hold the t button until yellow mark ? control lever with the blue button pressed,
is at the smallest value. the red and green hydraulic connections
are controlled.
X Release the t button and press again until
red mark A appears. RUnit function: the output on the hydrau-
lic control unit is activated as long as the
X All: press the 9 button.
blue button is pressed. For more informa-
The Work functions menu window closes. tion, see the Mercedes-Benz body/equip-
ment mounting directive on the Internet at
"Settings," "Function button" menu http://bb-portal.mercedes-benz.com.
windows Attached equipment with an electrical
switching function must be connected (see
You can assign a specific function to the blue the manufacturer's operating instructions).
button on the control lever. With the hydraulic If the electrical circuit to the attached
system activated, control of the hydraulic con- equipment is not closed and the blue but-
nections using the operating lever changes ton is pressed, a fault message may be
depending on the function selected. shown in the on-board computer.
If no function has been assigned and you move Activated hydraulic system: if you move the
the control lever with the blue button pressed, control lever with the blue button pressed,
the hydraulic connections will not be controlled. the red and green hydraulic connections
are controlled.
sequence in the on- RJoystick: if the hydrostatic drive system
board computer has been activated, the vehicle can be
accelerated and decelerated using the con-
Operation and main- trol lever (Y page 185).
tenance â Activated hydraulic system: if you move the
control lever with the blue button pressed,
Hydraulics
the red and green hydraulic connections
Work functions are controlled.
Settings
RWork Drive: if the hydrostatic drive sys- Settings

tem has been activated, you can switch
between "drive" mode and "work" mode Automatic Snow plough
(Y page 180).
Activated hydraulic system: if you move the X Call up the Settings menu window
control lever with the blue button pressed, (Y page 213).
the red and green hydraulic connections
are controlled.
Automatic entry.
RUnit function 2: the output on the
hydraulic control unit is activated as long as
the blue button is pressed. For more infor- The Automatic selection window appears.
mation, see the Mercedes-Benz body/ X To switch the function on: press the u
equipment mounting directive on the Inter- button.
Hydraulic system
net at http://bb-portal.mercedes- The checkbox next to the function is marked.
benz.com. Attached equipment with an or
electrical switching function must be con- X To switch the function off: press the u
nected (see the manufacturer's operating button.
instructions). If the electrical circuit to the The checkbox next to the function is no longer
attached equipment is not closed and the marked.
blue button is pressed, a fault message may X Press the 9 button.
be shown in the on-board computer.
The Automatic selection window closes.
Activated hydraulic system: if you move the
control lever with the blue button pressed,
the yellow and blue hydraulic connections "Settings", "Save" menu windows
are controlled.
If you are working with several pieces of equip-
X To switch on the desired function: press ment, you can save all the settings for two
the u button. pieces of equipment in their own individual pro-
The checkbox next to the desired function is file. You can then load the profile for that equip-
marked. ment at any time (Y page 212).
or The following settings are saved in one profile:
X To switch off the desired function: press
Rthe limits of the hydraulic connections; see
the u button. "Settings", "Limits" (Y page 213)
The checkbox next to the desired function is
Rthe function assignment of the blue button on
no longer marked.
the control lever; see "Settings", "Function
button" (Y page 214)
The Function button selection window
Rthe automatic function of the snow plough;
closes.
see "Settings", "Automatic" (Y page 215)
Rthe load relief function value for the snow
"Settings", "Automatic" menu win- plough load relief; see the "Hydraulics" input
dows window (Y page 210)
Rthe flow rates for continuous consumers,
Structural Selection working hydraulics circuit and power hydraul-
sequence in the on- ics circuit; see the "Hydraulics" input window
board computer (Y page 210)
Operation and main- Rthe working speed; see Constant working
tenance â speed mode (Y page 233)
Rin hydrostatic operation, the pulling-away
Hydraulics gear for driving modes "drive" and "work"; see
Work functions Driving with the hydrostatic drive system
(Y page 180)
Z
216 Working hydraulics circuit I
Rthe stored speed for working mode cruise Hydraulics

control (Y page 181)
Rthe load value; see Working limiter Work functions
(Y page 183)
Settings
sequence in the on- Reset
board computer
X Call up the Settings menu window
Operation and main- (Y page 213).
tenance â
Hydraulics Reset entry.
Work functions
Hydraulic system
All hydraulics settings are reset to factory

Settings settings.
The Reset selection closes.
Save Profile 1
Profile 2 "Settings", "Back" menu windows
back
sequence in the on-
X Call up the Settings menu window board computer
(Y page 213).
X Press the r or s button to select the Operation and main-
Save entry. tenance â
X Press the 9 button. Hydraulics
The Save selection window appears.
X To save a profile: using the r or s
Work functions
button, scroll to the desired function: Settings
RProfile 1: all of the changes to the set-
tings can be saved. back
RProfile 2: all of the changes to the set-
tings can be saved. X Call up the Settings menu window
X Press the 9 button. (Y page 213).
The function is saved. The on-board computer X Press the r or s button to select the
briefly shows the Profile 1 stored or Pro‐ back entry.
file 2 stored message in the display. The X Press the 9 button.
Save selection window closes. The Work functions menu window is shown.
X To cancel saving a profile: press the r or
s button and scroll to the back function.
X Press the 9 button. Working hydraulics circuit I
The Save selection window closes.
Activating/deactivating working
"Settings", "Resetting" menu windows hydraulics circuit I
Structural Selection Activating working hydraulics circuit I

sequence in the on- ! Only switch on the hydraulic system when it
board computer is connected to an item of attached equip-
Operation and main- ment. There is otherwise a risk of damage to
tenance â the hydraulic system.
Working hydraulics circuit I 217
Controlling hydraulic connections

Hydraulic connections, yellow, 5, 6 and
hydraulic connections, blue, 7, 8
Example: vehicles with gear pump
Hydraulic system
X Connect the equipment to the working
hydraulics (see the manufacturer's separate
operating instructions) (Y page 205).
X Start the engine.
X Activate working hydraulics circuit I
X Make sure that the hydraulic system is ena-
(Y page 216).
bled (Y page 205).
X Press button I. Controlling yellow hydraulic connection 5,
The indicator lamp in button I lights up. raising the control system
Working hydraulics circuit I is activated. X Press and hold white button G and move the
control lever in direction D.
Deactivating working hydraulics circuit Controlling yellow hydraulic connection 6,
I lowering the control system
X Press and hold white button G and move the
X Press button I.
The indicator lamp in button I goes out. control lever in direction B.
Working hydraulics circuit I is deactivated. Controlling blue hydraulic connection 7,
or moving the control system to the left
X Switch off the hydraulic system (Y page 205). X Press and hold white button G and move the
or control lever in direction E.
X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition Controlling blue hydraulic connection 8,
lock. moving the control system to the right
X Press and hold white button G and move the
control lever in direction C.
Z
Hydraulic connections, red, 1, 2 and Hydraulic connections, red, 1, 2 and

hydraulic connections, green, 3, 4; hydraulic connections, green, 3, 4;
"Driving joystick" function in the on- "Driving joystick" function in the on-
board computer is not selected board computer is selected
Hydraulic system
X Activate working hydraulics circuit I X Activate working hydraulics circuit I

(Y page 216). (Y page 216).
X Ensure that the Driv. joyst. active func- X Ensure that the Driv. joyst. active func-
tion is not selected (Y page 214). tion is selected (Y page 214).
Controlling red hydraulic connection 1, rais- Controlling red hydraulic connection 1, rais-
ing the control system ing the control system
X Move the control lever in direction D. X Press and hold blue button F and move the
control lever in direction D.
Controlling red hydraulic connection 2, low-
ering the control system Controlling red hydraulic connection 2, low-
X Move the control lever in direction B. ering the control system
X Press and hold blue button F and move the
Controlling green hydraulic connection 3,
moving the control system to the left control lever in direction B.
X Move the control lever in direction E. Controlling green hydraulic connection 3,

moving the control system to the left
moving the control system to the right
control lever in direction E.
moving the control system to the right
control lever in direction C.
Lowering restrictor
Positioning movements made using the vehicle
hydraulics are controlled with the lever. Hauling
loads may lower quickly in an uncontrolled man-
ner. Take this into account, in particular when
activating the float setting. For attached equip-
ment that requires a braked lowering function, a
lowering restrictor adapted for the weight of the
equipment must be fitted to the equipment. You
can find further information on the lowering
restrictor in the body/equipment mounting

directives in the Mercedes-Benz body manufac-
turer portal: http://bb-portal.mercedes-
benz.com
Float settings
G WARNING
If you activate the float setting, attached
equipment may move uncontrollably or even Float setting, green hydraulic connections 3
Hydraulic system
lower. There is a risk of an accident and injury. and 4
RMake sure that nobody is in the area of X To activate the float setting: press button
danger of the attached equipment when T.
The indicator lamp in button T lights up.
activating the float setting.
X To deactivate the float setting: press but-
RMake sure that heavy attached equipment ton T.
is operated using a suitable lowering The indicator lamp in button T goes out.
restrictor, so that the equipment can be
lowered in a controlled manner.
Activating/deactivating float settings

using the keypad
Float setting, yellow hydraulic connections

5 and 6
X To activate the float setting: press button
S.
The indicator lamp in button S lights up.
Float setting, red hydraulic connections 1 X To deactivate the float setting: press but-
and 2 ton S.
The indicator lamp in button S goes out.
X To activate the float setting: press button
U.
The indicator lamp in button U lights up.
X To deactivate the float setting: press but-
ton U.
The indicator lamp in button U goes out.
Z
Float setting, green hydraulic connections 3

and 4
X To activate the float setting: press and hold
red button A.
X To deactivate the float setting: move the
control lever in direction C or E.
Float setting, yellow hydraulic connections
5 and 6
white button G and red button A.
Float setting, blue hydraulic connections 7
Hydraulic system

and 8
X To deactivate the float setting: press white
X To activate the float setting: press button button G and move the control lever in direc-
R. tion B or D.
The indicator lamp in button R lights up.
X To deactivate the float setting: press but- Float setting, yellow hydraulic connections
ton R. 7 and 8
The indicator lamp in button R goes out. X To activate the float setting: press and hold
white button G and red button A.
Activating/deactivating the float set- X Move the control lever in direction C.
tings with the control lever X To deactivate the float setting: press white
button G and move the control lever in direc-
tion C or E.
Snow plough load relief

General notes
With the snow plough load relief, you have the
option of partially transferring the weight of the
attached equipment to the vehicle. Mercedes-
Benz recommends that you only use the snow
plough load relief for the purpose for which it
was designed.
The weight shift:
Rincreases the traction on the front axle
Rimproves the driving characteristics through
better steering and cornering characteristics
Float setting, red hydraulic connections 1 Rreduces the wear on the bottom edges of
and 2 snow ploughs
Rreduces the noise level in clearing mode
red button A. Depending on the weight of the snow plough,
Mercedes-Benz recommends a load relief func-
tion value for the snow plough between
X To deactivate the float setting: move the 5% and 20%.
control lever in direction B or D.
The load relief function value set will be shown in
the on-board computer in the hydraulics menu
window (Y page 209) and in the hydraulics input
window (Y page 210) as a percentage:
Load relief function Meaning Switching snow plough load relief

value on/off
100% Full pressure in the Switching snow plough load relief to
hydraulic cylinder. standby mode
The snow plough is
raised.
50% Half of the pressure in
the hydraulic cylin-
der. The snow plough
is applying half its
weight to the road.
Hydraulic system
1% Low pressure in the
hydraulic cylinder.
The full weight snow
of the plough is being
applied to the road.

G WARNING
If you switch the snow plough load relief or the
hydraulic system on or off while the snow
plough attachment is raised, it may drop sud-
denly. You or others may become trapped.
You could then lose control of the vehicle if it
is moving. There is a risk of an accident and
injury.
X Activate working hydraulics circuit I
Snow plough load relief may only be switched
(Y page 216).
on or off when the snow plough attachment is
X Press button O.
lowered. The indicator lamp in button O flashes. The
Make sure that no other person: Hydraulicsinput window opens in the on-
board computer. The line for load relief func-
Rswitches on the hydraulic system while the
tion value Z is selected. The symbol for the
snow plough attachment is raised snow plough load relief has a coloured border.
Ris located in the danger zone if the transport Snow plough load relief is in standby mode.
lock is detached X To change the load relief function value:
using the u or t button on the steering
wheel, increase or decrease load relief func-
tion value \.
X Press the r or s button on the steering
wheel to select the back entry.
The Hydraulics input window closes. It is
now no longer possible to switch the value
accidentally.
Z
Switching on snow plough load relief value of the snow plough is selected
(Y page 209).
X Press and hold the 9 button on the steering
wheel.
Red hydraulic connections 1 and 2 are in the
float setting as long as the 9 button is
pressed. The snow plough is applying full
weight to the road.
X Release the 9 button on the steering wheel.
The snow plough is raised until the load relief
function value has been attained. The indica-
tor lamp in button O lights up and the X
indicator lamp in the status area of the on-
Hydraulic system
board computer goes on. Snow plough load

relief is switched on.
Changing the load relief function setting

X Call up the Hydraulics menu window
(Y page 210).
X Press the r or s button to select snow
plough load relief Z.
X Press the u or t button to increase or
decrease load relief function value \.
back selection.
The Hydraulics input window closes. It is
now no longer possible to switch the value
accidentally.
Switching snow plough load relief back to

X To switch on using the control lever: press standby mode using the control lever
and hold red button A.
float setting as long as red button A is
weight to the road.
X Release red button A.
board computer goes on. Snow plough load
relief is switched on.
X To switch on using the buttons on the
steering wheel: ensure that the Hydraulics
input window is shown in the on-board com-
puter and the line for the load relief function

weight to the road.
X Release the 9 button on the steering wheel.
board computer lights up. Snow plough load
relief is switched on. The symbol for the snow
plough load relief is coloured.
Switching off snow plough load relief

X Move the control lever in direction D until the X Raise the snow plough.
Hydraulic system
snow plough has been fully raised. X Press button O.
The indicator lamp in button O flashes. Snow The indicator lamp in button O and the X
plough load relief is in standby mode. indicator lamp in the status area of the on-
X To switch on snow plough load relief board computer go out.
again: press and hold red button A. or
X Move the control lever in direction B. X Switch off the hydraulic system (Y page 205).
Red hydraulic connections 1 and 2 are in the or
float setting as long as red button A is
weight to the road. lock.
X Release red button A.
The snow plough is raised until the load relief Automatic snow plough system
tor lamp in button O lights up and the X If you have selected the automatic snow plough
indicator lamp in the status area of the on- system, the snow plough is raised when you
board computer lights up. Snow plough load engage reverse gear.
relief is switched on. Selecting the automatic snow plough sys-
tem:
Switching snow plough load relief back to X Switch on snow plough load relief
standby mode using the buttons on the (Y page 221)
steering wheel X Select Automatic Snow plough , see Set-
X Call up the Hydraulics menu window tings, Automatic (Y page 215).
(Y page 210).
X Press the r or s button to select snow
plough load relief.
X Press the 9 button until the snow plough has
been fully raised.
The indicator lamp in button O flashes. Snow
plough load relief is in standby mode. The
symbol for the snow plough load relief has a
coloured border.
X To switch on snow plough load relief
again: press and hold the 9 button on the
steering wheel.
float setting as long as the 9 button is
Z
Switching the snow plough to the float Continuous consumers

setting
General notes
! Only switch on the hydraulic system when it
is connected to an item of attached equip-
You can connect equipment with a constant flow
rate either to red hydraulic connection 1 or to
green hydraulic connection 3. If you then switch
on the continuous consumer, the attached
equipment is supplied with a constant flow rate.
Hydraulic system
The attached equipment then cannot be con-

trolled with the control lever.
Switching the continuous consumers

on/off
X Press and hold red button A.

X Move the control lever as far as it will go in
direction B for approximately one second.
The snow plough is in the float setting and is
applying its full weight to the road. The indi-
cator lamp in button O flashes.
Pressing the snow plough briefly onto

the road
X Make sure that snow plough load relief is Switching the continuous consumers to
switched on. standby mode
X Move the control lever in direction B until the X Connect the attached equipment (see manu-
snow plough pushes against the road with the facturer's operating instructions) either to red
desired pressure. hydraulic connection 1 or to green hydraulic
The indicator lamp in button O flashes. Snow connection 3 (Y page 205).
plough load relief enters standby mode. X Start the engine.
X To switch on snow plough load relief
again: move the control lever into the neutral
bled (Y page 205).
position.
Working hydraulics circuit II 225
X Ensure that unnecessary continuous consum- or

ers and snow plough load relief (Y page 221) X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition
are switched off. lock.
X Continuous consumer to red hydraulic
connection 1: press button Q.
The indicator lamp in button Q flashes. The
Hydraulics input window opens in the on-
Working hydraulics circuit II
board computer. Red hydraulic connection 1 Working hydraulics circuit II, vehicles
for continuous consumer Z is selected. The
symbol for the continuous consumer has a with gear pump
coloured border. The continuous consumer is Activating/deactivating working
in standby mode.
hydraulics circuit II
or
Hydraulic system
X Continuous consumer to green hydraulic i As described below, you can confirm your
connection 3: press button P. selection with the 9 button on the steering
The indicator lamp in button P flashes. The wheel or with the black button on the control
Hydraulics input window opens in the on- lever.
board computer. Green hydraulic connection
3 for continuous consumer Z is selected. ! Only switch on the hydraulic system when it
The symbol for the continuous consumer has is connected to an item of attached equip-
a coloured border. The continuous consumer ment. There is otherwise a risk of damage to
is in standby mode. the hydraulic system.
X To change the flow rate: using the u or
t button, increase or decrease flow rate
\.
Switching on continuous consumers
the black button on the control lever until the
indicator lamp in button Q or P lights up.
The corresponding continuous consumer is
switched on. The symbol for continuous con-
sumer Z is coloured.
Switching continuous consumers back to
standby mode
(Y page 210).
X Using the r or s button, select corre-
sponding continuous consumer Z.
indicator lamp in button Q or P flashes.
The symbol for continuous consumer Z has a
coloured border. The continuous consumer is
in standby mode.
Switching off continuous consumers Switching working hydraulics circuit II to
X Press button Q or P. standby mode
The indicator lamp in button Q or P goes X Connect the equipment to the working
out. hydraulics (see the manufacturer's separate
or operating instructions) (Y page 205).
X Switch off the hydraulic system (Y page 205). X Start the engine.
Z
226 Working hydraulics circuit II
X Make sure that the hydraulic system is ena- do so, however, all flow rates must be switched
bled (Y page 205). off beforehand.
X Press button J.
The indicator lamp in button J flashes. The Switching the flow rate
board computer. The line for working hydraul-
ics circuit II Z is selected. Working hydraul-
ics circuit II is in standby mode.
X Check the flow rate and, if necessary,
increase or decrease the flow rate. To do so,
increase or decrease the working speed as
appropriate (Y page 232).
Activating working hydraulics circuit II
Hydraulic system

indicator lamp in button J lights up.
Working hydraulics circuit II is activated. The
symbol for working hydraulics circuit II Z is
coloured.
Switching working hydraulics circuit II back
to standby mode
(Y page 210).
X Using the r or s button, select work-
ing hydraulics circuit II.
indicator lamp in button J flashes. Using button L, you can switch the flow rates
The symbol for working hydraulics circuit II Z between working hydraulics circuit I and cir-
has a coloured border. Working hydraulics cuit II.
circuit II is in standby mode. Switching on flow rate selection
Deactivating working hydraulics circuit II X Ensure that:
X Press button J. Rworking hydraulics circuit I is deactivated
The indicator lamp in button J goes out. (Y page 216)
or Rworking hydraulics circuit II is deactivated
X Switch off the hydraulic system (Y page 205). (Y page 225)
or Rthe continuous consumer has been
X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition switched off (Y page 224)
lock. X Press button L.
The indicator lamp in button L lights up. The
flow rate has been switched between circuit I
Assignment of flow rate, vehicles with Z and circuit II \.
dual-circuit hydraulic system X Activate working hydraulics circuit I
(Y page 216).
General notes X Activate working hydraulics circuit II
The flow rate is created by two gear pumps. The (Y page 225).
flow rate for circuit I is 32 l/min and for circuit II,
55 l/min. The stated flow rates apply to a rated Switching off flow rate selection
engine speed of 2,200 rpm. You can change the X Ensure that:
flow rate amount for the individual circuits. To
Working hydraulics circuit II 227
Rworking hydraulics circuit I is deactivated Rworking hydraulics circuit I is deactivated

Rworking hydraulics circuit II is deactivated Rworking hydraulics circuit II is deactivated
Rthe continuous consumer has been Rthe continuous consumer has been
switched off (Y page 224) switched off (Y page 224)
X Press button L. X Press button K.
The indicator lamp in button L goes out. The The indicator lamp in button K lights up. The
flow rate has been switched between circuit I cumulation is preselected.
and circuit II. X Activate working hydraulics circuit I
(Y page 216).
Cumulation of flow rates The sum of the flow rates of circuit I and cir-
cuit II is now present in circuit I Z.
Hydraulic system
or
X Activate working hydraulics circuit II
(Y page 225).
The sum of the flow rates of circuit I and cir-
cuit II is now present in circuit II \.
Switching off cumulation
X Ensure that:
Rworking hydraulics circuit I is deactivated
(Y page 216)
Rworking hydraulics circuit II is deactivated
(Y page 225)
Rthe continuous consumer has been
switched off (Y page 224)
X Press button K.
The indicator lamp in button K goes out. The
flow rates are again distributed to circuit I Z
and circuit II Z.
Working hydraulics circuit II, vehicles

with positioning pump
Example: sum of the flow rates in working hydraul-
ics circuit II
General notes
Using button K, you can interconnect the flow Working hydraulics flow rates, see "Technical
rates of working hydraulics circuit I and circuit II. data" (Y page 336).
The flow rate is, however, limited to 87 l/min.
You can therefore use both circuits to drive a Activating/deactivating front working
continuous consumer in circuit I or circuit II. hydraulics circuit II
Switching on cumulation
! Only switch on the hydraulic system when it
X Ensure that: is connected to an item of attached equip-
Z
228 Working hydraulics circuit II

rate, changing the flow rate
X Using the u and t buttons, increase or
decrease the flow rate.
Activating working hydraulics circuit II
indicator lamp in button V lights up.
Front working hydraulics circuit II is activated.
The symbol for front working hydraulics cir-
cuit II symbol Z is coloured.
Switching front working hydraulics circuit II
Hydraulic system
back to standby mode

(Y page 210).
X Using the r or s button, select front
working hydraulics circuit II.
indicator lamp in button V flashes.
The symbol for front working hydraulics cir-
cuit II Z has a coloured border. Front working
Switching front working hydraulics circuit II hydraulics circuit II is in standby mode.
to standby mode Deactivating front working hydraulics cir-
X Connect the equipment to the working cuit II
hydraulics (see the manufacturer's separate X Press button V.
operating instructions) (Y page 205). The indicator lamp in button V goes out.
X Start the engine. or
X Make sure that the hydraulic system is ena- X Switch off the hydraulic system (Y page 205).
bled (Y page 205). or
X Press button V. X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition
The indicator lamp in button V flashes. The lock.
Hydraulicsinput window opens in the on-
board computer. Front working hydraulics cir-
cuit II line Z is selected. Front working Activating/deactivating side and rear
hydraulics circuit II is in standby mode. working hydraulics system circuit II
Selecting an operating mode ! Only switch on the hydraulic system when it
X Attached equipment with constant flow is connected to an item of attached equip-
rate: make sure that LS is not in the input ment. There is otherwise a risk of damage to
window. If necessary, press and hold the the hydraulic system.
u button until a flow rate is shown.
or
X Equipment with load sensing: press and
hold the t button until LS is shown in the
input window.
Power hydraulics circuit III/IV 229

rate, changing the flow rate
X Using the u and t buttons, increase or
decrease the flow rate.
Activating side and rear working hydraulics
system circuit II
indicator lamp in button J lights up.
Side and rear working hydraulics circuit II is
activated. The symbol for side and rear work-
ing hydraulics circuit II \ is coloured.
Hydraulic system
Switching side and rear working hydraulics
circuit II back to standby mode
(Y page 210).
X Using the r or s button, select side
and rear working hydraulics circuit II.
indicator lamp in button W flashes.
The symbol for side and rear working hydraul-
Switching side and rear working hydraulics ics circuit II \ has a coloured border. Side
circuit II to standby mode and rear working hydraulics circuit II is in
standby mode.
X Connect the equipment to the working
hydraulics (see the manufacturer's separate Deactivating side and rear working hydraul-
operating instructions) (Y page 205). ics system circuit II
X Start the engine. X Press button W.
X Make sure that the hydraulic system is ena- The indicator lamp in button W goes out.
bled (Y page 205). or
X Press button W. X Switch off the hydraulic system (Y page 205).
The indicator lamp in button W flashes. The or
Hydraulics input window opens in the on- X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition
board computer. Side and rear working lock.
hydraulics circuit II line \ is selected. Side
and rear working hydraulics circuit II is in
standby mode.
Power hydraulics circuit III/IV
Selecting an operating mode
X Attached equipment with constant flow General notes
rate: make sure that LS is not in the input
The power hydraulics (VarioPower®) are located
window. If necessary, press and hold the in a separate frame in the platform subframe.
u button until a flow rate is shown. This has enormous pay load advantages, e.g. for
or snow-clearing and protecting the hydraulic com-
X Equipment with load sensing: press and ponents from corrosion. If the power hydraulics
hold the t button until the smallest are not needed, they can be removed, including
adjustable flow rate is shown in the input win- the frame, from the platform subframe. Further
dow. information can be obtained from a Mercedes-
X Press and hold the t button until LS is Benz Service Centre.
shown in the input window.
Z
230 Power hydraulics circuit III/IV
The following components of the power hydraul-

ics are located in the platform subframe:
RHydraulic oil reservoir
ROil cooler
RHydraulic pumps
ROil filter
The hydraulic pumps are selectively driven via a
propeller shaft from an engine-driven power
take-off.
The power hydraulics consists of two open oil
circuits. It operates continuous consumers or
attached equipment that consume low quanti- Example: vehicles with positioning pump
Hydraulic system
ties of oil. Switching power hydraulics circuit III into

standby mode
X Connect equipment to the power hydraulics
Activating/deactivating the power (see the manufacturer's separate operating
hydraulics instructions) (Y page 205).
X Engage engine power take-off (Y page 235).
General notes
X Start the engine.
! Only switch on the power hydraulics when X Make sure that the hydraulic system is ena-
connected to an item of attached equipment. bled (Y page 205).
There is otherwise a risk of damage to the X Press button M.
power hydraulics. The indicator lamp in button M flashes. The
You must switch off the power hydraulics Hydraulics input window opens in the on-
when you have finished using the equipment board computer. The line for power hydraulics
and when you are transporting it. circuit III Z is selected. The power hydraulics
Flow rates for circuit III are in standby mode.
Rpower hydraulics circuit III: 125 l/min Changing the flow rate
Rpower hydraulics circuit IV: 125 l/min X Using the u or t button, increase or
The cumulative flow rate of the power hydraulics decrease the flow rate.
is, however, limited to 180 l/min. The stated Activating power hydraulics circuit III
flow rates apply to a rated engine speed of
2,200 rpm. X Press the 9 button on the steering wheel or
Activating/deactivating power hydraul- indicator lamp in button M lights up.
Power hydraulics circuit III is activated. The
ics circuit III symbol for power hydraulics circuit III Z is
coloured.
Switching power hydraulics circuit III back
into standby mode
(Y page 210).
power hydraulics circuit III.
indicator lamp in button M flashes.
The symbol for power hydraulics circuit III Z
Example: vehicles with gear pump has a coloured border. Power hydraulics cir-
cuit III is in standby mode.
Power hydraulics circuit III/IV 231
Deactivating power hydraulics circuit III circuit IV \ is selected. Power hydraulics cir-
X Press button M. cuit IV is in standby mode.
The indicator lamp in button M goes out. Changing the flow rate
or X Using the u or t button, increase or
X Switch off the hydraulic system (Y page 205). decrease the flow rate.
or Activating power hydraulics circuit IV
lock.
indicator lamp in button N lights up.
Activating/deactivating power hydraul- Power hydraulics circuit IV is switched on. The
ics circuit IV symbol for power hydraulics circuit IV \ is
coloured.
Hydraulic system
Switching power hydraulics circuit IV back
into standby mode
(Y page 210).
power hydraulics circuit IV.
indicator lamp in button N flashes.
The symbol for power hydraulics circuit IV \
has a coloured border. Power hydraulics cir-
Example: vehicles with gear pump cuit IV is in standby mode.
Deactivating power hydraulics circuit IV
X Press button N.
The indicator lamp in button N goes out.
or
X Switch off the hydraulic system (Y page 205).
or
lock.
Example: vehicles with positioning pump

Switching power hydraulics circuit IV into
standby mode
X Connect equipment to the power hydraulics
(see the manufacturer's separate operating
instructions) (Y page 205).
X Engage engine power take-off (Y page 235).
X Start the engine.
bled (Y page 205).
X Press button N.
The indicator lamp in button N flashes. The
board computer. The line for power hydraulics
Z
232 Equipment operation
Useful information should be disengaged for pulling away on uphill

slopes in traffic.
These Operating Instructions describe all the The engine brake is unavailable in engine speed
models and standard and optional equipment of mode. Engine speed mode is automatically
your vehicle that were available at the time of deactivated if you drive faster than approx-
going to print. Country-specific differences are imately 25 km/h. The F indicator lamp in the
possible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not status area of the on-board computer goes out.
This also applies to safety-relevant systems and Automatically activating engine speed
functions. mode
workshops (Y page 31). If you activate one of the following systems,
engine speed mode is automatically activated:
Rhydrostaticdrive system (Y page 177)
Ballast/weights Rtransmission power take-off (Y page 234)
Rengine power take-off (Y page 234)
! Observe the permissible axle and wheel Rfront PTO shaft (Y page 236)
Working mode
loads. Do not exceed the maximum gross Working speed

vehicle weight. During transportation, the dif-
ference between the left and right wheel X Activate constant working speed mode in the
loads should not exceed 10%. on-board computer (Y page 233).
The following parts of the vehicle may other- or
wise be damaged: X Set the working engine speed using the accel-
Rtyres
erator.
Rvehicle frame
Raxles Manually activating/deactivating
engine speed mode
The driving, braking and steering characteristics
of the vehicle change when equipment is cou- Only activate engine speed mode when you are
pled or attached as a result of the additional operating equipment that requires this mode to
overhang and momentum of the equipment. be activated. This can be the case when a device
Drive with even greater care. is connected to a working hydraulic circuit.
The Unimog has a lightweight construction to
enable it to carry the maximum possible equip-
ment weights and payloads. Therefore, it is nec-
essary to load it with ballast weights. The weight
of the Unimog must be adapted to suit the work
to be performed.
Equipment operation
Engine speed mode
General notes
X To activate: press switch :.
If engine speed mode is activated, it is possible Indicator lamp ; in the switch lights up.
to drive at a constant engine speed above the The F indicator lamp in the status area of
idling speed in equipment operation. the on-board computer lights up.
Driving characteristics in engine speed mode
differ considerably from driving in normal mode.
The accelerator no longer controls the drive tor-
que, but the engine speed. Engine speed mode
Equipment operation 233
Vehicles with Telligent® automatic gearshift: The idling speed setting is automatically deac-
the on-board computer display shows the tivated when you turn the key to position 1 in
manual drive program M. the ignition lock.
X Activate constant working speed mode in the
on-board computer (Y page 233). Constant working speed
or
X Set the working engine speed using the accel- Activating/deactivating with the buttons
erator. on the steering wheel
X To deactivate: press switch =. X To activate and set: make sure that engine
Indicator lamp ; in the switch goes out. speed mode is activated (Y page 232).
The F indicator lamp in the status area of X Press the Ù button on the multifunction
the on-board computer goes out. steering wheel repeatedly until the Rota‐
tional speed input window appears in the
on-board display.
X Press the s or r button to increase or
Engine speed setting
decrease the engine speed in approximately
General notes 20 rpm increments.
Working mode
The input window closes.
or
X Wait for approximately three seconds.
The input window closes.
X To deactivate: press the Ù button repeat-
edly until the Rotational speed input win-
dow appears in the on-board computer.
X Press the u Deactivate button.
The working speed can be reset with the
accelerator pedal.
Activating/deactivating using the control

You can set the idling speed and switch on the
constant working speed. lever without the blue button
X To activate and set: make sure that engine
Idling speed setting speed mode is activated (Y page 232).
X Press the F button upward or downward.
X To set and activate: press the Ù button on The Rotational speed input window
the multifunction steering wheel repeatedly appears in the on-board computer. The
until the Rotational speed input window engine speed is increased or decreased incre-
appears in the on-board computer. mentally by approximately 20 rpm up to the
X Press the s or r button to increase or setpoint.
decrease the engine speed in approximately X To set the working speed using the set-
20 rpm increments. point: press the F button upwards or
X Press the 9 button. downwards until the setpoint has been
The input window closes. reached.
or X Release the F button and press upward or
X Wait for approximately three seconds. downward again.
The input window closes. X To change and save the setpoint: press the
X To deactivate: press the Ù button repeat- F button upward or downward until the
edly until the Rotational speed input win- desired working speed has been reached.
dow appears in the on-board computer. X Press the t SET button on the steering
X Press the u Deactivate button. wheel.
The setpoint is saved.
X To deactivate: press the F button Types of power take-off

upward or downward.
X Press the u Deactivate button on the
There are two types of power take-off: trans-
mission power take-off and engine power take-
steering wheel.
off.
The working speed can be reset with the
accelerator pedal.
Transmission power take-off
Activating/deactivating using the control
lever and with the blue button General notes
X To activate: make sure that engine speed The transmission power take-off can be oper-
mode is activated (Y page 232). ated:
X To select the working speed function for the Rwhen the vehicle is stationary
blue button on the control lever, see the "Set- Rwhen the vehicle is driven forward in 1st to
tings", "Function button" menu window 4th gear
(Y page 214). Rwhen the vehicle is driven in reverse in 1st to
X Press the blue button on the control lever. 5th gear
Constant working speed mode is activated. The transmission power take-off can also be
Working mode
The working speed is set to the setpoint. engaged if the working gears (Y page 163) or the
X To deactivate: press the blue button on the crawler gears (Y page 164) are engaged.
control lever.
Constant working speed mode is deactivated. Engaging/disengaging transmission
The working speed can be reset with the power take-off
accelerator pedal. ! When power take-off is activated, you must
only change gear when the vehicle is station-
ary. The transmission may otherwise be dam-
Power take-offs aged.
General notes
Power take-offs are intended for operating
attachments and bodies. Important information
on fitting attachments and body components on
the power take-offs can be found in the body/
equipment mounting directives in the
Mercedes-Benz body manufacturer portal
http://bb-portal.mercedes-benz.com.
The engine and power take-offs must be oper-
ated at a certain engine speed/working speed,
depending on conditions of use. Depending on
the vehicle equipment, the working speed can X To engage: ensure that the engine is running
be set with the accelerator or constant working and the vehicle is stationary.
speed can be activated. X Vehicles with Telligent® gearshift: depress
On vehicles with speed limitation: the preset the clutch pedal.
engine speed cannot be exceeded when the PTO X Vehicles with Telligent® automatic gear-
is engaged. shift: shift the transmission into neutral.
For vehicles with additional equipment fit-
X All vehicles: press switch :.
ted: read the body manufacturer's operating
Indicator lamp ; in the switch flashes for
instructions before starting operation with the
several seconds. The transmission power
PTO.
take-off engages after a few seconds.
If power take-off is engaged, the correspond-
ing display message appears in the event win-
dow of the on-board computer for approx- in the switch light up. The engine power take-
imately two seconds. off is engaged.
The I indicator lamp in the status area of In the event window of the on-board com-
the on-board computer and indicator lamp ; puter, the corresponding display message
in the switch light up. appears for approximately two seconds.
Vehicles with Telligent® automatic gearshift: X Start the engine.
the transmission power take-off rotates. With X Observe the general notes on engine speed
a gear engaged, the transmission power take- mode (Y page 232).
off only rotates when the vehicle pulls away. X Activate constant working speed
X Vehicles with Telligent® gearshift: slowly (Y page 233).
release the clutch pedal and pull away. X To disengage: press switch =.
The transmission power take-off rotates. The I indicator lamp in the status area of
X All vehicles: observe the general notes on the on-board computer and indicator lamp ;
engine speed mode (Y page 232). in the switch go out.
X Activate constant working speed
(Y page 233). Pulling away in equipment operating
X To disengage: press switch =.
Working mode
mode
The I indicator lamp in the status area of
the on-board computer and indicator lamp ; Vehicles with Telligent® gearshift
in the switch go out.
X To pull away with the selected engine speed:
Rwith the crawler gears engaged
Engine power take-off (Y page 164), select a gear
! The engine power take-off must be engaged Rwith the working gears engaged
only when the engine is off. (Y page 163), select a gear (one to five)
Rfor vehicles without working gears, select
Engine power take-off is mostly used for power
hydraulics. It can, however, be used for other 1st gear
attached equipment (e.g. pump drives). X Release the parking brake.
Vehicles in accordance with the Euro 6 X Pull away.
standard: when automatic regeneration of the
diesel particle filter is carried out, the engine Vehicles with Telligent® automatic gear-
speed is increased. shift
A gear can only be engaged by operating the
multifunctional lever. The accelerator pedal
must not be depressed during the gearshift.
After engaging a gear, you must depress the
accelerator pedal to pull away.
X To pull away with the selected engine speed:
Rwith the crawler gears engaged
(Y page 164), select a gear
Rwith the working gears engaged
(Y page 163), select a gear (one to five)
Rfor vehicles without working gears, select
1st gear
X To engage: switch off the engine. X Release the parking brake.
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition X Pull away.
lock. If the accelerator pedal is depressed beyond
X Press switch :. 50%, the vehicle pulls away even if the accel-
The I indicator lamp in the status area of erator pedal is released.
the on-board computer and indicator lamp ;
Shifting gears in equipment driving ments/mounted implements that have been

mode switched on.
Observe the applicable safety regulations and
Vehicles with Telligent® gearshift
the separate operating instructions for the
Gear changes are only possible when the clutch attachments/mounted implements before
pedal is depressed.
engaging the PTO shaft. Make sure that no
X Select a gear.
persons are in the area of danger before
X Depress the clutch pedal. The accelerator
engaging the PTO shaft and during operation.
pedal must not be depressed during the gear-
shift.
X Wait for the gear change.
G WARNING
X Release the clutch pedal. After disengaging the PTO shaft, there is a risk
of injury due to attachments/mounted imple-
Vehicles with Telligent® automatic gear- ments running on.
shift After disengaging the PTO shaft, make sure
A gear can only be engaged by operating the that there are no persons in the area of dan-
Working mode
multifunctional lever. The accelerator pedal ger.

must not be depressed during the gearshift.
The accelerator pedal must be depressed again G WARNING
after changing gear.
At very low temperatures, the front PTO shaft
After the accelerator pedal has been depressed may also rotate initially when the engine is
beyond 50% and the clutch has engaged, the
vehicle will drive on even if the accelerator pedal started. There is a risk of injury due to rotating
is released. components and running attachments/
mounted implements.
Stopping in equipment driving mode When starting the engine, make sure that
there are no persons in the area of danger.
X Depress the brake pedal or shift to neutral.
The power take-offs are disengaged.
M is shown in the on-board computer display
G WARNING
for the normal engine management. Temperatures of up to 90 † are produced on
the front of the PTO shaft gear. If you remove
the trim under the front PTO shaft, you can
Front PTO shaft burn yourself. There is a risk of injury.
Let the engine cool down before removing and
Important safety notes wear protective gloves.
G WARNING
! The front PTO shaft stub may get dirty if it is
If you engage the PTO while driving, the not protected.
engine speed may be reduced and cause a After removing additional equipment, place
strong braking effect. There is a risk of an the protective cap on the front PTO shaft stub.
accident.
Only engage the PTO while the vehicle is sta-
tionary.
G WARNING
When you engage the PTO shaft, there is a risk
injury due to rotating components and attach-
Correct use Engaging/disengaging the front PTO

shaft
Front PTO shaft : is a transmission unit. It is

solely intended for the operation of attached X To switch on: make sure that the engine is
equipment and mounted implements running.
(Y page 238) and must only be used for this
Working mode
X Swing cover : upwards.
purpose.
X Pull out switch pin ;.
In the on-board computer display, both a sym-
Method of operation bol and a rotational speed appear for the front
Front PTO shaft :: PTO shaft.
The W indicator lamp in the status area of
Ris a single-stage transmission with a high rate
of efficiency.
X Observe the general notes on engine speed
Ris directly connected to the front of the mode (Y page 232).
engine's crankshaft. The power flow from the
engine PTO shaft is not interrupted during the
gear shift process. (Y page 233).
Ris fitted with a hydraulic multi-plate clutch i The maximum permissible working speed at
with a stub brake and has a self-sustaining oil the front PTO shaft is approximately
circuit. The PTO shaft gear oil is cooled by a 1,000 rpm.
heat exchanger that is integrated into the X If necessary, limit the working speed at the
transmission. front of the PTO shaft to 620 rpm
Rcan be engaged under load whether the vehi- (Y page 238).
cle is stationary or in motion. X To disengage: press cover : downwards
until it engages audibly.
Front PTO shaft cover Switch pin ; is pushed downwards.
In the on-board computer display, the symbol
X Before fitting equipment: remove the cover and rotational speed for the front PTO shaft
from front PTO shaft :. go out.
X After fitting equipment: slide the cover onto
The W indicator lamp in the status area of
front PTO shaft :. the on-board computer goes out.
X Check that it is positioned correctly. Twist the
cover in place.
Z
Limiting the working speed of the front

PTO shaft
: Front mounting plate
The engine speed can be limited to a maximum

of 1,328 rpm. This corresponds to a maximum
front PTO shaft working speed of 620 rpm.
Working mode
X To engage: switch on the front PTO shaft

(Y page 237).
X Press switch :.
X Observe the general notes on engine speed
mode (Y page 232).
(Y page 233).
: Example: tubular cross member, vehicles
X To disengage: press switch ;.
without a front-mounted plate
Front mounting plate Fitting additional equipment

G WARNING Important safety notes
While the vehicle is moving, if neither the front Observe the following notes:
mounting plate nor the tubular cross member
RInstructions for fitting equipment can be
is fitted, the vehicle frame will become unsta-
found in the body/equipment mounting
ble. The vehicle could then start to skid when directives in the Mercedes-Benz body manu-
you steer or apply the brakes. There is a risk of facturer portal: http://bb-
an accident. portal.mercedes-benz.com
Before driving off, always make sure that RFamiliarise yourself with the applicable acci-
either the front mounting plate or the tubular dent prevention regulations.
cross member is fitted. ROnly use attached equipment for the intended
applications as determined by the relevant
manufacturer.
RUndergo training before using the equipment
for the first time.
RRead the operating, maintenance and care
instructions delivered with the vehicle care-
fully. Please consult the equipment manufac-
turer or a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre if
you have any questions.
Note the following before installing equipment: General notes

Rpark the vehicle on a firm and level surface
Observe the following notes:
Rswitch off the engine
RSufficient steerability of the vehicle must be
Rapply the parking brake
guaranteed. The front axle load, with corre-
Rmake sure that nobody is in the vehicle sponding attached equipment and bodies for
Rmake sure that nobody is between the vehicle all vehicle loads, must be at least 33% of the
and the equipment actual gross vehicle weight.
RThe rear axle load must always be at least 33%
Notes on connecting/disconnecting of the actual gross vehicle weight.
equipment RSecure attached equipment using the
restraining facilities provided with the equip-
! Dirt entering the hydraulic system could ment when travelling to or from the place of
cause damage and malfunctions in the sys- operation.
tem. RMake sure that the power take-offs and
X Activate the float setting (Y page 219). hydraulic system are disengaged.
X Switch off the engine. RAttaching equipment to the vehicle changes
Working mode
X Only connect and disconnect equipment its weight and dimensions. This can have a
when the engine is switched off. This prevents considerable effect on the handling charac-
unintended movements. teristics.
RMake sure that the permissible axle loads are
X Make sure that the equipment is clean when
connecting and disconnecting. observed and that the vehicle dimensions
comply with the appropriate traffic regula-
X Do not go between the vehicle and the equip-
tions. Power assistance can be obtained from
ment. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Only use hydraulic lines designed to withstand
the hydraulic system's maximum pressure.
Working with equipment
Transporting equipment Important safety notes
! Observe the permissible axle and wheel Without your being aware of it, there may be
loads. Do not exceed the maximum gross persons in the danger area of the vehicle who
vehicle weight. During transportation, the dif- could collide with the vehicle or its add-on
ference between the left and right wheel equipment. In addition, objects or dirt may be
loads should not exceed 10%. thrown off by the add-on equipment. There is
The following parts of the vehicle may other- a risk of serious or even fatal injuries.
wise be damaged:
Before engaging the PTO shaft and during
Rtyres operation, ensure that no one is in the danger
Rvehicle frame area.
Raxles
The driving, braking and steering characteristics G WARNING

of the vehicle change when equipment is cou- When working with additional equipment you
pled or attached as a result of the additional could touch or damage the supply lines, espe-
overhang and momentum of the equipment.
cially when moving earth. There is a risk of
Drive with even greater care.
serious or even fatal injuries.
Always determine and mark where the supply
lines for gas, water and electricity are located.
Have the supply interrupted if necessary.
Z
Observe a safe distance of at least 5 m from These include, for example, work with:
high-voltage transmission lines. If it is not pos- Ra lifting work platform
sible to maintain a safe distance at all times,
Ra crane
have the power supply interrupted.
Ran excavator implement
When working with attached equipment, make
sure that there are no people in the working Always maintain a sufficient safe distance from:
area. The working area also includes the area Roverhangs
into which the equipment could throw dirt or Redges
stones, for example.
Rslopes
Block the area off for pedestrians if necessary.
Runstable ground
Warn other road users by securing the area of
danger according to the relevant traffic regula- If the surface is not secure, take appropriate
tions. safety precautions.
Ensure that persons do not reach into the mov- Only operate the mounted equipment from the
ing parts of attached equipment. operation areas prescribed by the manufac-
turer.
Earth-moving equipment When working with mounted equipment, make
Working mode
sure that there are no people in the working

Familiarise yourself with your surroundings area.
before commencing work. This could help you to
avoid collisions with objects that do not lie Equipment for maintenance of grass-
within the driver's field of vision. land and plant protection
The following could be overlooked:
Rhigh-voltage transmission lines G WARNING
Rsupply lines Flammable material such as leaves, grass or
Robjects that are hidden by overgrown plants twigs may ignite if they come into contact with
Robjects that are covered in snow hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk
Remove objects from the working area. Mark of fire.
the route of supply lines and interrupt the supply When driving on an unpaved road or off-road,
if necessary. Inform the relevant authorities. check the vehicle underside regularly. In par-
ticular, remove trapped plant parts or other
Equipment with a wide working range flammable material. Contact a qualified spe-
cialist workshop immediately if damage is
G WARNING
detected.
The vehicle could overturn when working with
attached equipment with a wide working Clean the vehicle if it has become dirty after off-
range. There is a risk of an accident and injury. road driving before driving on public roads
ROnly drive on ground with a firm surface.
again, see checklist after driving off-road
(Y page 190).
RWhen driving on steep inclines, always fol-
low the line of fall (straight up or down) and Front loader operation
do not turn.
RAlways ensure that the ground is solid G WARNING
enough when carrying out work with the If you transport persons in the front loader
vehicle stationary. without the safety devices and adjustments to
RAlways use the supporting devices inten- the vehicle required, they could fall out. There
ded for the equipment. is a risk of injury.
Always make sure that the vehicle is on a firm

surface for applications where there is a danger
of tipping.
Tipper platform 241
Before transporting persons in the front Do not carry out any work on attached equip-
loader, always ensure that: ment if:
Rthe engine is running
Ra suitable and approved hydraulic valve for
Rthe parking brake is not applied
operation with a working cage is fitted.
Rthe vehicle is on an uneven surface
Ra special working cage has been mounted Rthe hydraulics are under pressure, the float
with all required safety devices. setting can be activated for the purposes of
pressure reduction, if necessary
Only install front loaders that fulfil the require- (Y page 219)
ments of the Unimog equipment mounting Rthere are other people in the cab
directives. Tested front loaders have mounting
certification from Daimler AG. You can obtain Do not deactivate safety devices. Do not wear
the equipment mounting directives on the Inter- loose clothing.
net at: http://bb-portal.mercedes-
benz.com.
If you install, remove, operate or maintain the Tipper platform
front loader, observe the safety regulations for
General notes
Working mode
the front loader; see the manufacturer's oper-
ating instructions.
Correct use
To handle certain goods, e.g. pallets or hay
bales, you must attach the appropriate equip-
ment to the front loader.
If the front loader is raised, it is essential that
you observe the headroom clearance, for exam-
ple in entrances and underpasses.
If you park the vehicle, you must lower the front
loader to the ground before you leave the vehi-
cle. This prevents the front loader from being
inadvertently lowered.
Transporting goods in the front loader is not
permitted on public roads.
Tipper platform : is designed to transport bulk

Working on equipment goods and general cargo and should only be
used for this purpose.
G WARNING
After disengaging the PTO shaft, there is a risk Method of operation
of injury due to attachments/mounted imple- The tipper platform is a loading area which is
ments running on. surrounded on all sides by platform dropsides.
After disengaging the PTO shaft, make sure The tipper platform can be tilted on 3 sides or
that there are no persons in the area of dan- secured using socket pins.
ger. The platform dropsides at the rear and sides can
be opened using a catch lever. The posts can be
removed.
! Work on attached equipment must only be
carried out by specialist staff. Attend training Bulk goods and general cargo are secured on
sessions by the equipment manufacturer and the loading area using either the lashing eyelets
observe the equipment manufacturer's oper- or the Mercedes-Benz fastening components.
ating and maintenance instructions.
Z
242 Tipper platform
Loading the tipper platform tiple lashing points to distribute these forces,
and distribute the load equally among them.
! Body mounting (e.g. of gritters) using the The vehicle’s driving, braking and steering char-
lashing eyes is not permitted. To mount a grit- acteristics vary with the type, weight and centre
ter, use the fastening components on the of gravity of the load.
platform. The lashing eyes are only to be used
for securing a load. As the vehicle driver, you are responsible for the
load being properly secured to prevent it from
slipping, tipping, rolling or falling down. Correct
securing of loads must also be observed in nor-
mal driving situations, when swerving to avoid
an obstacle, during full brake application and on
poor road surfaces.
If the securing of the load does not fulfil appli-
cable technical requirements and regulations,
this may be punishable by law. This depends on
the national laws and the resulting consequen-
ces.
Working mode
Therefore, observe the respective country-spe-

cific laws.
Before loading the tipper platform, secure ball Check that the load is secure before every jour-
sockets : using designated pins =. The han- ney, and at regular intervals during a long jour-
dles of pins = must always point downwards ney. If necessary, adjust an incorrectly or inad-
and be secured using locking pins ;. equately secured load.
Each time before loading, lower the tipper plat-
form with the button or control lever i Information on lashing material conforming
(Y page 245). This will help prevent damage to to current standards (e.g. DIN EN) can be
the lifting cylinder and to the tipper platform. obtained from a qualified workshop or
X Place bulk goods on the tipper platform from
the lowest height possible. Information on the correct securing of loads
can be obtained from the manufacturers of
X Load the tipper platform so that the centre of
load-securing equipment or lashing material
gravity is as central as possible. for securing loads.
X Make sure that the platform dropside fasten-
ers are folded down as far as they will go after Primarily use the lashing eyes in the platform
closing the platform dropside (Y page 243). floor to secure the load, especially when secur-
ing heavy loads.
Load the lashing eyes evenly.
Loose loads, especially on the load surface of a
Securing loads tipper platform, should be secured using an
approved cargo net or tarpaulin.
G WARNING
If you load the vehicle unevenly, driving char-
acteristics such as steering and braking
behaviour may be severely impaired. There is
Load the vehicle evenly. Secure the load so
that it cannot slip.
! Observe the information on the maximum

loading capacity of the lashing points.
When you brake hard, for example, forces
apply that can be far higher than the weight
force of the transported load. Always use mul- Example: maximum load sticker of the lashing
point on the tipper
Tipper platform 243
X Loads that need to be kept upright should be quick-change platform should not be laden
secured in all directions at the lashing points when doing so.
or lashing eyes in the platform floor, depend-
ing on the vehicle's equipment. Only use lash-
ing material conforming to valid standards
(e.g. DIN EN), for example cargo nets and
lashing straps.
When securing the load, always use lashing
eyes that are nearby and pad sharp edges.
X Always secure the cargo net or a tarpaulin at
all available lashing points. While doing so,
ensure that the mounting hooks are secured
so that they cannot be unintentionally
released.
X To secure the tipper platform: raise the

Fitting equipment on the tipper plat- platform (Y page 245).
Working mode
form X Pull safety prop : out of bracket ; and
swing it down as far as it will go in the direc-
G WARNING tion of the arrow.
If you attach mounted implements incorrectly X Lower tipper platform (Y page 245) until
or do not secure them properly, this equip- safety prop : rests in bracket =.
ment may tip over. There is a risk of injury.
Never attach mounted implements, e.g. grit-
ting equipment using the lashing eyes, Platform dropsides
instead use the mountings intended for the
purpose.
G WARNING
! Body mounting (e.g. of gritters) using the
lashing eyes is not permitted. To mount a grit- When opening the side panel lock, the drop-
ter, use the fastening components on the side may drop downwards. This is particularly
platform. The lashing eyes are only to be used the case when it is subjected to a load and is
for securing a load. therefore under increased strain. There is a
Instructions for fitting equipment can be found danger of injury.
in the body/equipment mounting directives in Before opening, make sure that no persons
the Mercedes-Benz body manufacturer portal: are in the swinging range of the dropside.
http://bb-portal.mercedes-benz.com
Always open the side panel lock laterally from
the dropside to be opened. Be particularly
careful if the side panel latches cannot be
Safety prop
released using the normal amount of force.
G DANGER
When working beneath the raised tipper plat- G WARNING
form/quick-change platform, it may lower if When the catch lever is pressed down, it auto-
operated incorrectly or if there is a leak in the matically springs into the extreme position.
hydraulic system. You could be crushed as a As a result, you could trap your fingers, for
result. There is a risk of fatal injuries. example. There is a risk of injury.
Secure the raised tipper platform/quick- Always press the catch lever down with the
change platform with the safety prop before palm of your hand.
working beneath it. The tipper platform/
Z
244 Tipper platform
! Attached equipment must never be propped Rear platform dropside

up against the aluminium platform dropsides
or the posts. Opening the rear platform dropside
To prevent this, gritters and similar attach-
ments are not fitted with lateral supports
when delivered from the factory.
Opening the platform dropside
X Swing rear catch lever : upwards to the left

and right.
Working mode
The platform dropside is released.

X Swing down the platform dropside.
X Swing rear catch lever : downwards to the
Example: platform dropside left and right as far as it will go.
X Swing front catch lever : and rear catch If the rear platform dropside is open, the plat-
lever = up. form dropside catch lever must not be unlocked.
X Swing the platform dropside down.
Letting the rear platform dropside swing
freely
X Swing front catch lever : and rear catch
lever = down as far as they will go. ! Do not open the rear platform dropside
catch levers if the rear platform dropside is to
swing freely. The rear platform dropside will
Releasing the platform dropsides otherwise drop down and be damaged.
A second person is required when closing the
catches and when releasing the platform drop-
side.
X Make sure that the tipper platform is unloa-
ded.
X Swing front catch lever : and rear catch
lever = up.
X Remove post ; (Y page 245).
X Hold the platform dropside level with the plat-
form and pull it from the mounting pins.
X Remove the platform dropside.
X Ensure that rear catch levers : on the left
X Swing front catch levers : down as far as and right are closed.
they will go. X Pull platform dropside locking lever ; in the
The platform dropside can now swing freely.
Tipper platform 245
Releasing the rear platform dropside Rear platform dropside access steps
G WARNING
When the catch lever and the locking lever of
the rear dropside are open, it is only loosely
held in its mounting. The tailgate can fall
down. There is a risk of injury.
Before opening, ensure that no-one is in the
area behind the dropside.
A second person is required when closing the

catches and when releasing the platform drop-
side.
X Make sure that the tipper platform is unloa- Use the platform dropside access steps to
ded. safely climb onto the platform.
X Pull platform dropside locking lever ; in the X Open the tailgate (Y page 244).
Working mode
X Fold out step =.
X Swing rear catch lever : upwards to the left X Use grab handle :, step ; and fold-out step
and right. =.
X Remove the platform dropside.
X Swing rear catch lever : downwards to the
Tipper operation
left and right as far as it will go.
Removing the post
G WARNING
If you drive off with the tipper platform raised,
it could get caught on buildings, bridges or
trees, for example. There is a risk of an acci-
dent.
Before driving off, always make sure that you
have lowered the tipper platform and that it is
correctly secured.
While tipping, the ball points can be loaded with

2.3 t. This value only applies to a stationary
vehicle.
ded. Before tipping
X Swing all catch levers : up and the platform
dropside down. General notes
X Swing all catch levers : down as far as they
Please observe the following notes when raising
will go. and lowering the tipper platform:
X Unscrew screws = in post ;.
Rthe vehicle must be on a firm and level sur-
X Remove post ;.
face.
Ralways insert pins on the platform side to
which the load is to be tipped. The pins have
different shapes to prevent confusion or diag-
onal insertion.
Z
246 Tipper platform
Rthe handle of the pins must always point

downwards and be secured with the locking
pin.
Rmake sure that a suitable safe distance is
kept.
Rmake sure that the dropsides can be opened
or are open.
Raising/lowering the tipper platform,

vehicles without working hydraulics
Enabling/disabling the tipper function
X Start the engine.
X Enable the tipper function (Y page 246).
X Ensure that, in vehicles with a tipper platform
trailer, switch C is pressed.
X To raise the tipper platform: press and hold
Working mode
button ? until the tipper platform has

reached the desired position.
The Y indicator lamp in the status area of
X To lower the tipper platform: make sure
lock.
X To enable the tipper function: press X Press and hold button A until the tipper plat-
switch :. form has reached the desired position.
Indicator lamp ; in the switch lights up. When the tipper platform is fully lowered, the
Y indicator lamp in the status area of the
The raise/lower tipper platform button is ena- on-board computer goes out.
bled.
X Disable the tipper function (Y page 246).
X To disable the tipper function: press switch
=. Raising/lowering the tipper platform
Indicator lamp ; in the switch goes out.
trailer
The raise/lower tipper platform button is dis-
abled.
Raising/lowering the tipper platform

vehicle
Tipper platform 247
X To enable the tipper function: make sure

that the hydraulic system is enabled
(Y page 205).
X Press switch :.
Indicator lamp ; in the switch lights up. In
the on-board computer display, the
YJoystick active message is dis-
played. The å indicator lamp in the status
area of the on-board computer lights up.
The raise/lower tipper platform control lever
function is enabled.
X To disable the tipper function: press switch
X Start the engine. =.
X Enable the tipper function (Y page 246). Indicator lamp ; in the switch goes out.
X Press switch B. The raise/lower tipper platform control lever
The tipper platform trailer can be raised or function is disabled.
lowered.
Working mode
X To raise the tipper platform: press and hold Raising/lowering the tipper platform
button ? until the tipper platform has vehicle
reached the desired position.
X To lower the tipper platform: make sure
lock.
X Press and hold button A until the tipper plat-
form has reached the desired position.
X Press switch C.
The tipper platform trailer is no longer selec-
ted.
Raising/lowering the tipper platform,

vehicles with working hydraulics
Enabling/disabling the tipper function
X Start the engine.

X Enable the tipping function (Y page 247).
X Ensure that, in vehicles with a tipper platform
trailer, switch D is pressed.
X To raise the tipper platform: press control
lever ? in direction B and hold it in place
Z
248 Tipper platform
until the tipper platform has reached the X To lower the tipper platform: make sure
desired position. that the key is in position 2 in the ignition
The Y indicator lamp in the status area of lock.
the on-board computer lights up. X Press control lever ? in direction A and hold
X To lower the tipper platform: make sure it in place until the tipper platform has
that the key is in position 2 in the ignition reached the desired position.
lock. X Press switch D.
X Press control lever ? in direction A and hold The tipper platform trailer is no longer selec-
it in place until the tipper platform has ted.
reached the desired position. X Disable the tipper function (Y page 247).
When the tipper platform is fully lowered, the
Y indicator lamp in the status area of the
on-board computer goes out.
Removing and fitting the tipper plat-
form with a crane
Raising/lowering the tipper platform
trailer
Working mode
G DANGER
If unsuitable lifting gear is used to fit/remove
the tipper platform, it can come loose. The
tipper platform could drop and you or others
that are in the area of danger of the tipper
platform could be seriously or even fatally
injured. There is a risk of fatal injury.
Always use lifting gear that is suitable for the
load.
G WARNING
When raising or lowering a tipper platform
with a crane, it could swing uncontrollably, for
example, due to the changed centre of grav-
ity. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that when raising and lowering
with a crane that nobody is in the area of dan-
ger.

ded.
X Start the engine.
X Enable the tipping function (Y page 247).
Removing the tipper platform
X Press switch C. G WARNING
The tipper platform trailer can be raised or
lowered. The piston rod of the lifting cylinder could
X To raise the tipper platform: press control extend due to drop in pressure while lifting the
lever ? in direction B and hold it in place tipper platform and trap you. There is a risk of
until the tipper platform has reached the injury.
desired position. Make sure that nobody is in the area of danger
of the tipper platform.
Tipper platform 249
When removing the tipper platform, you must X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
get the assistance of a second person. lock.
X Make sure that the pins on the rear ball sock- X Simultaneously lower the tipper platform with
ets are installed (Y page 242). the control lever/switch (Y page 245) and
X Open the rear platform dropside with the crane, until the tipper platform is
(Y page 243). completely resting on the ball sockets.
X Open the rear platform dropside
(Y page 243).
Working mode
X Attach lifting gear ; to front lashing
points : on the platform floor.
X Close the rear platform dropside X Attach lifting gear D to rear lashing points E
(Y page 243). on the platform floor.
X Start the engine. X Close the rear platform dropside
(Y page 243).
X Raise the tipper platform with the control
lever/switch (Y page 245) and secure it with
a safety prop (Y page 243).
X Raise tipper platform = slightly with the
crane.
X Remove left and right locking pins H from

pins F.
X Using the handle, turn left and right pins F
upwards and remove them from rear ball
sockets G.
X Using the crane, carefully lift the tipper plat-
X Remove two diagonally opposed screws ?
form horizontally and remove it.
from lifting cylinder B on the underside of
the tipper platform.
X Replace screws ? with two M12 x 50 mm set
screws.
X Remove two screws A.
X Raise the tipper platform slightly with the
crane and fold in safety prop C.
Z
250 Tipper platform
X Insert pins F into the left and right sides of

the rear ball sockets G and turn the handle
downwards.
X Place locking pins H onto pins F.
(Y page 243).
X Detach lifting gear D from both rear lashing
points E on the platform floor.
X Close the rear platform dropside
(Y page 243).
X Raise the tipper platform using the crane at
front lashing points : and secure it with
X Unscrew magnet I from the tipper platform. safety props C (Y page 243).
X Start the engine.
X Carefully extend lifting cylinder B of the tip-
per platform with the control lever/switch
until it reaches the platform floor
Working mode
(Y page 245).
X Attach lifting cylinder B using screws ?, A
to the platform floor.
X Lower the tipper platform and remove the lift-
ing gear.
X Check that the tipper platform and the Y
board computer are operating correctly.
X Attach magnet I to switch J, e.g. with
adhesive tape.
the on-board computer remains off when the Quick-change system for the tipper
tipper platform has been removed. platform
X Make sure that lifting cylinder B has been
fully retracted. Important safety notes
X Lash lifting cylinder B to the frame.
G DANGER
This helps to prevent damage to the fittings.
If unsuitable lifting gear is used to fit/remove
the tipper platform, it can come loose. The
Installing the tipper platform
tipper platform could drop and you or others
When installing the tipper platform, you must that are in the area of danger of the tipper
get the assistance of a second person. platform could be seriously or even fatally
X Remove both M12 x 50 mm screws on the injured. There is a risk of fatal injury.
underside of the platform floor. Always use lifting gear that is suitable for the
X Remove magnet I on switch J.
load.
X Screw magnet I onto the tipper platform.
X Attach lifting gear ; to front lashing G WARNING
points : on the platform floor.
When raising or lowering a tipper platform
X Attach lifting gear D to rear lashing points E
on the platform floor. with a crane, it could swing uncontrollably, for
X Carefully position the tipper platform horizon-
example, due to the changed centre of grav-
tally using the crane. ity. There is a risk of injury.
All four ball sockets G on the tipper platform
must rest completely on the balls.
Tipper platform 251
Make sure that when raising and lowering

with a crane that nobody is in the area of dan-
ger.
G WARNING
If you drive with the quick-change platform
uncoupled, it may fall off if you brake suddenly
or change direction. There is a risk of an acci-
dent and injury.
Always make sure the quick-change platform
is locked and secured before driving. X Pull out locking pin B on catch lever C.
X Push catch lever C inwards in the direction of
the arrow until it engages in retainer
ded.
spring ?.
Do not shift the catch lever on the quick-change The lifting cylinder is mechanically decoupled
Working mode
platform when the quick-change platform is from the quick-change platform. The quick-
raised. change platform only rests on the four balls of
ball sockets ;.
Removing the quick-change platform
A second person is required to remove the
quick-change platform.
X Park the vehicle on a level surface.
X Make sure that the quick-change platform is
lowered completely.
the on-board computer must be not be lit and
the ball sockets of the quick-change platform
X Switch off the engine. X Open the rear platform dropside
(Y page 243).
X Attach lifting gear C at the front and back to
lashing points D on the platform floor.
X Close the rear platform dropside
(Y page 243).
X Carefully raise the quick-change platform hor-
izontally with the lifting gear.
X Remove left and right locking pins = from

pins :.
X Using the handle, turn left and right pins :
upwards and remove them from rear ball
sockets ;.
Z
252 Tipper platform
X Unscrew magnet E from the quick-change X Carefully lift the quick-change platform hori-
platform. zontally using the lifting gear.
Ball sockets ; on the quick-change platform
X Press catch lever C outwards in the direction
of the arrow until it engages in retainer spring
A.
X Secure catch lever C with locking pin B.
X Insert pins : into the left and right sides of
the rear ball sockets ; and turn the handle
downwards.
X Place locking pins = onto pins :.
(Y page 243).
X Attach magnet E to switch F, e.g. with X Detach lifting gear C from lashing points D
adhesive tape. on the platform floor.
The Y indicator lamp in the status area of X Close the rear platform dropside
Working mode
the on-board computer remains off when the (Y page 243).

quick-change platform has been removed. X Installation check: raise the quick-change
platform (Y page 245).
X Screw magnet E onto the quick-change plat-
form.
X Check that the Y indicator lamp in the
status area of the on-board computer is func-
tioning correctly.
X Make sure that connection part G for the

quick-change platform is engaged in retainer
springs H.
X Lash connection part G to the frame.
This helps to prevent damage to the fittings.
Fitting the quick-change platform X Check that locking bolts I between the
quick-change platform and connecting part
A second person is required to fit the quick-
are correctly fitted.
change platform.
X Lower the quick-change platform
X If the quick-change platform has been
(Y page 245).
removed, make sure that connection part G
for the quick-change platform has engaged in
spring catches H.
X Remove magnet E on switch F.
X Attach lifting gear C at the front and back to
lashing points D on the platform floor.
Cleaning and care 253
Useful information REnsure that there is sufficient ventilation

when cleaning.
RMake sure that the vehicle interior dries
models and standard and optional equipment of completely after cleaning.
going to print. Country-specific differences are Cleaning the seat covers
be equipped with all the functions described. Clean covers made with fabric with a microfibre
This also applies to safety-relevant systems and cloth moistened with a solution containing 1%
functions. detergent, e.g. washing-up liquid. Wipe entire
seat sections carefully to avoid leaving visible
lines. Allow the seat to dry subsequently. Clean-
ing results are dependent on the type and the
age of the soiling.
Cleaning and care Cleaning the seat belts
Maintenance and care

Notes on care ! Observe the following notes on cleaning the
seat belts:
Rremove any stains or dirt immediately. This
Only wash your vehicle at a wash bay
will avoid residue or damage.
designed for this purpose. Dispose of empty
Rdo not bleach or dye the seat belts. This
containers and used cleaning products in an could impair the function of the seat belts.
environmentally responsible manner. Rdo not dry the seat belts in direct sunlight or
at temperatures above 80 †.
Regular care helps to maintain the value of the
vehicle. Clean the seat belts with a mild washing solu-
Other useful tips on vehicle care and mainte- tion.
nance, in particular when the vehicle is used in
arduous operating conditions, can be found in
the "Tips on maintaining the value of your vehi- Cleaning the vehicle exterior
cle" supplement.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use Important safety notes
care products that have been approved for
Mercedes-Benz. These care products can be G WARNING
obtained from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. If the windscreen wipers are set in motion
If you need to wash upper parts of the vehicle, when cleaning the windscreen or wiper
always use a suitable ladder or another non-slip blades, you could become trapped. There is a
climbing aid. danger of injury.
Always switch off the windscreen wipers and
the ignition before cleaning the windscreen or
Cleaning the interior
wiper blades.
Wet-cleaning the passenger compart-
ment G WARNING
If you use openings in the bodywork or
! Observe the following points when wet
cleaning the vehicle interior: detachable parts as steps, you could:
RNever use a high-pressure cleaner. Rslip and/or fall
RMake sure that no liquids enter or are left in Rdamage the vehicle and cause yourself to
gaps or cavities. fall.
There is a danger of injury.
Z
254 Cleaning and care
Always use secure climbing aids, e.g. a suita- Chassis and body
ble ladder.
G WARNING
! Do not use parts of the vehicle or openings Flammable material such as leaves, grass or
in the bodywork, such as battery compart- twigs may ignite if they come into contact with
ment covers or fuel/AdBlue® tanks, as steps. hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk
Parts of the vehicle or openings in the body- of fire.
work can otherwise be damaged.
When driving on an unpaved road or off-road,
! In order to avoid consequential damage, check the vehicle underside regularly. In par-
repair damage caused by loose chippings and ticular, remove trapped plant parts or other
remove any dirt immediately, in particular: flammable material. Contact a qualified spe-
Rinsect remains cialist workshop immediately if damage is
Rbird droppings detected.
Rflash rust
When used in dirt-intensive operating condi-
Rtree resin
Roils and grease
tions, the vehicle and the body should be regu-
larly cleaned and cared for. Parts and deposits
Rfuels of flammable materials must be removed from
Rtar stains the chassis and the body. This reduces the risk
Rsalt residue of flammable materials igniting on hot vehicle or
Wash your vehicle more frequently if it gets body parts.
dirty more often. Examples of dirt-intensive operating conditions
or environments:
! Vehicles with Mercedes-Benz protective
RPesticide and fertiliser spreading: plant mat-
chassis sealing:
ter which touches, brushes against or gathers
Rdo not use high-pressure cleaners with in the chassis or vehicle body, such as cereal
round-spray jets for cleaning ears
Ronly clean with the water pressure up to a RHarvesting green fodder or maintenance of
maximum of 30 bar road verges, such as mowing, mulching,
Rclean the vehicle with a water temperature pressing or loading: deposits of dust, grass,
up to a maximum of 40 † cuttings or hay in the chassis or body
Rkeep a distance of at least 30 cm between RHarvesting or landscape maintenance, such
the nozzle and the vehicle as pressing, loading or wood chopping:
Ronly use neutral cleaning agents in the mix- deposits of dust, straw, corn or cuttings in the
ing ratio prescribed by the manufacturer chassis or body
and do not use alkaline or acidic products RWaste disposal vehicles: deposits of flamma-
Rdo not use any petrol-based substances, ble waste in the chassis, such as paper
rape seed oil, diesel, petrol or other sol- RDisaster relief work and fire-fighting in forests
vents and on open plains: deposits such as grass,
Rwhenever the vehicle is used, remove cor- plant material and undergrowth
rosive substances with water afterwards
Rbefore and after each use during winter,
check the anti-corrosion protection, and
touch it up if necessary
When cleaning the vehicle, always use the vehi-
cle's steps and grab handles or secure climbing
aids, such as a suitable ladder.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion and
damage caused by neglect or incorrect care
cannot always be completely rectified. In such
cases, contact a qualified specialist workshop.
Access steps High-pressure cleaning

G WARNING
The water jet from a round-jet nozzle (dirt
grinder) can cause damage to tyres, suspen-
sion components or air bellows that is not
visible from the outside. Components that
have been damaged in this way can unex-
pectedly fail. There is a risk of an accident.
Do not use a high-pressure cleaner with a
round-jet nozzle to clean your vehicle. Have
damaged tyres, suspension components or
Keep steps ; and grab handles : free from air bellows replaced immediately.
dirt such as:

Rmud
! Never use a high-pressure cleaner in the
vehicle interior. The pressurised water cre-
Rclay
ated by the high-pressure cleaner and the
Rsnow associated spray could cause considerable
Rice damage to the vehicle.
This increases the safety of your footing. ! The BlueTec® exhaust gas aftertreatment
system may only be cleaned when it is cool.
Rain and light sensor The sensors could otherwise be damaged.
When cleaning, make sure never to point the
water jet at the exhaust pipe. The exhaust gas
aftertreatment could otherwise be damaged.
! When using a high-pressure cleaner, keep a
minimum distance between the high-pres-
sure nozzle and the vehicle parts. Parts of the
vehicle or engine can otherwise be damaged.
Observe the following minimum distances:
RRound spray jet approximately 70 cm
R25°flat-spray jet approximately 30 cm
RDirt grinder approximately 30 cm
Clean the windscreen in the area of rain and light ! Keep the water jet moving constantly while
sensor : regularly. This way, you will avoid cleaning. In this way, you will avoid causing
causing malfunctions. damage.
If the windscreen in the area of rain and light Do not point the water jet at:
sensor : is damaged:
Rdoor joints
Rthe function of the rain and light sensor can be
Rair bellows
impaired
Rbrake hoses
Rhave the windscreen replaced at a qualified
Rwheel balance weights
specialist workshop
Relectrical components
Relectrical connectors
Rseals
Z
256 Cleaning and care
! Vehicles with Mercedes-Benz protective Cleaning the engine

chassis sealing:
Rdo not use high-pressure cleaners with
! Observe the following notes when cleaning
the engine. This avoids malfunctions and
round-spray jets for cleaning damage to the engine.
Ronly clean with the water pressure up to a
RWhen using high-pressure or steam clean-
maximum of 30 bar
Rclean the vehicle with a water temperature
ers, do not point the spray directly at elec-
trical components and electric cables.
up to a maximum of 40 †
RMake sure that no water enters the air
Rkeep a distance of at least 30 cm between
intake and ventilation openings.
the nozzle and the vehicle
RTreat the engine with preservative agents
You could otherwise damage the Mercedes- after it has been cleaned. When doing so,
Benz protective chassis sealing. protect the belt drive system from the pres-
H Environmental note ervative agent.
ROnly use wax-based protective agents for
Only wash your vehicle at a wash bay
engines that comply with Sheet No. 385.4
designed for this purpose. Dispose of empty of the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for
containers and used cleaning products in an Service Products.
environmentally responsible manner.
! When using high-pressure or steam clean-
Please also observe the information provided for ers, do not point the spray directly at radiator
cleaning the radiator (Y page 268). core fins, electrical components or electric
cable ends.
In addition, observe the notes in the "High-pres-
Automatic car wash sure cleaning" section (Y page 255).
G WARNING
Braking efficiency is reduced after the vehicle Cleaning light-alloy wheels
has been washed. There is a risk of an acci- ! When cleaning the light-alloy wheels, do not
dent. use any acidic or alkaline cleaning agent. They
After washing the vehicle, brake carefully may corrode the wheel nuts or the locking
while paying attention to the traffic conditions springs of the wheel balance weight.
in order to restore full braking efficiency. ! Do not point the water jet of high pressure or
steam cleaners directly at the balance
! Before washing the vehicle in an automatic weights of the light-alloy wheel. They may
car wash, fold in the exterior mirrors and become detached and lead to imbalance and
switch off the windscreen wipers. Otherwise, increased tyre wear.
the exterior mirrors and windscreen wipers
Clean the light-alloy wheels regularly.
could be damaged.
In addition, observe the notes in the "High-pres-
Make sure that the exterior mirrors are fully
sure cleaning" section (Y page 255).
folded out again when you leave the auto-
matic car wash.
Wash off excess dirt before cleaning the vehicle After driving off-road or on a construc-
in an automatic car wash.
tion site
After the automatic car wash, remove the wax
from the windscreen and the wiper blades. This ! Only direct the compressed-air, steam or
prevents smearing and reduces wiper noise, water jet towards the radiator surface in a
which occur as a result of residue on the wind- vertical direction. Ensure that the radiator fins
screen. are not damaged. Remove any dirt from the
radiator fins. Damaged or dirty radiator fins
can cause the engine to overheat. If there is a
loss of coolant or damage to the cooling and
heating system, have it checked at a qualified After operation in mud, sand, water or after
specialist workshop. exposure to similar dirty conditions:
Foreign bodies that have become trapped can X Clean brake discs, brake linings, wheels and
be expelled during the journey, e.g stones in the axle joints and check them for damage.
tyre tread. X If necessary, lubricate the axle joints (observe
Check the tyres for foreign bodies that have the information in the Maintenance Booklet).
become trapped after every journey off-road or X Test the brakes.
on a construction site and before journeys on
public roads. Remove any trapped foreign bod-
ies.
Dirt and mud on the tyres and on the road sur- Chassis and underbody protection
face reduce road grip, particularly if the road ! To maintain a high level of anti-corrosion
surface is wet. This could cause your vehicle to protection you must observe the following:
skid.
Rdo not wash the vehicle until the fourth
Dirt and mud on steps and door sills make them
week after delivery.
less safe to tread on. This could cause you to slip

from the steps and injure yourself. Rwhen washing the chassis and underbody
with a high-pressure cleaner, ensure that
Always clean your vehicle carefully after every
the water temperature is not set above
journey off-road or on a construction site and
40 † and the spray pressure does not
before journeys on public roads.
exceed 30 bar.
When driving off-road, dirt, sand, mud and water Rdo not use rapeseed oil, petrol, diesel or
mixed with oil, for example, can soil the brakes.
other solvents for cleaning. They can cause
This can lead to reduced braking performance or
the dual-layer protection to dissolve or peel
to total failure of the brakes, also from increased
off.
wear. The braking characteristics change
depending on the material that has penetrated. Ronly use a pH-neutral cleaner, not alkaline
Clean the brakes after driving off-road. If you or acidic products.
then notice grinding noises or a reduction in Rdo not use any additional anti-corrosion
braking performance, have the brake system agents.
checked at a qualified specialist workshop as Rwhenever the vehicle is used in extreme
quickly as possible. Adapt your driving style to conditions, such as winter road service
the altered braking conditions. operations using wet salt, remove all traces
The following vehicle parts in particular must be of corrosive substances with water after-
cleaned: wards.
Rlighting system The Unimog's chassis and underbody have been
Rwindows treated with a special dual-layer protective coat-
Rexterior mirrors
ing.
Raccess steps and entrances
This dual-layer protection consists of a pene-
trating wax (Carlofon 3650) and an underbody
Rgrab handles
protection wax (Carlofon 4941). The penetrat-
Rtyres, wheels and wheel arches ing wax improves the anti-corrosion protection
Rsteering, axles and brakes on moving parts and at gaps, joints and over-
Rsuspension elements and chassis frame laps. The underbody protection wax perma-
Rlicence plate
nently seals the chassis.
Rradiator, engine and transmission i Other useful tips on vehicle care can be
X Remove any trapped foreign bodies, e.g.
found in the "Tips on maintaining the value of
stones. your vehicle" supplement.
Z
258 Maintenance
Maintenance Opening/closing the front flap

Important safety notes Overview
H Environmental note G WARNING
If circumstances require you to do some main- If you open the front flap while the engine is
tenance work yourself, you must observe the overheating or while there is a fire in the
environmental protection requirements. engine compartment, you could come into
When disposing of service products, e.g. contact with hot gases or other leaking ser-
engine oil, you must comply with the legal vice products. There is a risk of injury.
requirements. This also concerns all parts, Allow an overheating engine to cool down
e.g. filters, that have been in contact with ser- before opening the front flap. If there is a fire
vice products. in the engine compartment, leave the front
Dispose of empty containers, cleaning cloths flap closed and notify the fire brigade.
and care products in an environmentally
responsible manner.
Observe the instructions for care products.
Do not let the engine run longer than neces-
sary when stationary.
Like all technical equipment, the vehicle

requires care and maintenance. The scope and
frequency of maintenance work mainly depends
on the operating conditions, which can differ
widely.
You must secure the vehicle on axle stands of
sufficient load-bearing capacity if work is being Unlocking/locking the front flap
carried out underneath the vehicle. Never use
the jack instead of stands. The jack could slip
and the vehicle could drop. The jack is designed
only to raise the vehicle for a short time, e.g.
while a wheel is being changed.
When working on the vehicle, comply with all
safety regulations, such as operating instruc-
tions, regulations concerning hazardous mate-
rials, environmental protection measures, work
safety and accident prevention regulations.
The enclosed Maintenance Booklet contains
information on the scope and frequency of main-
tenance work and notes on warranty, service
products and maintenance work. Opening/closing the front flap
A qualified specialist workshop will confirm the
work that has been carried out in the Mainte-
nance Booklet.
Inspection and maintenance work requires spe-
cial skills that cannot be acquired by reading
these Operating Instructions. Always have this
work and maintenance work carried out by a
Maintenance 259
X Lock fasteners : with the square spanner in

the direction of arrow =.
X Vehicles with a mowing door: swing the
additional mirror up and secure the handrail
(Y page 64).
Removing/replacing the front flap

Overview
G WARNING
Closing the front flap
If you open the front flap while the engine is
overheating or while there is a fire in the
Opening the front flap
engine compartment, you could come into

X Vehicles with a mowing door: release the contact with hot gases or other leaking ser-
handrail and swing the additional mirror down vice products. There is a risk of injury.
(Y page 64).
Allow an overheating engine to cool down
X All vehicles: make sure that, when opening
before opening the front flap. If there is a fire
the front flap, there are no foreign bodies on
the lid, e.g. snow, dirt, foliage. in the engine compartment, leave the front
This way, no foreign objects can enter the flap closed and notify the fire brigade.
heating/air conditioning air inlet duct.
X Take the square spanner out of the tool bag
(Y page 278).
X Unlock fasteners : with the square spanner
in the direction of arrow ;.
X Swing up the front flap in the centre.
X Remove safety prop A from retainer ? and
swing it downwards.
X Insert safety prop A into bracket B.
Closing the front flap

G WARNING
An unlocked front flap may open up when the
vehicle is in motion and block your view. There
Before every trip, make sure that the front flap
is locked.
X Raise the front flap.

X Swing safety prop A up and engage it in
retainer ?.
X Swing down the front flap in the centre.
Ensure that centring pins C on the front flap Unlocking/locking the front flap
retract into brackets D. Two people are required to remove/replace the
front flap.
Z
260 Maintenance
Removing the front flap Always keep service products out of the reach
X Vehicles with a mowing door: release the of children.
handrail and swing the additional mirror down
(Y page 64). ! Do not operate the vehicle if the coolant
X All vehicles: take the square spanner out of
level is too low. Otherwise, the engine may be
damaged.
the tool bag (Y page 278).
X Unscrew quick-release fasteners ; on grab
handle :. Checking the coolant level and topping
X Unlock fasteners = with the square spanner
up the coolant
in the direction of arrow ?. X Park the vehicle on a level surface.
X Pull front flap up and remove. X Apply the parking brake.
Replacing the front flap X Check the coolant temperature in the on-
X Attach the front flap.
In order to ensure the correct coolant level,

X Position quick-release fasteners ; on grab the coolant temperature must be between
handle : and screw in slightly. 0 † and 25 †.
X Lock fasteners = with the square spanner in X Switch the ignition lock to position g.
the direction of arrow A. X When checking/topping up the coolant make
X Tighten quick-release fasteners ; on grab sure that you have a secure footing.
handle :.
X Vehicles with a mowing door: swing the
additional mirror up and secure the handrail
(Y page 64).
Coolant level
G WARNING
The cooling system is pressurised, particu-
larly when the motor is warm. If you open the X To check: check the coolant level.
cap, you could be scalded if hot coolant In order to ensure the correct coolant level,
sprays out. There is a risk of injury. the coolant temperature must be between
Let the engine cool down before you open the 0 † and 25 †.
cap. Wear protective gloves and protective The coolant in coolant expansion tank :
must be between "MIN" mark = and "MAX 6-
eyewear when opening. Open the cap slowly
cylinder with Allison" ;.
to release pressure.
G WARNING
Service product can be poisonous and haz-
ardous to health. There is a risk of injury.
Observe the instructions on the respective
original container when using, storing and dis-
posing off service products. Always store ser-
vice products in the sealed original container.
Maintenance 261
paint, plastic or rubber, rinse with water

immediately.
Have the brake fluid replaced regularly at a
qualified specialist workshop. You can find the
intervals for brake fluid change in the mainte-
nance booklet.
Checking the coolant level and topping

up
Vehicles with Telligent® gearshift or Tell-

X To top up: make sure that the coolant tem- igent® automatic gearshift:
perature is below 50 †.
X Turn green cap B slowly anti-clockwise and
release the pressure.

X Unscrew and remove green cap B.
or
X Remove spring A and detach cover ? using
an upward motion.
X Observe the information on coolant, coolant
mixture ratio and water quality (Y page 324).
X Top coolant up to "MAX 6-cylinder with Alli-
son" mark ;.
X Replace green cap B and tighten it as far as : Screws
it will go. ; Cover
or = Cover
X Press on cover ? and insert spring A. ? Max. mark
If the coolant level in coolant expansion tank : A Min. mark
is too low, the on-board computer displays the X Remove screws :.
red event window with the * symbol .
X Remove cover ;.
X Check: inspect the brake fluid level in the
expansion tank.
Hydraulic clutch actuation system The brake fluid level must be at maximum
mark ?.
If the brake fluid level has dropped signifi-
G WARNING cantly below maximum mark ?, there may be
a leak in the clutch actuation system. Have
Service product can be poisonous and haz- the clutch actuation system checked as soon
ardous to health. There is a risk of injury. as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.
Observe the instructions on the respective X To top up: unscrew cap =.
original container when using, storing and dis- X Observe the information on brake fluid
posing off service products. Always store ser- (Y page 322).
vice products in the sealed original container. X Make sure that the strainer is fitted.
Always keep service products out of the reach X Top up the brake fluid.
of children. Only fill the expansion tank to maximum
mark ?.
! Brake fluid corrodes paint, plastic and rub- X Replace cap = and screw it on.
ber. If brake fluid comes into contact with X Replace cover ; and tighten screws :.
Z
262 Maintenance
Vehicles with Telligent® automatic gear- Torque converter clutch

shift
G WARNING
Certain components in the engine compart-
ment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, the
radiator and parts of the exhaust system.
There is a risk of injury when accessing the
engine compartment.
As far as possible, allow the engine to cool
down and only touch the components descri-
bed in the following.
: Cover
G WARNING
; Max. mark
= Min. mark There are moving components in the engine
X Raise the tipper platform (Y page 245). compartment. Certain components may con-
or tinue to move or suddenly move again even
X Tilt the cab forwards (Y page 280). after the ignition has been switched off, e.g.
X Check: inspect the brake fluid level in the the radiator fan. There is a risk of injury.
expansion tank. If you have to carry out work in the engine
The brake fluid level must be at maximum compartment:
mark ;.
Rswitch off the ignition
If the brake fluid level has dropped signifi-
cantly below maximum mark ;, there may be Rnever touch the dangerous areas surround-
a leak in the clutch actuation system. Have ing moving components, e.g. the rotation
the clutch actuation system checked as soon area of the fan
as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. Rremove jewellery and watches
X To top up: unscrew cap :.
Rkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam-
X Observe the information on brake fluid
ple, away from moving parts.
(Y page 322).
X Make sure that the strainer is fitted.
G WARNING
X Top up the brake fluid.
Only fill the expansion tank to maximum Service product can be poisonous and haz-
mark ;. ardous to health. There is a risk of injury.
X Replace cap : and screw it on. Observe the instructions on the respective
X Lower the tipper platform (Y page 245). original container when using, storing and dis-
or posing off service products. Always store ser-
X Tilt the cab back into the driving position vice products in the sealed original container.
(Y page 280). Always keep service products out of the reach
of children.
Maintenance 263
Checking the fluid level Topping up the washer fluid

Add a washer fluid concentrate according to
Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Prod-
ucts Sheet No. 371.0 throughout the entire
year. Adjust the mixing ratio to suit the outside
temperature.
In temperatures above freezing, use a washer
concentrate for the summer to prevent smear-
ing. If there is a risk of frost, use a washer fluid
concentrate for winter to prevent the water from
freezing on the windscreen.
If the oil level in the torque converter clutch is

too low, the Ô warning lamp in the status

area of the on-board computer lights up.
X Park the vehicle on a level surface.
lock.
X Shift to neutral.
X Tilt the cab forwards (Y page 280).
X Start the engine (Y page 283). X Mix the washer fluid to the appropriate mixing
X Pull out oil dipstick :. ratio in a container beforehand.
The oil level must reach the FULL marking. X Remove cap : of washer fluid reservoir ;
by pulling it upwards.
Topping up the oil X Top up washer fluid reservoir ;, filling capa-
city (Y page 329).
X Switch off the engine (Y page 283). X Push on cap : until it engages.
X Unscrew filter plug ;.
When the washer fluid level in the washer fluid
X Observe the information on oil (Y page 329).
reservoir is too low, the on-board computer dis-
X Top up the oil. plays a grey event window with the ¦ symbol
X Check the engine oil level again. (Y page 116).
X Tighten filler plug ;.
Engine oil level

Windscreen washer system Checking the engine oil level
Important safety notes Check the engine oil level before the start of
every journey.
G WARNING
X Check the engine oil level via the on-board
Windscreen washer concentrate is highly computer (Y page 112).
flammable. If windscreen washer concentrate X Top up with the quantity of oil displayed in the
gets onto hot components of the engine or the on-board computer (Y page 264).
exhaust system, it may ignite. There is a risk of
fire and injury.
Make sure that windscreen washer concen-
trate is not spilled in the vicinity of the filler
neck.
Z
264 Maintenance
Topping up the engine oil Steering fluid level

G WARNING Important safety notes
ardous to health. There is a risk of injury. G WARNING
Observe the instructions on the respective Service product can be poisonous and haz-
original container when using, storing and dis- ardous to health. There is a risk of injury.
posing off service products. Always store ser- Observe the instructions on the respective
vice products in the sealed original container. original container when using, storing and dis-
Always keep service products out of the reach posing off service products. Always store ser-
of children. vice products in the sealed original container.
Always keep service products out of the reach
! Only use oils which have been approved for of children.
the vehicle and with the prescribed SAE clas-
sification. G WARNING
Do not add too much oil. If you add too much Certain components in the engine compart-
oil, the engine or the exhaust system could be
damaged. Have excess oil siphoned off. ment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, the
Do not add the topping-up quantity shown in the
on-board computer until the 4 symbol
appears in the status area of the on-board com- engine compartment.
puter (Y page 130). As far as possible, allow the engine to cool
X Park the vehicle on a level surface. down and only touch the components descri-
X Apply the parking brake. bed in the following.
G WARNING
There are moving components in the engine
compartment. Certain components may con-
tinue to move or suddenly move again even
after the ignition has been switched off, e.g.
the radiator fan. There is a risk of injury.
If you have to carry out work in the engine
compartment:
Rnever touch the dangerous areas surround-
ing moving components, e.g. the rotation
X Unscrew and remove cap :. area of the fan
X Observe the information on engine oil
Rremove jewellery and watches
(Y page 323).
X Top up the oil as shown in the on-board com- Rkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam-
puter. ple, away from moving parts.
X Replace cap : and screw it on.
! If the oil does not reach the MIN mark, the
vehicle's hydraulic system may be malfunc-
tioning.
Have the system checked immediately at a
Maintenance 265
Checking the fluid level and topping up Important safety notes

G WARNING
of children.
X Park the vehicle on a level surface. G WARNING

X Start the engine. The hydraulic system is under high pressure

X Tilt the cab (Y page 280). and the hydraulic fluid may be hot. If work on
X Push locking spring = and remove plug con- the hydraulic system is carried out incor-
nector ?. rectly, high-pressure hydraulic fluid may spray
X To check: pull out oil dipstick ;. out. There is a risk of injury.
X Wipe oil dipstick ; with a lint-free cloth. Only have work on the hydraulic system car-
X Re-insert oil dipstick ; as far as it will go and ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
pull it out again.
X Check the steering fluid level. Checking the oil level and topping up
The oil level must be between MIN mark B the hydraulic fluid
and MAX mark A.
X Insert oil dipstick ; as far as it will go.
X Remove plug ?.
X To top up: unscrew cap :.
X Observe the information on oil (Y page 329).
X Top up with the necessary amount of oil.
Checking the oil level of the working

hydraulics
General notes X Lower the tipper platform (Y page 245).
X To check: retract the working cylinder piston
The following systems are supplied with hydrau- rods on the attached equipment (see the
lic oil via the hydraulic oil reservoir: manufacturer's operating instructions).
Rworking hydraulics X Switch off the engine.
Rfan hydraulics X Check the fluid level with level gauge ;.
Rlifting cylinder of the tipper platform The oil level must be within the visible area of
Rauxiliary steering on the rear axle level gauge ;.
X To top up: open cap :.
X Observe the information on hydraulic fluid
(Y page 325).
Z
266 Maintenance
X Top up the hydraulic fluid until it is in the

centre of the visible area of level gauge ;.
Oil level of power hydraulics

G WARNING
ardous to health. There is a risk of injury. X Open cap :.
Observe the instructions on the respective X Observe the information on hydraulic fluid
original container when using, storing and dis- (Y page 325).
posing off service products. Always store ser- X Slowly add hydraulic fluid.
vice products in the sealed original container. X Replace cap : and screw it on.
Always keep service products out of the reach X Check the oil level of the power hydraulics
of children. (Y page 112).
The oil level display of the power hydraulics
G WARNING must show approximately 52 l.
X Activate and then deactivate the power
The hydraulic system is under high pressure
hydraulics (Y page 230).
and the hydraulic fluid may be hot. If work on
the hydraulic system is carried out incor-
rectly, high-pressure hydraulic fluid may spray
out. There is a risk of injury. Oil level, hydrostatic drive system
Only have work on the hydraulic system car- Important safety notes
ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
G WARNING
Checking the fluid level Service product can be poisonous and haz-
Always check the oil level before starting oper-
ation of hydraulic equipment.
X Check the oil level using the on-board com-
puter (Y page 112).
Topping up the hydraulic fluid of children.
! If any of the hydraulic cylinders have not
been fully retracted, do not top up the oil to
the maximum.
Maintenance 267
Checking the oil level and topping up Replacing the wiper blades
the hydraulic fluid
G WARNING
If you use the steps and grab handles at the
front of the cab when replacing the wiper
blades, you could slip and/or fall. There is a
risk of injury.
When replacing the wiper blades, always use
secure climbing aids, e.g. a suitable ladder.
G WARNING
X To check: the oil level must be between MIN If the windscreen wipers begin to move while

mark ? and MAX mark =. you are changing the wiper blades, you can be
X To top up: open red cap :. trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of
X Observe the information on hydraulic fluid injury.
(Y page 325). Always switch off the windscreen wipers and
X Add the hydraulic fluid slowly into reser- ignition before changing the wiper blades.
voir ; up to maximum mark =.
X Replace red cap : and screw it on. ! Only touch the wiper blade on the wiper
arm. Otherwise, you could damage the wiper
blade.
Front PTO shaft The windscreen will no longer be wiped properly
if the wiper blades are worn. This may prevent
you from observing the traffic conditions.
Windscreen wiper blades

General notes
! Vehicles with external sun visors: do not
fold up the wiper arm. Otherwise, you could
damage the external sun visors.
! When installing the new wiper blades, pay
careful attention to the different lengths:
Rleft wiper blade 900 mm
After each period of use:
Rright wiper blade 1000 mm
X Clean the stub of front PTO shaft : with a The wiper system can otherwise be damaged.
soft cloth.
X Lightly grease the stub of front PTO shaft :.
X Push the cover onto front PTO shaft :.
X Check that it is positioned correctly. Twist the
cover in place.
Have PTO shaft : transmission checked and
repaired at a qualified specialist workshop.
Z
268 Maintenance
Removing Mowing door wiper blade
X Apply the parking brake. X Apply the parking brake.

X Shift to neutral. X Shift to neutral.
X Move the windscreen wiper to the side, to its X Switch off the engine.
end position (Y page 81). X Remove the key from the ignition lock.
X To remove: unscrew nut = on wiper
X Remove the key from the ignition lock. blade :.
X Unscrew nut ; on wiper blade ?. X Raise wiper arm ;.
X Raise wiper arm =. X Remove wiper blade :.
X Pull out bolt A. X Carefully lift wiper arm ; off the windscreen.
X Left windscreen wiper: remove roller :. X To fit: carefully lift wiper arm ; off the wind-
X Both windscreen wipers: remove wiper screen.
blade ?. X Insert new wiper blade :.
X Carefully lift wiper arm = off the windscreen. X Screw on new nut = and tighten.
X Fold wiper blade : onto the windscreen.
Fitting
X Carefully lift wiper arm = off the windscreen.
X Insert new wiper blade ?. Cleaning the radiator
X Left windscreen wiper: insert roller :.
X Both windscreen wipers: insert bolt A. Important safety notes
X Screw on new nut ;.
G WARNING
X Tighten nut ; so that wiper blade ? can still
move in wiper arm =. If you clean the radiator, the air conditioning
X Fold wiper blade ? onto the windscreen. condenser or the protective grid with the
engine at normal operating temperature, you
can burn yourself on the hot components.
There is a risk of injury.
Allow the engine to cool down before cleaning
the radiator, the air conditioning condenser or
the protective grid. Always wear protective
gloves while doing so.
! Only direct the compressed-air, steam or

water jet towards the radiator surface in a
vertical direction. Ensure that the radiator fins
are not damaged. Remove any dirt from the
radiator fins. Damaged or dirty radiator fins
Maintenance 269
can cause the engine to overheat. If there is a

loss of coolant or damage to the cooling and
heating system, have it checked at a qualified
Check the engine radiator and charge-air cooler
for soiling on the exterior every time you refuel.
Checking the engine radiator and

charge-air cooler
Depending on the nature of the work performed
by your vehicle, the engine radiator and the
charge-air cooler may become heavily soiled. X Swing air conditioning condenser = for-
X Check the engine radiator and charge-air wards.
cooler for soiling on the exterior every time X Clean radiator core fin on air conditioning
you refuel. condenser = and on engine radiator ?.

X In extremely dirty conditions, e.g. mow- X Swing air conditioning condenser = and pro-
ing operations: check the engine radiator tective grid : back again.
several times a day and clean it whenever X Pull lever ; and swing left to lock.
necessary.
i Further tips on cleaning the engine radiator Cleaning the charge-air cooler and
and the charge-air cooler can be found in the hydraulic oil cooling fan
"Tips on maintaining the value of your vehicle"
supplement. Cleaning the protective grid of the charge-
air cooler and the hydraulic oil cooling fan
Cleaning the engine radiator and air
conditioning condenser
X Clean protective grid : through ventilation

slot ; in the front flap.
X Check the coolant temperature in the on-
Only clean the radiator at a coolant tempera-
ture below 50 †.
X Pull lever ; and swing it to the right.
X Open protective grid :.
Z
270 Maintenance
Cleaning the charge-air cooler and Cleaning the working hydraulics oil
hydraulic oil cooling fan cooler
Protective grid = is designed so that the radi- Rear right oil cooler
ator core fin of charge-air cooler/oil cooler ; X Check the coolant temperature in the on-
only has to be cleaned after very dirt-intensive board computer (Y page 112).
work. Only clean the radiator at a coolant tempera-
X Check the coolant temperature in the on- ture below 50 †.
board computer (Y page 112). X Clean protective grid : and radiator core
Only clean the radiator at a coolant tempera- fin ; of the working hydraulics oil cooler.
ture below 50 †.
X Open the front flap (Y page 258).
X Loosen wing nuts : on protective grid =.
Cleaning the oil cooler, hydrostatic
drive system/torque converter clutch
X Remove protective grid =.
X Clean radiator core fin of charge-air
cooler/oil cooler fan hydraulics ;.
Power hydraulics oil cooler
Rear left oil cooler

X Check the coolant temperature in the on-
Only clean the radiator at a coolant tempera-
ture below 50 †.
X Check the coolant temperature in the on- X Clean radiator core fins : of the oil cooler,
board computer (Y page 112). hydrostatic drive system/torque converter
Only clean the radiator at a coolant tempera- clutch.
ture below 50 †.
X Raise the tipper platform and secure it with
the safety prop (Y page 245).
X Clean radiator core fin : of the power
hydraulics oil cooler.
Maintenance 271
Cleaning the fine particle filter or the Cleaning the water membrane on the
active charcoal filter fine particle filter or active charcoal
filter housing
Example: fine particle filter

When operating in very dirty conditions, e.g. Example: water membrane on the fine particle filter
when mowing, check the fine particle filter or housing
the active charcoal filter several times a day and X Open the front flap (Y page 258).
clean if necessary. X Press water membrane ; together on fine
X Open the front flap (Y page 258). particle filter or active charcoal filter hous-
X Clean dust filter screen ?. ing : multiple times in quick succession.
X To remove the fine particle filter or the
The dust particles in the valve fall out. This
active charcoal filter: open clip :. ensure that the water is drained properly.
X Lift up and remove cover =.
X Pull out and clean fine particle filter or active
charcoal filter ; or if it is heavily soiled, Cleaning the air filter
replace it.
X Clean housing A with a moist cloth.
X To install the fine particle filter or the
active charcoal filter: insert fine particle fil-
ter or active charcoal filter ;.
X Insert cover = to the right into the guide and
close it.
X Attach clip : to flap = and close it.
Z
272 Maintenance
When operating in very dirty conditions, e.g. the yellow + Condensation in

when mowing, check the air filter and clean it if compressed-air reservoir event window is
necessary. displayed in the on-board computer
X To remove the air filter: open the right door. (Y page 121).
X Open catches ;. X Check the reservoir pressure in the
X Remove cover :.
compressed-air brake system (Y page 143).
X Push air filter ? to the left in the direction of
arrow = and remove.
X To clean: knock air filter ? out and replace if
necessary if heavily soiled.
X Clean housing interior A with a moist cloth.
Ensure that no foreign bodies enter the hous-
ing.
X To replace the air filter: insert air filter ?
and push to the right, in the opposite direction
to arrow =, as far as it will go.

X Insert cover :.
X Close catches ;.
X Close the right door.
X Compressed-air brake system, circuit 1
compressed-air reservoir ;: remove cov-
ering cap =.
Cleaning the release valve on the air X Press release valve : upwards and drain off
intake duct the condensed water.
X Press on covering cap =.
The release valve fills accordingly, depending on

the nature of the work performed by your vehi- X Compressed-air brake system, circuit 2
cle. compressed-air reservoir :: open drain
X Briefly press together release valve : on air plug ; by a maximum of a ¼ revolution and
intake duct ;. drain off the condensed water.
The dust particles in the valve fall out. X Tighten drain plug ;.
Draining the compressed-air reser- Replacing the compressed-air dryer

voir granulate cartridge
Check whether condensed water has collected Have the granulate cartridge of the
in the compressed-air reservoir every 14 days. If compressed-air drier replaced regularly at a
the condensation sensor in compressed-air res- qualified specialist workshop. You can find the
ervoir circuit 1 detects too much condensation,
Maintenance 273
intervals for granulate cartridge replacement in i Observe the notes in the "Tips on vehicle
the Maintenance Booklet. value retention" supplement.
Checking the major assemblies on the Batteries

vehicle
Improper handling of service products is haz-
G WARNING
ardous to the environment. During the charging process, a battery produ-
Do not allow service products to enter the ces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or
sewage system, surface waters, ground water sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can
or soil. ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
RMake sure that the positive terminal of a
Check the major assemblies on the vehicle for connected battery does not come into con-

leaks regularly. If fluid loss is identified, e.g. by tact with vehicle parts.
oil drops on the parking area, have the cause of
RNever place metal objects or tools on a bat-
the fluid loss rectified as quickly as possible at a
qualified specialist workshop. tery.
RIt is important that you observe the descri-
bed order of the battery terminals when
Checking the anti-corrosion protec- connecting and disconnecting a battery.
tion RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the
! Road salt has a corrosive effect. In winter, battery poles with identical polarity are
wash the vehicle more frequently in order to connected.
remove salt residue. Salt residues can other- RIt is particularly important to observe the
wise damage the anti-corrosion protection. described order when connecting and dis-
The vehicle can be provided with Mercedes- connecting the jump leads.
Benz protective chassis sealing. The Mercedes- RNever connect or disconnect the battery
Benz protective chassis sealing is an anti-corro-
sion wax with outstanding protective qualities. terminals while the engine is running.
On vehicles without Mercedes-Benz protective
chassis sealing, the cab is provided with body G WARNING
cavity protection and underbody protection. Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
X Check the vehicle regularly for corrosion Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do
damage, particularly the compressed-air and not inhale any gases released from the bat-
hydraulic lines. tery. When carrying out maintenance work on
X As a precautionary measure, spray the under-
the battery, wear acid-resistant protective
side of the vehicle with a wax-based protec-
tive agent. clothing, particularly protective eyewear, pro-
X Have any damage to the factory-fitted anti-
tective gloves and an apron. Do not lean over
corrosion protection rectified at a qualified the battery. Keep the batteries out of the
specialist workshop. reach of children.
X Vehicles without Mercedes-Benz protective
chassis sealing: as a precautionary measure,
spray the underside of the vehicle with a wax-
based underbody protective agent according
to Sheet No. 385.1 of the Mercedes-Benz
Specification for Service Products.
Z
274 Maintenance
If you come into contact with battery acid, the environment through the
observe the following: ventilation openings in the
Rimmediately rinse battery acid off skin thor- stoppers.
oughly with clean water and seek immedi-
Observe the safety notes and protective meas-
ate medical attention.
ures when handling the battery.
Rif you get battery acid in your eyes, rinse
Risk of explosion.
them thoroughly with clean water immedi-
G WARNING Fire, naked flames and smoking are

prohibited when handling the bat-
Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation tery. Avoid producing sparks.
of sparks, which could ignite the highly explo-
sive gases of a battery. There is a risk of an Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact
explosion. with skin, eyes or clothing.

Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle Wear appropriate protective cloth-
body to remove any existing electrostatic ing, in particular gloves, an apron and
face protection.
build-up.
Rinse acid splashes immediately
A highly explosive mixture of gases is generated with clean water. If necessary, con-
while charging the battery and jump-starting. sult a doctor.
Always make sure that neither you nor the bat- Wear protective eyewear.
tery are electrostatically charged. An electro-
static build-up may occur, for example:
Rif synthetic clothing is worn
Keep out of the reach of children.
Rif clothing is rubbed on the seat
Rif you pull or push the battery over carpets or
other synthetic materials
Rif you rub the battery with a cloth Observe these Operating Instruc-
tions.
Batteries contain pollutants.
It is against the law to dis- For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
pose of them along with mends that you only use batteries which have
been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz
household waste. They must for your vehicle. These batteries have an
be collected separately and increased leak protection so that vehicle occu-
recycled in an environmen- pants are not burned in the event of a battery
tally responsible manner. being damaged in an accident.
Dispose of batteries appro- The battery of the vehicle should always be suf-
priately. Hand over dis- ficiently charged in order to reach its full service
life.
charged batteries to a quali-
fied specialist workshop. If you do not use the vehicle for a while, the
vehicle battery, like other batteries, can become
Transport and store full bat- discharged over time. In this case, have the bat-
teries in an upright position. tery removed at a qualified specialist workshop.
When transporting batteries, In order to keep the battery charged, you can
secure them so that they do also connect a charger recommended by
not tip over. Note that bat- Mercedes-Benz. Please contact a qualified spe-
cialist workshop for further information.
tery acid could escape into
Maintenance 275
Have the battery charge checked more fre- Vehicles in accordance with the Euromot
quently if you use the vehicle mainly for short 4 standard or Euro 5 standard
trips or if you leave it standing idle for a lengthy
period. If you wish to park up the vehicle for a
long period, consult a qualified specialist work-
shop.
If one of the two batteries is faulty, both batter-
ies should be replaced. This is the only way to
ensure that the batteries can provide the
required capacities.
Removing/fitting the battery cover

Vehicles in accordance with the Euro 6
standard

Observe the safety notes on handling batteries.
X To remove: take square spanner ; out of
the tool bag (Y page 278).
X Unlock fastener ? using square spanner ;
in the direction of arrow :.
X Pull out and remove battery cover C by han-
dle A from guides B.
Observe the safety notes on handling batteries. X To fit: position battery cover C and slide it
X To remove: fold catch lever : upwards and into guides B.
release. X Lock fastener ? using square spanner ; in
X Pull out and remove battery cover ; from the direction of arrow =.
guide =.
X To fit: position battery cover ; and slide it
Disconnecting and connecting batter-
into guide =.
ies
X Attach catch lever : and fold down.
Disconnecting the batteries
! Vehicles with BlueTec® exhaust gas after-
treatment: do not disconnect the battery until
the engine has been switched off for at least
five minutes. This ensures that the exhaust
gas aftertreatment functions after restarting.
! Vehicles with auxiliary heating: during heat
output and the cooling-off period, the power
supply should only be disconnected, in the
event of danger, using the battery isolator
switch. If the power supply is disconnected
during heat output, the cooling off period can-
not be activated and this can damage the
auxiliary heating. You will find further infor-
mation in the "Auxiliary heating" section.
Z
276 Maintenance
Observe the safety notes on handling batteries. X Connect the negative terminals.
X Remove the key from the ignition lock and X Attach the covers of the negative and positive
wait approximately five minutes. terminals.
X Switch off all electrical consumers. X Connect the battery cover (Y page 275).
X Vehicles with auxiliary heating: ensure After an interruption to the power supply, e.g.
that the auxiliary heating is switched off and reconnecting the battery, perform the following
the cooling off period is complete tasks:
(Y page 96).
X Deactivate the anti-theft protection of the CD
X All vehicles: turn the battery isolator switch
radio (Y page 133).
to position g (Y page 83).
X Set the time, day and preselected heating
X Remove the battery cover (Y page 275). mode of the auxiliary heating system
(Y page 94).
Checking the battery fluid level

! Check the battery fluid every six months or

at least after 600 operating hours. In certain
operating conditions, e.g. mowing at high out-
side temperatures, the battery fluid level
must be checked at significantly lesser inter-
vals.
The fluid level in each battery cell must be
approximately 15 mm above the top of the
Vehicles in accordance with the Euro 6 standard plate.
Tap water adversely affects the performance
of the batteries. Add only distilled or de-ion-
ised water. Do not use a metal funnel for
refilling. There is a risk of a short circuit.
Vehicles in accordance with the Euromot 4 or Euro

5 standard
X Remove the covers of the negative and posi-
tive terminals.
Example: battery fluid level
X Disconnect the negative terminals.
: Max. mark
X Disconnect the positive terminals.
; Min. mark
Reconnecting the batteries Observe the safety notes on handling batteries.
Observe the safety notes on handling batteries. X Remove the battery cover (Y page 275).
X Make sure that the key is removed from the X Unscrew and remove the battery cell caps.
ignition lock. X Check the battery fluid level and correct it if
X Make sure that all electrical consumers are necessary.
switched off. The fluid level in each battery cell must be
X Connect the positive terminals. approximately 15 mm above the top of the
Maintenance 277
plate. Observe the min. and max. markings on Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before
the side of the battery compartment. charging it or jump-starting.
X Screw in the battery cell caps.
X Connect the battery cover (Y page 275). If the warning and indicator lamps do not light up
in the instrument cluster when temperatures
Battery care are low, it is probably because the discharged
battery has frozen. In this case, you may neither
! Please observe the following points: jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery.
The service life of a battery that has been
Rdirty battery clamps and battery surfaces thawed may be reduced. The starting charac-
cause leak currents, which lead to the bat- teristics may be impaired, especially at low tem-
teries discharging. Always keep the battery peratures. Have the thawed battery checked at
clamps and battery surfaces clean and dry. a qualified specialist workshop.
Lightly grease the battery clamps, espe-
cially the undersides, with acid-resistant ! Use a commercially-available battery
grease. charger to charge the batteries. Make sure
that the charging voltage is correct. Do not

Ronly clean batteries with the cell caps fit-
ted. Otherwise, dirt can enter the battery charge new batteries with rapid charging. The
cells. charge current of used batteries should be
Rcleaning agents containing fuel corrode the
maximum 75 % of the battery capacity for
rapid charging. Otherwise, you could damage
battery housing. Clean the battery housing
the batteries.
only with commercially available cleaning
agents. The charging current must not exceed 10% (or a
Rthe ventilation bores of the cell caps must maximum of 75% when rapid-charging) of the
be open. Otherwise, gases cannot escape. battery capacity. Do not rapid-charge new bat-
Clean clogged ventilation bores with a suit- teries.
able tool, e.g. a wire. Unscrew the battery Observe the safety notes on handling batteries.
cell caps first. Otherwise, there is the risk of X Remove the battery cover (Y page 275).
a short circuit. X Unscrew and remove the battery cell caps.
Rif batteries which are not in use have a no-
X Disconnect the battery terminals
load voltage of less than 12.4 V, they must (Y page 275).
be recharged.
Do not detach the connecting cables between
the batteries.
Charging the batteries X Make sure that the charging voltage is cor-
G WARNING rect, 12 V or 24 V.
X Observe the operating instructions for the
During charging and jump-starting, explosive battery charger.
gases can escape from the battery. There is a X Connect the battery charger (see the manu-
risk of an explosion. facturer's operating instructions).
Particularly avoid fire, naked flames, creating
sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient
ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Parking up the vehicle
Do not lean over a battery.
When parking up the vehicle, special measures
according to Mercedes-Benz Specifications for
G WARNING Service Products Sheet No. 383.0 need to be
A discharged battery can freeze at tempera- taken. For example, on vehicles with Telligent®
tures below freezing point. When jump-start- automatic gearshift, the clutch pedal must be
ing the vehicle or charging the battery, gases folded out. Further information can be obtained
can escape from the battery. There is a risk of from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
an explosion.
Z
278 Where will I find...?
Useful information The maximum payload of the jack can be

found on the sticker attached to it. Please
contact a qualified specialist workshop in the
event of a malfunction.
going to print. Country-specific differences are Stowage compartment in the rear of the
possible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not cab
functions.
Where will I find...?

Vehicle tool kit and emergency equip-
ment
Breakdown assistance

X Pull handle ; upwards and fold cover :
When working on the vehicle, comply with all upwards.
safety regulations, such as operating instruc- Stowage compartment = contains:
tions, regulations concerning hazardous mate-
rials, environmental protection measures, work Rtyreinflator hose
safety and accident prevention regulations. Rfirst-aidkit
Rcab safety prop
Stowage space in the rear left of the cab Rwarning beacon
Rwarning triangle
Left-hand stowage compartment under

the cab
: Tool bag with vehicle tool kit, square span-

ner, wheel wrench, pump lever (two-part)
; Jack
= Fire extinguisher
Jack maintenance X Open the left-hand door.
X After use: clean and reapply grease to all X Fold cover ; downwards.
moving parts.
Stowage compartment : contains a
X Every six months: completely extend and
compressed-air pistol with a compressed-air
then retract the pistons. hose and a window cleaner/scraper.
i The jack weighs approximately 8.8 kg.
Where will I find...? 279
Window cleaner/scraper with tele- Make sure that the locking pin of the pump
scopic pole lever is engaged in the hole intended for the
purpose.
Use the pump lever to operate:

Rthe jack
Rthe wheel wrench
Rthe hydraulic pump to tilt the cab
Pump lever
: Round rod
; Locking pin
X Open stowage compartment = (Y page 278) = Recess for locking pin
and remove the window cleaner/scraper. ? Tube
X Press telescopic pole : downwards (arrow) A Recess (for operating the jack)
and pull it out to the rear. X Remove the pump lever from the tool bag
X Screw the window cleaner/scraper onto tele- located in the stowage space in the rear left of
scopic pole :. the cab (Y page 278).
X Loosen the screw connection of telescopic X Connect round rod : to tube ?. Guide lock-
pole :. ing pin ; into recess = and turn round
X Extend and tighten the moving part of tele- rod : until locking pin ; rests in recess =.
scopic pole :.
X Clean the window, follow instructions
(Y page 253). Wheel chock
X Loosen the screw connection of telescopic
pole :.
X Retract and tighten the moving part of tele-
scopic pole :.
X Unscrew the window cleaner/scraper from
telescopic pole : and place it in stowage
compartment =.
X Slide telescopic pole : into the front of
guide ; and press upwards at the back until
it engages in retaining clamp ?.
Assembling/disassembling the pump

lever (2-part) Wheel chocks (example)
X To remove chocks: pull out locking pin ;.
G WARNING
X Unclip retaining spring =.
If you do not assemble the pump lever as X Pull out wheel chock : in the direction of the
described, the handle can slip out of the guide arrow.
while pumping. There is a risk of injury.
Z
280 Cab
Cab G WARNING
While tilting the cab, it may suddenly drop into
Tilting the cab
the end position. There is a risk of injury to
Important safety notes persons within the tilting range of the cab.
Only tilt the cab when there are no persons in
G WARNING the tilting range. Keep out of the area under
If you tilt the cab when the engine has over- the cab when the cab is tilted.
heated or during a fire in the engine compart-
ment, you could come into contact with hot ! To avoid damage to the front flap when tilt-
gases or other escaping operating fluids. ing the cab, it must be opened beforehand.
There is a risk of injury. ! If the vehicle is not fitted with tilting hydraul-
Allow an overheated engine to cool down ics, the cab can only be tilted at a qualified
before tipping the cab. In the event of a fire in specialist workshop.
the engine compartment, keep the cab in the
drive position and call the fire service.
G WARNING
Certain components in the engine compart-

engine compartment.
G WARNING
Notes on keeping the tilting area free
compartment:
area of the fan
Notes on securing the cab

Cab 281
No persons are allowed within the tilting range

of the cab while tilting.
Always tilt the cab fully forwards to the stop and
secure it with the safety prop.
Tilting the cab forwards

X Park the vehicle on level ground.
X Shift to neutral.
X Switch off the auxiliary heating system
X Slide pump lever A from the vehicle tool kit
(Y page 95).
into wheel wrench ? (Y page 278).
X To start the engine after tilting: turn the key
X Attach wheel wrench ? to bracket : using
to position 2 in the ignition lock.
pump lever A.
or X Keep moving pump lever A downwards and
X To not start the engine after tilting: turn upwards until the cab has reached its end
the key to position g in the ignition lock. The
position.
steering lock must not engage. The cab lock is unlocked hydraulically by
X Remove all loose objects (e.g. bottles, tools, means of hydraulic pump ;.
bags etc.) from the cab. X Remove wheel wrench ? with pump lever
X Close all the doors and stowage compart- A.
ments in the cab.
X For safety reasons, keep the area in front of
the cab clear.
X Make sure that there is a sufficient safe dis-
tance around the tilting area.
X Chock the vehicle's wheels as an additional
precaution to prevent it from rolling away.
X Open the front flap (Y page 258).
X Attach hook B of safety prop D to the top of

piston rod C.
X Swing safety prop D downwards.
X Secure safety prop D. In addition, place
screw E into the hole and screw a nut onto it.
Tilting back to the driving position
X Move valve lever = on hydraulic pump ; G WARNING

from position 2 to "Tip forward" position 1. If the cab is not locked, the following danger-
ous situations could arise when the vehicle
decelerates:
Rit could tilt forwards
Ryou could lose control of the vehicle
Z
282 Cab
Rpersons in the cab could be thrown for-

wards
Rpersons or objects in the swinging range
could be hit
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Before every journey, make sure that:
Rthe cab is locked
Rthe cab is engaged in driving position and
the valve lever is in driving position
Rthe indicator lamp goes out when the
X Attach wheel wrench ? to bracket : using
engine is started pump lever A.
X Keep moving pump lever A downwards and
X Remove safety prop D from piston rod C. upwards until the cab has reached its end
position.
The cab tilt lock is automatically locked.
X Remove wheel wrench ? with pump lever

A.
X Close the front flap (Y page 258).
X Make sure during the journey that valve lever
= is in "Tilt back" position 2.
X Make sure that the º indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster goes out after you start the
engine.
When the º indicator lamp goes out, the
cab is locked. If the º indicator lamp does
X Move valve lever = on hydraulic pump ; not go out, repeat the process and tip the cab
from position 1 to "Tilt back" to drive posi- back again.
tion 2.
Problems when tilting the cab

The cab cannot be tilted. The hydraulic pump valve lever is in the "tilt back" position.
X Set valve lever on hydraulic pump to the "tilt forwards" position
(Y page 280).
The tilting hydraulics are leaking or have failed.

X Have the tilting hydraulics repaired at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
Engine 283
Engine Before starting the engine

Starting and stopping the engine with lock.
the cab tilted X Shift to neutral.
X Tilt the cab forwards (Y page 280).
G WARNING
Certain components in the engine compart- Starting the engine
ment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, the X Press external engine start/engine stop :
radiator and parts of the exhaust system. until the engine starts.
There is a risk of injury when accessing the Starting the engine and increasing the
engine compartment. engine speed
As far as possible, allow the engine to cool X Hold down external engine start/engine
down and only touch the components descri- stop : until the desired engine speed is ach-
bed in the following. ieved.
After about three seconds, the engine speed
G WARNING increases. After external engine start/engine
stop : has been released, the engine con-
There are moving components in the engine tinues to run at the speed currently set.
compartment. Certain components may con- The engine speed can be increased up to the
tinue to move or suddenly move again even limiting speed.
after the ignition has been switched off, e.g. Stopping the engine
X Press external engine start/engine stop :
If you have to carry out work in the engine again.
compartment: X Tilt the cab back into the driving position
Rswitch off the ignition (Y page 280).
area of the fan Replacing the fuel prefilter
Rremove jewellery and watches G WARNING
Rkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam- Certain components in the engine compart-
ple, away from moving parts. ment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, the
Be aware of the road and traffic situation when
working on public roads and secure the parking
spot accordingly. engine compartment.
G WARNING
Z
284 Engine

compartment:
area of the fan
G WARNING X Unscrew cap : from filter housing ;.

X Remove cap : with filter element ?.
Fuel is highly flammable. Improper handing of
X Unclip filter element ? from cap :.
fuel creates a risk of fire and explosion.
X Clean filter housing ; and cap :.
Avoid fire, naked flames, smoking and creat-
X Coat new sealing ring = lightly with fuel and
ing sparks under all circumstances. Switch off
fit it.
the ignition and auxiliary heating before car-

X Clip new filter element ? into cap :.
rying out work to the fuel system. Always wear
X Insert cap : with filter element ? in filter
protective gloves. housing ;.
X Tighten cap :. Tightening torque approx-
H Environmental note imately 25 Nm.
Dispose of the water-fuel mixture in an envi- X Bleed the fuel system (Y page 287).
ronmentally responsible manner. X Tilt the cab back into the driving position
(Y page 280).
Dispose of used filter elements, seals and fuel
residue in accordance with relevant local reg- Replacing the fuel filter
ulations.
G WARNING
X Tilt the cab forwards (Y page 280). Certain components in the engine compart-
engine compartment.
G WARNING
Engine 285

compartment:
area of the fan
G WARNING X Unscrew cap : from filter housing ;.

X Remove cap : with filter element ?.
X Unclip filter element ? from cap :.
X Clean filter housing ; and cap :.
X Coat new sealing ring = lightly with fuel and
fit it.
X Clip new filter element ? into cap :.
X Insert cap : with filter element ? in filter
protective gloves. housing ;.
X Tighten cap :. Tightening torque approx-
H Environmental note imately 25 Nm.
Dispose of the water-fuel mixture in an envi- X Bleed the fuel system (Y page 287).
ronmentally responsible manner. X Tilt the cab back into the driving position
(Y page 280).
residue in accordance with relevant local reg- Draining and replacing the fuel prefil-
ulations. ter with water separator
X Tilt the cab forwards (Y page 280). Important safety notes
G WARNING
protective gloves.
Dispose of the water-fuel mixture in an envi-
ronmentally responsible manner.
Z
286 Engine
H Environmental note Replacing the fuel prefilter

residue in accordance with relevant local reg-
ulations.
Draining the fuel prefilter

Example
Drain fuel prefilter : regularly. : Filter head
X Remove bolts ; on cover plate =. ; Hand pump
X Remove cover plate =. = Bleed screw
? Shutoff valve
A Filter element
B Sealing ring
C Sealing ring
D Water separator
E Drain plug
X Place a collector tray under drain plug E.
X Open drain plug E and bleed screw =. Col-
lect the draining water-fuel mixture.
X Unscrew filter element A from filter head :.
X Unscrew water separator D from filter ele-
Example ment A and clean it or replace as necessary.
? Hand pump X Replace filter element A.
A Shutoff valve X Coat new sealing ring C lightly with fuel.
B Inspection window X Screw water separator D with sealing ring C
C Drain plug onto filter element A hand-tight.
X Place a collector tray under drain plug C. X Coat new sealing ring B lightly with fuel.
X Open drain plug C. To do so, turn the drain X Screw on filter element A with new sealing
plug to the left. ring B hand-tight on filter head :.
X Press hand pump ? several times in succes- X Close drain plug E and bleed screw =.
sion and collect the fuel/water mixture. X Bleed the fuel system (Y page 287).
X Close drain plug C. To do so, screw the drain X Check the fuel system for leaks.
plug tightly to the right.
X Bleed the fuel system (Y page 287).
X Check the fuel system for leaks.
Engine 287
Bleeding the fuel system

Fuel system without fuel prefilter
! Do not bleed the fuel system by operating
the starter motor for an extended period of
time. You could otherwise damage the starter
motor.
X Fill up the fuel tank to above the reserve range
(Y page 193).
X Start the engine (Y page 283) or
(Y page 142).
If the engine does not start: stop the start- X Fill up the fuel tank to above the reserve range
ing procedure after a period of 20 seconds, (Y page 193).
wait for approximately one minute and then X Press hand pump : of fuel prefilter ;
repeat the starting procedure. After three approximately fifty times in succession.
starting attempts, wait approximately three The filter housing is then filled with fuel.
minutes before trying again. X Start the engine (Y page 283) or
If the engine starts: let it idle for approx-
(Y page 142).
imately one minute. The fuel system is self- If the engine does not start: stop the start-
bleeding. ing procedure after a period of 20 seconds,
wait for approximately one minute and then
Fuel system with fuel prefilter repeat the starting procedure. After three
starting attempts, wait approximately three
! Do not bleed the fuel system by operating minutes before trying again.
the starter motor for an extended period of If the engine starts: let it idle for approx-
time. You could otherwise damage the starter imately one minute. The fuel system is self-
motor. bleeding.
Engine does not start

The engine will not start. At low outside temperatures: the flow properties of diesel fuel are
inadequate due to paraffin separation.
X Malfunctions resulting from paraffin separation can only be correc-
ted by heating the entire fuel system, e.g. by parking in a heated
area.
X If the engine does not start after several attempts, have the cause
traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine electronics are malfunctioning.

The immobiliser may be activated.
X Turn the vehicle key back to the stop in the ignition lock.
X Restart the engine.
Z
288 Flat tyre
Flat tyre not be able to achieve its load-bearing capa-

city due to the limited height.
Changing a wheel in the event of a flat Rdo not raise vehicles equipped with a loading
tyre crane or loading tailgate by using the hydrau-
lic supports. This would cause damage to the
Important safety notes chassis frame.
Rmake sure that the distance between the
G WARNING underside of the tyres and the ground does
On uphill and downhill slopes, the jack could not exceed 3 cm.
tip over with the vehicle raised. There is a Rnever place your hands or feet under the
danger of injury. raised vehicle.
Rdo not lie under the vehicle.
Do not change wheels on uphill or downhill
RDo not start the engine when the vehicle is
gradients. Contact a qualified specialist work-
raised, and avoid other shocks. The vehicle
shop.
can otherwise slip off the jack.
Rdo not open or close a door while the vehicle
G WARNING is raised.
If you do not position the jack correctly at the Rmake sure that nobody is in the vehicle when
appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the it is raised.

jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. X Vehicles with tyre pressure control sys-
There is a risk of injury. tem: deactivate the automatic mode of the
Only position the jack at the appropriate jack- tyre pressure control system (Y page 166).
ing point of the vehicle. The base of the jack X All vehicles: park the vehicle on a firm and
must be positioned vertically, directly under level surface.
the jacking point of the vehicle. X Apply the parking brake.
X Use chocks to safeguard the vehicle against
Observe the following when raising the vehicle: rolling away.
Rto raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-spe-
cific jack that has been tested and approved Positioning the jack
by Mercedes-Benz. If the jack is used incor-
rectly, it could tip over while the vehicle is Front axle
raised.
Rthe vehicle's jack is intended only to raise the
vehicle for a short time when changing a
wheel. It is not suited for performing mainte-
nance work under the vehicle.
Ronly position the jack at the appropriate jack-
ing point of the vehicle. Make sure that the
jack is correctly positioned at the jacking
point before raising the vehicle.
Rbefore raising the vehicle, secure it against
rolling away by applying the parking brake and
using wheel chocks. Do not release the park-
ing brake while the vehicle is raised. Example: left front wheel
Rthe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and
X If the tyres are flat, drive onto a wooden
non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large,
load-bearing underlay must be used. On a underlay.
slippery surface, a non-slip underlay must be X Left front wheel: turn the front wheels
used, e.g. rubber mats. slightly to the right, so that pitman arm =
Rdo not use blocks of wood or similar objects swings to the side.
as a jacking support. Otherwise, the jack will
Flat tyre 289
Position jack : under axle tube ; as close X Do not unscrew the last two wheel nuts until
as possible to the hub drive. the wheel is resting on the wheel bolts and is
X Right front wheel: straighten the front not under load.
wheels and position jack : under axle X Remove the wheel.
tube ; as close as possible to the hub drive.
Rear axle
Fitting the compressed-air hose, vehi-
cles with tyre pressure control system
G WARNING
Vehicles with tyre pressure control system:
when you unscrew the connection to the
compressed-air hose on the wheel or the tyre
valve cap on the spare wheel, air escapes
under high pressure. This can disperse parti-
cles. These can get into or irritate the eyes,
nose, mouth and ears. There is a risk of injury.
Wear protective eyewear when unscrewing.
Example: right rear wheel
X If the tyres are flat, drive onto a wooden
underlay.
X Position jack : under axle tube ; as close
as possible to the hub drive.
Removing a wheel
Example: wheel removed
Example: left front wheel

X Remove the wheel nut cover.
X Vehicles with tyre pressure control sys-
tem: push connector = into compressed-air
connection : and hold.
Example: spare wheel
X Slide back circlip ; and hold.
X Remove connector = from compressed-air X Wear protective eyewear.
connection : and release circlip ;. X Unscrew connector ; from tyre valve = and
X All vehicles: loosen all wheel nuts and remove compressed-air hose :.
remove all but two opposing wheel nuts. X On the spare wheel, unscrew cap A from tyre
valve ? and screw on compressed-air
Z
290 Flat tyre
hose : with connection ; immediately and Before fitting the wheel:

tighten. X Remove rust and dirt from the contact surfa-
ces of the wheel hub, wheel rim and wheel
Fitting a wheel nuts.
X Lightly oil the friction contact surfaces
G WARNING between pressure plate ; and wheel nut :
Oiled, greased or damaged wheel nuts or (arrow =).
wheel bolt threads can cause the wheel nuts X Turn pressure plate ; and wheel nut :
to loosen or be damaged. As a result, you (arrow ?).
The oil is distributed evenly.
could lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk
of an accident.
Never oil or grease the threads. In the event of
damage to the threads, contact a qualified
specialist workshop immediately. Have the
damaged wheel nuts or wheel bolts replaced.
Do not drive on.
! Check wheel nuts regularly for tightness.

Retighten if necessary. Replace damaged
wheel nut cover caps and wheel nut covers.
Observe the wheel nut tightening torque.
! After changing a wheel, check the tyre pres- Example: left front wheel
sure immediately. After fitting the wheel:
Observe the notes on operating and road X Tighten the wheel nuts in a crosswise pattern.
safety. Observe the correct tightening torque
When fitting a wheel: (Y page 318).
X Only use wheel nuts that are approved for X Vehicles with tyre pressure control sys-
your vehicle. tem: push connector = into compressed-air
Wheel nuts for steel wheels and light-alloy connection : and hold until circlip ;
wheels are different and must not be mixed engages.
up. X All vehicles: fit the wheel nut cover.
X Vehicles without tyre pressure control
system: check the tyre pressure
(Y page 303).
X Vehicles with tyre pressure control sys-
tem: activate the automatic mode of the tyre
pressure control system (Y page 166).
X All vehicles: the wheel nuts must be retight-
ened after 50 km (Y page 290).
Retightening the wheel nuts

Example: wheel nut G WARNING
The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts
and bolts are not tightened to the specified
tightening torque. There is a risk of accident.
Electrical fuses 291
Have the tightening torque immediately Electrical fuses

checked at a qualified specialist workshop
after a wheel is changed. Auxiliary consumers
Retrofitting of additional consumers or electri-
! Check wheel nuts regularly for tightness. cal devices requires special skills.
Retighten if necessary. Replace damaged
wheel nut covers. Observe the wheel nut
tightening torques. Fuses
Observe the correct wheel nut tightening torque
(Y page 318). Important safety notes
When using new or newly-painted wheel rims, Blown fuses must be replaced by fuses of the
check the tightening torque again after travel- same type, identifiable by the colour and amper-
ling approximately 1,000 to 5,000 km. age, with the amperages specified in the fuse
allocation chart. Further information can be
obtained from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Tyre inflator connection
G WARNING
You may only fill the tyres using the If you manipulate, bridge or replace a faulty
compressed-air system if your vehicle has a tyre
inflator connection. The reservoir pressure is fuse with a fuse of a higher amperage, the
too high for other connections. Pressure hoses electric cables could be overloaded. This may
and tyres may explode when filling using other result in a fire. There is a risk of an accident
connections. and injury.
Always replace faulty fuses with specified new
fuses of the correct amperage.
If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the

cause traced and rectified at a qualified special-
ist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre.
Before replacing a fuse
lock.
X Switch off all electrical consumers.
X To inflate the tyres: remove cap on tyre
inflator connection :. Opening/closing the fuse box
X Remove tyre inflator hose from the stowage
compartment in the rear of the cab
(Y page 278).
X Deflate at tyre inflator connection :.
X If the vehicle is predominantly used on
roads: the specified tyre pressures must be
observed.
X When driving off-road and on surfaces
with minimal load-bearing capacity (e.g.
sand): lower the tyre pressure (Y page 314).
This improves the traction of the tyres.
i The self-cleaning effect of the tyres is
improved at low tyre pressure, e.g. on greasy The fuse box is behind the right-hand seat.
and wet surfaces.
Z
292 Electrical fuses
X To open: slide the right-hand seat forward. X To close: insert fuse box cover ;.
X Open quick-release fasteners =. X Attach fuse box cover :.
X Remove fuse box cover :. X Close quick-release fasteners =.
X Pull fuse box panel ; upwards and out. X Slide the seat back to the desired position.
Layout of fuses and relays

Examples: layout of fuses and relays
Fuses and relays Fuse module FA1

Fuse module FA1 Consumers A
Consumers A F06 Radio (TCC) terminal 30 5
F01 Drive control system (CPC) / 20 F07 Programmable special module 15
tachograph (DTCO) (termi- (PSM) (terminal 30)
nal 30)
F08 Diagnostics connection 16-pin 10
F02 Drive control system (CPC) / 10 (OBDII) (terminal 30)
programmable special module
(PSM) / Unimog transmission F09 Engine management (MCM) / 10
control module (TCM-U) (ter- exhaust gas aftertreatment
minal 15) (ACM) AdBlue® supply unit
(terminal 15)
F03 Dual-mode steering / immo- 7.5
biliser (terminal 30) F10 15-pin trailer power socket / 20
7-pin trailer power socket,
F04 24 V power socket in centre 15 front (terminal 30)
console (terminal 15R)
F11 7-pin ABS trailer power socket 20
F05 24 V power socket behind the 25 (terminal 30)
driver's seat (terminal 15R)
Electrical fuses 293
Fuse module FA1 Fuse module FA2

Consumers A Consumers A
F12 7-pin ABS trailer power socket 15 F12 Seat heating / mower seat 10
(terminal 15) (terminal 15)
F13 12 V power sockets; behind 15 F13 Water separator / rotation 15
driver's seat / centre con- chains basic wiring (termi-
sole / voltage transformer for nal 15)
automatic headlamp range
controller (voltage trans- F14 Windscreen washer system 25
former input) (terminal 30) (terminal 15R)
F14 12 V power sockets; behind 15

driver's seat / centre console Fuse module FA3
(voltage transformer output),
12 V terminal Consumers A
F01 Immobiliser (terminal 50) 5
Fuse module FA2 F02 Mower seat windscreen 10
washer system (terminal 15)
Consumers A
F03 Mowing door side window 15
F01 Instrument cluster (ICUC) / 5 heating (terminal 30)
tachograph (DTCO) / reservoir
pressure sensor K1 & K2 / F04 Special Truck Control Unit 5
Camera Monitor System (STCU) (terminal 15)
(KMS) (terminal 15)
F05 Special Truck Control Unit 5
F02 Instrument cluster (ICUC) / 5 (STCU) (terminal 30)
central gateway (CGW) / mod-
ular switch field (MSF) (termi- F06 Voltage supply (CAN) valve 20
nal 30) block/equipment function
interface (terminal 30)
F03 Power windows control 15
panel / central locking (termi- F07 Hydrostatic transmission fan/ 30
nal 15R) torque converter clutch fan
(WSK) (terminal 30)
F04 Power windows control 15
panel / radio / dual-mode F08 Power hydraulics fan (terminal 30
steering starter relay lock (WL) 30)
(terminal 15R) F09 Working hydraulics fan (termi- 15
F05 Interior lighting (terminal 30) 10 nal 30)
F06 ABS (terminal 30) 20 F10 Rotating beacon (RKL) (termi- 10

nal 30)
F07 Auxiliary heating (terminal 30) 20
F11 32-pin and 11-pin power 10
F08 Heating (terminal 15R) 20 socket for equipment (termi-
nal 15)
F09 Windscreen heating (terminal 25
30) F12 Central locking (terminal 30) 15
F10 Unimog transmission control 20
module (TCM-U) (terminal 30)
F11 Unimog transmission control 20
module (TCM-U) (terminal 30)
Z
294 Compressed-air system
Fuse module FA3 Relay module A32

Consumers A Description
F13 24 V selectable power supply 15 K01 Power hydraulics fan
in roof (terminal 15)
K02 Working hydraulics fan
F14 Lifting cylinder/temperature 5
control for torque converter K03 Hydrostatic transmission fan/torque
clutch fan (WSK) (terminal 15) converter clutch fan (WSK)
K04 Auxiliary heating
Fuse module FA4 K05 Windscreen heating, left
Consumers A K06 Windscreen heating, right
F01 Heated rear window (termi- 20
nal 30) Relay module A31
F02 FleetBoard / Fleet manage- 7.5 Description
ment system (FMS) / Toll Col-
lect (CTT) (terminal 30) K01 Dual-mode steering

F03 FleetBoard / Fleet manage- 5 K02 Rotating beacon (RKL)
ment system (FMS) / Toll Col-
lect (CTT) (terminal 15) K03 Immobiliser
F04 Rear PTO shaft (terminal 15) 10 K04 Mowing door side window heating
F05 Rear PTO shaft (terminal 30) 20 K05 Refrigerant compressor clutch
F06 24 V additional socket, centre 15 K06 Heating recirculation pump

console K07 Auxiliary heating (overriding control
F07 - - blower)
F08 - - K08 Voltage supply (CAN) valve block
F09 - - K09 Auxiliary heating (engine preheating

cut-off at D+)
F10 - -
K10 Central locking
F11 - -
F12 - -
F13 - -
Charging the compressed-air system
F14 - -
from an outside source
In the event of engine damage or lack of reser-
Relay module K1A301 voir pressure, your vehicle can be refilled and
Description supplied with compressed air using the filler
connection. This allows the spring-loaded park-
K01 Heated rear window ing brake cylinders to be released.
G Warning
If you charge the compressed-air brake sys-
tem from an outside source, the spring-loaded
parking brake cylinders will be released man-
Jump-starting, tow-starting and towing away 295
ually. The vehicle is then no longer secured ventilation while charging and jump-starting.
against rolling away and may begin to move. Do not lean over a battery.
Before you charge the compressed-air system G WARNING
from an outside source: A discharged battery can freeze at tempera-
Rmake sure that the parking brake lever is in tures below freezing point. When jump-start-
the fully applied position. ing the vehicle or charging the battery, gases
can escape from the battery. There is a risk of
Ruse chocks to safeguard the vehicle against
an explosion.
rolling away.
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before
charging it or jump-starting.
! Observe the following notes. You could oth-

erwise damage the battery or electronic com-
ponents in the vehicle:
Rdo not use a battery quick-charge unit for
jump-starting.
Rif you use a mobile battery charger (battery
device with mains power stage), remove
the mains plug before jump-starting.
Ronly have jump-starting provided by vehi-
cles with a 24 V system.
X Make sure that the parking brake lever is in Ruse jump leads which are protected against
the fully applied position (Y page 147). polarity reversal and with a wire cross sec-
X Use chocks to safeguard the vehicle against
tion of approximately 35–50 mm2 and insu-
rolling away. lated terminal clamps.
X To fill with compressed air: remove the cap Rif the outside temperature drops below
on filler connection :. Ò10 †, a discharged battery could freeze.
X Refill compressed air at filler connection :. Do not start the engine under these cir-
When doing so, the filling pressure must cor- cumstances. Let the battery thaw out first.
respond to the pressure of brake circuit 1 or
brake circuit 2; see the compressed-air sys- ! When you remove the jump leads, let the
tem operating data (Y page 318). engine of the vehicle being jump-started idle.
This avoids damage being caused to the vehi-
cle electronics.
Jump-starting, tow-starting and tow- ! Do not connect the negative terminal clamp
ing away of the jump lead to the chassis frame. Other-
wise, engine or transmission components can
Jump-starting be damaged.
Important safety notes H Environmental note

Batteries contain pollutants.
G WARNING It is against the law to dis-
During charging and jump-starting, explosive pose of them along with
gases can escape from the battery. There is a household waste. They must
risk of an explosion. be collected separately and
Particularly avoid fire, naked flames, creating
sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient
Z
296 Jump-starting, tow-starting and towing away
recycled in an environmen-
tally responsible manner.
Dispose of batteries appro-
priately. Hand over dis-
charged batteries to a quali-
fied specialist workshop.
Transport and store full bat-
teries in an upright position.
When transporting batteries,
secure them so that they do
not tip over. Note that bat- Jump leads, vehicles in accordance with the Euro-
tery acid could escape into mot 4 or Euro 5 standard
the environment through the X To connect the jump leads: remove the bat-
ventilation openings in the tery compartment cover (Y page 275).
stoppers. X Remove positive terminal clamp cap ; and
negative terminal clamp cap :.
X First, connect the positive terminal clamp of

General notes
the jump lead to the positive terminal of the
Observe the safety notes and protective meas- other vehicle's battery and then to the q
ures when handling the battery (Y page 273). positive terminal of the starter battery.
After jump-starting, have the batteries checked X First, connect the negative terminal clamp of
at a qualified specialist workshop. the jump lead to the negative terminal of the
If the batteries are discharged, jump-start the other vehicle's battery and then to the ±
vehicle using another vehicle. negative terminal of the starter battery.
X Assisting vehicle: run the engine at a high
X Before jump-starting, disconnect any mobile
communications systems, such as a tele- speed.
phone, 2-way radio, fax machine, from the X Start the engine and allow it to idle.
electrical system. X To disconnect the jump leads: first, discon-
X Make sure that the vehicles are not touching. nect the negative terminal clamps of the jump
X Apply the parking brake. leads from the negative terminals.
X Disconnect the positive terminal clamp of the
X Switch off all electrical consumers.
jumps lead from the positive terminals.
X Attach positive terminal clamp cap ; and
lock.
negative terminal clamp cap :.
X Fit the battery compartment cover
Jump-starting with jump leads (Y page 275).
Jump-starting using the jump-starting

socket
G Warning
If you jump-start a vehicle that requires too
much current, the socket may become over-
loaded. There is a risk of fire in the electrical
system.
Jump leads, vehicles in accordance with the Euro 6
standard
Only jump-start vehicles of a similar vehicle Vehicles in accordance with the Euromot
type, e.g. lorries with an equal or lower power 4 or Euro 5 standard
need. The vehicles must be equipped with a
24 V system or with two 12 V batteries con-
nected in a series.
G Warning
If you insert the plug connector into the power
socket, sparks could be created. If you are in
the vicinity of highly flammable materials, e.g.
fuel, there is a risk of fire and explosion.
Do not insert the plug connector into the
power socket if you are in the vicinity of highly
flammable materials.
Vehicles in accordance with the Euro 6
standard
X To remove: fold catch lever = upwards and

release.
X Using handle ;, pull the cover out of
guides : and remove it.
X Donor vehicle and vehicle being jump-
X Remove battery compartment cover = started: turn the key back fully in the ignition
(Y page 275). lock.
X Donor vehicle and vehicle being jump- X Remove cover A from jump-starting
started: turn the key back fully in the ignition socket ?.
lock. X Connect a jump lead. Make sure that the lug
X Unscrew cover ; from jump-starting fits in the recess.
socket :. X Donor vehicle: start the engine and run it at
X Connect a jump lead. Make sure that the lug
a high speed.
fits in the recess.
X Vehicle being jump-started: start the
X Donor vehicle: start the engine and run it at
engine and leave it running at idling speed.
a high speed.
X Donor vehicle: switch off the engine and turn
X Vehicle being jump-started: start the
the key back fully in the ignition lock.
engine and leave it running at idling speed.
X Both vehicles: remove the jump lead.
X Donor vehicle: switch off the engine and turn
X Press cover A onto jump-starting socket ?.
the key back fully in the ignition lock.
X To fit: replace the cover and slide it into
X Both vehicles: remove the jump lead.
guides : using handle ;.
X Screw cover ; onto jump-starting socket :.
X Attach catch lever = and fold down.
X Fit battery compartment cover =
(Y page 275).
Z
Manoeuvring/tow-starting and tow- The spring-loaded brake cylinders of the parking

ing away brake are activated or can be activated if:
Rthe reservoir pressure in the compressed-air
Important safety notes brake system is too low
Rthe compressed-air brake system cannot be
G WARNING charged
If the engine is not running, the power steer- Rthere is a loss of pressure in the brake system
ing and the compressed-air supply are inop- In an emergency, you can release the spring-
erative. You then need to steer considerably loaded parking brake cylinders manually
more forcefully. The spring-loaded parking (Y page 299).
brake cylinder can be activated if there is a
loss of compressed air and the vehicle may Notes on tow-starting and towing away
then brake uncontrollably. This could cause Specialist knowledge beyond the scope of these
you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a Operating Instructions is required for tow-start-
risk of an accident. ing and towing away. Only have your vehicle
Always use a tow bar. Always ensure the tow-started/towed away by a professional tow-
compressed-air supply using an external ing/recovery company. Further information can
be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz Service

compressed-air source. Centre.
! If the engine is not running, observe the fol-
lowing when manoeuvring, tow-starting and Attaching the towbar
towing away:
When the vehicle is towed, the brakes and
gearshift do not have a compressed-air sup-
ply. The transmission lubrication system does
not function and there is a risk of transmission
damage. Observe the "Towing a vehicle while
the engine is not running" section.
! Route cables and compressed-air lines so
that they can accommodate movements with-
out strain, kinks or friction when turning cor-
ners, etc.
Note that steering movements require consid-
Example: coupling jaw
erably more force at a standstill than when the
vehicle is moving. Avoid steering movements The front coupling jaw is designed for manoeu-
when at a standstill, particularly when the front vring a trailer, towing away and tow-starting.
axle is under heavy load. X To unlock: swing coupling pin : approx-
If you transport the vehicle on a low-loader, the imately 90° backwards and pull it up and out.
permissible vehicle height may be exceeded. X Attach the towbar.
Pay attention to the headroom clearance of
X To lock: reinsert coupling pin : and swing
buildings, e.g. bridges.
forwards 90°.
Before towing, agree on a clear signal with the
towing vehicle driver. Both you and the towing
vehicle driver must adapt your driving styles to Tow-starting the vehicle
the more difficult conditions.
X Attach the towbar (Y page 298).
lock.
X Call up the Reserve pressure menu window
(Y page 111) and check the current reservoir
pressure.
X If the reservoir pressure is low: charge the X Shift to neutral.

compressed-air system from an outside
source (Y page 294). Towing distance over 5 km:
X Vehicles with Telligent® gearshift: depress X Remove the propeller shaft for the front and
the clutch pedal. rear axles.
X All vehicles: engage a gear.
The gear engaged is shown in the on-board Towing away vehicles with transmission,
computer display. transfer case or axle damage
X Tow-start the vehicle. X Remove the propeller shafts leading to the
Do not exceed a towing speed of 20 km/h. driven axles.
X Vehicles with Telligent® gearshift: release or
the clutch pedal and depress the accelerator X Load the vehicle onto the low-loader.
pedal.
X Vehicles with Telligent® automatic gear- Towing away a vehicle while the engine is
shift: depress the accelerator pedal. running
X Vehicles with Telligent® gearshift: imme- X Shift the transmission to neutral.
diately after the engine has started, depress
Towing away a vehicle with operational
the clutch pedal and shift the transmission to
the neutral position. gearshift
X Vehicles with Telligent® automatic gear- Towing speed up to a maximum of 40 km/h.
shift: immediately after the engine has star- X Start the engine.
ted, shift the transmission to the neutral posi- X Shift the transmission to neutral.
tion.
i Vehicles with Telligent® automatic gear-
shift: Releasing the spring-loaded parking
Rdepressing the accelerator pedal slowly = brake cylinders
slow clutch engagement
Rdepressing the accelerator pedal rapidly =
rapid clutch engagement In an emergency, the spring-loaded parking
brake cylinders can be released manually for
Towing away the vehicle towing if there is insufficient reservoir pressure
in the brake system. Before using the vehicle
General again, the spring-loaded cylinders for the park-
ing brake must be made operational again.
X Attach the towbar (Y page 298).
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition G Warning
lock. If you release the spring-loaded parking brake
X Ensure a supply of compressed air via the cylinders, the parking brake will be released.
towing vehicle; see "Charging the The vehicle is then no longer secured against
compressed-air system from an outside
rolling away and may begin to move. There is
source" (Y page 294).
Towing away a vehicle while the engine is Before you charge the compressed-air brake
not running system from an outside source, chock the
Towing distance of up to 5 km, towing vehicle's wheels to prevent it from rolling
speed of up to a maximum of 20 km/h: away.
! When the engine is not running, the trans- Before using the vehicle again, you must make
mission oil pump is not operational. There is a the spring-loaded cylinders for the parking
risk of transmission damage. brake are operational again.
Z
U 216/U 218/U 318 U 323/U 423/U 427/U 429/U 430/U

527/U 529/U 530
Overview
Overview
Releasing the spring-loaded parking

brake cylinders manually Releasing the spring-loaded parking
brake cylinders manually
! Undo the release bolt with a maximum tor-

que of 70 Nm. Do not use an impact wrench. ! Undo the release bolt with a maximum tor-
You could otherwise damage the spring-loa- que of 70 Nm. Do not use an impact wrench.
ded parking brake cylinder. You could otherwise damage the spring-loa-
X Use chocks to safeguard the vehicle against ded parking brake cylinder.
rolling away. X Use chocks to safeguard the vehicle against
X Remove cover = of left and right-hand side rolling away.
spring-loaded parking brake cylinder ?. X Unscrew release screw : of left and right-
X Unscrew release screw ; on left and right- hand side spring-loaded parking brake cylin-
hand side spring-loaded parking brake cylinder ; as far as possible (release position).
der ? (release position) until control pin : is
fully extended. Returning the spring-loaded parking
brake cylinders to the operational condi-
Returning the spring-loaded parking tion
brake cylinders to the operational condi- X Make sure that the J warning lamp in the
tion instrument cluster is not lit.
X Make sure that the J warning lamp in the The vehicle's compressed air system has suf-
instrument cluster is not lit. ficient reservoir pressure.
The vehicle's compressed air system has suf- X Release the parking brake (Y page 147).
ficient reservoir pressure. X Screw in and tighten release screw : of left
X Release the parking brake (Y page 147). and right-hand side parking brake cylinder ;
X Screw in and tighten release screw ; of left (brake position). Tightening torque 40 to
and right-hand side spring-loaded parking 50 Nm.
brake cylinder ? (brake position). Tightening
torque 40 to 50 Nm.
Control pin : is fully retracted.
X Press cover = onto the left and right-hand
side spring-loaded parking brake cylinders.
Important safety notes 301
Useful information Check the specified tyre pressures regularly

when the tyres are cold, at least every two
weeks and before long journeys. The tyre pres-
sure in tyres on the same axle must always be
the same.
RIf the tyre pressures are too low, this leads to
possible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not an excessive build up of heat in the tyres,
be equipped with all the functions described. increased tyre wear, a deterioration in driving
This also applies to safety-relevant systems and stability and increased fuel consumption.
functions. RIf the tyre pressures are too high, this leads to
Read the information on qualified specialist an increased braking distance, a deterioration
workshops (Y page 31). in tyre traction and increased tyre wear.
RValve caps on the tyre valves protect the valve
cores from moisture and dirt. For this reason,
Important safety notes always screw the valve caps tightly onto the
tyre valves.
Operating and road safety RIn the event of repeated pressure loss from
the tyres, exterior damage or leaking tyre
General notes valves may be the cause. Check the tyre pres-
sures regularly.
Tyres are of particular importance to the oper- RFurther important information on tyre pres-
ating and road safety of the vehicle. For this sures (Y page 303).
reason, check the tyre pressures, tyre tread and
RObserve the tyre pressure table
tyre condition on a regular basis.
(Y page 304).
A tyre dealer or a qualified specialist workshop
Wheels and tyres

will be able to provide further information on:
Rtyre load-bearing capacity (LI Load Index)
Tyre tread
Rtyre speed rating G WARNING
Rtyre age
If there is insufficient tyre tread, the tyre trac-
Rcauses and consequences of tyre wear
tion will decrease. The tyre tread can no lon-
Rmeasures to be taken in the event of tyre
ger dissipate water. This increases the risk of
damage
aquaplaning on a wet road surface, especially
Rtypes of tyre for specific regions, areas of
when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the
operation or conditions of vehicle use
road conditions. There is a risk of an accident.
Rinterchangeability of tyres, etc.
If the tyre pressure is too high or too low, tyres
Tyre pressure may wear differently at different points of the
tyre tread. Regularly check the tyre tread
G WARNING depth and the condition of the tread across
The tyre temperature and pressure increase the whole width of all tyres, therefore.
when the vehicle is in motion. Reducing the Minimum tyre tread depth on:
pressure of warm tyres leads to a tyre pres- RSummer tyres: 3 mm
sure that is too low when the tyres have
RM+S tyres: 4 mm
cooled. If the tyre pressure is too low, it may
cause the tyre to burst, especially when the For safety reasons, have the tyres replaced
load or speed increases. There is a risk of an before the legally specified minimum tread
accident. depth is reached.
You should never reduce the pressure of
warm tyres. Observe the specified tyre pres-
sure.
Z
302 Important safety notes
Tyre condition
G WARNING
Damaged tyres can cause tyre inflation pres-
sure loss. As a result, you could lose control of
your vehicle. There is a risk of accident.
Check the tyres regularly for signs of damage
and replace any damaged tyres immediately.
Check the condition of the tyres regularly, at

least every two weeks and before long journeys,
e.g. for:
Rexternal damage
Rforeign bodies in the tyre tread
Rcracks, bulges, punctures
Runeven tread wear or excessive wear on one
: Example: tread wear indicator side
A specified minimum tread depth is a legal
requirement for all tyres. Observe the relevant Tyre age
legal requirements for each country.
Tyres age, even if they are used infrequently or
For safety reasons, have the tyres replaced not at all. Operating and road safety diminish
before the legally specified minimum tread with age. For this reason have tyres more than
depth is reached.
Wheels and tyres
six years old checked and, if necessary,

A tyre has reached the minimum tread depth replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. This
when the tread wear indicator (arrow) is flush also applies to the spare wheel.
with the tyre tread.
The less tyre tread depth remaining, the poorer Tyre damage
the road grip and handling characteristics of the
vehicle, especially if the road surface is wet or Tyre damage can be caused by:
snow-covered. Rthe operating conditions of the vehicle
Rtyre ageing
Rkerbs
Rforeign bodies
Rinsufficient or excessive tyre pressure
Rweather conditions and environmental fac-
tors
Rcontact with oil, grease, fuel, etc.
Tyre load-bearing capacity, tyre speed

rating and tyre types
Vehicles with road-rail tyres G WARNING
: Door trim
Exceeding the stated tyre load-bearing capa-
; Sticker
city and the approved maximum speed could
Special wear limits apply to vehicles with road- lead to tyre damage or the tyre bursting. There
rail tyres. The wear limits are specified on is a risk of accident.
sticker ; and on the tyres.
Therefore, only use tyre types and sizes
approved for your vehicle model. Observe the
Tyre pressure 303
tyre load rating and speed rating required for Observe the recommended tyre pressures
your vehicle. and check the tyre pressure of all the tyres
including the spare wheel:
In particular, observe the permissible tyre spec-
ifications in a country. These regulations may Revery day before starting a journey
prescribe a certain type of tyre for your vehicle. Rwhen the load changes
In addition, the use of specific tyre types may be Rprior to long journey
advisable for certain regions and areas of oper-
ation. A tyre dealer, a qualified specialist work- Rfor changed operating conditions, e.g. off-
shop or any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre will road driving
be able to provide further information. If necessary, correct the tyre pressure.
Replacing tyres G WARNING

If replacing the standard tyres of your vehicle, The tyre temperature and pressure increase
use only the tyre and wheel sizes approved for when the vehicle is in motion. Reducing the
your vehicle type. A tyre dealer or a qualified pressure of warm tyres leads to a tyre pres-
specialist workshop will be able to provide fur-
sure that is too low when the tyres have
ther information.
cooled. If the tyre pressure is too low, it may
After changing the tyres, always carry the oper-
ating permit for the new tyre and wheel size as cause the tyre to burst, especially when the
well as the manufacturer's certification indicat- load or speed increases. There is a risk of an
ing that the wheel/tyres are permissible for use accident.
on the vehicle. The speedometer will also You should never reduce the pressure of
require adjustment. Observe the relevant legal
Wheels and tyres

warm tyres. Observe the specified tyre pres-
requirements for each country. Any Mercedes-
Benz Service Centre can provide information on sure.
obtaining a manufacturer's certificate.
! An increase/decrease of 10 † in air tem-
perature increases/reduces tyre pressure by
Retreaded tyres approximately 0.2 bar. Remember this pres-
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use sure change – particularly in winter – when
tyres and wheels which have been tested and checking tyre pressures, e.g. in a garage.
approved by Mercedes-Benz specifically for Example:
your vehicle. The room temperature in the garage is
approximately 20 †.
The outside temperature is approximately
Tyre pressure 0 †.
Adjust the tyre pressure so it is approximately
Important safety notes 0.4 bar higher than indicated in the tyre pres-
sure table.
G WARNING
When you leave the garage, the tyre pressure
Tyres with insufficient or excessive tyre pres- drops by approximately 0.4 bar.
sure harbour the following hazards:
Rthe tyres may burst, especially as the load
and vehicle speed increase.
Rthe tyres may wear excessively or unevenly
which can severely impair tyre traction.
Rthe handling as well as steering and braking
characteristics may be severely affected.
Z
304 Tyre pressure
Determining tyre pressure i Correct the tyre pressures for each axle on
the vehicle.
RThe tyre pressure values are given for a ref-
erence temperature of 20 †.
RIn the following tyre pressure table, the tyre
pressures are listed for the permissible vehi-
cle weight.
RDiffering values for the front axle take
account of the fact that the front axle is not
normally fully laden. The maximum tyre pres-
sures on the front axle are only required if the
axle is loaded accordingly. The figures given
are tyre pressure values for on-road driving. If
Example: tyre designation in doubt, always set the tyre pressure to the
next highest value. This is provided that the
X Read tyre size : and tyre load-bearing capa- tyre load-bearing capacity is adequate. In the
city ; on the tyre. axle load data the higher value (on the right)
X Determine the approved gross axle weight of for the front axle, in conjunction with the rear
the corresponding axle from the vehicle iden- axle load, corresponds to the maximum per-
tification plate (Y page 317). missible axle loads given in the vehicle docu-
X Look up the specified tyre pressure in the ments.
table (Y page 304). RFor off-road driving, the minimum tyre pres-
X Check and, if necessary, correct the pressure sures must be set in accordance with the
of all tyres. "Tyre pressure reductions for off-road driving"
Wheels and tyres
table (Y page 314).
Tyre pressure table

Tyre pressures for operation on firm surfaces
U 216 / U 218 / U 318, gross vehicle weight 7,490 kg2

Tyres LI Axle load in kg
Tyre pressure in bar
Front Rear
Up to / max.
335/80 R 20 2900 / 4400 4800
MPT81 147K 2.3 / 4.0 4.8
SP T9 149K 2.3 / 4.0 4.8
365/80 R 20 2900 / 4400 4800
XZL 152K 2.1 / 3.5 4.1
MPT81 152K 2.1 / 3.4 4.1
405/70 R 20 3300 / 4400 4400
XM47 136G 2.9 / 4.1 4.1
405/70 R 20 2900 / 4400 4800
SP T9 152J 2.1 / 3.4 4.1
2 Observe the gross vehicle weight on the vehicle identification plate.

Tyre pressure 305

Front Rear
Up to / max.
425/75 R 20 2900 / 4400 4800
XM47 148G 1.6 / 2.7 3.4
405/70 R 24 2900 / 4400 4800
SP T9 152J 1.7 / 2.9 3.2
AC70G 149G 1.6 / 2.8 3.4
295/60 R 22.5 2900 / 4400 4800
Ultra Grip WTS 150K 3.0 / 5.4 6.5
315/80 R 22.5 2900 / 4400 4800
Goodyear 156K/L 2.4 / 4.1 4.9
U 216 / U 218 / U 318, gross vehicle weight 8,500 kg2 / 7,990 kg2
Wheels and tyres

Front Rear
Up to / max.
335/80 R 20 3900 / 4800 4800
MPT81 147K 3.4 / 4.4 4.8
SP T9 149K 3.4 / 4.4 4.8
365/80 R 20 3900 / 4800 4800
XZL 152K 3.0 / 3.9 4.1
MPT81 152K 2.9 / 3.7 4.1
405/70 R 20 4300 / 4400 4400
XM47 136G 4.0 / 4.1 4.1
405/70 R 20 3900 / 4800 4800
SP T9 152J 3.0 / 3.8 4.1
425/75 R 20 3900 / 4800 4800
XM47 148G 2.3 / 3.0 3.4
405/70 R 24 3900 / 4800 4800
SP T9 152J 2.5 / 3.2 3.2
AC70G 149G 2.4 / 3.2 3.4
Z
306 Tyre pressure
Front Rear
Up to / max.
295/60 R 22.5 3900 / 4800 4800
Ultra Grip WTS 150K 4.6 / 6.0 6.5
315/80 R 22.5 3900 / 4800 4800
Goodyear 156K/L 3.5 / 4.5 4.9

Front Rear
Up to / max.
335/80 R 20 4700 / 5200 5500
MPT81 147K 4.3 / 5.0 5.9
Wheels and tyres
SP T9 149K 4.3 / 4.9 5.7

365/80 R 20 4700 / 5200 5500
XZL 152K 3.8 / 4.2 4.8
MPT81 152K 3.7 / 4.1 4.8
405/70 R 20 4700 / 5200 5500
SP T9 152J 3.7 / 4.2 4.8
425/75 R 20 4700 / 5200 5500
XM47 148G 2.9/3.3 4.0
405/70 R 24 4700 / 5200 5500
SP T9 152J 3.1 / 3.5 3.7
AC70G 149G 3.1 / 3.5 4.0
295/60 R 22.5 4700 / 5200 5500
Ultra Grip WTS 150K 5.8 / 6.6 7.6
315/80 R 22.5 4700 / 5200 5500
Goodyear 156K/L 4.4 / 5.0 5.8

Tyre pressure 307
U 318, gross vehicle weight 11,000 kg2

Front Rear
Up to / max.
335/80 R 20 5200 / 5500 6000
MPT81 147K 5.0 / 5.4 6.5
SP T9 149K 4.9 / 5.3 6.4
365/80 R 20 5200 / 5500 6000
XZL 152K 4.2 / 4.5 5.4
MPT81 152K 4.2 / 4.4 5.3
405/70 R 20 5200 / 5500 6000
SP T9 152J 4.2 / 4.4 5.3
425/75 R 20 5200 / 5500 6000
XM47 148G 3.3 / 3.5 4.1
405/70 R 24 5200 / 5500 6000
SP T9 152J 3.5/3.7 4.2
AC70G 149G 3.5/3.7 4.4
Wheels and tyres

295/60 R 22.5 5200 / 5500 6000
Ultra Grip WTS 150K 6.6 / 7.1 8.5
315/80 R 22.5 5200 / 5500 6000
Goodyear 156K/L 5.0 / 5.4 6.4
U 323 / U 423 / U 427 / U 429 / U 430, gross vehicle weight 12,000 kg2 / 12,100 kg2
Front Rear
Up to / max.
365/80 R 20 5200 / 6800 7000
XZL 152K 4.2 / 5.8 6.1
MPT81 152K 4.2 / 5.7 6.0
405/70 R 20 5200 / 6800 7000
SP T9 152J 4.2 / 5.7 6.0
365/85 R 20 5200 / 6800 7000
XZL 164G 3.6 / 4.9 5.4
375/75 R 22.5 5200 / 6800 7000
MPT 23 165G 3.4 / 4.8 5.2
Z
308 Tyre pressure
U 323 / U 423 / U 427 / U 429 / U 430, gross vehicle weight 12,000 kg2 / 12,100 kg2
Front Rear
Up to / max.
315/80 R 22.5 5200 / 6800 7000
Goodyear 156K/L 5.0 / 7.0 7.8
385/65 R 22.5 5200 / 6800 7000
HTC1 / HSW2 SCAN 160K 4.6 / 6.4 7.0
HDC 162K/ 4.2 / 5.9 6.2
164J
425/65 R 22.5 5200 / 6800 7000
XZY3 165K 4.0 / 5.4 5.6
445/65 R 22.5 5200 / 6800 7000
AC70+ 160G 2.8 / 4.1 4.8
XZL 168G 3.4 / 4.6 5.1
445/70 R 24 5300 / 5500 6900
XM47 151G 3.0 / 3.2 4.1
Wheels and tyres
275/90 R 22.5 5000 / 6100 6100

SRT/SRT2 153J 5.6 / 7.0 7.4
5200 / 6800 7000
153J/G 5.8 / 7.9 8.5
U 323 / U 423 / U 427 / U 429 / U 430, gross vehicle weight 12,700 kg2
Front Rear
Up to / max.
365/80 R 20 5800 / 6800 7100
XZL - 4.8 / 5.8 6.1
MPT81 - 4.7 / 5.8 6.0
405/70 R 20 5800 / 6800 7100
SP T9 - 4.7 / 5.7 6.0
445/70 R 24 5800 6900
XM47 151G 3.4 4.1

Tyre pressure 309
Front Rear
Up to / max.
445/70 R 24 5800 7100
XM47 151G 3.4 4.1
Vmax
80 km/h
Front Rear
Up to / max.
275/90 R 22.5 6300 / 6900 6900
SRT/SRT2 153J/G 7.3 / 8.0 8.5
365/85 R 20 5700 / 6800 7500
Wheels and tyres

XZL 164G 4.0 / 4.9 5.9
375/75 R 22.5 5700 / 6800 7500
MPT 23 165G 3.8 / 4.8 5.7
385/65 R 22.5 5700 / 6800 7500
HTC1 / HSW2 SCAN 160K 5.1 / 6.4 7.7
HDC 162K/ 4.8 / 5.9 6.7
164J
425/65 R 22.5 5700 / 6800 7500
XZY3 165K 4.4 / 5.4 6.0
445/65 R 22.5 5700 / 6800 7500
AC70+ 160G 3.2 / 4.1 5.3
XZL 168G 3.7 / 4.6 5.5
315/80 R 22.5 5700 / 6800 7500
Goodyear 156K/L 5.6 / 7.0 8.5
Z
310 Tyre pressure
Front Rear
Up to / max.
275/90 R 22.5 6900 6900
SRT/SRT2 153J/G 8.0 8.5
315/80 R 22.5 6900 6900
Goodyear 156K/L 7.1 7.6
6900 7500
156K/L 7.1 8.5
365/85 R 20 6200 / 6900 7800
XZL 164G 4.4 / 5.0 6.1
375/75 R 22.5 6200 / 6900 7800
MPT 23 165J 4.2 / 4.8 6.0
385/65 R 22.5 6200 / 6900 7800
HTC1 / HSW2 SCAN 160K 5.7 / 6.5 8.0
HDC 162K/ 5.3 / 6.0 7.0
Wheels and tyres
164J
425/65 R 22.5 6000 / 6500 7800
XZY3 165K 4.7 / 5.1 6.3
445/65 R 22.5 6000 / 6500 7800
AC70+ 160G 3.4/3.8 5.6
XZL 168G 4.0 / 4.4 5.8
Front Rear
Up to / max.
365/85 R 20 6200 / 7000 8000
XZL 164G 4.4 / 5.1 6.3
375/75 R 22.5 6200 / 7000 8000
MPT 23 165J 4.2 / 4.9 6.2
385/65 R 22.5 6200 / 7000 8000
HTC1 / HSW2 SCAN 160K 5.7 / 6.6 8.3
HDC 162K/ 5.3 / 6.2 7.3
164J
Tyre pressure 311
Front Rear
Up to / max.
365/85 R 20 5200 / 6800 7000
XZL 164G 3.6 / 4.9 5.4
395/85 R 20 5200 / 6800 7000
XZL 168G 3.6 / 4.9 5.4
XML 161G 3.6 / 5.0 5.5
375/75 R 22.5 5200 / 6800 7000
MPT 23 165J 3.4 / 4.8 5.2
385/65 R 22.5 5200 / 6800 7000
HTC / HSW Scan 160K 4.6 / 6.4 7.0
HDC 162K/ 4.2 / 5.9 6.2
164J
425/65 R 22.5 5200 / 6800 7000
XZY3 165K 4.0 / 5.4 5.6
Wheels and tyres

445/65 R 22.5 5200 / 6800 7000
AC70+ 160G 2.8 / 4.1 4.8
XZL 168G 3.4 / 4.6 5.1
445/70 R 24 5300 / 5500 6900
XM47 151G 3.0 / 3.2 4.1
455/70 R 24 5300 / 5500 6900
SP T9 154G 2.6 / 2.8 3.7
495/70 R 24 5600 6500
XM47 155G 2.8 3.4
495/70 R 24 5600 6500
AC 70G 155G 2.5 3.0

Front Rear
Up to / max.
445/70 R 24 5800 6900
XM47 151G 3.4 4.1
Z
312 Tyre pressure

Front Rear
Up to / max.
445/70 R 24 5800 7100
XM47 151G 3.4 4.1
Vmax
80 km/h

Front Rear
Up to / max.
455/70 R 24 5500 7500
SP T9 154G 2.8 4.0
Wheels and tyres

Front Rear
Up to / max.
495/70 R 24 6000 7700
XM47 155G 3.1 4.1
495/70 R 24 6000 7700
AC 70 G 155G 2.7 3.5
495/70 R 24 6000 8400
XM47 155G 2.8 4.1
AC 70G 155G 2.5 3.5

Tyre pressure 313

Front Rear
Up to / max.
365/85 R 20 6700 / 7200 8500 / 9000
XZL 164G 4.8 / 5.2 6.8 / 7.2
395/85 R 20 6700 / 7200 9000
XZL 168G 4.8 / 5.2 7.2
XML 161G 4.9 / 5.3 7.0
375/75 R 22.5 6700 / 7200 8500 / 9000
MPT 23 165J 4.7 / 5.1 6.7 / 7.2
385/65 R 22.5 6700 / 7200 8500 / 9000
HTC / HSW Scan 160K 6.3 / 6.9 8.9 / 9.0
HDC 162K/ 5.8 / 6.4 7.9 / 8.5
164J
425/65 R 22.5 6500 / 7200 9000
XZY3 165K 5.1 / 5.8 7.4
Wheels and tyres

445/65 R 22.5 6500 / 7200 9000
AC70+ 160G 3.8 / 4.4 6.7
XZL 168G 4.4 / 4.9 6.8

Front Rear
Up to / max.
365/85 R 20 7500 9000
XZL 164G 5.5 7.2
365/85 R 20 7200 / 7500 9500
XZL 164G 5.2 / 5.5 7.5
395/85 R 20 7500 9000
XZL 168G 5.5 7.2
XML 161G 5.6 7.0
395/85 R 20 7200 / 7500 9500
XZL 168G 5.2 / 5.5 7.6
375/75 R 22.5 7500 9000
MPT 23 165J 5.4 7.2
Z
314 Tyre pressure

Front Rear
Up to / max.
375/75 R 22.5 7200 / 7500 9500
MPT 23 165J 5.1 / 5.4 7.8
385/65 R 22.5 7500 9000
HTC / HSW Scan 160K 7.2 9.0
HDC 162K/ 6.7 8.4
164J
385/65 R 22.5 7200 / 7500 9500
HDC 162K/ 6.4 / 6.7 9.0
164J
425/65 R 22.5 6500 / 7500 9000
XZY3 165K 5.1 / 6.0 7.4
7500 9500
165K 6.0 7.8
Wheels and tyres
445/65 R 22.5 6500 / 7500 9000

AC70+ 160G 3.8 / 4.7 6.7
XZL 168G 4.4 / 5.1 6.8
445/65 R 22.5 7500 9500
XZL 168G 5.1 7.3
Tyre pressures for off-road use, based on rated pressure

Tyres Operating conditions
A = slightly yielding surface (farmland, grassland, unpaved
road), vmax 50 km/h
B = highly yielding surface (sand, mud), vmax 20 km/h
C = only for freeing in an emergency, for a brief period only,
0 to 10 km/h
A B C
335/80 R 20 XZL 80% 45% 33%
SP T9 80 % 45 % 33 %
SPPG8 80 % 45 % 33 %
MPT 81 75% 45 % 33 %

Tyre pressure 315
Tyres Operating conditions

A = slightly yielding surface (farmland, grassland, unpaved
road), vmax 50 km/h
B = highly yielding surface (sand, mud), vmax 20 km/h
C = only for freeing in an emergency, for a brief period only,
0 to 10 km/h
A B C
12.5 R 20 MPT 80 75% 45 % 33 %
365/80 R 20 XZL 75% 45% 33%
SP T9 75 % 45 % 33 %
MPT 81 75 % 45 % 33 %
SPPG8 75 % 45 % 33 %
14.5 R 20 MPT 80 75 % 45 % 33 %
365/85 R 20 XZL 80% 45% 33%
395/85 R 20 XZL 80% 45% 33%
XML 66% 40% 33%
Wheels and tyres

14.00 R 20 XZL 70% 40% 33%
405/70 R 20 SP T9 75% 55% 40%
AC 70 G 75 % 45% 33%
XM47 75 % 70% 50%
405/70 R 24 SP T9 75% 55% 40%
AC 70 G 75 % 55 % 40 %
445/70 R 24 XM47 75% 70% 55%
AC 70 G 75 % 45% 33%
455/70 R 24 SP T9 75% 55% 40%
445/65 R 22.5 AC 70+ 75% 45% 33%
XZL 75 % 45 % 33 %
495/70 R 24 XM47 80% 75% 55%
495/70 R 24 AC 70G 90 % 70% 55%
Explanatory notes for the table table. Do not apply lateral force, turn the
steering wheel or position the vehicle on a
RThe values in % are relative to the nominal tyre slope at these tyre pressures. Only reduce the
pressures for on-road driving. tyre pressures by as much as is necessary.
RThe tyre pressures for freeing a stuck vehicle The tyre pressure reduction values only apply
must not fall below the values given in the to those tyres explicitly listed in the table (size
Z
316 Tyre pressure
and tread). Applying these values to other

designs/treads is not permitted.
RInflate underinflated tyres at normal oper-
ating temperature to a level appropriate
for driving on the road: set a higher tyre
pressure than that given in the table for on-
road driving.
RGuide value: tyres at normal operating tem-
perature +10%. On vehicles with a tyre pres-
sure control system, the tyre pressure set for
conventional on-road driving is an indicative
value. Correct the tyre pressures at the earli-
est opportunity. Only check the tyre pressure
when the tyres have cooled and correct if
necessary.
Wheels and tyres
Vehicle identification plates 317
Useful information RVehicle type

RBasic headlamp setting
These Operating Instructions describe all the RRear axle ratio
models and standard and optional equipment of RAbsorption coefficient, diesel smoke
your vehicle that were available at the time of RType approval number
going to print. Country-specific differences are RVehicle identification number (VIN)
be equipped with all the functions described. RPermissible gross weight (kg)
This also applies to safety-relevant systems and RPermissible gross combination weight (kg)
functions. RMaximum permissible axle loads (kg)
workshops (Y page 31). i The data shown on the vehicle identification
plate label are sample data. The data are dif-
ferent for every vehicle and may differ from
the data shown here. You can find the data
Vehicle identification plates applicable to your vehicle on the vehicle's
identification plate label.
Vehicle identification plate
Overview Vehicle identification number (VIN)
Technical data
Example: vehicle identification plate label : Vehicle identification number stamped on
the right-hand longitudinal member
If there are no other national regulations, the
vehicle identification plate label is located inside
the cab on the right-side B-pillar.
Engine data plate
Information on the vehicle identifica- The engine data plate is affixed to the engine
tion plate control unit.
Example: vehicle identification plate label Engine number : is engraved on the lower sec-
tion of the crankcase front edge. Further infor-
318 Operating data
mation can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz

Service Centre.
Operating data
Engine
Type U 216 U 218 / U 318
Engine model series 934.971 934.971
Engine power output 115 kW 130 kW
according to DIN at
rated engine speed
Cylinder arrangement 4-cylinder in-line 4-cylinder in-line
Emission class Euro 6 standard Euro 6 standard
Torque (max.) at 650 Nm 750 Nm
engine speed At 1200 to 1600 rpm at 1200 to 1600 rpm
Idling speed Approx. 720 rpm Approx. 720 rpm
Engine brake (operat- Approx. 1000 to 3000 rpm Approx. 1000 to 3000 rpm
ing range)
Rated engine speed 2200 rpm 2200 rpm
Engine
Technical data
Type U 323 / U 423 U 423

according to DIN at
rated engine speed
Emission class Euro 6 standard Euromot 4 standard
engine speed At 1200 to 1600 rpm At 1200 to 1600 rpm
ing range)
Operating data 319
Engine
Type U 423 U 427 / U 527
according to DIN at
rated engine speed
Emission class Euro 5 standard Euro 6 standard
ing range)
Engine
Type U 429 / U 529 U 429 / U 529
according to DIN at
Technical data
rated engine speed
Emission class Euro 5 standard Euromot 4 standard
ing range)
Engine
Type U 430 / U 530
Engine model series 936.971
Engine power output 220 kW
according to DIN at
rated engine speed
Cylinder arrangement 6-cylinder in-line
320 Operating data
Engine
Type U 430 / U 530
Engine model series 936.971
Emission class Euro 6 standard
Torque (max.) at 1200 Nm
engine speed At 1200 to 1600 rpm
Idling speed Approx. 720 rpm
Engine brake (operat- Approx. 1000 to 3000 rpm
ing range)
Rated engine speed 2200 rpm
Operating temperature (coolant temperature)

Normal operation Approx. 80 – 100 †
Maximum permissible coolant temperature Up to 103 †
during operation
Automatically reduced engine output From 103 †
PTO shaft
Position of the front PTO shaft stub In accordance with EN 15432
The height depends on the tyres.
Technical data
Transmission ratio i = 2.139 (under drive)

Standard engine speed 1000 rpm/all other engine speeds (e.g.
540 rpm) can be set using the engine speed
setting (Y page 233).
Rotational speed of front PTO shaft at rated 1029 rpm
engine speed
Engine speed at a front PTO shaft rotational 1160 rpm
speed of 540 rpm
Engine speed at a front PTO shaft rotational 2140 rpm
speed of 1000 rpm
Direction of rotation Clockwise
Continuous operation output 160 kW
Profile of front PTO shaft in accordance with 1Ø inch splined shaft
SAE J499a standard The front PTO shaft stub can be twisted to ena-
ble equipment to be coupled up easily
Operating data 321
Tyre pressure
Tyre pressure (Y page 304)
Permissible difference between tyres on an axle 0.2 bar
Maximum permissible pressure in the vehicle compressed-air 10.0 bar
system to inflate a tyre
Wheel nut tightening torques (Nm)

Pressure plate nut U 216 / U 218 / U 318 M 20 x 1.5 450 ± 36 Nm
U 323 / U 423 / U 427 / M 22 x 1.5 600 ± 50 Nm
U 429 / U 430 / U 527 /
U 529 / U 530
Spring-loaded parking brake cylinders

Release torque of the spring-loaded parking brake cylinder Max. 70 Nm
release screw
Tightening torque of the spring-loaded parking brake cylinder 40–50 Nm
release screw
Release pressure (reservoir pressure in compressed-air system) Min. 6.5 bar
Auxiliary consumers circuit Approx. 8.5 bar
Steering play
Technical data
Maximum permissible steering play (measured at the rim of the 30 mm
steering wheel with the engine running, wheels in straight-ahead
position)
Service brake 12.5 bar
Brake circuit 1 Min. 7.0 bar
Brake circuit 2 Min. 7.0 bar
Trailer brake circuit Min. 5.5 bar
Pressure regulator (activation/deactivation pressure) Approx. 10.7 bar/12.5 bar
Spring-loaded brake circuit Min. 5.5 bar
Volume of compressed-air reservoir, brake circuit 1 32.0 l
Volume of compressed-air reservoir, brake circuit 2 20.0 l
322 Service products
Service products Other labels and recommendations relating to

the quality or indicating that the product meets
Important safety notes a certain specification are not necessarily
approved by Mercedes-Benz. Further informa-
Service products include: tion can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz Ser-
Rwindscreen washer concentrate vice Centre.
Rfuels (e.g. diesel) i Information about service products which
Rlubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil, have been tested by Mercedes-Benz and
grease) approved for your vehicle can be obtained on
Rhydraulic fluids the Internet at: http://bevo.mercedes-
Rcoolant benz.com
Rbrake fluid for the hydraulic clutch mecha- The specification and availability of lubricants
nism system may vary. Some lubricants are no longer availa-
RAdBlue® (BlueTec® exhaust gas aftertreat- ble, especially for older vehicles. Further infor-
ment reduction agent) mation can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre.
G WARNING
ardous to health. There is a risk of injury. Brake fluid
Observe the instructions on the respective G WARNING
original container when using, storing and dis- The brake fluid continuously absorbs mois-
posing off service products. Always store ser- ture from the air. This results in the boiling
vice products in the sealed original container. point of the brake fluid lowering. If the boiling
Always keep service products out of the reach point of the brake fluid is too low, vapour
of children. pockets may form in the hydraulic clutch
actuation system when it is subjected to a
! Special additives (except approved fuel
Technical data
additives) are neither required nor approved heavy thermal load. In this case, the function
for use with approved service products. Addi- of the hydraulic clutch actuation system is
tives may cause damage to major assemblies. restricted. There is a risk of an accident.
Therefore, do not mix any additives with ser- Have the brake fluid renewed at the prescri-
vice products. You are responsible for the bed intervals.
results of using fuel additives.
H Environmental note ! Brake fluid corrodes paint, plastic and rub-
ber. If brake fluid comes into contact with
Dispose of service products in an environ-
paint, plastic or rubber, rinse with water
mentally-responsible manner. immediately.
Approved service products fulfil the highest Have the brake fluid replaced regularly at a
quality standards and are documented in the qualified specialist workshop. You can find the
Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Prod- intervals for brake fluid change in the mainte-
ucts. For this reason, only use approved service nance booklet.
products for your vehicle. Information about Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-
approved service products is available from a Benz according to MB Approval 331.0. Informa-
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. tion about approved brake fluid can be obtained
You can recognise service products approved by from a qualified specialist workshop or at
Mercedes-Benz by the following inscription on http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
the container:
RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 228.51)
or
RMB Approval (e.g. MB Approval 228.51)
Service products 323
Engine oils Changing the engine oil

General notes ! If the SAE class (viscosity) of the engine oil
used is not suitable for continually low outside
temperatures below -20 †, this could cause
engine damage.
The specified temperatures of the SAE class
always refer to freshly added oil. Engine oil
ages during driving due to soot and fuel resi-
due. This impairs the characteristics of the
engine oil, particularly at low outside temper-
atures.
If the outside temperature is under -20 †,
Mercedes-Benz strongly recommends using
engine oils of SAE class 5W-30 or 0W-30.
Use only all-season oils.
! Engine oils other than those of the quality Oil change intervals are dependent on the fol-
specified in this Operator's Manual are not lowing:
permitted.
Rthe operating conditions of the vehicle
Vehicles in accordance with the Euromot 4 Rthe grade of the engine oil used
standard: only use engine oils which corre-
X Select the SAE class (viscosity) of the engine
spond to Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Ser-
vice Products, Sheet No. 228.51, 228.31 or oil in accordance with outside temperatures.
228.5. You can find information regarding SAE
classes and outside temperature ranges on
Vehicles in accordance with the Euro 5 or Sheet No. 224.2 in the Mercedes-Benz Spec-
Euro 6 standard: only use engine oils which ification for Service Products.
correspond to Mercedes-Benz Specifications
for Service Products, Sheet No. 228.51 or The maximum oil change interval can only be
228.31. achieved by using engine oils of particularly high
Technical data
Engine oils complying with Sheet No. 228.51 quality in accordance with Sheet No. 228.51 of
have a higher quality standard and have a the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service
favourable effect on: Products.
Rlength of oil change intervals
Adding/topping up the engine oil
Rengine wear
Rfuel consumption ! There is a risk of damage to the catalytic
Rexhaust emissions converter or to the engine if too much oil is
added. Have excess oil drained off.
i You can find information on the quality When topping up, Mercedes-Benz recommends
grade, e.g. Sheet No. 228.51, and the viscos- that you only use engine oil of the same grade
ity, e.g. SAE class 5W-30, from the designa- and SAE class as the oil filled at the last engine
tion on the oil container. oil change.
Before delivery, an engine oil complying with Check the engine oil level in the on-board com-
Sheet No. 228.51 and SAE class 5W-30 will be puter (Y page 112) before you top up the oil
filled. (Y page 264).
Scope of application Miscibility of engine oils

Multi-grade engine oils complying with Sheet The benefits of high-quality engine oils diminish
No. 228.51 or 228.31 can be used all year if you mix them.
round. Depending on fuel quality (sulphur con-
tent in fuel), oil change intervals must be short-
ened.
Z
Engine oils are differentiated according to: clean the antifreeze from components before
Rengine oil brand starting the engine.
Rquality grade (Sheet No.)
RSAE viscosity class A coolant that ensures anti-corrosion/anti-
freeze protection and other important protec-
If, in exceptional circumstances, the type of tive effects is filled at the factory.
engine oil currently used is not available,
another engine oil approved for Mercedes-Benz The coolant is a mixture of water and corrosion
may be used. inhibitor/antifreeze agent.
The corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze in the coolant
has the following properties:
Transmission oil Rheat transfer
Ranti-corrosion protection
! When changing the oil, if you replace the Rcavitation protection (against pitting)
synthetic oil with a mineral transmission oil,
you may damage the assembly. Before the oil Rantifreeze protection
change, check whether the use of a mineral Rraising the boiling point
transmission oil is permitted. Information is Leave the coolant in the engine cooling system
available from any Mercedes-Benz Service all year round – even in countries with high out-
Centre. side temperatures.
Check the corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze con-
centration in the coolant every six months.
Drive axles and transmission Have the coolant replaced regularly at a quali-
Depending on the vehicle version, the drive fied specialist workshop. You can find the inter-
axles, transmission and PTO shaft transmission vals for coolant change in the maintenance
may be filled with a high-quality synthetic oil at booklet.
the factory. Only use corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze
If, when changing the transmission oil, a mineral approved by Mercedes-Benz, according to
oil is to be used instead of synthetic oil, you must Sheet No. 325.5 or 326.5. This prevents dam-
Technical data
first make sure that this is permissible. Only use age to the engine cooling system and engine.
transmission oil approved by Mercedes-Benz. Information about approved corrosion inhibi-
Information about approved transmission oil tor/antifreeze additive can be obtained from a
can be obtained from a qualified specialist work- qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet
shop or on the Internet at http:// at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Observe the notes When renewing the coolant, ensure that it con-
on intervals for oil change in the Service Book- tains 50% corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze by vol-
let. ume. This corresponds to antifreeze protection
Further information can be obtained from a down to Ò37 †.
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Do not exceed 55% by volume (antifreeze down
to approximately Ò45 †). The heat dissipation
and antifreeze may otherwise be negatively
affected.
Coolant
If there is a loss of coolant, do not top it up by
G WARNING using only water, but also add an approved cor-
rosion inhibitor/antifreeze agent.
If antifreeze comes into contact with hot com-
The water in the coolant must meet certain
ponents in the engine compartment, it may requirements, which are often fulfilled by the
ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. use of drinking water. The water must be treated
Let the engine cool down before you top up if its quality does not meet the required stand-
the antifreeze. Make sure that antifreeze is ards.
not spilled next to the filler neck. Thoroughly Observe the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for
Service Products, Sheet No. 310.1.
Further information can be obtained from a Symbols : advise you about:

Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Rpossible dangers
Rhaving service work carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop
Refrigerant
Hydraulic fluids
Your vehicle's climate control system is filled
with R‑134a refrigerant and contains fluorinated General notes
greenhouse gas.
The instruction label regarding the refrigerant H Environmental note
type used can be found on the inside of the bon- Mixing different oil types can affect opera-
net. tional effectiveness and biodegradability to an
! Only the refrigerant R‑134a and the PAG oil impermissible degree.
approved by Mercedes-Benz may be used.
The approved PAG oil may not be mixed with The hydraulic system is filled with SAE 10 W
any other PAG oil that is not approved for engine oil as standard at the factory.
R-134a refrigerant. The climate control sys- At low outside temperatures down to Ò32 † you
tem may otherwise be damaged. can use SAE 5 W-40 engine oil.
Maintenance work such as refilling refrigerant Always use the same grade of hydraulic fluid for
or replacing components may only be carried the hydraulic system and the attached equip-
out at a qualified specialist workshop. All appli- ment/assemblies.
cable regulations as well as SAE standard J639 If you change grades of hydraulic fluid, the entire
must be adhered to. hydraulic system must be fully emptied first.
Always have all work on the climate control sys- This includes hoses, valves, cylinders and oil fil-
tem carried out at a qualified specialist work- ters. In addition, the attached equipment and
shop. assemblies must also be emptied. Otherwise,
the hydraulic fluid may foam at a mixing ratio
Technical data
higher than 3%.
Refrigerant instruction label
Have the hydraulic fluid replaced regularly at a
intervals for hydraulic fluid change in the Main-
tenance Booklet.
Only use hydraulic fluid approved by Mercedes-
Benz according to MB Approval 228.0. Informa-
tion about approved hydraulic fluid can be
obtained from a qualified specialist workshop or
at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
Synthetic esters
An environmentally compatible hydraulic fluid is
Example: refrigerant instruction label extremely important. Besides the operating con-
: Symbols for hazard and service information ditions, service life factor (oil change interval)
; Refrigerant filling capacity and the high price difference, the economic
aspect must also be taken into account. Com-
= CO2 equivalent of the refrigerant used pare the price in relation to the downtime factor
? Applicable standards and disposal.
A PAG oil part number
B GWP (global warming potential) of the refrig-
erant used
C Refrigerant type
Z
Observe that for synthetic esters there are dif- G WARNING

ferences in the basic structures of oleic acid
ester products and carboxylic acid ester prod- Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to health.
ucts: There is a risk of injury.
Roleic acid-based synthetic esters age faster Be sure to avoid swallowing fuel or letting it
Rthe operational effectiveness of carboxylic come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
acid-based synthetic esters is virtually unlimi- Do not breathe the fuel vapours in. Keep fuels
ted, provided the degree of contamination out of the reach of children.
does not require a premature oil change to be
performed Keep the doors and windows closed while
refuelling.
Brands of environmentally-compatible If you or others come into contact with fuel,
hydraulic fluids observe the following points:
RImmediately rinse fuel off your skin with
soap and water.
Environmentally compatible hydraulic fluids
RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,
must be separately stored, collected and dis-
rinse your eyes with clean water immedi-
posed of in accordance with waste manage-
ment laws.
RConsult a doctor without delay if you swal-
Optional equipment code H97: the hydraulic low fuel. Do not induce vomiting.
system is filled at the factory with carboxylic RImmediately change out of clothing that
acid ester, Panolin HLP Synth 46. has come into contact with fuel.
Have the hydraulic fluid replaced regularly at a
intervals for hydraulic fluid change and oil filter
G WARNING
change in the Maintenance Booklet. If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the flash
Mixing similar oil types can affect operational point of this fuel mixture is lower than that of
Technical data
effectiveness and biodegradability to an imper- pure diesel fuel. When the engine is running,
missible degree. Mixing mineral oils and envi- components in the exhaust system may over-
ronmentally-friendly hydraulic fluids is not per- heat unnoticed. There is a risk of fire.
missible.
Never refuel with petrol. Never add petrol to
The hydraulic system is filled with mineral oil as
standard, unless the environmentally compati- diesel fuel.
ble hydraulic oil is expressly ordered as an
option (code HB2 or code H97). ! If you are using drums or canisters to refuel
the vehicle, you should filter the fuel before
adding it.
Diesel fuels This will prevent malfunctions in the fuel sys-
tem due to contaminated fuel.
Important safety notes ! A high fuel sulphur content accelerates the
ageing process of the engine oil and can dam-
G WARNING age the engine and exhaust system.
! Only refuel using commercially available,
fuel creates a risk of fire and explosion. sulphur-free diesel fuel that conforms to the
Avoid fire, naked flames, smoking and creat- European standard EN 590 as of 2010, et seq.
ing sparks under all circumstances. Switch off (max. 0.001% sulphur by weight).
the engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary The following fuel types are not permitted:
heating before refuelling. Rsulphurous fuel with a sulphur content
greater than 0.001% sulphur by weight
Rpetrol
Rmarine diesel Diesel fuels at low temperatures

Raviation fuels
Rheating oils G WARNING
Rvegetable oils If you heat fuel system components, e.g. with
Rparaffin a hot-air gun or naked flame, these compo-
RFAME fatty acid methyl ester (bio-diesel nents could be damaged. This can cause fuel
fuel) to escape and ignite. Depending on the type
These fuel types cause irreversible damage to of damage, fuel may also not escape until the
the engine and BlueTec® exhaust gas after- engine is running. There is a risk of fire and
treatment, as well as significantly reducing explosion.
the expected service life. Never heat fuel system components. Contact
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel may cause a qualified specialist workshop to rectify the
damage to the fuel system, engine and emission malfunction.
control system.
In winter months, diesel fuel with an improved
Fuel grade cold flow quality is available. In Europe, the
EN 590 standard defines various climate-
In accordance with the European standard dependent temperature categories. Malfunc-
EN 16942, you will find the following compati- tions can be avoided by refuelling with diesel
bility label for diesel fuel: fuel that corresponds to the climatic specifica-
Ron the instruction label on the vehicle's fuel tions outlined in EN 590. At unusually low out-
tank, next to the fuel filler cap side temperatures, it is possible that the flow
Ron the fuel pumps or fuel pump nozzles suit- characteristics of the diesel fuel may be insuffi-
able for your vehicle throughout Europe cient. Accordingly, diesel fuel from warmer
areas may not be suitable for operation in colder
climatic conditions.
i Further information on country-specific fuel
Technical data
properties and fuel types with low-tempera-
ture resistance can be obtained from oil com-
panies, e.g. at filling stations.
Fuel additives
Example: compatibility label on the vehicle
RB7: for diesel fuel with a maximum of seven % ! Do not add any petrol or kerosene to diesel
by volume FAME fatty acid methyl ester (bio- fuel to improve its flow characteristics. Petrol
diesel fuel) or kerosene impairs the lubricity of the diesel
fuel. This can cause damage to the diesel
RXTL: for paraffinic diesel fuel in accordance
injection system, for example.
with EN 15940
Before delivery, the fuel sulphur content is set to
<0.001% sulphur by volume (10 ppm).
AdBlue®
Certain countries have diesel fuel with varying
sulphur content of the fuel. Diesel fuel with low AdBlue® notes
sulphur content is sold in certain countries
under the name "Euro diesel". ! Only use AdBlue®/DEF in accordance with
Details about current country-specific fuel sul- DIN 70070/ISO 22241. Do not use any addi-
phur content can be obtained from the tives.
Mercedes-Benz Specification for Service Prod- If AdBlue®/DEF comes into contact with pain-
ucts according to Sheet No. 136.2. Further ted or aluminium surfaces when filling the
information can be obtained from a Mercedes- tank, rinse the affected area immediately with
Benz Service Centre. plenty of water.
Z
If the AdBlue® tank still contains enough Additives, tap water

AdBlue®, pressure compensation may occur
when the tank lid is unscrewed. AdBlue® may ! Do not mix additives to AdBlue®. Do not thin
spill out. Therefore, open the AdBlue® tank lid AdBlue® with tap water. This could destroy
carefully. If AdBlue® spills out, immediately
wash the affected area with plenty of water.
AdBlue® is a non-flammable, non-toxic, colour-
Storage
less, odourless and water-soluble liquid. ! Containers made of the following materials
When opening the AdBlue® tank, small amounts are not suited to storing AdBlue®:
of ammonia vapours could escape. Raluminium
Ammonia vapours have a pungent smell and are Rcopper
particularly irritating to:
Rcopper alloys
Rskin
Runalloyed steel
Rmucous membranes
Rgalvanised steel
Reyes
If stored in these types of containers, constit-
The vapours may cause a burning sensation in uents of these metals may dissolve and cause
the eyes, nose and throat as well as irritation of irreparable damage to the exhaust gas after-
the throat and watering eyes. treatment.
Avoid inhaling ammonia vapours. Only fill the
Only use containers made of the following mate-
AdBlue® tank in well-ventilated areas.
rials to store AdBlue®:
AdBlue® should not come into contact with skin,
RCr‑Ni steel in accordance with
eyes or clothing, and should not be swallowed.
Keep AdBlue® out of the reach of children. DIN EN 10 088-1/2/3
RMo-Cr‑Ni steel in accordance with
If you come into contact with AdBlue®, observe
DIN EN 10 088-1/2/3
the following:
Rpolypropylene
Rimmediately wash AdBlue® from your skin Rpolyethylene
Technical data
with water and soap.

Rif AdBlue® comes into contact with your eyes,
Disposal
rinse your eyes with clean water immediately.
Consult a doctor without delay. H Environmental note
Rif you have swallowed AdBlue®, immediately
rinse your mouth with water and drink plenty Dispose of AdBlue® in an environmentally
of water. Consult a doctor without delay. responsible manner.
Rchange clothing that is soiled with AdBlue®
Observe laws and regulations on the disposal of
immediately.
AdBlue® in the country concerned.
High outside temperatures Purity
The chemical composition of AdBlue® can break
down if it heats up to 50 † over a long period of ! Impurities in AdBlue®, e.g. due to other ser-
time (e.g. as a result of direct sunlight on the vice products, cleaning products or dust, may
tank). This creates ammonia vapour. lead to:
Rincreased emission values
Low outside temperatures Rdamage to the catalytic converter
Rengine damage
AdBlue® freezes at a temperature of approx- Rmalfunctions in the BlueTec® exhaust gas
imately Ò11 †. As the vehicle's AdBlue® supply aftertreatment
system is heated, operating in winter is guaran-
teed even at temperatures below Ò11 †.
Capacities 329
Ensure that AdBlue® is always pure to avoid the tank. The purity of the fluid is otherwise no
malfunctions in BlueTec® exhaust gas after- longer guaranteed.
treatment.
If AdBlue® is pumped from the AdBlue® tank,
e.g. during repairs, do not use this fluid to refill
Capacities
Capacity approximately Service product

(Sheet Number)
Engine with oil filter 4-cylinder 17.0 l SAE 5W-30 engine
engine oil (Y page 323)
6-cylinder 25.0 l
engine
Transmission UG 100 11.0 l SAE 75W-80 trans-
(718.840) mission oil (235.41)
With working 13.0 l
gears
With crawler 14.0 l
gears
With hydro- 13.0 l
static drive
system
Technical data
With power 11.5 l
take-off
PTO shaft gear 4.0 l
Hydrostatic trans- 9.5 l SAE 10W engine oil
mission (228.0)
Torque converter 18.0 l SAE 10W engine oil
clutch (228.0)
Axles Intermediate 0.7 l each Synthetic hypoid oil
transmission (235.8)
Differential 2.5 l each
front/rear
Steering As required Multipurpose
knuckle grease (267.0)
Steering 3.0 l Steering gear oil
(236.2, 236.3)
Hydrostatic fan, on 55.0 l HD SAE 10W (228.0)
vehicles without (Y page 325)
working hydraulics
Z
330 Capacities

(Sheet Number)
Hydrostatic fan, on Initial filling 75.0 l
vehicles with work-
ing hydraulics3 Permissible 35.0 l
amount to be
removed
Working hydraulics Initial filling 75.0 l
Permissible 35.0 l
amount to be
removed
Power hydraulics Initial filling 52.0 l
Permissible 5.0 l
amount to be
removed
Cooling system 4-cylinder 30.0 l Fresh water with
with heating engine approximately 50%
Total capacity antifreeze
(Y page 324)
6-cylinder 35.0 l
engine
Total capacity
4-cylinder 15.0 l
engine
Antifreeze to
Technical data
–37 †
6-cylinder 17.5 l
engine
Antifreeze to
–37 †
Hydraulic clutch Expansion As required MB brake fluid DOT
actuation system tanks 4 plus (331.0)
(Y page 322)
Lubricating nipple Axle, propeller As required Multipurpose
shaft, chassis, grease (267.0)
etc.
Battery Topping up As required Distilled water
Battery cable Acid-proof grease
terminals (350.0)
3 Vehicles with working hydraulics receive an additional 20 l of hydraulic fluid, since the fan hydraulics and
working hydraulics use the same oil reservoir.
Capacities 331

(Sheet Number)
Fuel tank U 216 / 145 l Diesel fuel (131.0,
U 218 / 137.0)
U 318 / (Y page 326)
U 323 K /
U 423 K
Optional 200 l
equipment:
U 318 /
U 323 / U 423
U 323 L / 200 l
U 423 L /
U 427 /
U 429 /
U 430 /
U 527 /
U 529 / U 530
Optional 250 l
equipment:
U 323 L /
U 423 L /
U 427 /
U 429 /
U 430 /
U 527 /
U 529 / U 530
Technical data
AdBlue® tank U 216 / U 218 18.0 l AdBlue® (352.1)
U 318 / 25.0 l
U 323 /
U 423 /
U 427 /
U 429 /
U 430 /
U 527 /
U 529 / U 530
Windscreen 15.0 l Windscreen washer
washer system concentrate (371.0)
Air-conditioning Refrigerant 0.16 l Compressor oil
system compressor
Refrigerant 1400 g Refrigerant R134a
circuit (361.0)
Z
332 Hydraulic system
Hydraulic system
Hydraulic system schematic: working hydraulics
Vehicle with gear pump
Schematic diagram of working hydraulics, circuit I and circuit II, 4-cell, with snow plough load relief
: Blue hydraulic connection 7, circuit I
; Blue hydraulic connection 8, circuit I
= Proportional valve for hydraulic connection 1 to 8, circuit I
? Hydraulic connection, separate return flow line, circuit II
Technical data
A Hydraulic connection, circuit II

B Valve block for changing the oil circuit
C Oil cooler
D Green hydraulic connection 4, circuit I
E Green hydraulic connection 3, circuit I
F Red hydraulic connection 1, circuit I
G Red hydraulic connection 2, circuit I
H Hydraulic connection, circuit II
I Hydraulic connection, separate return flow line, circuit I or circuit II
J Oil filter
K Gear pump for circuit I and circuit II
L Red hydraulic connection 1, circuit I
M Red hydraulic connection 2, circuit I
N Green hydraulic connection 3, circuit I
O Green hydraulic connection 4, circuit I
P Snow plough load relief valve
Q Hydraulic connection, circuit II
R Hydraulic connection, separate return flow line for circuit I or circuit II
S Yellow hydraulic connection 5, circuit I
T Yellow hydraulic connection 6, circuit I
Hydraulic system 333
Vehicles with positioning pump
Schematic diagram of working hydraulics, circuit I and circuit II, 4-cell, with snow plough load relief
: Blue hydraulic connection 7, circuit I
; Blue hydraulic connection 8, circuit I
= Proportional valve for hydraulic connection 1 to 8, circuit I
? Hydraulic connection, separate return flow line, circuit II
A Valve block for changing the oil circuit
B Hydraulic connection, circuit II
C Load-sensing connection
D Switchover valve between constant current and load-sensing operation
Technical data
E Oil cooler
F Green hydraulic connection 4, circuit I
G Green hydraulic connection 3, circuit I
H Red hydraulic connection 1, circuit I
I Red hydraulic connection 2, circuit I
J Hydraulic connection, circuit II
K Hydraulic connection, separate return flow line, circuit I or circuit II
L Load-sensing connection
M Oil filter
N Positioning pump for circuit I and circuit II
O Red hydraulic connection 1, circuit I
P Red hydraulic connection 2, circuit I
Q Green hydraulic connection 3, circuit I
R Green hydraulic connection 4, circuit I
S Snow plough load relief valve
T Hydraulic connection, circuit II
U Hydraulic connection, separate return flow line for circuit I or circuit II
V Load-sensing connection
W Yellow hydraulic connection 5, circuit I
X Yellow hydraulic connection 6, circuit I
Z
Hydraulic system schematic: power hydraulics
Schematic diagram of power hydraulics (circuit III and circuit IV)

: Propeller shaft
; Positioning pump, circuit III
= Positioning pump, circuit IV
? Hydraulic connection, circuit III
A Hydraulic connection, circuit IV
B Return flow line
C Return flow line
D Leak oil connection
Technical data
E Oil filter
F Leak oil connection
G Return flow line
H Return flow line
I Hydraulic connection, circuit IV
J Hydraulic connection, circuit III
Hydraulic system 335
Hydraulic connections
Working hydraulics, without code H86:
Circuit I Plug-type coupling

ISO 16028 - size 12.5
Red hydraulic connections 1, 2
Green hydraulic connections 3, 4
Yellow hydraulic connections 5, 6
Blue hydraulic connections 7, 8
Circuit II red: pressure line: ISO 16028 - size 19, con-
nector
black: separate return flow line: ISO 16028 size
19, coupling
Working hydraulics, with code H86:
Circuit I Plug-type coupling

ISO 7241-1 size 12.5
Red hydraulic connections 1, 2
Green hydraulic connections 3, 4
Yellow hydraulic connections 5, 6
Blue hydraulic connections 7, 8
Circuit II red: pressure line: ISO 7241-1 size 20, connec-
tor
Technical data
black: separate return flow line= ISO 7241-1
size 20, coupling
Power hydraulics
Circuit III Pressure line, screw coupling (Voswinkel type

HS 20), connector
Return flow line, screw coupling (Voswinkel
type HS 20), sleeve
Circuit IV Pressure line, screw coupling (Voswinkel type
HS 20), connector
Return flow line, screw coupling (Voswinkel
type HS 20), sleeve
Leak oil connection Screw coupling (Voswinkel type HS 10), sleeve
Z
Hydraulic system flow rates

Flow rates, vehicles with a gear pump
Version Rated engine speed Pressure
rpm in bar
Working hydraulics as single-circuit 2200 Approximately 240
hydraulic system
Working hydraulics as dual-circuit 2200 Approximately 240
hydraulic system
Power hydraulics 2200 Approximately 280
Version Circuit I Circuit II Circuit I and circuit II,

maximum
Working hydraulics as sin- 55 l/min - -
gle-circuit hydraulic system
Working hydraulics as dual- 32 l/min 55 l/min 87
circuit hydraulic system
Version Circuit III Circuit IV

Power hydraulics 125 l/min 125 l/min
i The flow rates are calculated on a theoretical basis. Losses are therefore not taken into account
Technical data
(efficiency).
Flow rates, vehicles with a positioning pump

Version Rated engine speed Pressure
rpm in bar
Working hydraulics with load-sens- 2200 Approximately 240
ing connections
Power hydraulics 2200 Approximately 280
Version Working hydraulics in con- Working hydraulics in

stant current operation, load-sensing operation,
maximum maximum
Working hydraulics with load-sens- 80 l/min 110 l/min
ing connections
Version Circuit III Circuit IV

Power hydraulics 125 l/min 125 l/min
Vehicle dimensions 337
i The flow rates are calculated on a theoretical basis. Losses are therefore not taken into account
(efficiency).
Vehicle dimensions
Example: vehicle dimensions
Technical data
Example: vehicle dimensions

i All height values refer to the tyres and vehicle loads listed in the table below.
Vehicle type U 216 / 218 U 318
Vehicle model designation 405.090 405.104
number
Tyres 365/80 R 20 365/80 R 20
Z
338 Vehicle dimensions
Vehicle type U 216 / 218 U 318

Vehicle load:
Front axle 3500 kg 3500 kg
Rear axle 5500 kg 5500 kg
Gross vehicle weight 9000 kg 9000 kg
: Angle of approach, for large 25° 27°
tyres
; Front overhang 1050-1150 mm 1050-1150 mm
= Wheelbase 2800 mm 3000 mm
? Overall length 4900 mm 5100 mm
A Angle of departure 37° 37°
B Trailer coupling height 825 mm 825 mm
C Frame height at rear 1094 mm 1094 mm
D Load platform height 1352 mm 1352 mm
E Dropside height 400 mm 400 mm
F Ground clearance Approx. 340 mm Approx. 340 mm
G Overall width4 2150 mm 2150 mm
H Overall height5 2855 mm 2855 mm
I Track width 1794 mm 1794 mm
Technical data
Diameter of turning circle Approx. 12.6 m Approx. 13.7 m

Platform internal dimensions 2200 x 2075 mm 2385 x 2075 mm
Vehicle type U 323 K / U 423 K U 427 K / U 429 K / U 430 K

Vehicle model designation 405.105 405.110 / 405.110
number
Tyres 365/85 R 20 365/85 R 20
Vehicle load:
tyres
; Front overhang 1050-1150 mm 1050-1150 mm
4 Depending on the equipment mounted, an overall width of 2550 mm is possible.

5 Without strobe lights.
Vehicle dimensions 339
Vehicle type U 323 K / U 423 K U 427 K / U 429 K / U 430 K

Vehicle type U 323 L /U 423 L / U 427 L / U 429 L /

U 430 L
Vehicle model designation number 405.125 / 405.125 / 405.125
Tyres 365/85 R 20
Technical data
Vehicle load:
Front axle 4200 kg
Rear axle 7800 kg
Gross vehicle weight 12000 kg
: Angle of approach, for large tyres 33°
; Front overhang 1050-1150 mm
= Wheelbase 3600 mm
? Overall length 5600 mm
A Angle of departure 42°
B Trailer coupling height 873 mm
C Frame height at rear 1144 mm
D Load platform height 1407 mm
E Dropside height 400 mm
F Ground clearance Approx. 385 mm

Z
340 Vehicle dimensions
Vehicle type U 323 L /U 423 L / U 427 L / U 429 L /

U 430 L
G Overall width8 2200 mm
H Overall height9 2910 mm
I Track width 1734 mm
Diameter of turning circle Approx. 16.5 m
Platform internal dimensions 2900 x 2075 mm
Vehicle type U 527 K / U 529 K / U 530 K U 527 L / U 529 L / U 530 L

Vehicle model designation 405.202 405.222
number
Tyres 365/85 R 20 365/85 R 20
Vehicle load:
tyres
; Front overhang 1140 mm 1140 mm
Technical data


Compressed-air reservoir identification plates 341
Vehicle type U 527 K / U 529 K / U 530 K U 527 L / U 529 L / U 530 L

Information on the compressed-air condensation (drainage ring nut at the low-

reservoir est point of the reservoir).
Rno welding, heat treatment or other operation
relevant to safety is to be performed on the
For first-time buyers and other users
pressure-bearing walls of the reservoir (cas-
Accompanying documentation in accordance ing, base, ring nuts).
with directives 87/404/EEC and EN 286-2 Rthe internal supply pressure may exceed max-
RThe reservoir is only intended for use in
imum operating pressure Ps by no more than
compressed-air systems and auxiliary equip- 10% for a brief period.
ment on motor vehicles and their trailers, and
is only to be used to hold compressed air.
RThe reservoir is to be marked for identification
with a works number and the reservoir man- Compressed-air reservoir identifica-
ufacturer's name, together with the principal tion plates
operating data and the EC mark – see the
identification plate or engravings directly on
the reservoir wall.
RThe reservoir is to be manufactured with a
"Declaration of conformity" in accordance
with Article 12 of Directive 87/404/EEC.
RThe reservoir is maintenance-free if the fol-
lowing point is complied with.
Technical data
RThe reservoir is to be secured to the vehicle by
tensioning straps (clamps).
- In the case of aluminium reservoirs, con-
tact surface points must be designed to
prevent corrosion or mechanical damage
from occurring. Tensioning straps are to be Example: identification plate on the steel reservoir
positioned in such a way that they do not : Manufacturer
come in contact with the base connecting ; MB part number
seams; the reservoir is not to be subjected = Maximum operating pressure (bar)
to any stress that would jeopardise oper- ? Testing establishment code number
ating safety. A Year of manufacture
- Coatings applied to aluminium reservoirs
B Volume (litres)
must not contain lead, and the top coat of
paint must only be applied over a suitable
primer coat. Steel threaded connections
for aluminium reservoirs must have a cor-
rosion-proof coating.
- The reservoir is only to be cleaned using
non-alkaline cleaning agents (aluminium
reservoirs).
- The reservoir is to have the interior visible
through the threaded connections.
- The reservoir is to be emptied at regular
intervals to prevent the accumulation of
Z
342
343
344
Publication details
Internet
Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehi-

cles and about Daimler AG can be found on the
following websites:
http://www.mercedes-benz.com
http://www.daimler.com
Documentation team
You are welcome to forward any queries or sug-

gestions you may have regarding these Operat-
ing Instructions to:
Daimler AG, HPC: CAC, Customer Service,
70546 Stuttgart, Germany
©Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated or
otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, with-
out written permission from Daimler AG.
Vehicle manufacturer
Daimler AG
Mercedesstrasse 137
70327 Stuttgart
Germany
As at 22.11.2017
É4055843153ZËÍ
4055843153
Order no. 6518 5134 02 Part no. 405 584 31 53 Edition 05-18 ND

BA Unimog UGE 405 Niederdruckbremse 05-18 ND en GB PDF

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

BA Unimog UGE 405 Niederdruckbremse 05-18 ND en GB PDF

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Unimog

! Notes on material damage alert you to dan-

Menus and input windows in the on-

Working mode ................................... 232

Maintenance and care ...................... 253

Breakdown assistance ..................... 278

Wheels and tyres .............................. 301

Technical data ................................... 317

B Brake supply pressure in circuit 1

Towing and tow-starting ................ 298 Working-area lamp ........................... 79

Cleaning the air filter Heavily loaded (display message

Compressed-air reservoir for aux- Coolant level

Declarations of conformity ................. 30 Diodes

Compressed-air reservoir for aux- Driving with a high centre of grav-

Checking the oil level (on-board Equipment socket

Hydraulic clutch operation system Hydraulics menu window ............... 209

Activating/deactivating standby Important safety notes .................... 99

Light-alloy wheels Normal door, from inside with

Draining compressed-air reser- Mixed air operation

Areas in the display ....................... 104 Settings menu ............................... 113

Outside temperature display Power steering

R Regeneration disabled (display

S Brake fluid ..................................... 322

Spare wheel Stowage spaces and stowage com-

see Mobile phone Important safety notes .................. 150

Transmission/clutch circuit Minimum tyre tread depth ............. 301

Stowage compartment in the rear Windscreen

Working hydraulics Working mode cruise control

Operating Instructions Correct use

If you carry out modifications to electronic com-

G WARNING Operating conditions

Rcleaning agents from the vehicle in front.

mable materials, such as leaves, grass or twigs, Jack

nection in the vehicle, which is approved for versions

BlueTec® exhaust gas aftertreatment

Notes on fitting equipment ing of engine diagnostic data is a legal require-

Manufacturer's own services

Function Page Function Page

Overhead control panel

Example: instrument cluster

Warning and indicator lamps

Centre console Function Page

Rear centre console Function Page

Multifunction steering wheel

u Selects the next main menu/ V Selecting cruise control 173

Function Page Combination switch

Cruise control lever Multifunction lever

Useful information Seat belts

These Operating Instructions describe all the Introduction

Important safety notes

Important safety notes G WARNING

G WARNING the seat belts checked immediately at a quali-

of an accident, they could be crushed

Lap belt for the swivel seat

Releasing the seat belt G WARNING

ded in the vehicle.

e.g. cushions. Only use child restraint sys-

Furthermore, unsecured animals may be flung

Never leave animals unattended in the vehi-

Useful information Exterior door lock

Opening and closing

! Only open the doors when traffic conditions

Locking/unlocking centrally using the